PC Programming Manual

Pure IP-PBX

Model No. KX-NS1000

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety, page 20" before using this product.

KX-NS1000: PCMPR Software File Version 004.30000 or later

Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://www.panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx/
Introduction

Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic
Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:

Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.

Section 2, Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

Explains the layout and menus of Web Maintenance Console.

Sections 3 – 28, Web Maintenance Console Operating Instructions

Serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX.

Section 29, Appendix

Provides a list of changes from previous software versions of the PBX.

Feature Programming References

Provides a list of all related programming items for each feature.

References Found in the PC Programming Manual

PC Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.

Feature Manual References

The Feature Manual explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features
and facilities. Sections from the Feature Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Installation Manual References

The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX. Sections
from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Links to Other Pages and Manuals

If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other PBX
manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• PC Programming Manual References
• Feature Manual References

Trademarks
• Microsoft, Outlook, Internet Explorer, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Intel and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.

2 PC Programming Manual
 Introduction

• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

Notice
• During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data
to the Storage Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for
some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
Storage Memory Card, it can be easily reloaded.
• To save the system data to the Storage Memory Card, (1) click the button on the Home screen of Web
Maintenance Console before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) logout from Web
Maintenance Console so that the PBX automatically saves the system data.

NOTES
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version
of the PBX or installed cards? in Maintenance Console Software in 2.3 Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQ).
• Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some
PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
• Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
• In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NS1000NE) is omitted unless necessary.
• Operation of the KX-NTV series depends on the PBX software file version and the firmware version of the
KX-NTV series. You can confirm the compatibility on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://www.panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx/

PC Programming Manual 3
Introduction

4 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 Overview ................................................................................................ 19
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 20
1.1.1 For Your Safety ............................................................................................................. 20
1.1.2 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 21
1.1.3 Entering Characters ...................................................................................................... 21
1.2 PC Programming ........................................................................................................... 26
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ............................................................................. 26
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ......................................................................... 29
1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ............................................... 33
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types ............................................................................................. 34
1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability ............................................................................. 35
2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console ........................................ 37
2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 38
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts ........................................................................... 38
2.1.2 Access Levels ............................................................................................................... 39
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console ..................................................................... 42
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard ....................................................................................................... 43
2.1.5 Software Interface ........................................................................................................ 43
2.1.6 Card Status ................................................................................................................... 47
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting ............................................................................................ 48
2.2 Logout ............................................................................................................................ 49
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ............................................................................. 50
3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen .......................................... 59
3.1 Home Screen ................................................................................................................. 60
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard .................................................................................. 63
4 Status ..................................................................................................... 65
4.1 Status—Equipment Status ........................................................................................... 66
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS ................................................................................ 66
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information ................................................................ 66
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information ................................................................ 67
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status ................................................................ 67
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB ................................................................................ 68
5 System Control ..................................................................................... 69
5.1 System Control—Program Update .............................................................................. 70
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File ...................................... 71
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File .......................................... 73
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update ................................................. 75
5.2 System Control—MOH .................................................................................................. 77
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install .................................................................................... 77
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete ................................................................................... 77
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup .................................................................... 77
5.3 System Control—FAX Card .......................................................................................... 79
5.4 System Control—System Reset ................................................................................... 80
5.5 System Control—System Shutdown ........................................................................... 81
6 Tool ........................................................................................................ 83
6.1 Tool—System Data Backup .......................................................................................... 84
6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB .............................................................. 84

PC Programming Manual 5
Table of Contents

6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS .............................................................. 85

6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration ............................................................................ 87
6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear ........................................................................................ 88
6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group .................................................................................. 89
6.5 Tool—Extension List View ............................................................................................ 90
6.6 Tool—Import .................................................................................................................. 91
6.7 Tool—Export .................................................................................................................. 96
6.8 Tool—Screen Customise .............................................................................................. 97
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup ................................................................................................. 98
6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup .................................................................... 98
6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ............................................................... 99
6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore ............................................................................................... 101
6.11 Tool—UM Backup History .......................................................................................... 103
6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS ................................................................................................... 104
6.13 Tool—Contact information ......................................................................................... 105
6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting ............................................................................................. 106
6.15 Tool—URL Information ............................................................................................... 107
7 Utility .................................................................................................... 109
7.1 Utility—Diagnosis ........................................................................................................ 110
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis ........................................................................... 110
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping ............................................................................................. 113
7.2 Utility—File ................................................................................................................... 114
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX ........................................................................ 114
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC ........................................................................ 114
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View ............................................................................................... 115
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete ............................................................................................. 115
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX ........................................................ 116
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC ........................................................ 116
7.3 Utility—Log .................................................................................................................. 118
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log ............................................................................................... 118
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog ................................................................................................... 120
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log .............................................................................. 121
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log .................................................................................... 121
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log .................................................................................... 121
7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace ................................................................................................. 123
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ................................................... 123
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace .................................................... 123
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace .................................................. 124
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group .................................... 124
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group .................................. 125
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace ............................................................. 127
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace .................................................. 127
7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) ................................................. 127
7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ................................................. 128
7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace .................................................................. 128
7.5 Utility—Report ............................................................................................................. 130
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report ................................................................ 130
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information ................................................. 130
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports ............................................................................. 131
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report ................................................................................... 133
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information ............................................................................ 134
7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information ......................... 134
7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information ................................... 135
7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log ................................ 137

6 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation ............................................................................ 139

7.7 Utility—Email Notification .......................................................................................... 140
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert ................................................................................ 140
7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis ............................................................. 141
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email ....................................................................... 141
7.8 Utility—Command ....................................................................................................... 142
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command ............................................................................ 142
7.8.2 Utility—Command—Router Command ....................................................................... 142
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation ......................................................... 143
7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording .................................................................... 145
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting ...................................... 145
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting ....................................... 145
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List ................................ 145
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance .............................................. 147
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance ............................................................................ 148
7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection ...................................................................................... 149
8 Users .................................................................................................... 151
8.1 Users—User Profiles ................................................................................................... 152
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting ................................................................... 154
8.2 Users—Add User ......................................................................................................... 159
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User ................................................................................. 159
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users ............................................................................. 163
8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording .................................................................... 165
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording ........................................ 165
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List ................................................ 165
8.4 Users—ICDG Management ......................................................................................... 167
8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor ............................................................. 167
8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report ................................................................. 168
8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export ............................................... 177
8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History ..................................................... 178
9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration ............................................. 179
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot ........................................................ 180
9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary .................................... 184
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status ................ 186
9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property ........................ 191
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property .............................. 197
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main ....................... 197
9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card ................ 211
9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM ..................... 211
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property ...................... 213
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property ....................... 214
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View .......
215
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property ......... 216
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property .......... 219
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property ........... 220
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property ....... 237
9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK
Settings ....................................................................................................................... 241
9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—
Hunt Pattern ............................................................................................................... 241
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property ......... 243
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property ....... 244

PC Programming Manual 7
Table of Contents

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property ........ 247

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property ..... 256
9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property ...... 257
9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property ........... 262
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property ............ 264
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property ...... 270
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property ....... 271
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property ............... 280
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property ................. 281
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type ......... 282
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port ........... 286
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
....................................................................................................................................... 288
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port ............ 291
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ............ 299
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2 ........ 307
9.29.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card
Property - OPB3 ......................................................................................................... 308
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
....................................................................................................................................... 309
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station ................................... 310
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option ................................................... 313
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority ........................................ 315
9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource ...................................... 316
9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting ....................... 316
9.34.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource
Advisor ..................................................................................................................... 317
9.34.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage ........................ 318
10 PBX Configuration—[2] System ........................................................ 319
10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time ..................................................... 320
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting ................ 320
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving .......... 320
10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—
Daylight Saving ........................................................................................................ 321
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM .............................................. 323
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters .......................................... 324
10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table ...................................................... 333
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting ................................ 333
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table ................................................... 334
10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan .............................................. 335
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main .................................. 335
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial .......................... 350
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature .... 351
10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service .............................................. 354
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings .................... 354
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block ............ 363
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block ............. 364
10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns ......................................... 365
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO ................ 365
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE .....
365
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others ........... 366
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options .............................................. 367
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings ................................ 383

8 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain ..................................................... 385

10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH ............................ 385
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card ........................................ 386
11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group .......................................................... 387
11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group ...................................................... 388
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings ............................ 388
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ................ 391
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification ............... 391
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan .............................. 394
11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign .... 395
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate ............................. 396
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group ........................................................ 398
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group ............................................. 399
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting ............................ 399
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group .................................................... 401
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting ................................... 401
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager ........................... 402
11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group ................... 403
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
..................................................................................................................................... 403
11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Member List ............................................................................................ 408
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time
Table ........................................................................................................................... 409
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
..................................................................................................................................... 410
11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor
..................................................................................................................................... 413
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group ................................ 414
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List ............. 414
11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group .......................................................... 415
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings ........................... 415
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings ................................. 416
11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List ....... 417
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group .................................................. 418
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List ............................. 418
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group ............................................ 420
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List ........................ 421
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group ....................................................... 422
11.11 PBX Configuration—[3-11] Group—VM(DPT) Group ............................................... 423
11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings ................ 423
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings ...................... 423
11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
.................................................................................................................................. 423
11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—VM(DTMF) Group ............................................ 424
11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings ............. 424
11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings ............... 424
11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member
List ........................................................................................................................... 424
12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension ................................................... 425
12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension ......................................... 426
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings ........ 426

PC Programming Manual 9
Table of Contents

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP

Generate .................................................................................................................. 441
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND ..................... 442
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial .................... 443
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button .............. 443
12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible
button data copy ...................................................................................................... 450
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button ...................... 451
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send .......
451
12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table ................ 451
12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station .......................................... 452
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings ......... 452
12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP
Generate .................................................................................................................. 465
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND ..................... 466
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button ............... 467
12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible
button data copy ...................................................................................................... 471
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send . 471
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table ................ 472
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console ............................................... 473
13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device ......................................... 475
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone ........................................ 476
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager .................................. 479
13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message .................................. 480
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System ......... 480
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message ...... 482
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay ................................... 484
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor ................................ 485
14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature ........................................................ 487
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial ......................................... 488
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge ................................................ 490
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code ............................................ 495
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone ............................................ 497
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message ............................................. 498
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant .............................................................. 499
15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS ............................................................. 501
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code ......................................................... 502
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code .................................................... 503
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier ...................................................... 504
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial .................................................... 505
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous ....................................................... 506
16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS ............................................................. 509
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting ..................................................... 510
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ................................................... 511
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time ............................................... 512
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting .......................... 512
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority ........................................... 513
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier ................................................................... 514
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception ................................ 516

10 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG ............................... 517

17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network ......................................... 519
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table ............................................ 520
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission ............ 522
17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) .................. 524
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table ................................ 525
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit ................... 526
18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call ................................. 527
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings ...................... 528
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings ........ 529
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table ......................... 533
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic
Registration ................................................................................................................ 535
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate ......
536
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table ................................. 538
18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous .......................... 542
19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance ............................................. 543
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main ....................................................... 544
19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation ............................. 552
19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
..................................................................................................................................... 552
19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
..................................................................................................................................... 553
19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group
Setting ........................................................................................................................ 555
19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer ........................ 557
20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings .......................................... 559
20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings ................................................................... 560
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting ........................................ 560
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting ............................................ 561
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration ................................ 584
21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service ........................................... 585
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service ................................................................... 586
22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service .................... 597
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group ............. 598
22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment ......... 601
23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings .......................................... 603
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing ............... 604
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters ......................................... 606
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service ................................. 614
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer ...... 616
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control ............. 619
23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control ............. 620
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control .............. 621
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password ................. 622
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table ..................................... 625

PC Programming Manual 11
Table of Contents

24 UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters ..................................... 629

24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group .............................. 630
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group .......................... 632
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement
....................................................................................................................................... 633
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters ................................... 635
25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ................................................ 651
25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ......................................................................... 652
26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security .......................................... 653
26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ................................................................... 654
27 Router Configuration ......................................................................... 657
27.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1] Router Information ........................................ 658
27.1.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-1] Router Information—Connection Status ........ 658
27.1.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-2] Router Information—PPPoE Status .............. 658
27.1.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-3] Router Information—VPN Status .................. 660
27.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2] WAN ................................................................ 661
27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings .......................... 661
27.2.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-2] WAN—Network Monitor ................................ 667
27.2.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-3] WAN—Protocol Bridge .................................. 667
27.2.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-4] WAN—Dynamic DNS .................................... 668
27.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3] LAN ................................................................. 669
27.3.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-1] LAN—IPv4 ..................................................... 669
27.3.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-2] LAN—DNS Server ......................................... 671
27.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-4] Routing ........................................................... 673
27.5 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-5] DMZ ................................................................. 674
27.6 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-6] MAC Address ................................................. 675
27.7 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-1] One Touch Security ................................... 676
27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet Filtering .......................................... 678
27.9 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-1] VPSS ................................................................. 683
27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec ................................................................. 685
27.11 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-3] Pass Through ................................................... 691
27.12 Router Configuration—QoS Settings—[4] QoS Service .......................................... 692
28 Network Service .................................................................................. 695
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports .................................................................... 696
28.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature ........................................................................ 701
28.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP ........................................................ 701
28.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP ........................................................... 702
28.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP ......................................................... 702
28.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP ........................................................... 703
28.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP ........................................................ 703
28.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 ....................................................... 705
28.2.7 Network Service—[2-8] Server Feature—TELNET .................................................... 705
28.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature ......................................................................... 707
28.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP ............................................................. 707
28.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog ......................................................... 707
28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent ............................................... 708
28.4 Network Service—[4] Other ........................................................................................ 710
28.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security .................................................................... 710
28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS .......................................................................... 710

12 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

29 Appendix ............................................................................................. 711

29.1 Revision History .......................................................................................................... 712
29.1.1 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.0xxxx .............................................. 712
29.1.2 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.1xxxx .............................................. 714
29.1.3 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 003.0xxxx .............................................. 715
29.1.4 PCMPR Software File Version 003.2xxxx .................................................................. 716
29.1.5 PCMPR Software File Version 004.00xxx .................................................................. 717
29.1.6 PCMPR Software File Version 004.01xxx .................................................................. 718
29.1.7 PCMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx .................................................................. 719
29.1.8 PCMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx .................................................................. 720
29.1.9 PCMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx .................................................................. 720
Feature Programming References ............................................................................. 723
Absent Message ...................................................................................................... 724
Account Code Entry ................................................................................................. 724
Advice of Charge (AOC) .......................................................................................... 724
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) ....................................................................... 724
Automatic Extension Release .................................................................................. 724
Automatic Fax Delivery ............................................................................................ 725
Automatic Fax Transfer ........................................................................................... 725
Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX .................................................................. 725
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ............................................................................ 725
Automatic Setup ...................................................................................................... 726
Background Music (BGM) ........................................................................................ 726
Backup Master Mode and Isolated Mode ................................................................ 726
Budget Management ............................................................................................... 727
CA (Communication Assistant) ................................................................................ 727
Call Billing for Guest Room ...................................................................................... 727
Call Charge Services ............................................................................................... 727
Call Distribution Port Group ..................................................................................... 728
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) .................................................................. 728
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) ..................................................................... 728
Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG .............................................................................. 729
Call Forwarding (FWD) ............................................................................................ 729
Call Hold .................................................................................................................. 729
Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN .................................................................................... 730
Call Monitor .............................................................................................................. 730
Call Park .................................................................................................................. 730
Call Pickup ............................................................................................................... 731
Call Transfer ............................................................................................................ 731
Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN ................................................................................... 731
Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG ................................................................................... 732
Call Waiting .............................................................................................................. 732
Call Waiting Tone ..................................................................................................... 732
Caller ID ................................................................................................................... 733
Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution ............................................................. 733
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection .......................................................... 733
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) ........................... 734
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG .................. 735
Centralised Voice Mail ............................................................................................. 735
Class of Service (COS) ............................................................................................ 735
Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs ............................................................. 736
Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs .................................................. 736
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) ..................................................... 736

PC Programming Manual 13
Table of Contents

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG .................................... 736

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) .................................................................... 736
Conference .............................................................................................................. 737
Conference Group Call ............................................................................................ 737
Confirmation Tone .................................................................................................... 737
Data Line Security ................................................................................................... 738
Dial Tone .................................................................................................................. 738
Dial Tone Transfer ................................................................................................... 738
Dial Type Selection .................................................................................................. 738
Direct In Line (DIL) ................................................................................................... 739
Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) ................................................ 739
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ...................................................................... 739
Direct SIP Connection ............................................................................................. 740
Display Information .................................................................................................. 740
Distribution Order ..................................................................................................... 740
Do Not Disturb (DND) .............................................................................................. 741
Door Open ............................................................................................................... 741
Doorphone Call ........................................................................................................ 741
DSP Resource Reservation ..................................................................................... 741
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment .................................... 742
E-mail Notification for Extension Users ................................................................... 742
E-mail Notification for Manager ............................................................................... 742
E-mail Notification of Sensor Alarm ......................................................................... 742
E-mail Notification of System-level Events .............................................................. 742
Emergency Call ....................................................................................................... 743
Enhanced Walking Extension .................................................................................. 743
Executive Busy Override ......................................................................................... 743
Extension Dial Lock ................................................................................................. 743
Extension Feature Clear .......................................................................................... 744
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) ..................................................... 744
External Feature Access (EFA) ............................................................................... 744
External Relay Control ............................................................................................. 744
External Sensor ....................................................................................................... 745
Fax Cover Page ....................................................................................................... 745
Flash/Recall/Terminate ............................................................................................ 745
Flexible Buttons ....................................................................................................... 745
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering ..................................................................... 746
Floating Extension ................................................................................................... 746
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button .................................................................... 746
Group ....................................................................................................................... 747
Group Call Distribution ............................................................................................. 747
Hands-free Answerback .......................................................................................... 748
Hands-free Operation .............................................................................................. 748
Headset Operation ................................................................................................... 748
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
.................................................................................................................................. 748
Hot Line ................................................................................................................... 748
Idle Extension Hunting ............................................................................................. 749
Incoming Call Distribution Group Features .............................................................. 749
Incoming Call Log .................................................................................................... 749
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features ................................ 750
Intercept Routing ..................................................................................................... 750
Intercept Routing—No Destination .......................................................................... 751
Intercom Call ............................................................................................................ 751
Internal Call Block .................................................................................................... 751

14 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Internal Call Features .............................................................................................. 751

IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) ............................................................................. 751
IP-CS (KX-NS0154) ................................................................................................. 752
ISDN Extension ....................................................................................................... 752
ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol .............................................................. 752
ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) .............................................................. 753
KX-UT Series SIP Phones ....................................................................................... 753
Last Number Redial ................................................................................................. 753
LED Indication ......................................................................................................... 754
Legacy Device Connection ...................................................................................... 754
Line Preference—Incoming ..................................................................................... 754
Line Preference—Outgoing ..................................................................................... 754
Local Alarm Information ........................................................................................... 754
Log-in/Log-out .......................................................................................................... 755
Making a TIE Line Call ............................................................................................. 755
Malicious Call Identification (MCID) ......................................................................... 755
Manager Features ................................................................................................... 756
Message Waiting ..................................................................................................... 756
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service ............................................... 756
Music on Hold .......................................................................................................... 756
Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) ................................................................ 757
Network ICD Group ................................................................................................. 757
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ..................................................................... 757
Off-hook Monitor ...................................................................................................... 757
One-look Networking ............................................................................................... 758
One-numbered Extension ........................................................................................ 758
One-touch Dialling ................................................................................................... 758
Operator Features ................................................................................................... 758
Outgoing Message (OGM) ....................................................................................... 759
Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group ....................................... 759
Overflow Feature ..................................................................................................... 759
Paging ...................................................................................................................... 759
Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP) ............................................................................... 760
Pause Insertion ........................................................................................................ 760
PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension . 760
Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection ............................................................................... 761
Ping .......................................................................................................................... 761
Portable Station (PS) Connection ............................................................................ 761
Power Failure Transfer ............................................................................................ 761
Printing Message ..................................................................................................... 761
Privacy Release ....................................................................................................... 761
PS Directory ............................................................................................................. 762
PS Ring Group ......................................................................................................... 762
PS Roaming by Network ICD Group ....................................................................... 762
PT Programming ...................................................................................................... 762
QSIG Enhanced Features ....................................................................................... 763
Queuing Feature ...................................................................................................... 763
Quick Dialling ........................................................................................................... 763
Reverse Circuit ........................................................................................................ 763
Ring Tone Pattern Selection .................................................................................... 763
Room Status Control ............................................................................................... 764
Send to Fax Machine ............................................................................................... 764
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor ............................ 764
Simple Remote Connection ..................................................................................... 764
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension ............................................................. 766

PC Programming Manual 15
Table of Contents

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk .................................................................... 766

SIP Portable Station (S-PS) and SIP Cell Station (SIP-CS) .................................... 766
SIP Refer Transfer ................................................................................................... 766
Software Upgrading ................................................................................................. 767
Special Carrier Access Code ................................................................................... 767
Speed Dialling—Personal/System ........................................................................... 767
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ............................................................ 767
Supervisory Feature ................................................................................................ 768
Supervisory Feature (ACD) ..................................................................................... 768
Syslog Record Management ................................................................................... 768
Tenant Service ......................................................................................................... 768
Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN ............................................................. 769
TIE Line Service ...................................................................................................... 769
Time Service ............................................................................................................ 769
Timed Reminder ...................................................................................................... 770
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) ............................................................ 770
Trunk Access ........................................................................................................... 771
Trunk Adaptor Connection ....................................................................................... 772
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) ............................................................... 772
Trunk Busy Out ........................................................................................................ 772
Trunk Call Limitation ................................................................................................ 772
UM Group Failover .................................................................................................. 773
Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group ..................................................... 773
Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding ..................................................................... 773
Unified Messaging—Auto Receipt ........................................................................... 773
Unified Messaging—Automated Attendant (AA) ...................................................... 773
Unified Messaging—Automatic Login ...................................................................... 774
Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager ........................... 774
Unified Messaging—Call Services ........................................................................... 775
Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario ............................................................ 775
Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Status ................................................................ 775
Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside .......................................................... 775
Unified Messaging—Call-through Service ............................................................... 775
Unified Messaging—Callback Number Entry ........................................................... 775
Unified Messaging—Caller ID Call Routing ............................................................. 776
Unified Messaging—Caller ID Callback ................................................................... 776
Unified Messaging—Caller ID Screening ................................................................ 776
Unified Messaging—Caller Name Announcement .................................................. 776
Unified Messaging—Company Greeting ................................................................. 776
Unified Messaging—Covering Extension ................................................................ 776
Unified Messaging—Custom Service ...................................................................... 776
Unified Messaging—Custom Service Builder .......................................................... 777
Unified Messaging—Default Mailbox Template ....................................................... 777
Unified Messaging—Dialling by Name .................................................................... 777
Unified Messaging—Direct Service Access ............................................................. 777
Unified Messaging—Extension Group ..................................................................... 777
Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service ........................................ 777
Unified Messaging—Group Distribution Lists .......................................................... 778
Unified Messaging—Hold ........................................................................................ 778
Unified Messaging—Holiday Service ....................................................................... 778
Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode ..................................................................... 778
Unified Messaging—IMAP Integration ..................................................................... 778
Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service ........................................... 778
Unified Messaging—Intercept Routing to a Mailbox ................................................ 779
Unified Messaging—Intercom Paging ..................................................................... 779

16 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Unified Messaging—Interview Service .................................................................... 779

Unified Messaging—List All Names ......................................................................... 779
Unified Messaging—Live Call Screening (LCS) ...................................................... 779
Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox) ................... 780
Unified Messaging—Mailbox ................................................................................... 780
Unified Messaging—Manager Service Switching .................................................... 780
Unified Messaging—Message Reception Mode ...................................................... 780
Unified Messaging—Message Transfer ................................................................... 780
Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device ....................... 780
Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Lamp ..................................... 781
Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device ................. 781
Unified Messaging—Multilingual Service ................................................................. 781
Unified Messaging—No DTMF Input Operation ...................................................... 782
Unified Messaging—On Hold Announcement Menu ............................................... 782
Unified Messaging—Operator Service .................................................................... 782
Unified Messaging—Password Administration ........................................................ 782
Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service ....................................................... 782
Unified Messaging—Personal Greetings ................................................................. 782
Unified Messaging—PIN Call Routing ..................................................................... 783
Unified Messaging—Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting ........................ 783
Unified Messaging—Port Service ............................................................................ 783
Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set .................................................. 783
Unified Messaging—Subscriber Tutorial ................................................................. 783
Unified Messaging—System Backup/Restore ......................................................... 783
Unified Messaging—System Prompts ..................................................................... 784
Unified Messaging—System Reports ...................................................................... 784
Unified Messaging—System Security ...................................................................... 784
Unified Messaging—Toll Saver ................................................................................ 784
Unified Messaging—Transfer Recall to a Mailbox ................................................... 784
Unified Messaging—Trunk Service (Universal Port) ............................................... 785
Unified Messaging—Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer ....................................... 785
Unified Messaging—Urgent Message ..................................................................... 785
Unified Messaging—Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button ............................................. 785
Unified Messaging—Voice Mail Service .................................................................. 786
Unified Messaging—Web Programming .................................................................. 786
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) Integration ..................................................... 786
User Profiles ............................................................................................................ 786
Verification Code Entry ............................................................................................ 786
VIP Call .................................................................................................................... 787
Virtual PS ................................................................................................................. 787
Voice Mail (VM) Group ............................................................................................. 787
Voice Mail Integration .............................................................................................. 787
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network ........................................................... 788
Walking COS ........................................................................................................... 788
Walking Extension Features .................................................................................... 788
Walking Extension-Home position control ............................................................... 788
Whisper OHCA ........................................................................................................ 789
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode .................................................................................... 789

PC Programming Manual 17
Table of Contents

18 PC Programming Manual
 Section 1
Overview

This section provides an overview of programming the

PBX.

PC Programming Manual 19
1.1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 For Your Safety
To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is
operated or handled improperly.

This notice means that misuse could result in death

WARNING or serious injury.

This notice means that misuse could result in injury

CAUTION or damage to property.

The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be
observed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be
performed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in
order to operate the unit safely.

WARNING

• Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised
Panasonic Factory Service Centre.

CAUTION

• Do not remove the Storage Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the
PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.

• To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords

20 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.2 Introduction

1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.

2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and
inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become
known to others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the
PBX system is installed at the site.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal
identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.

1.1.2 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your
requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system
programming".
Programming can be performed by system installers, on-site managers, and individual users. However,
managers and individual users may only change a limited number of settings. For details, see 2.1.1 Web
Maintenance Console Accounts.
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through system programming with Web
Maintenance Console. Starting Web Maintenance Console is described in 1.2 PC Programming. Individual
system programming items are described from 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen.

Programming Modes
There are two different modes available for programming using Web Maintenance Console:
• On-line Mode
On-line mode allows you to use Web Maintenance Console on a PC that is connected to the PBX to
modify the system data and settings used by the PBX. Settings can be modified and results are displayed
in real time. Modifications to settings change the information in the PBX’s temporary memory (DRAM). To
finalise the changes, you must either save the changes to the PBX’s Storage Memory Card by clicking
or log out of Web Maintenance Console by clicking . For details, see Web Maintenance Console
Features in 2.1.5 Software Interface.
• Off-line Mode
Off-line mode allows you to connect to a version of Web Maintenance Console running on your PC. Using
Off-line mode, you can create new system data files and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. After you finish configuring settings, they can be saved
and uploaded to the PBX, which will update the PBX’s settings. For details, see Uploading Programmed
Settings to the PBX in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

1.1.3 Entering Characters

The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or
other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.

PC Programming Manual 21
1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 1 (Standard)

22 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 2 (For CE model)

PC Programming Manual 23
1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 3 (For RU model)

24 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 4 (For GR model)

PC Programming Manual 25
1.2 PC Programming

1.2 PC Programming
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance
Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC.
This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.

System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business, Windows® 7, Windows 8, Windows 8 Professional, Windows 8.1 or
Windows 8.1 Professional operating system

Note
In Windows 8 / 8.1 and Windows 8 / 8.1 Professional, Web Maintenance Console runs only in desktop
mode. It is not available from the Windows 8 / 8.1 Start screen.

Recommended Display Settings

• Screen resolution: XGA (1024 × 768)
• DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)
Supported Browsers for use with Web Maintenance Console
• Windows Internet Explorer® 8
• Windows Internet Explorer 9
• Windows Internet Explorer 10*1
• Windows Internet Explorer 11
• Mozilla® Firefox® version 6 or later
*1 64-bit Enhanced Protected Mode (EPM) is not supported.

Always apply the latest updates to your Web browser software. For details, refer to your Web browser’s
documentation. Only the browsers and browser versions listed above are supported for use with Web
Maintenance Console.

Note
When using Windows Internet Explorer, there may be a delay when displaying some screens of Web
Maintenance Console. A message may be displayed that reads "Stop running this script?". This
message is automatically displayed when a script takes a long time to complete. If this message is
displayed, click No to continue using Web Maintenance Console. If you click Yes, you will have to close
the browser window for Web Maintenance Console and log in again. For information about disabling this
prompt, refer to your Web browser’s on-line support resources.

Browser Setting Requirements

The following functions must be enabled in the Web browser’s settings to use Web Maintenance Console:
• Cookies
• JavaScript
• The ability to download files
• The display of animations

26 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

• The display of images

For details regarding the above settings, refer to your Web browser’s documentation.

PC Specifications (for programming)

The following are recommended specifications for PCs used for programming. For details about
programming in Off-line mode, see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.
Recommended Specification
CPU 3.2 GHz Intel® Core™ 2 Duo processor or comparable CPU
RAM 2048 MB
Hard Disk 10 GB available space

Copyright for MD5

This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5 Message-
Digest Algorithm).

Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.

Licence to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.

Licence is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as
"derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or
referencing the derived work.

RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or
the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

PC Connection (On-line Mode)

To connect to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, both the PC and the PBX must be connected.
The connection can be made through a local area network (LAN), a virtual private network (VPN), or over
the Internet. A PC can also be connected directly to the maintenance port of the PBX.

Note
• When connecting to Web Maintenance Console over the Internet, the use of an encrypted
communication method, such as TLS, is strongly recommended. For details, contact your network’s
administrator.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (On-line Mode)

Below is the procedure for connecting to Web Maintenance Console to programme in On-line mode:
1. Connect the PC to the PBX:
• Connect the PBX to a PC with the MNT port and access the PBX directly from the PC.
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC in your LAN or VPN.
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC using an Internet
connection.

PC Programming Manual 27
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

Notice
• When connecting the PC to the MNT port, if the PC is set to obtain the IP address automatically,
the IP address of the PC will be set to an appropriate IP address to establish a connection to the
PBX. For more information about the connection procedure, refer to "5.2 PC Connection" in the
Installation Manual.
2. Access Web Maintenance Console:
MNT Port connection:
Launch your Web browser and in the address bar, enter one of the following addresses exactly as
shown:
– 223.0.0.1
or
– http://kx-ns1000.

Note
• If entering "http://kx-ns1000.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown.
• If connecting using 223.0.0.1 takes a long time, configure a static IP address for the PC.

LAN or VPN connection:

Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance
Console port number into the address bar. The input method will differ according to the PC’s connection
to the PBX.
The default IP address for the LAN port of the PBX is 192.168.0.101, and the default Web Maintenance
Console port number is 80. Accordingly, the address to enter to connect to the PBX for the first time will
be as follows (enter the address exactly as shown):
http://192.168.0.101

Internet connection (TLS Connection):

When the PC is accessing the PBX from a connection over the Internet, the use of TLS is strongly
recommended. When using a TLS encrypted connection, the default port is 443. The format of the
address to enter to connect to the PBX using a TLS encrypted connection will be as follows:
https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy
• "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of a device that can be accessed from the Internet, such as the
IP address of a network router.
• "yyy" is a port number. The network router’s port forwarding settings must be configured so that traffic
arriving at port "yyy" is forwarded to the correct IP address and port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Port forwarding settings must specify the IP address and the port number of the network router
("xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy") to transfer the packets to the PBX in the LAN, so that the packets sent to the
global IP address and specified port of the router will be transferred to the IP address and specified
port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Note the usage of "https" instead of "http".
• If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using TLS, a security alert window is displayed. Follow
the prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.

Note
• The IP address and Web Maintenance Console port number for the PBX can be changed from
their default values. If settings for the LAN port’s IP address or port number have been forgotten,
connect using the MNT port connection as described above and confirm the LAN port’s IP
address in 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings, and the port in
28.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP.

28 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

• You can also connect to the PBX in On-line mode using the Off-line Web Maintenance Console
Programme Launcher. For details, see Connecting in On-line Mode using the Programme
Launcher in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.
3. The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. For details about logging in, see
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console.
• If this is the first time the PBX is accessed (i.e., it is in its initialised, factory default state), you must
log in using the Installer level account. Once you log in, the Easy Setup Wizard will launch. For
details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• If the PBX has been set up using the Easy Setup Wizard, PBX system programming can be
performed. To perform programming, enter the login name and password according to your status
and authorisation level. For details about the differences between levels of authorisation, see
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.
4. After you successfully log in to Web Maintenance Console, the Home screen will be displayed and
programming can be performed. For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance
Console, see 2.1.5 Software Interface.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (Off-line Mode)

To connect to Web Maintenance Console in Off-line mode, use the New -Offline Mode or Open -Offline
Mode operations in the Off-line Web Maintenance Console programme launcher. For details, refer to
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

PC Programming is performed by connecting to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console, which is also
known as On-line mode. However, as certain programming requires installed cards to be set to out of
service (OUS), or requires system settings to be changed, some programming cannot be performed while
the PBX is in use. Off-line mode programming is performed using the Off-line version of Web Maintenance
Console, which you install on your PC.
Off-line mode allows you to create new system data files and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. The programming changes can be saved and then later
uploaded to the PBX.
The following procedures outline how to install and use the Off-line Web Maintenance Console for Off-line
mode programming.

Installation
Note
• Be sure to install and use the latest version of "Off-line WEB-Maintenance Console".
• Before beginning the installation of Off-line Web Maintenance Console, the following software must
be installed on the PC:
– Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
– Microsoft .NET Framework 4
This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s online Download Center.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business, Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows 8 Professional, Windows 8.1, or Windows 8.1 Professional, you must be logged in as a user
in the "Administrators" group.
1. Copy the "Off-line WEB-Maintenance Console" setup file to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.

PC Programming Manual 29
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

The Programme Launcher

After Off-line Web Maintenance Console has been installed, you can run the Programme Launcher from the
Windows Start menu.

Off-line Web Maintenance Console Programme Launcher

Note
Off-line Web Maintenance Console cannot be used when the PBX Web Manager for Unified PC
Maintenance Console (for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs) is running on the PC.
To disable the PBX Web Manager:
1. In the Unified PC Maintenance Console launcher, click Option→PBX Web Manager.
2. Deselect the Enable Web Server check box.
3. Click OK.

Starting a New System Data File

You can start a new session of PBX programming in Off-line mode. You can then programme PBX settings
in Off-line Web Maintenance Console and then save them to a file you can later upload to the PBX.

Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite
all previous settings. Use this function only when necessary.

To create a new system data file

1. In the Programme Launcher, click New -Offline Mode. The Off-line Web Maintenance Console login
screen will be displayed in your PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console.
2. Log in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console using the Installer level account and password to start the
Easy Setup Wizard. For details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.

To convert a KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA100D’s system data file to KX-NS1000

KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA100D system data can be converted for use with the KX-NS1000 by using the
Database Converter.

30 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

1. In the Programme Launcher, click Database Converter. The Database Converter screen will be
displayed in your PC.
For details, refer to "Converting KX-TDE, KX-NCP or KX-TDA100D System Data for Use with the
KX-NS1000" in "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console" in the Installation Manual.

Opening an Existing System Data File

This operation will load a PBX settings system data file from your PC for programming in Off-line mode. The
system data file can be a file created earlier using Off-line Web Maintenance Console, or a system data file
downloaded from a PBX. You can then programme PBX settings using Off-line Web Maintenance Console
and then save the settings to a file you can later upload to the PBX.
When you use the following procedure to open a system file created using a previous version of the
KX-NS1000 software, a confirmation screen will be displayed asking whether you want to convert the
system data to the latest software version. Click Yes to convert the data and proceed with Off-line
programming.

Notice
Only system data created using software version 001.10000 or later can be converted this way. System
data created using software version 001.00000 cannot be converted.

To open a system data file

1. In the Programme Launcher, click Open -Offline Mode.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open, and then click OK.
The file will be loaded and the Off-line Web Maintenance Console login screen will be displayed in your
PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance
Console.
5. Log in using an account name and password associated with the system data file that was loaded.

Note
User (User) level accounts cannot be used to log in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console. For details
about account types, refer to 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

Connecting in On-line Mode using the Programme Launcher

You can also use the Programme Launcher to log in to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode. You can
save the IP address and port information for each PBX in a profile. This feature is useful when there are
multiple PBXs in your network. For details about connecting to the PBX in On-line mode, see Connecting
to Web Maintenance Console (On-line Mode) in 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console.

To connect in On-line mode using the Programme Launcher

1. In the Programme Launcher, click Connect -Online Mode.
The Connection dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select a profile from the drop-down list, or enter the IP address and Port manually.
3. Click Connect.
The Web Maintenance Console login screen for connecting directly to the PBX in On-line mode will be
displayed in your PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 31
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

Editing and Printing Terminal Labels

You can create and print key label sheets that match the Flexible Button settings and then use the labels on
extensions. In the Programme Launcher, click Terminal Label Print. The screen for editing and printing key
labels will be displayed. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.

Options
You can specify the display language of the Programme Launcher, as well as set the web server port
number for Off-line Web Maintenance Console. In the Programme Launcher, click Options and change the
settings as necessary.
Adding Additional Languages
Additional display language files may be made available. To add a display language not listed in the
language selection menu, select Additional language, and then click Browse to specify the language file.
After specifying a language file, click OK to change to the selected language.

VoIP Test Tool

Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool. This tool is identical to the VoIP Test Tool
included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.

IP Terminal Utility
Click the IP Terminal button to launch the IP Terminal setup utility. This utility is identical to the IP Terminal
utility included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.

IP Trace File Converter

Click the IP Trace File Converter button to launch the IP Trace File Converter utility. This utility will convert
locally-saved IP trace file data collected by the system utilities listed below into a format that can be
analysed by general packet analysis software tools.
– 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace
– 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace
Others
Click this button to open the folder containing external applications. For example, the Import CSV Edit Tool
can be used as an external application.

Programming in Off-line Mode

Once you have logged in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console, programming is very similar to On-line
mode. The title bar will be coloured differently from when in On-line mode:

When programming in On-line mode:

When programming in Off-line mode:

Some items are not programmable when in Off-line mode, and those items will be greyed out. Some tools
and utilities are also not available in Off-line mode. For details, refer to 2.1.2 Access Levels.

Notice
• In Off-line mode, changes made in 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise will not be reflected in On-line
mode. This is because these settings are not stored in the system data file (DCSYS).

32 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

• When you load the system data file to the PBX, you must install any required activation keys in On-
line mode. Activation keys are required for mailboxes. Settings such as mailbox passwords will be
cleared if the number of activation keys for mailboxes is insufficient.

Uploading Programmed Settings to the PBX

When programming in Off-line mode, clicking the icon will open a save dialogue box. Specify a location
and file name for the system data file. This file can then be uploaded to the PBX in On-line mode using the
"File Transfer PC to PBX" utility. For details, refer to 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX.

Notice
• If the PC running the Off-line Web Maintenance Console is shut down, the Web browser is closed, or
the user logs out, any changes that have not been saved will be lost. Be sure to regularly save data
while programming.
• When you upload a system setting file to the PBX, all existing settings on the PBX will be overwritten
with the settings in the file, including settings you may not want to change. To change only specific
settings in Off-line mode, follow the procedure below:
1. Use the "File Transfer PBX to PC" utility in On-line mode to save a file with the PBX’s current
settings. For details, refer to 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC.
2. Use the Open -Offline Mode command in the Programme Launcher to load the PBX system file
in Off-line mode.
For details, refer to Opening an Existing System Data File above.
3. Perform the desired programming in Off-line mode, and then click the icon to save the
modified system settings to your PC.
4. Log in to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, and then use the "File Transfer PC to
PBX" utility to upload the modified data to the PBX.
• When programming in Off-line mode, be careful when programming the following parameters:
– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—
Mailbox Password (Message Client)
– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—E-
mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address—E-mail Address
These parameters require an activation key (KX-NSU2xx) to function. If these items are programmed
in Off-line mode, but the PBX does not have the required activation key installed, the values specified
for these parameters will be cleared when the data is uploaded to the PBX.

1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode

Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions and DSS
consoles.
1. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode.
a. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to
your PC. For details, see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC.
b. Use the Programme Launcher to open the system data in Off-line mode. For details, see Opening
an Existing System Data File in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.
2. In Off-line mode, export the key settings to a CSV file.
a. After logging in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console, access the screen from which key settings will
be exported:
– For extensions: Setup → PBX Configuration → Extension → Wired Extension → Flexible
Button

PC Programming Manual 33
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

– For DSS consoles: Setup → PBX Configuration → Extension → DSS Console

b. Click Export, specify a location to save the flexible key settings data, and then click OK.

Note
The Export button is available only when in Off-line mode.
3. Open the exported CSV data in the Terminal Label Print utility, and then edit the label settings as
necessary.
a. In the Programme Launcher, click Terminal Label Print.
b. Select Open. Specify the exported CSV file in the dialogue that is displayed, and then click OK.
c. Edit the following settings as necessary:
Label Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding
button. (Max. 20 characters)
Colour of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding
button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Colour of Background Specifies the colour used for the label background for the
corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Font Size Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding
button. (Size value range: 4–15)
Telephone Type Specifies the model number of the telephone to determine the
size and shape of the label template.

4. Once the settings have been configured, click Key Label Print on the settings screen. Follow the Key
Label Print Wizard to print the key labels or to output the data as a PDF file.

1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

One-look Network Configuration
Multiple KX-NS series PBXs can be connected together in a configuration called a One-look network. One
KX-NS1000 PBX serves as the Master unit, and other KX-NS series PBXs connect to the Master unit as
Slave units. Slave unit PBXs receive settings and operation instructions from the Master unit PBX. With this
configuration, it is easy to make network-wide changes by performing programming at only one PBX.

One-look Network Data Types

The data that is set when programming a One-look network using Web Maintenance Console is divided into
three categories: global data, local data, and connection data. The kind of data being programmed affects
how the programming is performed.
Data Type Description
Global Data Global data is related to the function of the PBX network as a whole. These
settings are unified network-wide, including extension and calling configurations.
Local Data Local data is related to the settings and functions of each Slave unit PBX. Local
data includes UM configuration settings and network settings.
Connection Connection data includes setting information for connecting the Master unit to
Data Slave units in the One-look network.

Details for Master units and Slave units are as follows:

34 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

Configuration
Description
Type
Master Unit This is the central PBX of a One-look network of KX-NS1000 PBXs. All PBXs in
a One-look network can be programmed by logging in to the Master unit via Web
Maintenance Console. Both the global settings (settings that apply to all PBXs)
and local settings (settings that apply only to a single Slave unit PBX) of the
One-look network can be programmed in one session. Slave units can also be
registered to the Master unit and then configured from the Master unit.
If the Master unit is set to out of service (OUS) for maintenance or due to a
problem, the One-look network cannot be used until the Master unit is returned
to in service (INS) status.

Note
When a single KX-NS1000 is used in a stand-alone configuration or other
networking configuration, for programming purposes it still must be set as
the Master unit.
Slave Unit Slave units receive programming information from the Master unit for all system-
wide functions, such as extension information and call handling. Each Slave unit
also contains local data programming settings, but these local settings are still
specified using the Master unit. When you log in to a Slave unit, you may view
all global data settings, but only that Slave unit’s local data and connection data
may be viewed. The only setting data that can be specified using a Slave unit is
connection data.
If a Slave unit is set to OUS, its resources cannot be used but otherwise the
One-look network will still function. The resources of the OUS Slave unit may be
used again when it is returned to INS status.

Stand-alone and Other Networking Configurations

A KX-NS1000 PBX can be used as a single stand-alone unit, without connecting to other KX-NS1000 PBXs
in a One-look network. Programming is still performed by logging in to the PBX using Web Maintenance
Console. A KX-NS1000 PBX (including the Master unit of a One-look network) can also connect to other
PBXs using standards such as H.323. For details about other networking configurations, refer to "4.2.2
Network Type Comparison" in the Feature Manual.

1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability

A One-look network can be configured so that even if a site’s main PBX fails or is otherwise disconnected
from the network, operation of the One-look Network as a whole continues. One-look Networking
Survivability provides the following features:
• Backup Master mode
A Slave unit can be designated as a Backup Master unit. When the Master unit goes offline, the Slave
units will detect the change in status. The designated Slave unit will switch to Backup Master mode, and
the other Slave units will use the Backup Master unit as the Master unit.
• Isolated mode
If no PBX is designated as the Backup Master unit, or if the Backup Master unit also goes offline, Slave
units will operate in Isolated mode if they are set to do so. In Isolated mode, each PBX will provide
service to the extensions registered to it and for the trunk lines connected to it.
• Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX
If the unit to which an IP extension (e.g., IP-PT or SIP extension) is connected fails, the extension can
automatically switch its connection to a secondary PBX.
• UM Group Failover

PC Programming Manual 35
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

When a PBX goes offline, incoming calls routed to the UM group of the PBX can be automatically
redirected to another PBX’s UM group.
For more information about One-look Networking Survivability and programming required for each aspect of
network survivability, refer to "4.2.3 One-look Networking Survivability" in the Feature Manual.

36 PC Programming Manual
 Section 2
Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

This section serves as reference operating instructions

when using Web Maintenance Console to programme
the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 37
2.1 Introduction

2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts
User account levels
Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts
in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The
Installer level is the highest authorisation level. There are also two levels for end users, Administrators and
Users. The usage for each level and number of accounts available for each level are as follows:
Level Description Number of Accounts/Network
Installer For dealers and system installers 1
User For on-site managers 32
(Administrator)
User (User) For end users Up to 1512*1

*1 The total number of administrator and user accounts combined cannot exceed 1512.

Differences between user levels

• Installer
The installer level account is the highest authorisation account of the three levels. This account level is to
be used by dealers or system installers. All system programming settings are available, and this account
is used for overall system installation and maintenance. The installer level can be used to programme
which menus in Web Maintenance Console are accessible by Administrator accounts.
• User (Administrator)
Administrator accounts are for general maintenance of users and user settings. This account level is used
by on-site managers and network administrators. Administrator level accounts can use Web Maintenance
Console to add users or programme user settings.
User (Administrator) accounts are intended for maintenance functions only. To manage their own PBX
user settings, on-site managers and network administrators should create their own User (User) accounts
for programming.
• User (User)
User accounts are for individual users of the PBX system. Users can use Web Maintenance Console to
change their extension settings, speed dial settings, or other personal settings by accessing a limited
number of pre-defined menus.

Note
• User (User) accounts cannot be used when programming in Off-line mode. For details, refer to
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

Account Login Names and Passwords

Each account has a login name and password and are specified as follows. All account passwords are set
in Web Maintenance Console (see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User).

38 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.2 Access Levels

Level Login Name Password

Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,
and 0-9 (case sensitive).
For an initialised PBX that has not yet
been set up, the default Installer level
password is "1234". You will be prompted
to choose a new password for the
Installer level account when the Easy
Setup Wizard is run (see 2.1.4 Easy
Setup Wizard).
Administrator 1-16 character login name, using a- 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,
z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). and 0-9 (case sensitive). Set during
User
Set during account creation. account creation.
(see 8.2.1 Users—Add User— (see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single
Single User) User)

For more information about creating and managing end user accounts, see 8 Users .

CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and
inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become
known to others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the
PBX system is installed at the site.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.

2.1.2 Access Levels

Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the
account and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a
menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that
menu option, for example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."

The options available for each programming mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User (User); A: User (Administrator); I: Installer

Note
User (User) accounts cannot be used when programming in Off-line mode.
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.

Home Screen
Menu Option Off-line On-line
A I U A I
Site Selection ü ü ü ü ü

PC Programming Manual 39
2.1.2 Access Levels

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I
Add Site ü ü
System Information ü ü ü ü ü
Logout ü ü ü ü ü

Tool
Menu Option Off-line On-line
A I U A I
System Data Backup—Backup to USB ü ü
System Data Backup—Backup to NAS ü ü
BRI Automatic Configuration ü
NDSS Link Data Clear ü
Call Pickup for My Group ü ü
Extension List View ü ü ü ü ü
Import→Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü
Import→Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Import→ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Import→ARS - Except Code ü ü
Import→ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Import→Wired Extension ü ü
Import→PS Extension ü ü
Import→Quick Dial ü ü
Import→SIP Extension ü ü
Import→V-IPGW16 GW Settings ü ü
Import→V-IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü
Import→V-SIPGW16 Settings ü ü
Import→V-SIPGW16 Provider ü ü
Export→Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü
Export→Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Export→ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Export→ARS - Except Code ü ü
Export→ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Export→Wired Extension ü ü
Export→PS Extension ü ü
Export→Quick Dial ü ü
Export→SIP Extension ü ü

40 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.2 Access Levels

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I
Export→V-IPGW16 GW Settings ü ü
Export→V-IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü
Export→V-SIPGW16 Settings ü ü
Export→V-SIPGW16 Provider ü ü
Screen Customise ü ü
UM Data Backup ü
UM Data Restore ü
UM Backup History ü
DXDP All OUS ü
Contact information ü ü ü ü
UT Option Setting ü ü
URL Information ü ü

Utility
Menu Option Off-line On-line
A I U A I
Diagnosis→Card Diagnosis ü ü
Diagnosis→Ping ü
File Transfer PC to PBX ü
File Transfer PBX to PC ü
File View ü
File Delete ü
Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü
Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü
Error Log ü ü
Syslog ü
Web-MC Event Log ü ü
UM System Log ü
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ü
V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace ü
V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace ü
CS Status Monitor→Air Sync Group ü
CS Status Monitor→LAN Sync Group ü
Fax - Protocol Trace ü
Fax - Task sequence Trace ü

PC Programming Manual 41
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I
UM System Trace (Internal) ü
T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ü
T1/E1 Line Trace ü
Digital Trunk Error Report ü
IP Extension Statistical Information ü
UM View Reports ü ü
E-mail Report ü ü
IP-CS Information → IP-CS Statistical Information ü
IP-CS Information → LAN Sync Information ü
Activation Key Installation ü
Email Notification—Alert ü ü
Email Notification—System Analysis ü
Email Notification—Test Email ü
UM Command ü
Router Command ü
UM – System Prompts Customisation ü ü
Automatic Two-way Recording ü ü ü ü
UM - System Maintenance ü ü
CS-Web Connection ü ü

2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console

After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance
Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first
time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must
log in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
For information about account names and passwords, see 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

Login Screen

42 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

Login Restrictions
• Up to 32 User (User) and User (Administrator) level accounts may log in at one time to Web Maintenance
Console in On-line mode.
• Only 1 user may log in using the Installer level account at a time. If someone using the Installer level
account is logged in to Web Maintenance Console and is making changes, and another user logs in using
the Installer level account, the user logging in may override the other logged-in user so that programming
can be performed (a warning screen will be displayed for the user that is about to override the currently
logged-in user).
• Users can view only menus and setting items they may access according to their account level. For User
(Administrator) level accounts, the items that can be viewed can be set by the Installer level account. For
details, see 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise.
• If two logged-in users change the same setting, the change made last will be the effective setting.
• If a user attempts to log in, but enters an incorrect password three times, the failure is recorded in the
error log of the PBX and the user may not attempt to log in again for a 5-minute period.

2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in
to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard
for that PBX will launch automatically.
You must log in using the Installer level account name and password.
– The Installer level account name is "INSTALLER".
– The default Installer level account password is "1234".
After logging in, the Easy Setup Wizard welcome screen is displayed. Select a language, and then click
Install. Refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard" in the Installation Manual for detailed and important information
about configuring the PBX using the Easy Setup Wizard.

2.1.5 Software Interface

This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.

Main Window
When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the main window is displayed. For information about
connecting to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console.
The main window of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below:

PC Programming Manual 43
2.1.5 Software Interface

2
1 3

1. Logged in Account Level

The logged in account level is displayed.
2. Menu Buttons
Provides access to the three main components of Web Maintenance Console:
Button Description
Clicking this button will load the Home Screen. From the Home Screen, you can:
• View the status of connected PBXs in the One-look network
• Add PBXs to your One-look network
• Select a PBX to perform programming
Home Screen For more information, see 3.1 Home Screen.
Clicking this button will display the Maintenance Screen tree view items. From the
Maintenance Screen, you can:
• Check the status and equipment of the selected PBX
• Backup or update PBX system files
Maintenance • Use tools and reports to monitor and analyse system usage
Screen For more information, see Maintenance Screen Tree View Items below.
Clicking this button will display the Setup Screen tree view items. From the Setup
Screen, you can:
• Configure PBX hardware and virtual cards
• Programme settings for extensions and call handling
Setup Screen • Configure network settings and auxiliary PBX functions
• Configure the Unified Messaging (UM) system
For more information, see Setup Screen Tree View Items below.

3. Web Maintenance Console Features

Clicking these buttons provides features for Web Maintenance Console, as follows:

44 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.5 Software Interface

Button Description
Clicking this button will save any changes made to settings to the Storage Memory
Card. Programming changes that are not saved will be lost if the PBX is reset or is
turned off. Changes may also be lost if Web Maintenance Console is suddenly
Save Data terminated or the PC running Web Maintenance Console loses power
unexpectedly. Be sure to save the data periodically while programming, especially
during long programming sessions.
Clicking this button displays the Web Maintenance Console software version,
copyright notices, and licences.

System Note
Information Licence information is not displayed when programming in Off-line mode.
Clicking this button will save any programming changes to the PBX’s Storage
Memory Card and log you out of Web Maintenance Console. For more information,
see 2.2 Logout.
Logout
Clicking this button will display the Extension List View in a separate window. For
details, see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View.

Extension
List View

4. Home Screen/Tree View

The Home Screen (shown above) displays the PBX icon view or PBX list view. The information and
status of PBXs in the One-look network can be managed and confirmed. For more information, see
3.1 Home Screen.
When the Maintenance Screen or Setup Screen is selected, the tree view is displayed. The tree view is
used to display PBX setting items. Setting items are listed in categories, and by clicking items in the
tree, setting items are displayed to the right in the settings programming area. Some tree items have
sub-categories with additional options and settings. Clicking a sub-category will open an additional
layer of settings. Below is a summary of the tree view menu items for the Setup Screen and the
Maintenance Screen.

Maintenance Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions
Status • Check the status of the PBX’s system hardware
• Check the status of PBX equipment (PSs, CSs, UPS, etc.)
• Check the status of extensions used by the Unified Messaging system
For details, see 4 Status.
System Control • Download and update PBX software files
• Manage music on hold (MOH) data
• Reset or shutdown the system
For details, see 5 System Control.

PC Programming Manual 45
2.1.5 Software Interface

Item Primary Functions

Tool • Backup system data to a USB memory device
• View a list of PBX extensions
• Import and export PBX settings and user information
• Backup or restore Unified Messaging data
For details, see 6 Tool.
Utility • Perform tests for PBX cards and network connections
• Transfer files between the PBX and a connected PC
• View reports, error logs, event logs, and programme update logs
• Monitor and trace PBX communications and protocols
• Manage activation keys
For details, see 7 Utility.

Setup Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions
Users • Manage, view, and add PBX user profiles and account information
For details, see 8 Users .
PBX Configuration • Configure PBX hardware settings for cards, equipment, and networking
• Configure network-wide programming such as BGM and Class of Service
• Configure dialling features, call routing, and incoming call settings
• Configure call logging (SMDR) and other PBX maintenance items
For details, see 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration to 19 PBX
Configuration—[11] Maintenance.
UM Configuration • Configure Unified Messaging mailboxes and voice mail subscriber settings
• Configure service settings and system parameters
• Configure hardware options
For details, see 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings to 26 UM
Configuration—[7] System Security.
Router • Confirm the status of the built-in router and its settings
Configuration
• Configure built-in router settings and connections
• Configure WAN/LAN settings for the built-in router
• Configure security for the built-in router, such as a firewall
For details, see 27 Router Configuration .
Network Service • Configure server and client features for the PBX
• Configure connections settings and network security
For details, see 28 Network Service.

Site Selection Menu

When you are logged in to the Master unit of a One-look network and you are viewing programming screens
in the tree view, a site selection drop-down menu is displayed with each PBX site’s name and ID number.
You can select a PBX site in the One-look network from the drop-down menu to programme items for that
site.

46 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.6 Card Status

Note
On some screens, the site selection menu will be inactive. This means that the currently displayed
programming items are set for the Master unit PBX only, and cannot be set for each Slave unit.

Standard Buttons
There are standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console.
The standard buttons are as follows:
Button Function
OK Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory
(DRAM) and closes the current screen.
Cancel Abandons changes and closes the current screen.
Apply Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory
(DRAM) and remains on the same screen.

Copying and Pasting Data

Many setting items in Web Maintenance Console can be copied and pasted to other items on the same
screen. When the icon is displayed, clicking it will open a menu where you can specify the copy source
and the paste destinations.
1. On a programming screen, click . The copy window will be displayed.

Note
The icon may not be displayed for some programming screens.
2. Select the copy source from the Copy From drop-down menu.
3. In Copy To, select one or more paste destinations. Hold down the "Ctrl" key and click to select
destinations one at a time, or hold down the "Shift" key and click to select a range of destinations.
4. In Items, select one or more items to copy from the source selected in Copy From. Hold down the "Ctrl"
key and click to select items one at a time, or hold down the "Shift" key and click to select a range of
items.
5. Click Copy. The programming item(s) selected in Items for the copy source specified in Copy From will
be copied to the destination(s) specified in Copy To.

Individual items can also be copied and pasted in a manner similar to other software programmes. Press
"Ctrl"+"c" to copy a highlighted (orange-coloured) programming item entry, select a target cell by pressing
the keyboard arrow keys, and then press "Ctrl"+"v" to paste the copied information to the selected cell.

2.1.6 Card Status

Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service
(INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item.
Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in
1.1.2 Introduction).
• "In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.

PC Programming Manual 47
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting

• "Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed
from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.
• "Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more
information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-
line mode only) in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

2.1.7 Extension Number Setting

Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of
programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard
window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains
how to use this Extension Number Setting window.

To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you
wish to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be
added to the first free spaces on the original screen.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Selects the types of extension numbers to display in Wired Extension,
Type Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items can Portable Station,
be selected. Items that are not available are shown with ICD Group, PS Ring
a grey checkbox. Group, OGM
(DISA), External
Pager, Fax Unit,
UM / VM Extension,
UM Group,
VM(DPT) Group,
VM(DTMF) Group
Extension Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Matching extensions
Numbers & Extension Type, and names. Click entries to select
Names List them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the
selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it again.
Available Specifies which fields in the original form to add Available fields
Column extension data to. For example, if both extension
numbers and names can be entered in the original form,
it is possible to specify that extension name data not be
transferred, by deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.
Selected Displays the extensions that have been selected to be Selected extensions
Extension added to member data. To remove an extension from
List this list, click it to select it and click Delete.

48 PC Programming Manual
 2.2 Logout

2.2 Logout
To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to
the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary
memory (DRAM) of the PBX to the Storage Memory Card.

To logout
1. Click the button.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.

Note
• If the PC running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is shut down, or
the Web browser is closed, any changes that have not been saved to the Storage Memory Card will
be lost. To save settings while programming, click the button on the Home screen. Always end your
programming session by clicking the button.
• If you are logged in but do not perform any operations in Web Maintenance Console for 60 minutes
(default value), you will be automatically logged out.

PC Programming Manual 49
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software
to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:
Title Description
Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.
Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Card Status Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Portable Stations Setting up portable stations, including registration and
deregistration.
Numbering Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual
extensions or features.
Saving Modified Data Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting Features Setting up individual features.

Connection
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via a LAN connection.
A • Is the PC connected to the LAN?
• Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more
details, see 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports.
• Is the login name and password correct?

Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX?
A • Yes. This is possible in Off-line mode.
Create a new system data file in Off-line mode (see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using
Off-line Mode), modify settings as necessary, and then upload this file to the PBX
later (see 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX).

Maintenance Console Software

Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A • From the Home Screen, access the List View (see 3.1 Home Screen). The software
version of the PBX is displayed on this screen.
• From 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot, click Summary.
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.

Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too
narrow.
A • Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the
table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all
characters are displayed.

Card Status
Q The status of a new card will not change to "INS".

50 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the
maximum supported by the PBX?
• Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install"
for that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
• Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed
correctly in the slot.
• Confirm that the card is not damaged.

Q I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.

A • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?
• Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
• Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
• Is a trunk line connected to the appropriate port?
• Is the port in FAULT status, even though a trunk is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.

Q How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?

A • Change New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 9.32 PBX
Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option from "In Service (INS)" to "Out of
Service (OUS)".

Portable Stations
Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in 9.31 PBX
Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station.
A • Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station
match? Confirm that they are the same.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
• Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the PS
Registration and De-registration option to delete the previous registration.

Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.

A • First, de-register the Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.

Q I cannot de-register a Portable Station.

A • Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to
the CS and try the de-registration operation again.

Q The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is not
available, or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable
Station, so it cannot be de-registered.

PC Programming Manual 51
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown
in PS Registration and De-registration of 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station.

Q I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the
Portable Station still shows the old extension number.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station
still shows the old FCO.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable
Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A • Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is
necessary for it to operate.

Numbering
Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A • Change the extension number of the target port to the new number, and click Apply.
Next, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was
engaged in a call, but the display still shows the previous extension number.
A • The extension number will not change while the extension is in use. When the
conversation is finished, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit
numbers?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—
Main screen.
2. Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change No. of Additional
Digits from "x" to "xx".
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
in Numbering.

Q How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?

52 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Select 3-digits for Select the default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup
Wizard. If you want to change to a 3-digit extension numbering plan after the PBX
system is already running using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the
procedure below. There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main:
1. Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method
allows a maximum of 10 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2. Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method
allows a maximum of 100 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Numbering.

Q What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by
any extensions (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of
those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension
number (see 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings and 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings).
2. Clear the Leading Number cell.
3. Click Apply.
4. Modify the No. of Additional Digits cell as required.
5. Click Apply.
6. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
7. Click Apply.
8. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
9. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
10. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.

PC Programming Manual 53
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a
number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set
"21" as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension
numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
– A feature number
– Another extension block
– A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table)
– Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Clear the Leading Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. Set No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4. Click Apply.
5. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
6. Click Apply.
7. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
8. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
9. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q How do I change a feature number?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—
Main screen and navigate to the Features tab.
2. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change a feature number.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
– A feature number
– An extension
– A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table)
– Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

54 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Q How do I change the code used to access another PBX?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—
Main screen.
2. Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
4. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
– A feature number
– An extension
– A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table)
– Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
A • The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.

Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly

installed card?
A • Change New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension
Card in the 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option screen from
"Enable" to "Disable".

Saving Modified Data

Q Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A • Click Apply or OK in the main screen.

Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not
updated in the PBX.
A • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to
the Storage Memory Card. If system data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card,
the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX
is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the button on the Home screen to save
the system data to the Storage Memory Card. Also, when you finish a programming
session, be sure to click the button to logout and save the system data to the
Storage Memory Card.

Note
Do not remove the Storage Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX.
Doing so may cause the PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.

PC Programming Manual 55
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Q After reinitialising the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.
A • The following setting data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card, so will be
deleted when the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup
memory.
– Advice of Charge (AOC)
– Hospitality guest billing data
– Timed Reminder
– ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
– Remote Extension Dial Lock

Setting Features
Q How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk?
A • From the 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or
"Pulse", as required.

Q How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk?

A • From the 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port screen, modify the CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set
separately.

Q What settings do I change to enable use of an extension ISDN telephone?

A • From the 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to "EXT".

Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?

A • From the 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port or 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
PRI Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either "QSIG-
Slave" or "QSIG-Master".

Q How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?

A • Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings screen.

Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?

A • Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block screen. Click in the
relevant cells to select the COS levels whose extensions are blocked from calling
each other.

Q How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions?

56 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.2 PBX
Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block screen.
Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk groups that cannot be used by
extensions associated with a particular COS in each time mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls, set all trunk
groups for that COS to "Block" (blue).

Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?

A • It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the
SLT-SLT Hold Mode option on the 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—
System Options screen.
For more details, see "2.13.1 Call Hold" of the Feature Manual.

Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls
directly?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, enter the floating extension
number you chose for the ICD group in the Floating Extension Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, select the ICD
group you created from the ICD Group No. drop-down list.
4. Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension Number
column.
5. Click Apply.
6. On the DIL tab of the 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—
DIL Table & Port Settings screen, enter the floating extension number of the
ICD group as the DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night of each time
mode.
7. Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group submenu.

Q How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table screen, set the actions as required
for each queuing table.
2. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, from the Queuing Time Table
tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode.

Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)

group?

PC Programming Manual 57
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Perform the following steps:

1. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, from the ICD
Group No. drop-down list, select the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of
the Extension Number column.
3. Set Delayed Ring as necessary.
4. Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.

Q I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being
forwarded.
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Check that the Forward / DND settings of the target extension on the 12.1.2
PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND or
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND screen are set to one of the forwarding settings.
2. Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3. Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.

58 PC Programming Manual
 Section 3
Web Maintenance Console Home Screen

This section explains how to setup the main PBX and

other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 59
3.1 Home Screen

3.1 Home Screen

The Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console provides an overall view of your One-look network, and
allows you select a PBX to perform programming, or add a PBX to your One-look network. The Home
Screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console. The screen can also be accessed by
clicking the Home Screen icon at the top of the Web Maintenance Console screen.

Note
• The first time you login to a PBX using Web Maintenance Console, instead of the Home screen the
Easy Setup Wizard is run. See 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.

1. PBX management buttons

These items provide site management functions as follows:
Icon Description
Add Slave
Click this button to run the Add Site Wizard to add a PBX as a Slave unit to the
One-look network.

Note
This is displayed only when logged in to the Master unit.
Icon View
Click this button to display the PBXs as icons (as in the above illustration).

60 PC Programming Manual
 3.1 Home Screen

Icon Description
List View
Click this button to view the following information in a list format:
• System Capacity Selection
This field indicates the type that is selected for System Capacity Selection in
Easy Setup Wizard. For details, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard" in the
Installation Manual.
• Site status indicator
• Site ID (1–16)
• Site Name
• Location (MIB)
Specified at MIB info—SysLocation in 28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3]
Client Feature—SNMP Agent.
• Status (INS or OUS)
• PBX Mode
• PBX Model
• IP Address
• MAC Address
• PBX Version (software version)
• PBX Region
• Data Version
• SRAM Version
You can also perform PBX site management from this screen:
• Click Registration to register Slave units that have been added using the Add
Site Wizard. For details, see 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard. You can
also click De-Registration or Forced De-Registration to remove Slave units
from the One-look network.
– When logged in to a Slave unit, only information for that Slave unit and the
Master unit is displayed.
– You can register or de-register Slave units only in On-line mode.
• In the Backup Master drop-down list, select a site to designate it as the
Backup Master site, and then click OK. For details, see 1.2.3.1 One-look
Networking Survivability.

Note
If you have already designated a Backup Master site and want to select a
different site, first select Unassigned and click OK. Then, select the new
Backup Master site.

2. Master unit PBX icon

This is the icon and unit name representing the Master unit PBX. Click this icon to open the Setup
Screen for this PBX. You can also right-click the icon and select to open either the Setup Screen or the
Maintenance Screen.
Right-click the icon and select Normal Mode in the following cases:

PC Programming Manual 61
3.1 Home Screen

• The Master unit is offline and not operating, and you want to restore the Master unit to normal
operation.
• There has been a connection error with one or more Slave units, and you want to restore their
connection to the Master unit in the One-look network.
3. PBX information
• The time of when Web Maintenance Console last received information from the PBX is displayed.
• The uptime of the PBX is displayed (the total time since the PBX was last reset).
4. Slave unit PBX icons
These 15 icons represent Slave unit PBXs under the control of the Master unit PBX. Units that have
been registered display a unit name and are coloured in. Remaining available unit positions are shown
as greyed out. You can right-click a registered PBX and select Maintenance, Setup, or Direct Login
for that PBX. Selecting Direct Login will display the Login screen for that PBX. For details about the
login procedure, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console.
If the PBX is operating as the Master Backup unit or is in Isolated mode, but the Master unit has been
restored to normal operation, you can right-click the PBX’s icon and select Normal Mode to restore the
PBX to normal operation. (It will reconnect to the Master unit PBX as a Slave unit.)
The desired method for recovering from Isolated mode to Normal mode can be specified. For details,
refer to 8.4.2 One-look Networking Survivability in the Installation Manual.

Note
• For the following items related to the Unified Messaging (UM) programming of a Slave unit, you
must select Direct Login to log in to the PBX that the UM Group in which programming will be
performed belongs to:
– 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status
– 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB
– 5.3 System Control—FAX Card
– 6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB
– 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
– 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore
– 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History
– 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log
– 7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)
– 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace
– 7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace
– 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
– 7.8 Utility—Command
– 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
– UM Configuration settings
(For details for UM Configuration settings, see "20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings" to
"26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security".)

PBX Status Icons

If the PBX is in service (INS) and operating normally, the unit will be displayed as shown above. Icons are
displayed on PBX units when they are not in service and operating normally. The following icons are
displayed on PBX units according to their status:

62 PC Programming Manual
 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

Icon Description
Connection Error (Status Unknown)
The site where you are logged in cannot communicate with the sites displaying
this icon and cannot determine their status.
Maintenance Mode
This PBX is installed but it is out of service (OUS) and maintenance is being
performed on it. PBXs with this icon are visible on the home screen, but they are
currently not connected to other PBXs in the One-look network.
Pre-install Mode
This PBX is installed but it is out of service (OUS) and has not yet been put in
service (INS). The free trial period for activation key trials has not yet begun.
Offline Master Unit
The Master unit is currently not connected to other PBXs in the One-look
network and is not operating as the Master unit.

3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

The Add Site Wizard, which is run from the Home Screen, will add KX-NS series PBXs (KX-NS300/
KX-NS500/KX-NS700/KX-NS1000) to your One-look network as Slave units.

Note
• The PBX to be added must have been configured as a Slave unit using the Easy Setup Wizard. See
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• To designate a Backup Master PBX, first add the PBX as a Slave unit to the One-look network using
the Add Site Wizard, and then select it as the Backup Master unit from the List View.
• KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700 PBXs cannot be designated as a Master or Backup Master PBX.
1. To start the Add Site Wizard, click the Add Slave button ( ) on the Home screen. For details about the
Home Screen, see 3.1 Home Screen.
2. Follow the prompts of the Add Site Wizard to complete the following settings:
– PBX Setting
– LAN Setting
– Registration Setting
– SNTP / Daylight Saving
– Maintenance Setting

Note
• The parameters which appear in the settings above are described in 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• If 2 or more sites will be added to the One-look network, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each site.
3. After the Add Site Wizard is completed, click Registration on the List View of the Home screen.
4. A list of PBXs set up as Slave units will be displayed under Available Site. Select PBXs by their
assigned site names and click the right arrow to move them to Selected Site for Registration.
Click Next to start the registration process.
5. On the Registration Executing screen, the status of PBXs being registered is displayed.
6. On the Registration Completed screen, the result of the registration process is shown. Click Close to
continue.

PC Programming Manual 63
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

Registered Slave PBXs can now be viewed and selected on the Home Screen for programming.

Removing registered Slave units from the One-look network

To remove a Slave unit from the One-look network, there are two methods: De-registration and Forced De-
registration.
Method Description
De-registration • Registration information and settings for the Slave unit are
deleted from the Master unit.
• The De-registered Slave unit is reset to its initialised state
(factory default state).
Forced De-Registration • Registration information and settings for the Slave unit are
deleted from the Master unit.
• The De-registered Slave unit is not reset to its initialised
state. Information and settings registered on the Slave unit
remain.

1. Set the Slave unit to be removed to out of service (OUS) status.

2. From the List View of the Home Screen (see 3.1 Home Screen) click De-registration or Forced De-
registration.
3. Select the PBX(s) by site name, click the arrow to move them to the selection box, and click Next.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Click OK to continue.
A removal status screen will be displayed. Each selected PBX will be removed one at a time. After
each successful removal, a confirmation message will appear. Click Continue to proceed to the next
PBX to remove.
5. When all removal is complete, a message will be displayed. Click Close to finish.

64 PC Programming Manual
 Section 4
Status

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 65
4.1 Status—Equipment Status

4.1 Status—Equipment Status

4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS
Information is provided about the status of the UPS device and the connection to the PBX
• UPS Connection Status
Displays if the UPS system is connected or not connected. If a UPS system is connected, the information
below will be displayed for the UPS system.
• Battery Voltage (V)
The voltage of the UPS battery is displayed (0-240 V).
• Battery Charge Percentage (%)
The remaining charge of the UPS battery is displayed (percentage value).
• Power Supply
Displays the usage status of the UPS (if the UPS is engaged in supplying power to the PBX).
• UPS Shutdown Conditions - Battery level
From the drop-down list, select the amount of remaining battery level for when to initiate PBX shutdown
procedures.
For more information about setting up a UPS system, refer to "4.13 Starting the KX-NS1000—Connecting
an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)" in the Installation Manual.

4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information

Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target
V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Site Number of the site
Shelf Number of the shelf
Slot Number of the slot
Port Number of the port
CS Name Name of the attached CS
Status Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left
blank.
Version Version number of the programme file stored in the CS
Revision Revision number of the programme file stored in the CS
CSID 12-digit ID number of the CS
Path Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the
case of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating
extension number.
When an extension number is not registered, the display shows
"OFF". The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS
model. For more details, see the documentation for your CS.

66 PC Programming Manual
 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information

Item Description
Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a
PS Ring Group.

To view CS information
1. From the Target CS I/F Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target shelf and slot.
• To display information on a single card, select the shelf number, slot number and name of that card.
• To display information on all matching cards, select "All".
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. If you want to save the CS information, click Capture.
a. Create a file for saving the data.
b. Click Start.
c. Click Close.
4. Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5. Click Stop to end monitoring.
6. If you started to save the CS information in step 3, click Capture, then click Stop to record the
information to the specified file.
7. Click Close to return to the main screen.

4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information

Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
PS No. PS location number.
Only registered PSs will be displayed.
Extension Number Extension number of the PS.
Site Number of the site.
LocationSlot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
LocationPort Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Model Name *1
Model name of the PS.
Version*1 Software version of the PS.

*1 This information is displayed for certain PSs only. For more information, refer to the documentation for your PS.

4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status

The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The
screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways:

PC Programming Manual 67
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB

• Online (Ready): The port is ready to be used.

• Incoming Call: The port is handling an incoming call.
• Outgoing Call: An outgoing service is being processed.
• Error Occurred: An error has been detected.
• Off Line: The port is offline.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB

USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount
button.
• Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device
from the PBX, click Unmount.

Note
If a mounted memory device is removed from the PBX without first clicking Unmount, the data on the
USB memory device may be damaged.
• None: No USB memory device is detected by the PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

68 PC Programming Manual
 Section 5
System Control

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen
when programming using Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 69
5.1 System Control—Program Update

5.1 System Control—Program Update

The programme files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update
feature.
Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognised by the KX-NS1000.

Hardware that can be updated using Program Update

Programme Type Target of Update File Name
MPR Programme KX-NS1000 Mother Board PCMPR
LPR Programmes CSIF PCSINF
DHLC/DLC PDHLC
SLC PSLC
DID PDID
T1 PT1
E1 PE1
E&M PEM
BRI PBRI
PRI23 PPRI23
PRI30 PPRI30
OPB3 POPB3
ESLC16/EMSLC16 PESLC
ECSLC24/EMSLC24/MCSLC16/MCSLC24 PEESLC
ELCOT PELCOT
EECHO PEECHO
CSLC16 PCSLC
STACK-S PSTKS
PT Programmes KX-NT265 PNT265A
KX-NT343, KX-NT346, KX-NT343 PNT300
KX-NT321 PNT321
KX-UT133, KX-UT136 PUT13X
KX-UT113, KX-UT123 PUT1XX
KX-NT543, KX-NT546 PNT540
KX-NT551, KX-NT553, KX-NT556 PNT550
KX-NT560 PNT560
KX-UT248 PUT248
KX-UT670 PUT670

70 PC Programming Manual
 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File

Programme Type Target of Update File Name

Firmware for PFPGA PFPGA
KX-NS1000
PAPMIRNR PAPMIRNR
PARMVDNR PARMVDNR
PARMIREP PARMIREP
PARMVDEP PARMVDEP
PC300NR PC300NR
PC300EP PC300EP
PC300DAG PC300DAG
Unified Messaging PFAX PFAX
(UM) Programme
CS Programmes (PS CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable PCSDECT
Programmes) Station
CS using a CSIF card for 2.4 GHz Portable PCS24G
Station
CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable PDCSDECT
Station
CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz PDCS24G
Portable Station
High-density CS for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT
IP-CS for DECT Portable Station PICSDCT
TCAx85 + IP-CS (KX-NS0154)*1 PNS0154

*1 Software updates for PSs (e.g., KX-TCA185) are bundled with software updates for an IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only).

5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program

File
Software updates for PBX hardware components can be downloaded to the PBXs in the One-look network.
Manual and automatic methods are available.
Programme downloading can be performed only in On-line mode.

Note
• If these operations are performed when logged in to a Slave unit, only the manual method can be
used, and files may only be acquired from a local PC or a USB memory device.
• When using an FTP server with this feature, the programme files to be downloaded to the
KX-NS1000 PBX must be named on the FTP server in a specific way that includes the version
number.
Example: "PNT300_xxx_xxx_xxx"
("xxx_xxx_xxx" is the version number.)

Manual
Using manual operations, the location of updated PBX software is specified and downloaded to the Master
unit, and then transferred to any Slave units.
To download programme files manually

PC Programming Manual 71
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File

1. In Location of program files, specify the location of the updated files from the Look in drop-down list.
The choices are as follows:
• Local PC
Click Browse and specify the location of the updated programme files stored on the PC logged in to
Web Maintenance Console.
• USB Memory
If a USB memory device is inserted into the PBX, the contents of the following directory on the
device will be checked for updated files:
/private/meigroup/psn/ippbx/update
• FTP Server
The PBX connects to the specified FTP server and checks for updated files. Specify an FTP server
from the FTP connection name drop-down list, and specify the number of attempts to connect to
the FTP server in No. of retries.
To specify a new FTP site, see 28.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP.
• Master Unit
The most recent versions of files previously downloaded to the Master unit are displayed.
• NAS
Specify the location of the updated programme files stored on a directory of the NAS to Web
Maintenance Console.
2. Specify which PBX programme files will be automatically downloaded by checking the boxes next to
each hardware item.
3. For FTP Server only
Click Check to confirm the connection to the FTP server. If a connection is established, the Execute
button will become active.
4. Click Execute, and then click OK on the confirmation message that appears. When the transfer is
complete, click OK.

Note
• If downloading cannot be completed within 10 minutes (due to slow network speeds or other
connection problems), the download operation will be cancelled.
• The Master unit’s FTP server function must be enabled for Slave units to download programme files.
See 28.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP.

Automatic
The Master unit is set to automatically check an FTP server for updated programme files. If an update is
available, the Master unit will download the data. The downloaded software is then sent over the One-look
network from the Master unit to all Slave units.
To download programme files automatically
1. For Download Server, select an FTP site.
To specify a new FTP site, see 28.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP.
2. For Download mode, select one of the following:
• None: No actions are taken (automatic downloading is disabled).
• Check only: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If an e-mail is entered
in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been discovered.

72 PC Programming Manual
 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

Note
If Check only is selected, updated files will have to be downloaded manually (see the manual
procedure above).
• Download automatically: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If
updated files are discovered, they will be downloaded automatically to the PBX. If an e-mail is entered
in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been downloaded.
3. In Check time and date, specify when the PBX will contact the server to check for updates. The check
can be performed on a daily or weekly basis.
4. In Email notification specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive an e-mail notification when
updated files have been discovered or when updated files have been downloaded.

Note
If Download automatically is not selected in step 2, specify at least one e-mail address so that an
administrator will be notified when updated files have been discovered.
5. To begin automatic checking for updates according to Check time and date, click Execute.
6. The PBX will now periodically perform checks and downloads as specified in the settings. Click
Download Cancel on this screen to stop automatic programme updates.

Note
When the system is downloading data from an FTP server, if downloading cannot be completed within
10 minutes (due to slow network speeds or other connection problems), the download operation will be
cancelled.

5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to
update the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a
specified time, or the update process can be carried out manually.
You must be connected to the PBX in On-line mode to update programme files.

Note
• Before updating programme files, we strongly recommend making a backup of all system files. For
details, refer to the following:
– 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup
– 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
• Do not upgrade KX-UT series SIP phones at the same time as the Main unit.
• When upgrading the system software to version 004.1xxxx from an older version, the following SRAM
data is cleared.
– Timed Reminder
– Remote Station Lock Status
– Room Status
– Login/Logout Status
– SMDR
– Billing Information
– Hotel Check In/Check Out
– Hotel Specifications

PC Programming Manual 73
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

Save SRAM data before upgrading the firmware.

When you upgrade the software, a message will be shown. Then, you can save the following SRAM
data into the Storage Memory Card as "smdrdata.zip".
– SMDR
– Billing Information
– Hotel Specifications
• When upgrading the firmware for the Unified Messaging (UM) Programme (PFAX), specify the MPR
card as the target hardware. The MPR card’s firmware will be updated at the same time. Be aware
that a system reset is necessary when doing the update. However, to update the MPR card’s firmware
at the same time as the PFAX firmware, Immediately (Manual update) must be selected for Program
Update Type. If Timed Update (Automatic update) is selected, the PFAX firmware will not be updated
at the same time.

For Program Update Type, select Immediately or Timed Update.

Immediately (Manual update)

Specify which cards or devices to update, and perform the update immediately.
1. In Email notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme
files have been updated.
2. Updated programme files that can be used to update cards or devices installed in the system are listed
in Available Program File(s). In Select the target to update, specify which cards or devices will be
updated using the files listed by checking the boxes next to each item.

Note
• When selecting an item, a warning message may be displayed. Confirm the contents of the
warning, and then click OK to continue.
• If you are updating the software for a PS, select the port of an IP-CS (e.g., KX-NS0154) that
supports this feature. For details about which PSs can be updated, see 5.1.3 System Control—
Program Update—Plug and Update.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click on another PBX site tab to programme another PBX in the One-look network as required, and then
repeat steps 1–3. Perform settings for each PBX in the One-look network as required.
5. Click Execute.
The programme files are updated to the specified PBXs.

Note
• Updated PBXs reset when the update is complete.
• If this operation is performed when logged in to a Slave unit only the PBX mother board and hardware
specifically registered to the Slave unit may be updated.

Timed Update (Automatic update)

Specify which cards or devices to update and a time to execute the update.
1. In Email notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme
files have been updated.
2. Updated programme files that can be used to update cards or devices installed in the system are listed
in Available Program File(s). In Select the target to update, specify which cards or devices will be
updated using the files listed by checking the boxes next to each item.

74 PC Programming Manual
 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

Note
When selecting an item, a warning message may be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning,
and then click OK to continue.
3. In Update Time, specify the time of day when the update will be executed.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click on another PBX site tab to programme another PBX in the One-look network as required, and then
repeat steps 1–4. Perform settings for each PBX in the One-look network as required.
6. Click Execute.
The programme files will be updated to the specified PBXs at the specified time.

Note
• In a One-look network, the following processing is performed after you click Confirm:
1. If you are updating the PBX's software, the check boxes are checked for all sites where the
update will be applied.
2. A general check of the software version of all sites is performed.
• When updating the software of devices other than the PBX (i.e., terminal devices), individually select
the check boxes for sites where the update will be applied.
• All PBXs in a One-look network must be using the same version of the software. When updating
PBXs connected in a One-look network, note the following:
– To confirm the software version of each site, click Confirm. Major and minor software versions are
displayed as follows:
Software version: XXX.YYY
XXX = Major version
YYY = Minor version
– If all sites are the same software version, Apply is available and the settings will be applied for all
sites. If all sites are not the same software version, Apply is not available.
– When updating the programme files for multiple PBXs, an immediate (manual) update is
recommended. For Automatic (timed) updates, set the same Update Time for all PBXs in the One-
look network.
• At most, the process of updating all PBXs in the network can take approximately 30 minutes to
complete.
• For CS programme files, in order for CS cards to be displayed on this screen, the cards must be set
to INS, and the ports of the card must be set to OUS.

5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs, IP-CSs, and certain PSs to be automatically updated to the
latest software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version
number of the system software stored on the Master unit is compared to the system software currently in the
device, after the device has been registered to the PBX. If the software on the Master unit is newer, it is
downloaded to the device. In a One-look network, Plug and Update can be enabled for each type of device
on a per-site basis. Manual update can also be enabled for PSs.
The Plug and Update screen lists the PBXs in the One-look network by site number and site name. By
default, Plug and Update is set to Off for all sites and device types.
1. For each site and device type, select On for the features you want to enable.
• Plug & Update for IP-PT/IP-CS: Enable Plug and Update for IP-PTs and IP-CSs.
• Plug & Update for TCAx85: Enable Plug and Update for supported PSs.

PC Programming Manual 75
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

• Manual Update for TCAx85: Enable manual updates for supported PSs.
2. Click OK.

Note
• Plug & Update for TCAx85 and Manual Update for TCAx85 cannot be set to enable at the same
time.
• The following PSs support this feature:
– KX-TCA185
– KX-TCA285
– KX-TCA385

76 PC Programming Manual
 5.2 System Control—MOH

5.2 System Control—MOH

5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time.
2. In the Select column, specify which PBX sites will install the sound file as an MOH file.
3. As uploading the file to the PBX may require some time, a time can be set in Time Set.
4. In BGM No., specify which BGM number the MOH file will occupy.
5. Click Execute to confirm the settings. An installation report for each site will be displayed when the
installation is finished. If "Now" is set for Time Set, the installation will begin at this time.

Note
• Users logged in to the Master unit can see the status of all One-look network sites. Users logged in to
a Slave unit may only view the status of that PBX.
• Only WAV files can be installed, and file names must not exceed 57 characters in length (including
the file extension ".wav"). If non-alphabetic characters are used, the file name must not exceed 14
characters in length.
• Some language codes for file names are not supported, and file names may not display correctly after
they are installed on the PBX. To ensure proper display, use only the ASCII character set for file
names.
• Files may not be larger than 80 MB in size.
• For a KX-NS300 PBX Slave unit, only 2 sound files can be installed for the site.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete

MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved
in all BGM numbers.
2. In the Select column, specify which PBX sites will delete MOH files from the specified BGM numbers.
3. Click Execute to delete the files of the specified BGM numbers.

Note
• Users logged in to the Master unit can see the status of all One-look network sites. Users logged in to
a Slave unit may only view the status of that PBX.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup

MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. From Site No., select a PBX from which to download MOH files.

PC Programming Manual 77
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup

2. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed. Click Backup for the file you would like to back up. One
file can be backed up at a time.
3. A save file dialogue will appear. Specify the directory on the PC to back up the file to.
4. Click OK when finished.

Note
• Users logged in to the Master unit can see the status of all One-look network sites. Users logged in to
a Slave unit may only view the status of that PBX.
• Remained Capacity Time indicates the amount of time available for new MOH files to be added. The
amount of time of any MOH files scheduled to be uploaded in 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
is not reflected in this value.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

78 PC Programming Manual
 5.3 System Control—FAX Card

5.3 System Control—FAX Card

This function is used to restart the optional FAX Card after it is installed in the PBX. For details about
installing the FAX Card, refer to "4.3.4 FAX Card (KX-NS0106)" in the Installation Manual.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Execute.
2. Click OK.
3. The card is restarted and a confirmation message is displayed. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 79
5.4 System Control—System Reset

5.4 System Control—System Reset

When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows
a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console.
When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost. A backup should be
performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be performed if settings
or data have recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup would overwrite the
imported data with the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

[Manual System Reset]

1. Select the System Reset tab.
2. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
3. Click Backup or Skip according to the system’s status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will be reset after the backup has been
performed.
• Skip: The system is reset without performing a backup.
If you are logged in to the PBX that is reset using this command, it is necessary to re-log in to Web
Maintenance Console to continue programming.

[System Reset by Timed Schedule]

1. Select the Timed Reset tab.
2. Select a site at Select Site (select All Sites or a specific site number and name).
3. Select the Reset Mode (None, One Time, Daily).
4. Set the Reset Time (00:00-23:59).
5. Click Apply or OK to set the system reset.

The specified site will have its system reset at the specified mode and reset time, according to the above
settings.

80 PC Programming Manual
 5.5 System Control—System Shutdown

5.5 System Control—System Shutdown

In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance
Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown.
When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost. A backup
should be performed before the shutdown to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be
performed if settings or data have recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup
would overwrite the imported data with the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Select the PBX site(s) to shut down in the Select Site drop-down menu.
2. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
3. Click Backup or Skip according to the system’s status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will prepare for shutdown after the backup
has been performed.
• Skip: The system is prepared for shutdown without performing a backup.
4. The STATUS LED on the front of the PBX will flash amber. When shutdown preparations are
completed, the STATUS LED will stop flashing and remain a solid amber. Once the STATUS LED stops
flashing, you may turn off the power switch on the back of the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 81
5.5 System Control—System Shutdown

82 PC Programming Manual
 Section 6
Tool

This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of

the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 83
6.1 Tool—System Data Backup

6.1 Tool—System Data Backup

6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB
A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a USB memory device inserted into the PBX’s USB port. At a
later time, the USB memory device can be used to restore the backed up system data to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To back up the system data to a USB memory device

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB port of the PBX.

Note
• To check the inserted USB memory’s status, see 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB.
• The USB memory device must be compatible for use with the PBX. For details, refer to "4.10
Connection of Peripherals—USB Interface for Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and USB
Memory Device—Using a USB memory device" in the Installation Manual.
• If an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) device is connected to the PBX with a USB cable, the
USB cable must first be removed, then reconnected after the backup to USB has been
completed. For details about the connection between the UPS and the PBX, refer to "4.13
Starting the KX-NS1000—Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)" in the Installation
Manual.
2. Select the system data items to backup.
• System Data
System data includes programming information for the PBX, including extension and network
configuration information.
• MOH + OGM
MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Message) sound files stored on the PBX are backed up.
• Activation Key
Activation key files that were installed on the PBX are backed up.
Any or all of the above items may be selected. However, the system cannot be restored unless System
Data is specified.
3. Click Execute to back up the specified files. If backup data already exists on the USB memory device,
it will be deleted. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Continue.
4. A time estimation for the backup will be displayed. Click Continue.
5. A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup. A message will be displayed when
the backup is finished. Click OK.

Note
• Unified Messaging (UM) data must be backed up using a separate process. See 6.9 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
• Use a USB memory device with a capacity of at least 512 MB. During the backup process, if an error
message is displayed indicating there is not enough free memory space on the USB memory device,
delete other unnecessary files on the USB memory device, or use a USB memory device with a larger
capacity.

Restoring backed up data from a USB memory device to a PBX

Follow the procedure below to restore the backed up data to a PBX.

84 PC Programming Manual
 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS

Note
The restoration process first requires an initialisation of the PBX, which returns the PBX to its factory
default state. Under the following conditions, restoration may not be possible, even though the PBX has
been initialised.
• The USB memory device hardware is faulty.
• The data on the USB memory device has become corrupted.
• The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process.
To minimise the potential of a failed backup, connect the USB memory device to a PC to confirm the
USB memory device is operational and that the backup data is intact before starting this restore
process.
1. The PBX must be in a powered-off state.
2. Insert the USB memory device with the backup data into the USB port of the PBX.
3. Set the PBX’s System Mode Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
4. Turn on the PBX’s power switch. The STATUS indicator will flash green. Slide the System Mode Switch
back to the "NORMAL" position. The restore process will begin and the STATUS indicator will flash
rapidly.
5. When the restoration process is completed, the PBX will restart automatically.

6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS

A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a NAS (Network Attached Storage) in the PBX’s LAN network.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To back up the system data to a NAS

1. Connect a NAS and PBX.
Set the parameters necessary to connect the NAS to the PBX (IP address of the NAS, etc.), and then
confirm the connection. See 28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS.
2. Select the system data items to backup.
• System Data
System data includes programming information for the PBX, including extension and network
configuration information.
• MOH + OGM
MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Message) sound files stored on the PBX are backed up.
3. Click Execute to back up the specified files. If backup data already exists on the NAS, it will be
deleted. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Continue.
4. A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup. A message will be displayed when
the backup is finished. Click OK.

Note
• Unified Messaging (UM) data must be backed up using a separate process. See 6.9 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
• Data backed up from the PBX to a NAS cannot be restored directly from the NAS to the PBX. The
backup data must be copied from the NAS to a local PC. Then the data can be restored from the local
PC to the PBX.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close
bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.

PC Programming Manual 85
6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS

• Since it is necessary to send large amounts of data to the NAS when using the data backup feature,
we recommend setting up a NAS at each site.
In particular, when backing up to a NAS over a VPN using the built-in router, the NAS will require a
large amount of network bandwidth. Therefore, a NAS will be necessary at each site.

PC Programming Manual References

28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

86 PC Programming Manual
 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and TEI Mode, on
the Network tab of the 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
screen.

Note
• To use this tool, the card to be configured must be pre-set to OUS status. For more details, see
2.1.6 Card Status.
• At any time on this screen, you can click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving.
To configure the BRI card
1. In Check, select the card, and then click OK.
2. Click Execute.
The results of the automatic configuration will be displayed.
3. Click the Check Box cell for the ports that have been configured.
4. Click Data Apply to save these results to the BRI card.

PC Programming Manual 87
6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear

6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear

Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and
monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the
QSIG network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To clear the NDSS Link Data

When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click OK to clear the data.
• Click Cancel to keep the data, and close the screen.

88 PC Programming Manual
 6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group

6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group

Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so
that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0".

To activate this tool

1. When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
The Group Call Pickup feature number (default: 40) + the extension user group number of the
extension is assigned to first personal speed dial.

Note
This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met:
– The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to " 0".
– " 0" is not used for another feature number.
– The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned.
– The Personal Speed Dialling feature number has been assigned.
– The extension user group number does not exceed the highest Call Pickup Group number.

PC Programming Manual 89
6.5 Tool—Extension List View

6.5 Tool—Extension List View

Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information
according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Site, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word
searching feature.

The types that can be displayed are as follows:

Type Detail
Intercom Wired Extension
Portable Station Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
SIP / IP-PT / S-PS SIP/IP-PT/S-PS Extension
UM / VM Unified Messaging UM Group/VPS Voice Mail
ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group Portable Station Ring Group
UM Group Unified Messaging UM Group
VM(DPT) Group VM (DPT) Group
VM(DTMF) Group VM (DTMF) Group
Pager External Pager
OGM (DISA) DISA
DSS DSS Console
DPT-I/F CS PT-interface CS

90 PC Programming Manual
 6.6 Tool—Import

6.6 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using
the Export tool (see 6.7 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files. Unsupported file types
cannot be opened.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan, it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate
editor, before importing.

The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as follows:

Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID

Data Type Import Destination
System Speed Dialling Number Location
Name Name
CO Line Access Number + Dial
Telephone Number
CLI Destination CLI Destination

Related programming: 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Note
Imported Speed Dial and Caller ID data can be copied to a specific speed dial destination. The copy
range can be specified by selecting the from/to of the index.

Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table

Data Type Import Destination
Location Location
DDI/DID Number Dial In Number
DDI/DID Name Dial In Name
DDI/DID Destination-Day Destination-Day
DDI/DID Destination-Lunch Destination-Lunch
DDI/DID Destination-Break Destination-Break
DDI/DID Destination-Night Destination-Night
Tenant Number Tenant Number
Service Group No. Group number for VPS answer
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Day CLI Ring - Day
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Lunch CLI Ring - Lunch
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Break CLI Ring - Break
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Night CLI Ring - Night

Related programming: 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

PC Programming Manual 91
6.6 Tool—Import

ARS - Leading Digit

Data Type Import Destination
Location Location
Leading Number Leading Digit
Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits
Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number

Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number

ARS - Except Code

Data Type Import Destination
Location Location
Leading Number Exception Exception Code

Related programming: 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception

ARS - Routing Plan

Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time

Wired Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected automatically)

Related programming: 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension

Settings

PS Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number*1 Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected automatically)

*1 This data can only be exported, and cannot be imported.

Related programming: 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings

Quick Dial*
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
Dial Dial

92 PC Programming Manual
 6.6 Tool—Import

Data Type Import Destination

Phone Number Phone Number

Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

*: Refer to Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000 below.

SIP Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
Extension Number Extension Number
Password* Password

Related programming: 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port

Property
*: Refer to Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000 below.

V-IPGW16 GW Settings
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
GW Name GW Name
GW IP Address GW IP Address
GW Group GW Group No.
Connection for IP-GW16 Connection for IP-GW16
Protocol Protocol
Progress Tone Send Mode Progress Tone Send Mode
IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 1st
IP Codec Priority 2nd IP Codec Priority 2nd
IP Codec Priority 3rd IP Codec Priority 3rd
Packet Sampling Time (G.711A) Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Voice Activity Detection for G.711
FAX Sending Method FAX Sending Method
Maximum Bit Rate Maximum Bit Rate
FAX Detection Ability FAX Detection Ability
DTMF DTMF
Payload Type Payload Type
T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram
T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy
Redundancy

PC Programming Manual 93
6.6 Tool—Import

Data Type Import Destination

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages
count for T.30 messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data
count for data
T38 FAX Rate Management T38 FAX Rate Management Method
Method

Related programming: 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—GW

Settings–Main

V-IPGW16 DN2IP
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
Leading Number Leading Number
Remaining Number of Digits Remaining Number of Digits
GW No./GW Group Selection GW No./GW Group Selection
GW Group GW Group
GW No. GW No.

Related programming: 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—DN2IP

V-SIPGW16 Settings
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

V-SIPGW16 Provider
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

PS Registration
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Note
Before importing PS registration settings, be sure to de-register any PSs already registered to the
KX-NS1000 PBX.

To import system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Import, and then click the type of data to import.

94 PC Programming Manual
 6.6 Tool—Import

2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click OK to open the file.
If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the
data (system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
6. If required, select import fields.
When import fields can be selected, the selection screen is displayed automatically. Matching origin and
destination fields are entered by default.
• To change the destination for an import field, select the preferred field from the drop-down list.
• To not import a field, select the blank option from the drop-down list.
7. Click OK to perform the import operation.
Depending on the type of data imported, the relevant programming screen may be displayed.
• Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error
message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be cancelled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being
imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.

Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000

Quick Dial
The KX-NS1000 only supports an 8-digit Quick Dial format. Therefore, KX-TDE/KX-NCP Quick Dial data in
the 4-digit format cannot be imported to the KX-NS1000.

SIP Extension – Password

KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs allow 3-digit passwords, but KX-NS1000 PBXs require password with 4 digits or
more. When importing password data from KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs to the KX-NS1000, any 3-digit
passwords will not be imported and the password entry will be left blank.

PC Programming Manual 95
6.7 Tool—Export

6.7 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see
6.6 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.

Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List
Separator, found in the Windows Control Panel’s "Regional Options".

To export system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2. Select the check boxes next to the names of the fields to export, and then click OK.
3. If a message window is displayed, click OK.
4. In the file selection screen, select the Save check box, and then click OK.

96 PC Programming Manual
 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise

6.8 Tool—Screen Customise

Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator)
account level.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the
User (Administrator) account level.

To modify displayed screens

1. Click the access level to modify.
2. Select the items that you want to have displayed.
• Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
• Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 97
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup

6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup

The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a
USB memory device connected to the PBX or a NAS.
a. System Prompts
– Installed Prompts
– Custom Service Menu
– Company Name
– Company Greetings
– System Mailbox Group Voice Label
– System Caller Name
– Prompt Selection
– Hold Announce Menu
b. Mailbox Prompts
– Owner Name
– Personal Greetings
– Personal Caller ID Name
– Interview
– Personal Group List Name
– EMD List Member Name
c. Mailbox Messages

Note
Mailbox data may not be backed up if the mailbox is in use during the backup process. Additionally,
Unified Messaging system response time may be affected when backing up data. For these reasons, we
recommend backing up data when the Unified Messaging system is not in use.
Use only the ASCII character set for directory/file names.
The UM Data Backup tool can be executed manually or scheduled to run automatically at regular intervals.
Refer to the following:
• 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup
• 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup

Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can
be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup.
1. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes
of the items you want to back up.
2. To back up mailbox prompts, select the check box next to Mailbox Prompts and select which prompts
to back up.
3. To back up the prompts for specific mailboxes, click Mailbox Prompts to open the mailbox list. Check
the top checkbox to select all mailboxes, or select the mailboxes for which you wish to back up
prompts, then click OK.

98 PC Programming Manual
 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

4. To back up mailbox messages, check the box next to Mailbox Messages button and click Mailbox
Messages to open the mailbox list. Select the top check box to select all mailboxes, or select the
mailboxes you wish to back up, and then click OK.
5. Select the destination for the backed up data:
• Local PC: After the backup is started, a file download will begin in your web browser. Specify a
location on your local PC to save the backup data.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit): Back up the data to a USB memory device connected to the Master
Unit PBX. When USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) is selected, a folder selection menu becomes active.
Specify a folder on the USB memory device for saving the backup data.

Note
Before selecting this option, make sure that a USB memory device is connected to the Master
Unit PBX.
• NAS: Back up the data to a NAS. When NAS is selected, a folder selection menu becomes active.
Specify a folder on the NAS for saving the backup data.
6. Click OK to start the backup.

Note
• The system will prepare the data to be backed up, and the backup will begin about 30 seconds later.
The time needed to backup the data will vary depending on the communication speed and the
amount of data that is being backed up.
• Deleted messages will not be backed up when backing up Mailbox Messages.
• To back up the Unified Messaging data of a Slave unit in a One-look network, log in to the Slave unit
and perform the backup operation from the Slave unit.
• When Local PC is selected, individual messages that are larger than 100 MB cannot be backed up.
• Depending on your browser or your browser’s settings, a prompt may appear during the backup for
each file to be downloaded. Be sure to select an action for each prompt that appears.

6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the
selected data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (Scheduled
backups cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM
Data Backup.
Follow the procedure below to schedule an automatic backup.
1. Click to create a new scheduled backup.
2. Enter a description for the backup.
3. Set the frequency (daily, weekly, etc.) and time of day when the backup should take place.
4. Check the desired item(s) to backup.
5. Click Edit next to Mailbox Prompts.
6. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Edit next to Mailbox Messages.
9. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup. You can also specify the
following backup conditions:

PC Programming Manual 99
6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

• Retention Days: Back up only messages that have been stored on the system for at least the
number of days specified.
• Remaining mailbox Capacity (min): Only perform a backup if the remaining mailbox capacity has
reached the specified amount.
• Delete After Backup: Specify to delete messages that have been backed up from the mailbox.
• Message Type: Specify to back up all messages, or only messages marked as "old".

Note
An invalid combination of these settings may prevent a backup from occurring. For example, if a
mailbox is full, but there are no messages older than the number of days specified in Retention
Days, or no messages are marked as "old", the backup will not be performed.
10. In System Backup, select USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) or NAS, and then specify the folder on the
selected device where you want to save the system backup file.
11. Click OK.
12. In Status, select Enable and click OK.

Note
• Up to 20 backup events can be scheduled.
• If a backup is scheduled, but a USB memory device is not connected to the PBX at the time of the
scheduled backup, the backup will not be performed.
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.
Editing a scheduled backup
1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to edit.
2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the settings as desired.
4. Click OK.

Deleting a scheduled backup

1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.
4. Click OK.

100 PC Programming Manual

 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore
data from a USB memory device connected to the PBX or from a file on your local PC.
1. Select the check boxes of the items to restore.
2. In System Restore, select Local PC or USB Flash Drive (Main Unit).
• Local PC
Click Browse and select a backup file from your local PC. The file must have been saved using the
UM Data Backup tool.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit)
When USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) is selected, the folder selection menu becomes active. Specify
the folder on the USB memory device where the backup data is saved.
• NAS
When NAS is selected, the folder selection menu becomes active. Specify the folder on the NAS
where the backup data is saved.

Note
Before selecting USB Flash Drive (Main Unit), make sure that the USB memory device with the
backup data is connected to the Master unit PBX.
To restore a single file:
Files that match the selected types of items to restore will be highlighted.
Click a file in the list to display its name in the text box. You can also click a folder name to display that
folder’s contents, and then click a file to select it.
To restore multiple files at once:
Folders whose contents match the selected types of items to restore will be highlighted.
Click a folder in the list to display its name in the text box. You can also click a folder name to display
that folder’s contents, and then click a folder to select it.

Note
When restoring data from a local PC, up to 40 files can be selected at one time. When there are a
large number of files to restore, they should be restored from the folder on the USB memory
device.
3. Click OK to restore the selected file or folder of files.
• Local PC
The results of the data restore will be downloaded from the PBX as a text file called
"UM_data_restore_result.txt". Save the file to your local PC to view its contents.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit)
The results of the data restore will be saved in a text file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt" on the
USB memory device. To view this file, you must connect the USB memory device to a PC and then
open the text file.
• NAS
The results of the data restore will be saved in a text file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt" on the
NAS. To view this file, you must connect to the NAS and copy to a PC and then open the text file.

PC Programming Manual 101

6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

Note
• When restoring multiple items, only files that match the items for which check boxes have been
selected will be restored. Also, even if data exists in the specified folder of the USB memory device,
the data will not be restored unless the check box of the matching item has been selected.
• Data in sub-folders of a selected folder will not be restored.
• If more than one file matches a selected item, the newest file will be restored.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close
bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
• The backup file names stored on the USB memory device should not be changed. If the file names
are changed, the system may not be able to detect which backup files correspond to which UM data
items.
• A backed up message cannot be restored to the subscriber’s mailbox if the mailbox still contains a
New/Old/Deleted copy of the same message.
• Voice data recorded by users in a KX-TVM series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in
the KX-NS1000’s Unified Messaging system. For details, refer to "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance
Console—KX-TVM System Prompt and Mailbox Data Import" in the Installation Manual.

102 PC Programming Manual

 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen:
• Description
• Parameters
• Completion Status
• Date & Time
• Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS)
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 103

6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS

6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS

Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the currently selected site.

To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the currently selected site
1. Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view.
2. Click OK.

104 PC Programming Manual

 6.13 Tool—Contact information

6.13 Tool—Contact information

Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item,
this information will be displayed for the user’s reference.
1. Input the following information, and then click OK.
• Company Name
• Telephone Number
• Fax Number
• Address
• URL
• Email Address

PC Programming Manual 105

6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting

6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting

Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level.

Note
The following apply when programming in On-line mode only:
• To apply changes made to these settings for KX-UT series SIP phones connected to Slave unit PBXs
in a One-look network, be sure to click the icon after programming. Otherwise, there may be a
delay of 30 minutes or more before changed settings are applied.
• To set these parameters, all installed V-UTEXT32 cards must first be set to OUS. For details, see 9.1
PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Numbering Plan for UT Series Terminal

One or more number dialling plans can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones. Enter the dial plan text
string into the text box, and then click OK. A dial plan text string may also be copied and pasted into the text
box from another source.

Note
• For more information about dial plans, refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX-UT series
SIP phone.
• You can enter up to 500 characters in the dial plan text box.
• You can assign up to 20 dial plans, separating them with a "|" (vertical bar).
• You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan.
• When OK is clicked, the entered text string will be validated. If there is a validation error, a message
will be displayed.

Timer for UT Series Terminal

This timer specifies for KX-UT series SIP phones how long the system waits for another digit to be dialled
before determining that dialling has finished. This value will apply for all KX-UT series SIP phones
connected to the PBX. Specify a number of seconds in Extension Inter-digit (s), and then click OK.
If the value for the timer is changed, the new value will be applied to each KX-UT series SIP phone after it is
restarted.

106 PC Programming Manual

 6.15 Tool—URL Information

6.15 Tool—URL Information

The URL addresses for downloading the IMAP tool and the Fax Driver can be specified on this screen.
These URL addresses will be used for the Unified Messaging Plug in and Fax Driver Tool download
buttons displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu. For
details, see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.

Specify valid URL addresses for Unified Messaging Plug in and/or Fax Driver Tool, and then click OK.

PC Programming Manual 107

6.15 Tool—URL Information

108 PC Programming Manual

 Section 7
Utility

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 109

7.1 Utility—Diagnosis

7.1 Utility—Diagnosis
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis
Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems.
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are
to be used again.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary
according to the type of card being tested.

The tests that are performed on each card are listed below.

Note
Tests marked with a "*" are available only for cards installed on a legacy gateway. For details, see
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2. For more
information about cards installed in legacy gateways, refer to the documentation of the legacy gateway
PBX.

Test Type Available Cards

Local loop back diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs:
SLC2, LCOT2, BRI4, PRI
Legacy Gateways:
DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16,
CSLC16, MCSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, CSIF, LCOT8,
LCOT16, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI2, BRI4, BRI8, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID
Card CT Bus diagnosis* DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16,
ECSLC24, CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID
DTMF Receive test port KX-NS1000 PBXs:
SLC2
Legacy Gateways:
DHLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, MCSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16,
CSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, E&M, DID
PT loop back diagnosis* DHLC, DLC
DSP DTMF generator/receiver T1, E1
diagnosis*
DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis* T1, E1
Framer IC alarm signal detection T1, E1, PRI
diagnosis*
Framer IC error detection diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs:
PRI
Legacy Gateways:
T1, E1, PRI
CS-INF loop back diagnosis* CSIF

110 PC Programming Manual

 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis

Test Type Available Cards

Super frame synchronization CSIF
diagnosis*
Caller ID card loop back diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs:
LCOT2
Legacy Gateways:
LCOT, ELCOT
Extension mode setting test BRI

To perform a card test

1. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
2. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
3. Select the Card Test option, and then click Execute.
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on
the last line of the output.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Specify a save destination and file name.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.

Note
To run consecutive card tests on the BRI4 card, you must change the card’s status to INS, then OUS
again after running each test.

Network Loopback Test

Performs a remote loopback test on the PRI23 card.

Note
To perform this test, it is necessary to set Loopback Test started by Network in 9.28 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting to "Enable".

To perform a network loopback test

1. Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform.
The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card.
2. Click Apply.
Preparation for the test is complete. The test will start automatically.
3. After the test is complete, select Release and click Apply.
4. Click Cancel to return to the Test Menu screen.

Pair Port Test

Tests the combination of an extension port and trunk port to ensure that communication with the trunk port
can be carried out successfully. Only cards installed in legacy gateway KX-TDE/KX-TDA PBXs can be
tested.

PC Programming Manual 111

7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis

The pair port test can be carried out using one LCOT or ELCOT card and one DHLC8, SLC8, SLC16,
MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, or ECSLC24 card.

Note
• Cards installed in KX-NS1000 PBXs and legacy gateway KX-NCP PBXs cannot be tested using this
utility.
• The cards to be used for testing must be installed in the same legacy gateway PBX.

The tests that are performed are as follows:

Line current OFF (Ext->CO) Line current from extension to trunk turns off.
Line current ON (Ext->CO) Line current from extension to trunk turns on.
Off hook detection (CO->Ext) Off-hook generation/detection from trunk to extension
DTMF detection (CO->Ext) DTMF generation/detection from trunk to extension
DP detection (CO->Ext) DP generation/detection from trunk to extension
BELL detection (Ext->CO) BELL generation/detection from extension to trunk
Speech path (Ext->CO) Speech path from extension to trunk
Speech path (CO->Ext) Speech path from trunk to extension

To perform a pair port test

1. Click on the Status cell of the extension card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
2. Click Test.
A new window will be displayed.
3. Select the Pair Port Test option. A new window will be displayed.
4. In Extension Line, in the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the extension card to test. Each
card will be preceded by a 3-digit number, following the pattern "XYZ":
• X: Site number (1–16)
• Y: Shelf number (2–3 [Corresponding to Legacy Gateway 1 or 2])
• Z: Slot number (1–11)
5. From the Port No. drop-down list in Extension Line, select the port number of the extension to test.
6. In CO Line, in the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the trunk card to test. Each card will be
preceded by a 3-digit number, following the pattern "XYZ" as described in step 4.
7. From the Port No. drop-down list in CO Line, select the port number of the trunk to test.
8. Click Test.
The error report will be displayed.
9. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
a. Specify the save destination and file name.
b. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.

112 PC Programming Manual

 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping
Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address
across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To perform a Ping test

1. Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
2. Click Test to perform the test.
The result will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Ping screen.

PC Programming Manual 113

7.2 Utility—File

7.2 Utility—File
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX
Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX.
Pre-existing files on the Storage Memory Card are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To install new main system data that has been copied to the PBX, use the System Reset utility (see
5.4 System Control—System Reset) for DCSYS files.

The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains
supported data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred.
Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.

The names of all files that can be stored on the Storage Memory Card are as follows:

System Data
Name on Storage Memory Card Corresponding Card
DCSYS Mother Board
DCSYS_R Mother Board*1

*1 DCSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DCSYS_R".

To transfer files to the Storage Memory Card

1. The dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select the file to upload, and click OK.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the Storage Memory Card, the PBX automatically renames them according to
the header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3. Click OK.

7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC

Copies system data files from the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

The files that can be downloaded from the Storage Memory Card are as follows:
File Name File Type
DCSYS System data
$SYSERR Error data
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
UT_ACS KX-UT series SIP phone configuration
data

• Downloading the DCSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the configuration of the PBX.

114 PC Programming Manual

 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View

• The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error
causes a system reset. They can be analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem. If there
is only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files will be
numbered in chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.
• KX-UT series SIP phone configuration data can be transferred to a PC, and then imported using the
phone’s Web user interface. For details, refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX-UT series SIP
phone.

To transfer files to the PC

1. Select the file to download from the list of files on the Storage Memory Card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error
message to be displayed.
2. Click Transfer.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
4. Enter a file name.
5. Click Save.
• A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
• A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
6. Click OK.

7.2.3 Utility—File—File View

Displays a list of files on the Storage Memory Card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.
This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the Storage Memory Card.
The effective date, PCMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of
activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.

To view information of programme and activation key files stored in the Storage
Memory Card
1. Click on the name of the desired programme or activation key file.
2. Click Detail. The Detail screen will be displayed. You can select different files from the File drop-down
menu to view the details for each file.
3. Activation key files can be deleted on the Detail screen. Follow the procedure below.
a. Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
b. Click OK.

Note
The maximum number of files is 99. Therefore, we recommend deleting activation key files that have
expired.

7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete

Allows you to delete files from the Storage Memory Card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 115

7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

The DCSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility.

Note
Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update
is currently being performed. For details, see 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update
Program File.

To delete files from the Storage Memory Card

1. Click on the file to be deleted.
2. Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
3. Click OK.
The display will return to the File Delete screen.

7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the Storage Memory Card.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.
Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If the location specified already contains an OGM, it
will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.

To transfer OGMs to the Storage Memory Card

1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2. Select the destination to transfer the OGM files to from the drop-down list, and then click Browse.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Select the message files to upload. The files must be in the WAV format.
It is possible to select multiple files.

Note
• When selecting files to copy to the PBX, the file names (apart from the file extension) cannot be
more than 33 characters in length.
• When selecting G.711 codec WAV files to copy to the PBX, the total file size of all selected files
combined cannot exceed 32 megabytes.
4. Click OK.
• The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
• An index number (01 to 64) will be appended automatically to the file names of message files
transferred to the PBX.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the Storage Memory Card to the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To transfer OGMs to the PC

1. From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
• To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
• To transfer all messages at once, select "ALL".
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.

116 PC Programming Manual

 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

2. Enter a file name.

3. Click Save.
4. Click OK.
• When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a
number appended to the file name corresponding to that message’s location on the Storage Memory
Card.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 117

7.3 Utility—Log

7.3 Utility—Log
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
Collects and displays system error information.
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all
of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:

Button Function
Cancel Closes the Error Log screen without saving.
Save Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Minor Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system operation.
Major Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system, or result in
system failure.
Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the PBX.
Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.

The items displayed on screen are as follows:

Item Description
Date The date of the error detection.
Time The time of the error detection.
Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX. For details about the error code,
refer to the "Log Information" item in this table.
Sub Code SMDR:
The 8-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (BBWXYYZZ).
Web Maintenance Console:
The 6-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (WXYYZZ). (The site number
of the PBX can be confirmed in the Site column of the Error Log.)
For information about the digits of the Sub Code, refer to table "Sub Code
Details" below.
Error Message A description of the error.
Log Information Clicking this button displays a list of errors and solutions in PDF format, as
shown below.

[Sample] List of Errors and Solutions

For each error code, the error message, probable cause, and solutions are explained.

118 PC Programming Manual

 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

Sub Code Details

Sub Code Description
BB Site ID
00–15
• Corresponds to site numbers of PBXs in the One-look network (1 to 16)
W Slot Type
For physical slots (including physical slots of legacy gateway PBXs)
– " " (blank)
For KX-NS1000 virtual slots
– "*" (asterisk)
X Shelf Number
• – KX-NS1000 unit: 1
– Legacy gateway: 2–3
– Non-PBX process: 5
– Convert process: 6

PC Programming Manual 119

7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog

Sub Code Description

YY Slot Number
When X is not 4 or 5
Physical shelf
Mother board slot: 00
Regular slots: 01–05
Legacy gateway
STACK-S card: 00
Optional physical service card slots:
– KX-TDE600/KX-TDA600: 01–10
– KX-TDE620/KX-TDA620: 01–11
– KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-NS1020: 01–07
(Slots 04 and 07 are disregarded for KX-NCP500 PBXs)
Virtual shelf
Virtual Trunk slots: 1–16
Virtual Extension slots: 17–36
Virtual IP-CS slots: 37–52

When X is 4
YY: Convert code

When X is 5
YY: Process code
ZZ Port Number
When X is not 4 or 5
ZZ: Optional service card port number (01–XX)

When X is 4
ZZ: Convert code

When X is 5
ZZ: Process number (determined by each process)

Note
• When there is no parameter for slot and port number, YY and ZZ will be displayed as "00".
Example: Sub code for the mother board = "01 10000"
• For more information about Self Numbers and Slot Numbers for KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700
PBXs, refer to the PC Programming manual for each PBX.

7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information:
• Type: Describes the type of system event.
• Date: The date and time the system event occurred.
• Message: Details about the system event.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

120 PC Programming Manual

 7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log

7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log

The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The items displayed on screen are as follows:
Item Description
Date The date of the event.
Time The time of the event.
User The account name of the user accessing Web Maintenance
Console.
Description A description of the action taken by the user. (i.e. "Login to Web-
MC")
IP Address The IP address of the PC used to access Web Maintenance
Console.

To save the event log as a text file

1. From the Web-MC Event Log screen, select Save.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click Save.

To clear the event log

1. From the Web-MC Event Log screen, select Clear.

Note
Users logged in to a Master unit can see all events. Users logged in to a Slave unit can only view the
events for that unit.

7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log

You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click OK to export a UM System Log file.
2. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
3. Click OK.

7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log

Collects and displays Logical Partitioning Call Control Log information.
To show the setting change information for the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Condition button.
To show the call restriction status of the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Status button.

Condition
Item Description
Date The date on which the setting change of the logical partitioning
feature occurred.

PC Programming Manual 121

7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log

Item Description
Time The time at which the setting change of the logical partitioning
feature occurred.
Information "Logical Partition" is displayed.
Status The new setting status of the following settings is displayed.
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property
—Main—Main—Area ID for logical partition
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option
2—Applying logical partitioning

Status
Item Description
Date The date on which the call restriction event from the logical
partitioning feature occurred.
Time The time at which the call restriction event from the logical
partitioning feature occurred.
Function The call restriction types are as follows:
– CO call
– CO-CO call
– Conference call
Information The restricted extension number and/or trunk number is displayed.
If the restriction is between sites in a One-Look network, an
asterisk "*" is shown directly before the trunk or extension number
(e.g. EXTN100-*T256).
Status "Restricted (Logical Partitioning)" is displayed.

122 PC Programming Manual

 7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace

7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI or PRI cards, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target BRI or PRI card
be set to INS status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN cards, and 3 types of data can be downloaded:
• Real Time Trace: Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second intervals. The
displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked.
• Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
• Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace
shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.

To view trace data

1. From the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the
pattern "X-Y-Z" as follows:
• X: Site number (1–16)
• Y: Shelf number (1–3)
– 1: KX-NS1000 physical shelf
– 2: Legacy Gateway 1
– 3: Legacy Gateway 2
• Z: Slot number (1–11)
2. From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
3. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
• Click Clear to clear the screen display.
5. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace

This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card
be set to INS status.

To save trace data to the Storage Memory Card

1. From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to
the Storage Memory Card (file name: "PRTH323").

To transfer trace data to the PC

1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual 123

7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace

The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW16 card and saved to a PC using the
V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace.
This option requires that the target V-SIPGW16 card be set to INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to trace and file V-SIPGW16 card protocol activity:

To save trace data to the Storage Memory Card

1. From the tree menu, select V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to the
Storage Memory Card (file name: "PRTSIPC").

To transfer trace data to the PC

1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync

Group
This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with air synchronisation. CSs receive data from
other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs
that are in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

The displayed items for the Current Sync CS of each CS are as follows:

124 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group

Item Description
CS Type Type of CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Shelf The shelf number (or Virtual for IP-CSs) of the CS that each CS is
currently synchronised with.
Slot Slot number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Port Port number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS / Repeater Indicates whether the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with is a
CS or Repeater.
CS Name Name of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS ID 12-digit ID number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Monitored Value Monitored value (dBm) of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised
with.
Monitored Level Monitored level (signal strength level) of the CS that each CS is currently
synchronised with.
Error Rate Error Rate (%) of the CS for each CS that it is currently synchronised
with.

To monitor the status of CSs

1. From the Air Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list, select the desired Air Synchronisation
Group number.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start to monitor the status of air synchronisation.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the specified interval.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
5. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. To collect the monitored data, click Start Capture.
7. Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data.
A dialogue box will be displayed.
8. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
9. Enter a file name.
10. Click Save.
The dialogue box will close.

7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync

Group
This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with LAN synchronisation (KX-NS0154 only). CSs
receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Information is displayed for IP-CSs
that are in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

The displayed items for each CS are as follows:

PC Programming Manual 125

7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group

Item Description
Index A unique index for the CS. (This depends on the number of V-IPCS4
cards and the number of connected CSs.)
Site The site to which the CS is connected.
Shelf Always displays "Virtual".
Slot The slot number of the CS in the selected synchronisation group.
Port The port number of the CS.
Connection The connection status of the CS (OUS/INS/Fault).
LAN Sync Status The current synchronisation status of the CS, as follows:
1. No Sync.: Attempting to establish synchronisation
2. Establishing Sync.: Establishing synchronisation
3. Good: Currently synchronised
4. Keep Sync.: Maintaining synchronisation
5. Unstable: The CS is running unsynchronised
6. Sync. Lost: Synchronisation has been lost
7. Out of system: Cannot communicate with the PBX
8. Sync. Master: CS is the sync master or is a slave acting as the sync
master
LAN Sync Quality Level Shows the quality of the synchronisation, depending on the value of LAN
Sync Status, as follows:
• 1, 7, 8: "–" is displayed.
• 6: The quality of the synchronisation before synchronisation was lost is
displayed.
• Other: A number indicating the quality of the synchronisation (-16384–
16384 ns).

To monitor the status of CSs

1. From the LAN Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list, select the desired LAN
Synchronisation Group number.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start to monitor the status of LAN synchronisation.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the specified interval.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
5. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. To collect the monitored data, click Start Capture.
7. Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data.
A dialogue box will be displayed.
8. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
9. Enter a file name.

126 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace

10. Click Save.

The dialogue box will close.

7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace

This screen displays trace information for faxes sent and received by the PBX’s FAX Card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following information is recorded for each fax sent or received:
• Date/Time
• Status
• Mode
• Resolution
• Speed
• Remote Capacity
• Local Capacity
To save a copy of the recorded information, click Save Trace and follow the prompts.

7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace

This screen displays a log of events related to fax activity.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
To save a copy of the log, click Save Trace and follow the prompts.

7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)

Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports:
• DTMF / Dial: data regarding DTMF signals received by the Unified Messaging system.
• Guidance: guidance data that the Unified Messaging system played.
• Message: Unified Messaging system activity for messages such as creating, playing and deleting.
• Process Event: events occurred between Unified Messaging system processes such as Application, Call
Processor and DSP.
• Caller ID: received Caller ID information.
• DID: received DID numbers.
• PIN: PINs received by the Unified Messaging system.
Follow the steps below to monitor or log the system trace data.
1. Select Internal Trace, Display, or Trace Clear.
– Setting
1. Check Enable / Disable Trace Data.
2. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
3. Click OK.
– Display: Displays the trace data and/or error data.
1. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
2. To include error data, click the Error Trace tab and check Error Data.

PC Programming Manual 127

7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor

3. Click OK.
4. The selected data will be displayed in a new window. Click the Trace Data or Error Trace tabs
to switch views. Click Save Log File to save a copy of the displayed data.
5. Click Cancel when finished.
– Trace Clear: Clears saved trace data.
1. Select the trace data to clear.
2. Click OK to clear the selected trace data.
3. The message "System Trace Clear Successful" will be displayed. Click OK to continue.

7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor

Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of a T1 or E1 card that is installed in a legacy
gateway by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
For information about legacy gateways, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
This option is only available at the Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.
While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa will
be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.

To view signalling bit information

1. From the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the
pattern "X-Y-Z" as follows:
• X: Site number (1–16)
• Y: Shelf number (2–3 [Corresponding to Legacy Gateway 1 or 2])
• Z: Slot number (1–11)
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.

7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace

Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 or E1 line
of a card installed in a legacy gateway. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
For information about legacy gateways, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.

To view trace data

1. From the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the
pattern "X-Y-Z" as follows:
• X: Site number (1–16)
• Y: Shelf number (2–3 [Corresponding to Legacy Gateway 1 or 2])
• Z: Slot number (1–11)
2. From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel.

128 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace

3. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data being
monitored changes.
4. Click Stop to end the trace.
5. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
Information will be saved to the PC as a text-format file.
• Click Clear to erase the information.

PC Programming Manual 129

7.5 Utility—Report

7.5 Utility—Report
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report
Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time
period selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment
being used, and the distance from the telephone company.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Time Time of error
Slot Relevant slot and card type
Counter of Digital Out of SYNC (#300) Digital trunk out of sync (Loss of Signal)
Trunk Error Logs
RAI (#301) Digital trunk RAI signal reception
logged in "Minor Error"
Log AIS (#302) Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal
reception
Frame Failure (#300) Digital trunk frame failure (Loss of Frame)
Counter of minor CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error
communication error
SF Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing
Error)
FE Frame synchronisation bit-error
LV Line Code Violation
SL Controlled slip

To view digital trunk information

1. From the Slot drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
• To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".
2. From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
3. Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.

7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), V-IPEXT32 cards,
V-IPCS4 cards, and the DSP card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

130 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Item Description
Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset.
Port No. Number of the port.
RTP Receive Packet Counter Total number of packets received.
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter Total number of packets lost.
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter Total number of packets abandoned.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms] Maximum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms] Minimum time taken for a packet to
arrive.

To view IP extension information

1. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number for the card.
2. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
4. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports
can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To view a report
1. In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parametersdrop-down list.
2. Specify a range of mailbox numbers in the From and To boxes, or click Select all mailboxes.
3. Click View Report.
Some reports can be viewed as a table or as a graph. For these reports, select "Table" or "Graph"
under View As before clicking View Report.

To export a report
A report can be printed from Web Maintenance Console or exported as a text file or CSV file.
1. When viewing a report, select Print Out (PC), Text, or Comma-separated values (CSV) from the
drop-down menu.
2. Click Export.
3. If you select Print Out (PC):
A print command is sent to the PC. Follow any prompts to print the report.
If you select Text or Comma-separated values (CSV):
A file save dialogue is displayed. Specify the folder to export the report file to.

PC Programming Manual 131

7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

To clear a report
For each report, all data can be cleared. Follow the steps below to clear all report data. Some reports can
also be set to automatically clear at specified times.
1. Select the Report Data Clear (Manual) tab.
2. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
3. Click Report Data Clear.

To automatically clear report data:

1. Select the Report Data Clear (Scheduled) tab.
2. Select Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly, and specify the time, the day of week or day of month, and
the month, as necessary.
3. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
4. Click OK.

Note
For scheduling the Automatic Report Data Clear, if a day is specified that does not exist (i.e., February
31), the Automatic Report Data Clear will not be performed.

Unified Messaging System Reports

Report Type Description
Mailbox Information Report The mailbox information report displays configuration
parameters (from owner’s extension to e-mail options) for a
specified mailbox or a range of mailboxes. 50 records are
displayed at a time for this report.
Call Account Report*1 The call account report displays information about outgoing call
activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox.
The report includes date, starting time, used port, connection
time, called telephone number, call type, exit status of each
callout, total callouts number and the connection time for local or
long distance call, and total number of outgoing calls. 400
records are displayed at a time for this report.
UM Extn. Usage Report*1 The port usage report displays information about each UM port,
such as connection time and percentage of time which each UM
port was busy.
Memory Card Usage Report*1 The memory usage report indicates the amount of storage
space used and the amount of available space. Available space
is expressed in minutes. Information for the number of
messages stored in and deleted from the Unified Messaging
system is displayed.

132 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report

Report Type Description

Mailbox Usage Report*1 The mailbox usage report displays information for a specified
mailbox or range of mailboxes, including the number of recorded
messages, the total time of outgoing calls, external messages,
message notification, group message delivery, and number of
faxes received.
• Specify the mailboxes for which you want to display a report,
then click View Report.
• Items not marked as "current" are accumulated indications
since the last clearing of this report.
100 records are displayed at a time for this report.
Fax Transfer Report*1 The fax transfer report displays information about faxes received
by the Unified Messaging system and transferred to a fax
extension. It includes the fax reception date, the port number
used, and the fax transfer status for a maximum of 64 fax
messages.
Fax Server Report The fax server report displays the log of all sent and received
faxes. The report includes the user name or mailbox number
that sent or received the fax, number of pages of the fax
document, and the result of the fax transmission or reception.
Images of sent and received faxes can also be displayed.
Call Handling Statistic Report*1 The call handling statistic report displays both a summary of and
details of Unified Messaging activity over a specified period of
time for the Automated Attendant service. This report includes
the total number of incoming calls, transferred calls, held calls,
calls which left a message, the result of transferred calls, etc.
Custom Service Report*1 The Custom Service report displays information such as Custom
Service settings, message recording status, number of access,
time of access, and number of access to each key.
Message Status Report The message status report provides the status of all messages
of specified subscribers, including faxes.
Subscriber Setup Report The subscriber setup report displays the basic settings (owner’s
name, password, personal greeting, etc.) for a specified mailbox
or range of mailboxes.
Security Information Report The security information report displays information about
mailbox accesses. The report includes the date of the last
change and last access, number of total accesses, login, and
failed accesses.
Hourly Statistics Report*1 The hourly statistics report displays information about the
number of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per
hour, etc.

*1 This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings.

7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report

A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail
Report.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 133

7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent:
• User name under which the message was sent
• Unified Messaging mailbox number
• Time sent
• Destination e-mail address
• Sending status of the e-mail message

The maximum number of entries included in the report is as follows, depending on the type of the message:
• Voice mail or fax message notifications: 5,000 entries
• Missed call notifications: 1,000 entries
• Other e-mail messages (system messages, etc.): 1,000 entries

Note
Messages sent by the PBX, such as system alerts, will list the user as "System" and the mailbox
number as "—".

If these maximum amounts are exceeded, older records beyond the maximum amount for each type will be
deleted as new entries are recorded. To delete all e-mail report records, click Delete all E-mail report.

Exporting the E-mail Report

1. Select an export format from the drop-down list.
2. Click Export.
3. A download dialogue for the e-mail report will be displayed. Open the file to view it, or save the file to the
PC.

7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical
Information
Displays accumulated statistical information on the usage of wireless channels and air synchronisation of
IP-CSs.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Date The date the information was acquired.
Time The time the information was acquired. Statistics are collected
every hour.
Available Channel (Max / Min / Maximum, minimum, and average number of available channels
Average) for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Location Registration The number of successful, failed, and total location registrations
(OK / NG / Total) for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Outgoing Call (OK / The number of successful, failed, and total number of outgoing
NG / Total) calls made by the CS for the previous 1 hour.

134 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Item Description
Number of Incoming Call (OK / The number of successful, failed, and total number of incoming
NG / Total) calls received by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Number of etc. (OK / NG / Total) The number of successful, failed, and total number of other
transactions made by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Change*1 The number of times the CS has changed its air synchronisation
destination in the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Self Running*1 The number of times the CS has switched to self-running mode
in the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Lost*1 The number of times the CS has lost synchronisation in the
previous 1 hour.

*1 A dash is displayed if the selected CS is synchronised using LAN synchronisation.

To view IP-CS statistical information

1. In the Target IP-CS: CS Name drop-down list, select the CS whose statistics you want to view. Only
CSs that support this feature are displayed in the drop-down list.
The selected CS’s CSID is displayed in CSID, and the statistics for the selected CS are displayed.
2. To refresh the display with the latest statistics, click Refresh.

Note
You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the
upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call
Disconnect Log.

7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on the performance of CSs being synchronised using LAN
synchronisation. On this screen, you can view the performance of wireless devices on the LAN, which is
useful for troubleshooting and determining whether the number of channels needs to be increased.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Date The date the information was acquired.
Time The time the information was acquired. Statistics are collected
every hour.
IP Address The IP address of the selected CS.
Sync Change The number of times the CS has changed its synchronisation
destination in the previous 1 hour.
Sync Lost The number of times the CS has lost its synchronisation in the
previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync The number of times the CS has switched to keep sync in the
previous 1 hour.
H.O Unable The number of times handover has not been possible in the
previous 1 hour.

PC Programming Manual 135

7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Item Description
Keep Sync Ratio (%) The percentage of time the CS has been in keep sync in the
previous 1 hour.
H.O Unable Ratio (%) The percentage of time the CS has been unable to do handover
in the previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync Time The length of time in minutes the CS has been in keep sync.
H.O Unable Time The length of time in minutes the CS has been unable to do
handover.
Short Term Diag The short term (within the previous 1 hour) diagnosis for LAN
synchronisation.
• Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined.
• Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be
determined because the IGMP querier could not be found.
• Under Diagnosis: Diagnosis is being performed.
• OK: Synchronisation is OK.
• Not OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is susceptible to jitter.
• Not OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is susceptible to
delay.
• Conditional OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is OK, but jitter
is possible.
• Conditional OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is OK, but
delay is possible.
• Out of Sync: Synchronisation cannot be established.
• Out of Sync (10base-T): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 10Base-T connection.
• Out of Sync (100base-TX half): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 100Base-TX half-duplex connection.
• Out of Sync (IGMP Querier not found): Synchronisation
cannot be established because an IGMP querier could not be
found.

136 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Item Description
Long Term Diag The long term diagnosis for LAN synchronisation.
• Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined.
• Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be
determined because the IGMP querier could not be found.
• Under Diagnosis: Diagnosis is being performed.
• OK: Synchronisation is OK.
• Not OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is susceptible to jitter.
• Not OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is susceptible to
delay.
• Conditional OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is OK, but jitter
is possible.
• Conditional OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is OK, but
delay is possible.
• Out of Sync: Synchronisation cannot be established.
• Out of Sync (10base-T): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 10Base-T connection.
• Out of Sync (100base-TX half): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 100Base-TX half-duplex connection.
• Out of Sync (IGMP Querier not found): Synchronisation
cannot be established because an IGMP querier could not be
found.

To view LAN synchronisation information

1. In the Target IP-CS: CS Name / MAC Address drop-down list, select the CS whose statistics you want
to view. Only CSs that support this feature are displayed in the drop-down list.
The selected CS’s MAC address is displayed in the text box, and the statistics for the selected CS are
displayed. The master CS’s name and MAC address are also displayed for reference.
2. To refresh the display with the latest statistics, click Refresh.

Note
You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the
upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call
Disconnect Log.

7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log

Displays a list of PS calls that have been disconnected at the CS selected on the parent screen. This log
can be saved as a text file.
This screen can be accessed by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link on either the IP-CS Statistical
Information screen or the LAN Sync Information screen.
See 7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information and 7.5.5.2 Utility—
Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

PC Programming Manual 137

7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Item Description
Index The entry’s index.
Date The date the call was disconnected.
Time The time the call was disconnected.
Error Message The reason the call was disconnected.
• Connection Error: There was an error in the connection.
Extension Number The extension number of the PS where the call was
disconnected.
PS-ID The ID of the PS where the call was disconnected.

To save the log

1. Click Save.
The log information of CSs that support this feature is saved.
2. A download dialogue for the call disconnect report will be displayed. Open the file to view it, or save the
file to the PC.

138 PC Programming Manual

 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation

7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation

Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are
copied from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and specify the directory where the activation key files are stored, and click Open.
2. A list of activation key files stored in the specified directory is displayed. Check the boxes next to the
activation keys to install to the PBX, and click Install.
3. The activation keys will be copied to the Master unit, and then copied to the Slave units of the One-look
network. When installation is complete, the message, "The activation key has been installed and
activated successfully!" is displayed.
4. Click OK.

Note
• You can click the provided link to directly access 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
—Activation Key Status to view activation key information and programme the number of activated
IP-GW trunks and IP softphones.
• You can install an Activation Key through the Master Unit to any Slave Unit (regardless of the PBX
model of the Slave Unit).

PC Programming Manual 139

7.7 Utility—Email Notification

7.7 Utility—Email Notification

7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status.

System Alarm
An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message
will contain details about the alarm.
1. For Filtering Setting, select the check boxes to specify whether to receive e-mails when there is a
Major alarm, a Minor alarm, or both.
2. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive system alarm alert messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when there is a system alarm, or information regarding the PBX may be sent
unintentionally to a third party.
3. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
For Format—Message body type, select the check boxes to specify whether to include the subject in
the message body.
• Type1: Message body does not include the subject
• Type2: Message body includes the subject
4. Click OK when finished.
Licence Expiry
• Partner licence (product licences with an expiration date)*1
A notification e-mail will be sent to the specified addresses at midnight, 40 days before the activation key
expires. Or, if the PBX is started within 40 days of the activation key’s expiration, a notification e-mail will
be sent at that time to the specified addresses. Only 1 notification will be sent.
• Non-product licences with an expiration date
A notification e-mail will be sent to the specified addresses at midnight, 10 days before the activation key
expires if the PBX is turned on. If the PBX is started within 10 days of the activation key’s expiration, a
notification e-mail will be sent each time the PBX is started.
*1 For the following activation keys, the e-mail will be sent 40 days before the activation key expires.

– Poltys CCAccounting A.L.

– Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise A.L.

– Poltys CCView A.L.

– Poltys CCView add. PBX A.L.

– Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L. (1 user)

– Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L. (5 users)

– Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L. (1 user)

– Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L. (5 users)

– Poltys Number notice A.L.

– Poltys CCAgent A.L. (1 user)

– Poltys CCAgent A.L. (5 users)

140 PC Programming Manual

 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (4 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (8 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (12 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (16 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (24 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (8 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (16 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (24 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (1 port)

– Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (2 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L. (4 ports)

1. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive expiry notice messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when activation keys are about to expire, or information regarding the PBX may be sent
unintentionally to a third party.
2. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
For Format—Message body type, select the check boxes to specify whether to include the subject in
the message body.
• Type1: Message body does not include the subject
• Type2: Message body includes the subject
3. Click OK when finished.

7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis

Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address.
2. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
3. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
4. Click Execute and the mail will be sent at that time.

7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email

Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
3. Click Execute. A test mail will be sent to the specified address(es).
Mail settings can be viewed and set in 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP.

PC Programming Manual 141

7.8 Utility—Command

7.8 Utility—Command
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command
System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue:
1. Enter the desired command, then click RUN. Results from entered commands are displayed.
2. When finished, click Close.

7.8.2 Utility—Command—Router Command

Router commands can be sent directly to the built-in router using the Commands dialogue.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue:
1. Enter the desired command, then click RUN. Results from entered commands are displayed.
2. When finished, click Close.

Note
• Some examples of supported commands are as follows: ROUTE, NETSTAT, ARP, DNSFLUSH.

142 PC Programming Manual

 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The
programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following categories of system prompts can be customised from the System Prompts customisation
screen:
a. System Guidance
b. Custom Service Menus
c. Company Greetings
d. Other
– Company Name
– Language Select Menu
– Hold Announce Menu
– Mailbox Group List
– System Caller ID
To customise system prompts, select a tab in the System Prompts dialogue box.

Notice
The system prompts initially installed on the Storage Memory Card cannot be restored to their original
state by initialising or resetting the PBX; any changes made to the initially installed system prompts
cannot be undone. Before changing any system prompts, perform a backup of the initial system prompt
data. See 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup for details. Then, you can restore the system prompts to their
initial state by restoring the backup data. See 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore for details.

Deleting Prompts
The programmer is able to delete specified system prompts.
To delete a specific system prompt:
1. Select the cell for the desired prompt number.
2. Click Delete.

Recording System Prompts

1. Select the desired system prompt to record, and click Play/Record.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click Browse.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:

PC Programming Manual 143

7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

– G.711 PCM codec

– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
5. Click OK.

Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback

1. Select the desired system prompts.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.

144 PC Programming Manual

 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording

7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording

7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor
Setting
Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent
extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. Click Add/Delete.
2. Select supervisor extensions from the list, and click OK.
3. Repeat this procedure to add multiple supervisors. Click OK when finished.

7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension

Setting
Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by
a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—
Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
2. In UM Group Destination Mailbox specify the mailbox where the Automatic Two-way Recording data
will be sent. Select Add New Mailbox and specify a new mailbox number, or select an existing mailbox
from the Select Mailbox drop-down list.
3. Select a UM group from the Assign a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list to specify the UM
Group of the mailbox specified in 2.
4. In What type of calls to record, check the boxes to specify if internal calls, external calls, and/or calls
made to an incoming call distribution group will be recorded to the mailbox.
5. In Select User Extensions, click Add.
6. Select the check boxes for the agent extensions that the supervisor will control, and then click OK.
7. Click List View to confirm the current Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervised
extension.
8. Click OK when you have finished configuring settings and adding agent extensions for a supervisor.
Once these settings have been configured, supervisors can change settings for agent extensions they have
been assigned in 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording.

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension

Setting List
In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the
Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor,
UM Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension. These settings may be changed by a
programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. For an extension, select a setting for Internal Call, External Call, and ICDG Incoming Only. (See
below for details.)
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.

PC Programming Manual 145

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls from outside parties that are received through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.
3. Click OK when finished.
The programming items displayed on this screen are as follows.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number extension (reference only). (consisting of
0–9)
Extension Indicates the name of the extension Max. 20
Name (reference only). characters
Internal Call Specifies whether intercom calls for On, Off Feature Manual
the extension will be automatically References
recorded. 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager
Note
Calls between extensions that are
connected in a QSIG network are
seen as external calls,
irrespective of whether an
activation key for QSIG enhanced
features is used. To enable
Automatic Two-way Recording for
this type of call, set External Call
to On.
External Call Specifies whether trunk calls for the On, Off Feature Manual
extension are automatically recorded. References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager
ICDG Specifies whether only trunk calls On, Off Feature Manual
Incoming that are received through an References
Only incoming call distribution group to the 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
extension are automatically recorded. Recording for Manager
Note
External Call must be set to "On"
to set this item to "On".
Supervisor Indicates the extension designated Extension PC Programming Manual
as a supervisor that may play, delete, number and References
or confirm the information of two-way user name 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-
recordings (reference only). way Recording—Supervisor
Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager

146 PC Programming Manual

 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance

Name Description Value Range Links

UM Group Indicates the UM group number in Group number PC Programming Manual
No. which the two-way recording will be and group References
performed (reference only). name 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-
way Recording—Extension
Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager
Mailbox Indicates the Unified Messaging Mailbox PC Programming Manual
Number mailbox where two-way recordings number References
will be stored (reference only). 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-
way Recording—Extension
Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager

7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance

Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time
by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop.
Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs:
• The Stop button is clicked.
• The two-way recording time limit or memory capacity has been reached.
• The date and time set in Recording Period is reached.
2. To set a specific time when Automatic Two-way Recording will stop:
a. In Recording Period, select Yes for Setting.
b. In Date & Time, enter a year, month, day, hour, and minute. Click on the calendar and clock
numbers to select them.
c. Click OK.
3. To end Automatic Two-way Recording any time, click Stop.

PC Programming Manual 147

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance

Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance.

System Maintenance Mode

Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode.

System Maintenance Start Time

Specifies the System Maintenance start time.
After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.

148 PC Programming Manual

 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection

7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection

You can specify the URL of the Super Master CS for your system, which will be used for accessing online
CS-Web system programming. For details about the Super Master CS and setting up SIP-CSs, refer to the
SIP-CS Installation Guide.
1. In Super Master CS-Web URL, enter the URL of the Super Master CS.
2. Click Test to confirm if the input URL is correct. If the URL is correct, the CS-Web login screen will open
in your web browser.
3. Click OK.
When programming in other screens, clicking the SIP-CS Web button on that screen will access CS-Web
system programming at the URL specified here.

PC Programming Manual 149

7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection

150 PC Programming Manual

 Section 8
Users

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 151

8.1 Users—User Profiles

8.1 Users—User Profiles

Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added,
edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account.

Note
• For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must
use the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User
Profiles screen. For details, see 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise.
• When a User (User) level account accesses this screen, he may view and edit items for his account
as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings are
available for User (User) level accounts only. For details, see 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—
Advanced setting.
The settings that can be changed in the User Profile List for each user are as follows:

Common
Item Description
First Name Specifies the first name of the user.
Last Name Specifies the last name of the user.
User Group Specifies the user’s group.
User groups can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Ext. No. Specifies the extension number associated with this user.
Extension numbers can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Ext. COS Select a Class of Service (COS) for the user from the drop-down list.
COS settings can be set in 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of
Service.
UM Group No. Select a UM group for the user from the drop-down list.
Mailbox No. Specifies the UM mailbox number for the user.
Mailbox COS Select a mailbox COS for the user from the drop-down list. Mailbox COS
settings can be set in 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service.

FWD/DND
Item Description
First Name Specifies the first name of the user.
Last Name Specifies the last name of the user.
FWD/DND setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from trunks.
Mode

152 PC Programming Manual

 8.1 Users—User Profiles

Item Description
FWD setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD destination for calls from trunks.
Destination
FWD/DND setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from extensions.
Mode
FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions.
Destination

For settings and details for FWD/DND items, refer to the following:
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND
Option
Item Description
Rule of copy to extension name Determines how the First Name and Last Name set in User
Profiles is used for the Extension Name of the following
settings.
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings

User Controls
• Add Button
To add a user profile for a single extension, click the button to open the Add User Wizard. See
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.
• Edit Button
To edit information on an individual user level, select a user from the list by clicking on the row of the user
to edit, then clicking the button to open the Add User Wizard with the selected user’s information filled
in. See 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.
• Delete Button
To delete users:
1. Check the box(es) next to the user’s name(s) and click the button.
2. A confirmation message will appear. Click OK.
3. The user’s information is deleted from the list.
• Add Range Button
To add multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time, click the button. See 8.2.2 Users—
Add User—Multiple Users.

Note
• In order to edit the settings of the Unified Message tab by clicking the button, you must be logged
in to the PBX with the associated UM Group that your mailbox is assigned to. If you are logged in to a
PBX that is different from the PBX with the associated UM Group of your mailbox, the following items
will be greyed out:
– Prompt Registration

PC Programming Manual 153

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

– Mailbox Password
– Mailbox Password (Message Client)
– Advanced setting
If these items are greyed out, click Direct Login to log in directly to the PBX associated with the UM
Group of your mailbox to make changes to these items.
• The , , and buttons are not visible for User (User) level accounts.

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account
as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be
programmed by users.

Note
The advanced settings described here are displayed only for User (User) level accounts.

Accessing advanced user profile settings

1. Log in Web Maintenance Console using a User (User) level account.
2. In the user profile, click the Unified Message tab.
3. Click the Advanced setting button.
4. In addition to normal mailbox settings, Advanced Call Transfer Setting and Scenario Setting will be
displayed.

Advanced Call Transfer Setting

By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call Handling, you can create a call handling
"scenario" for your extension. Up to 20 scenarios can be created, and a scenario can be assigned to each
absent message. Click the Edit button in Advanced Call Transfer Setting to open the window for
programming. Select a Scenario number (1–20) from the drop-down menu, then programme the settings for
that scenario. Click OK at the bottom of the window when finished.
Name Description Value Range Links
Scenario Specify a name for the scenario for Max. 32 Characters Feature Manual
Name identification. References
3.2.2.7 Call
Transfer Scenario

154 PC Programming Manual

 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer Determines how the Unified None: Rings the Feature Manual
Status— Messaging system will handle a call subscriber’s extension. References
Selection in the selected scenario. Call blocking: Handles 3.2.2.7 Call
the call according to the Transfer Scenario
Incomplete Call Handling
for No Answer setting for
the subscriber’s
extension. The
subscriber’s extension
will not ring.
Call screening: The
caller is prompted to
record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging
system then calls the
subscriber and plays
back the caller name.
The subscriber can
choose whether to
answer the call.
Leave a Message:
Transfers the caller to the
mailbox.
Intercom Paging: Pages
the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom
Service.
Call Transfer Specifies whether calls from certain Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Status—VIP telephone numbers will be References
Filter transferred directly to a specified 3.2.2.7 Call
extension or telephone number. Transfer Scenario
Note
This setting can only be set to
"Enable" when Call Transfer
Status—Selection is set to
"Leave a Message".
Call Transfer Specifies the telephone numbers Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Status— that the VIP Filter setting will be References
Telephone applied to. When a call is received 3.2.2.7 Call
Number 1, 2, from any of the numbers specified Transfer Scenario
3 here, the call will be transferred
immediately to the destination
specified in Call Transfer Status—
Transfer to (Selection/Other).

PC Programming Manual 155

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer Specifies the transfer destination for Extension: The call is Feature Manual
Status— calls transferred according to the transferred to the user’s References
Transfer to VIP Filter setting. extension. 3.2.2.7 Call
(Selection/ Other: The call is Transfer Scenario
Other) transferred to the
telephone number that is
specified in Transfer to
(Other).
Call Transfer Select a Custom Service from the Custom Service PC
Status— drop-down menu if "Transfer to Programming
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu" is Manual
specified selected for Call Transfer Status- References
Custom Selection.
23.3 UM
Service Menu
Configuration—[4-3]
Service Settings—
Custom Service
Feature Manual
References
3.2.2.7 Call
Transfer Scenario
Call Transfer If "None" or "Call screening" is Max. 32 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Status— selected for Call Transfer Status- of 0–9, , and #) References
Transfer to Selection, specifying a telephone 3.2.2.7 Call
specified number here will transfer the caller Transfer Scenario
telephone to that telephone number.
number - 1
Note
If "Call screening" is selected,
the transfer destination will hear
the call screening prompt before
the call is transferred.

156 PC Programming Manual

 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer If "None" or "Call screening" is Other, Extension, Feature Manual
Status— selected for Call Transfer Status- Covering Extension References
Transfer to Selection, and the call could not be If "Other" is specified, 3.2.2.7 Call
specified transferred to the number specified enter a maximum of 32 Transfer Scenario
telephone in Call Transfer Status-Transfer to digits consisting of 0–9,
number 2, 3, specified telephone number - 1, , and #.
4, 5 the call will be transferred according
(Selection/ to these settings for this scenario, in
Other) numerical order of priority.

Note
• This sequence has higher
priority than the alternate
extension transfer sequence
specified in 24.4 UM
Configuration—[5-4] System
Parameters—Parameters—
PBX Parameters—PBX
Environment—Alternate
Extension Transfer
Sequence (Up to 16 digits /
[0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]).
• If "Call screening" is selected,
the transfer destination will
hear the call screening prompt
before the call is transferred.
Incomplete Specifies how the scenario handles Leave a Message: Feature Manual
Call Handling a call when there is no answer. Allows the caller to record References
for No Answer a message. 3.2.2.7 Call
Note Transfer to a covering Transfer Scenario
More than one option can be extension: Transfers the
selected. caller to a covering
extension.
Page the mailbox owner
by intercom paging:
Pages the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to operator:
Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu:
Lets the caller return to
the top menu and try
another extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom
Service.

PC Programming Manual 157

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Incomplete Specifies how the scenario handles Leave a Message: Feature Manual
Call Handling a call when the destination is busy. Allows the caller to record References
for Busy a message. 3.2.2.7 Call
Note Transfer to a covering Transfer Scenario
More than one option can be extension: Transfers the
selected. caller to a covering
extension.
Page the mailbox owner
by intercom paging:
Pages the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to operator:
Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu:
Lets the caller return to
top menu and try another
extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom
Service.

Scenario Setting
You can select scenarios set in 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting for your extension. A
scenario can be set temporarily, or scenarios can be selected for use according to the Absent Message
setting of the extension of the subscriber. (→ 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message)
Temporary Scenario: Setting a scenario here will use that scenario indefinitely. A scenario set here will be
used regardless of the subscriber’s extension status. Selecting "None" will remove the setting.
Absent Message 1–9: The selected scenario will be used when the indicated Absent Message is set at the
extension.

158 PC Programming Manual

 8.2 Users—Add User

8.2 Users—Add User

8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings
on a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be
displayed with information already entered when editing an existing user.

Note
User (User) level accounts may access this screen to edit their account information, but only the items
marked with a "*".

User Information
Item Description
First Name* Specifies the first name of the user (max 20 characters).
Last Name* Specifies the last name of the user (max 20 characters).
Change Language* Select the Web Maintenance Console language displayed for the user from
the drop-down list. Users may select different display languages without
affecting the display of other users.
Site name Select a PBX site from the drop-down list for the account.
Department Specifies a department description of up to 64 characters.
Section Specifies a section description of up to 64 characters.
User Group Select a User Group from the drop-down list.
User groups can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
User Level Select a User Level from the drop-down list.
• The Installer level account may select User (User) or User (Administrator)
levels.
• User (Administrator) level accounts may only select the User (User) level.

The First Name and Last Name set on this screen are applied to system settings as follows.
• The First Name and Last Name are copied to the Extension Name for the user’s extension number in
the following settings.
A. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
B. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
The format of the extension name is determined by the setting in the User Profiles—Option tab:
– Rule-A: [First Name] [space] [Last Name]
– Rule-B: [Last Name] [,] [First Name]

Notice
If the length of the name copied to the Extension Name is longer than the maximum number of
characters allowed for the setting, the letters at the end of the name exceeding the maximum will be
discarded.

PC Programming Manual 159

8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

• The First Name and Last Name are copied to the corresponding First Name and Last Name on the
following screen for the specified mailbox number.
C. 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
• Changing the name settings in the Extension Settings or Mailbox Settings screens listed above will not
change the First Name or Last Name on this screen (the copying function is one-way).

Contact
Item Description
Extension No. Select an extension for the user from the drop-down list.
Device Displays the device type of the selected extension.
Extension PIN* Specifies the user’s extension PIN.
DDI Specifies the user’s Direct Dial In (DDI) number.
Fax* Specifies the user’s fax number.
Phone (Home)* Specifies the user’s home telephone phone number.
Phone (Mobile)* Specifies the user’s mobile telephone phone number.
Email 1–3* Specifies the user’s e-mail address(es).

The Extension PIN set on this screen is applied to system settings as follows.
• The Extension PIN is copied to the Extension PIN for the user’s extension number in the following
settings.
A. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
B. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
• If Automatic copy to Mailbox Password is checked when the Extension PIN is input, the Extension
PIN is also copied to the following settings according to the user’s designated mailbox.
– Mailbox Password in the User Profiles—Unified Message tab.
– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Mailbox
Password

Notice
If the Extension PIN to be copied has less characters than the minimum number of characters required
for the Mailbox Password, the data will not be copied and an error message is displayed. See 26.1 UM
Configuration—[7] System Security—Subscriber—Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits).
The e-mail addresses set for Email 1–3 on this screen are applied to system settings as follows.
• If Use for missed call notification is checked when the Email 1–3 information is input, the user will
receive an e-mail at the address(es) specified when a trunk call is missed.
• If Automatic copy to UM message notification is checked when the Email 1–3 information is input, the
input address(es) are copied to the following setting. This process is one-way; changes to the below
setting will not change the information input on this screen.
– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—E-mail/Text
Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address

Notice
If the Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) is not installed, or the
number of activation keys is insufficient, the e-mail address(es) will not be copied and an error message
is displayed.

160 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

Unified Message
Item Description
UM Group No. Select a UM group for the user from the drop-down list.
Mailbox Number Enter the UM mailbox for the user.
Class of Service Select a COS for the user from the drop-down list.
(COS)
Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen.
The following prompts can be recorded in this screen:
• Mailbox owner name
• Personal greetings (No Answer, Busy, After Hour, Caller ID Greeting,
Temporary Greeting and Absent Message)
• Interview mailbox questions
• Personal caller ID name
To record a prompt
Select a prompt number and click Play/Record.
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then
click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
4. Click Disconnect.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click Browse. The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
5. Click Upload.
6. Click OK.
To start and stop prompt playback
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.
4. Click OK.
To delete a specific prompt
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 161

8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

Item Description
Mailbox Password* Click to specify the password for the mailbox.

Note
If Extension PIN is input in the Contact tab, and Automatic copy to
Mailbox Password is checked, the extension PIN will be copied to this
setting and overwrite any previously input data here.
Mailbox Password Click to specify the messaging client password for the mailbox.
(Message Client)*
Note
This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified
Messaging E-mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that
will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software programme.
Advanced setting* Click to view the selected mailbox’s settings. See 20.1 UM Configuration—
[1] Mailbox Settings.

Note
When User (User) level accounts access these settings, additional items
are displayed. See 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting.
Unified Messaging Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download
Plug in site for the IMAP Session Controller software.
Fax Driver Tool Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download
site for the Fax Driver software.

Telephony Feature
Item Description
Class of Service Select the COS for the user from the drop-down list.
(COS)
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD/DND settings for trunk calls.
Disturb—For For the FWD destination, Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in
external calls* the Contact tab), or a manually input number can be specified.
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD/DND settings for extension calls.
Disturb—For internal For the FWD destination, Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in
calls* the Contact tab), or a manually input number can be specified.
Speed Dialling View/ Click this button to open the Speed Dial screen. The appropriate screen
Edit* (wired extension or portable station) will be opened according to the
extension specified for the user.
Flexible Button View/ Click this button to open the Flexible Button screen. The appropriate screen
Edit* (wired extension or portable station) will be opened according to the
extension specified for the user.

Login Account
Item Description
Login ID Set a login ID for the user. (4-16 characters in length)

Note
Login IDs must be unique for each user.

162 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users

Item Description
Password* Set a password for the user. (4-16 characters in length)
Re-enter* Re-enter the password for confirmation.

When all relevant information has been set, click OK to add or reflect changes to the user account.

Note
If the user changes any of their own settings, they will be applied to the user the next time they log into
Web Maintenance Console.

8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users

The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of
extensions at one time.
1. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for.
2. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to
create Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension
numbers.
3. If you choose to create mailboxes in step 2, select where the mailboxes will be created:
• Create mailboxes to the UM group of the PBX where extensions belong to:
The mailbox for each extension will be created in the UM group of the site (PBX) to which the
extension is assigned.

Note
When this setting is selected, mailboxes for PS extensions will be created in the UM group of the
Master unit.
• Create mailboxes to the specified UM group:
Mailboxes for the extensions will be created in the UM group that you select from the drop-down list.
4. Click OK.
Settings automatically programmed for each user
• First Name/Last Name
The Extension Name, which is the name displayed on extension LCDs, can be copied all at once to the
First Name and Last Name settings for each extension. The format for copying the Extension Name
can be selected as follows.
1. Click Setup → Users → User Profiles.
2. On the Option tab, for Rule of copy to extension name select one of the following.
– Rule-A: [First Name] [space] [Last Name]
– Rule-B: [Last Name] [,] [First Name]
For more information, refer to "5.10 Configuration of Users" in the Installation Manual.
• Login ID: The extension number (i.e., if the extension is "101", the Login ID for the user will also be
"101")
• Password: "PWD" + the extension number for the user (e.g., "PWD101")

Note
• When OK is clicked, if any extensions within the range specified in step 1 already have user accounts
associated with them, the process will not complete, and an error message will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual 163

8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users

• If the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box is selected and a
mailbox number has already been assigned to another extension, the user profile will be created
without a UM mailbox assigned to it.
• If the maximum number of digits for a mailbox number (Mailbox—Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8) in
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters) is less than the number of digits
for the specified extensions, the maximum number of digits for a mailbox number will be automatically
increased to match the number of digits for the specified extensions.
• A maximum of 500 users can be created at once using this feature.

164 PC Programming Manual

 8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording

8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording

This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording

On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for
extensions they are supervising. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM
Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension.
1. For an extension, click the setting for Internal Call, External Call, or ICDG Incoming Only.
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.

Note
To set ICDG Incoming Only to "On", External Call must first be set to "On".
3. Click OK when finished.

8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List

Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature.
1. Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list.
2. Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two-way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM
group.
3. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK.
4. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages
displayed or play a message.
To filter the list of messages:
Specify any number of the following conditions, and then click Search to display the messages that
match those conditions.
• Mailbox: Specify an Automatic Two-way Recording mailbox, or select ALL.
• Extension: Specify an extension to view all calls that were recorded using Automatic Two-way
Recording for that extension, or select ALL.
• Status: Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox.
• Internal/External: Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or trunk calls, or
specify both.
• Call Type: Specify whether the recorded conversations were incoming calls or outgoing calls, or
specify both.
– If Internal/External is set to "Internal" or "Both", Call Type will be set to "Both".
– If Internal/External is set to "External", Call Type can be set to "Incoming", "Outgoing", or "Both".
• Phone Number: Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension.

PC Programming Manual 165

8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List

• Caller Name: Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension (may not be available
for all recorded messages).
• Length: Specify the length of the recorded conversations.
• Period: Specify a time period in which calls were recorded.
To play a message:
For playback on the PC:
1. Select the check box of a message to play.
2. At the bottom of the screen, select PC.
3. Click the button.
The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to
Web Maintenance Console.
For playback using the supervisor’s designated extension:
1. In the Mailbox filter, select the mailbox whose messages you want to display, and then click
Search.
2. Select the check boxes for one or more messages to play.
3. At the bottom of the screen, select Phone.
4. Click the button.

Note
If ALL has been selected for the Mailbox filter, the button will be disabled. Select a specific
mailbox to enable the button.
5. In the window that appears, enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at
which to play back the messages, and then click Connect.
6. Go off-hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system.
7. During the call, click Play to listen to the currently selected message. If multiple messages were
selected in step b, you can click Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected
messages.
8. When you are finished listening to messages, click Disconnect or go on-hook.

166 PC Programming Manual

 8.4 Users—ICDG Management

8.4 Users—ICDG Management

This screen is accessible only by users designated as an ACD supervisor. This screen can be accessed
only in On-line mode.

8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor

Description
Users designated as an ACD supervisor can specify an ICD group to monitor, set monitoring conditions, and
begin monitoring.
Name Description Value Range Links
Supervisor Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop- Registered Feature Manual
selection down list. ACD References
This operation is available only at the User supervisors 2.2.2.10
(Administrator) level. Supervisory Feature
For details about ACD supervisor settings, (ACD)
see 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4]
Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—ACD Supervisor.
Start Monitor Click the Start Monitor button to start Feature Manual
monitoring the target ICD group. This References
feature requires the Call Centre Feature 2.2.2.10
Enhancement activation key or the Built-in Supervisory Feature
ACD report activation key. If this activation (ACD)
key is not installed, the Start Monitor
button is greyed out.
Basic Settings— Specifies the layout of monitoring results. 1 Group, 4 Feature Manual
Layout Groups References
2.2.2.10
Supervisory Feature
(ACD)
Basic Settings— Selects the ICD groups to be managed by ICD groups Feature Manual
Select ICD Group the ACD supervisor, from a drop-down list. References
2.2.2.10
Supervisory Feature
(ACD)
Options—Member Specifies the display mode of the status of Standard, Feature Manual
Status View Mode group members. Simple References
2.2.2.10
Supervisory Feature
(ACD)
Options— Specifies the threshold number of current 1–30 Feature Manual
Highlighted waiting calls. When this number is matched References
Display Settings— or exceeded, calls are highlighted on the 2.2.2.10
Number of monitor screen. Supervisory Feature
Current Waiting (ACD)
Calls (1-30)

PC Programming Manual 167

8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Options— Specifies the waiting time after which calls 0–10’00 Feature Manual
Highlighted are highlighted on the monitor screen. References
Display Settings— When this setting is set to "0", all waiting 2.2.2.10
Waiting Time calls are highlighted. Supervisory Feature
(0-10 min/10 sec) (ACD)
Options— Specifies the colour mode of highlighted Mode 1, Mode Feature Manual
Highlighted items on the monitor screen. 2, Mode 3 References
Display Settings— 2.2.2.10
Colour Mode Supervisory Feature
(ACD)
Options— Specifies whether highlighted items blink Enable, Feature Manual
Highlighted on the monitor screen. Disable References
Display Settings— 2.2.2.10
Blinking Supervisory Feature
(ACD)
Options— Select the display resolution of the monitor Disable,
Highlighted screen for full screen display. Automatic,
Display Settings— 1024 × 768,
Full Screen Note 1280 × 1024,
Display (pixels) When you select Automatic, the system 1920 × 1080
automatically recognises the specified
resolution of your PC display and
selects a full screen resolution from the
following display resolutions. If any of
these sizes do not match the specified
resolution for your PC display, select
the resolution that is smaller than and
closest to your monitor's maximum
display resolution.

8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Description
On this screen, users designated as an ACD supervisor can create ACD reports on ICD groups after filtering
according to group, agent, or call. Filtering types are separated by tabs.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Supervisor Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop-down list. Registered Feature
selection This operation is available only at the User ACD Manual
(Administrator) level. supervisors References
2.2.2.10
Supervisory
Feature (ACD)

168 PC Programming Manual

 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Report Follow the procedure below to save/load ACD report Feature
Profiles profiles. The type of ACD report (Group/Agent/Call) Manual
and filter conditions are saved in each profile. References
1. Click the Report Profiles button. 2.2.2.10
2. To load a previously saved report profile, click a Supervisory
profile to select it, and then click the Load button. Feature (ACD)

3. To save the current report profile, assign a name

in Profile Name (max. 32 characters), and then
click the Save button.
Option Follow the procedure below to set ACD report options. Feature
1. Click the Option button. Manual
References
2. In Device, Select the destination for the ACD
report data: 2.2.2.10
Supervisory
• Local PC: After the ACD report is created, a Feature (ACD)
file download will begin in your web browser.
Specify a location on your local PC to save the
ACD report data.
• NAS: Save the data to a NAS. When NAS is
selected, a folder selection menu becomes
active.
3. Select the ACD Report - Export CSV File
Format.
Value Range
Comma(,), Semicolon(;)
4. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 169

8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Group
Name Description Value Range Links
Group— To display a report according to groups, follow the Feature Manual
View Report procedure below. This feature requires the Call References
Centre Feature Enhancement activation key or the 2.2.2.10
Built-in ACD report activation key. If this activation Supervisory
key is not installed, the View Report button is Feature (ACD)
greyed out.
1. Enter the report output conditions and click the
View Report button.
2. The ACD Report - Group Report screen is
displayed. To confirm the selected groups,
click View. The list of selected groups is
displayed.
*1
3. Results for the following items are displayed.
4. Reports can be outputted in the following 3
ways.
• Graph: Click the Graph button to display
the report in graph form on the ACD Report
- Group Graph screen. Click the Print
button to print the graph.
• Export: Click the Export button to output
the report to a local PC as a file.
• Print: Click the Print button to print the
report.
5. Click the Close button to close the ACD
Report - Group Report screen.
Group— Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop- *2
Group, Hour , Feature Manual
Filter down list. Day, Date, References
Settings— Month, Trunk, 2.2.2.10
View Mode Caller ID/ Supervisory
CLIP Feature (ACD)
Group— To select the target group for creating a report, Feature Manual
Filter follow the procedure below. References
Settings—
1. Click the Select button. 2.2.2.10
Select Supervisory
Group 2. Click an ICD group from those displayed in the
Feature (ACD)
Available Group for ACD Report window to
select it. Up to 64 groups can be selected.
3. Click ==> to move the selected ICD groups to
the Selected Group for ACD Report window.
4. To remove ICD groups from the Selected
Group for ACD Report window, click a group
to select it and click <==.
5. Click OK.

170 PC Programming Manual

 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Group— Specifies the target period for the report. Yesterday, Feature Manual
Filter Last Week, References
Settings— Last Month, 2.2.2.10
Select Today, This Supervisory
Period Week, This Feature (ACD)
Month,
Custom
*3
Period

*1
Item Description

Incoming Calls

Total The number of incoming calls received by the target ICD group.

Answered The number of incoming calls answered by the target ICD group.

Lost The number of incoming calls to the target ICD group cancelled by the caller.

Overflow The number of overflowed incoming calls to the target ICD group.

Talk Time

Total The total talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS (D)) *

Average The average talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. The longest talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Wait Time

Wait Time (Answered)

Total The total waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS (D)) *

Average The average waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. The longest waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Wait Time (Lost)

Total The total waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS (D)) *

Average The average waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. The longest waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. Waiting Calls The maximum number of calls waiting in the queue of the target ICD group.

* "D" indicates the number of days (D=1–62). If the number of days is 0, (D) is not displayed.
*2 If Hour is selected, set the monitoring range for the target group (0:00–23:59).
*3 If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also.

PC Programming Manual 171

8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Agent
Name Description Value Range Links
Agent— To display a report according to agents, follow the Feature Manual
View Report procedure below. This feature requires the Call References
Centre Feature Enhancement activation key or the 2.2.2.10
Built-in ACD report activation key. If this activation Supervisory
key is not installed, the View Report button is Feature (ACD)
greyed out.
1. Enter the report output conditions and click the
View Report button.
2. The ACD Report - Agent Report screen is
displayed. To confirm the selected agents, click
View. The list of selected agents is displayed.
*1
3. Results for the following items are displayed.
4. Reports can be outputted in the following 3
ways.
• Graph: Click the Graph button to display the
report in graph form on the ACD Report -
Agent Graph screen. Click the Print button
to print the graph.
• Export: Click the Export button to output
the report to a local PC as a file.
• Print: Click the Print button to print the
report.
5. Click the Close button to close the ACD
Report - Agent Report screen.
Agent— Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop-down Agent, Feature Manual
Filter list. *2
Hour , Day, References
Settings— Date, Month 2.2.2.10
View Mode Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
Agent— To select the target agent for creating a report, Feature Manual
Filter follow the procedure below. References
Settings—
1. Click the Select button. 2.2.2.10
Select Supervisory
Agent 2. Click an agent from those displayed in the
Feature (ACD)
Available Agent for ACD Report window to
select it. Up to 8192 agents are displayed, and
up to 128 agents can be selected from the list.
3. Click ==> to move the selected agents to the
Selected Agent for ACD Report window.
4. To remove agents from the Selected Agent
for ACD Report window, click an agent to
select it and click <==.
5. Click OK.

172 PC Programming Manual

 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Agent— Specifies the target period for the report. Yesterday, Feature Manual
Filter Last Week, References
Settings— Last Month, 2.2.2.10
Select Today, This Supervisory
Period Week, This Feature (ACD)
Month,
Custom
*3
Period

*1
Item Description

Total Answer

Total Answer The number of calls that the target agent answers.

Talk Time

Total The total talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS (D)) *

Average The average talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. The longest talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)

Login Time The total login time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS (D)) *

Not-ready Time The total not ready time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS (D)) *

Wrap-up Time The total wrap-up time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS (D)) *

* "D" indicates the number of days (D=1–62). If the number of days is 0, (D) is not displayed.
*2 If Hour is selected, set the monitoring range for the target group (0:00–23:59).
*3 If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also.

PC Programming Manual 173

8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Call
Name Description Value Range Links
Call— To display a report according to calls, PC Programming
View follow the procedure below. This Manual
Report feature requires the Call Centre References
Feature Enhancement activation key or
11.5.3 PBX
the Built-in ACD report activation key.
Configuration—
If this activation key is not installed, the
[3-5-3] Group—
View Report button is greyed out.
Incoming Call
1. Enter the report output conditions Distribution Group—
and click the View Report button. Miscellaneous—
2. The ACD Report - Call Report Options—Call Log
*1 for Built-in ACD
screen is displayed. Report—ICD Group
Unanswered Call
Note
Log
The displays described in *1–
*3 can be changed through Feature Manual
system programming. For References
details, see "11.5.3 PBX 2.2.2.10
Configuration—[3-5-3] Group Supervisory Feature
—Incoming Call Distribution (ACD)
Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Call Log for Built-in
ACD Report—ICD Group
Unanswered Call Log".
3. Reports can be outputted in the
following 2 ways.
• Export: Click the Export button
to output the report to a local
PC as a file.
• Print: Click the Print button to
print the report.
4. Click the Close button to close
the ACD Report - Call Report
screen.

174 PC Programming Manual

 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Call— Follow the procedure below to select Feature Manual
Filter the target group for creating a report. References
Settings 2.2.2.10
1. Click the Select button.
—Select Supervisory Feature
Group 2. Click the ICD group name you want (ACD)
to analyse from the ICD group
names displayed on the Available
Group for ACD Report window.
(Maximum 64 groups displayed)
3. Click ==> to move the ICD group
you selected in step 2 to the
Selected Group for ACD Report
window. (Maximum 64 groups)
To delete an ICD group from the
Selected Group for ACD Report
window, click the ICD group name,
and then click <==.
4. Click OK.
Call— Specifies the target period for the Yesterday, Last Week, Last Feature Manual
Filter report. Month, Today, This Week, References
Settings This Month, Custom 2.2.2.10
—Select Period
*2
Supervisory Feature
Period (ACD)

PC Programming Manual 175

8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Call— Calls that are the target of an ACD • Caller ID/CLIP Filter: Feature Manual
Filter report can be filtered in the following 3 Filtering according to References
Settings ways. caller ID or CLIP 2.2.2.10
—Call Supervisory Feature
1. Click Caller ID/
Filter (ACD)
CLIP Filter.
Mode
2. Set the target caller
ID or CLIP
(maximum: 10).
• Talk/Wait Duration
Filter: Filtering
according to continuous
talking or waiting time
1. Click Talk/Wait
Duration Filter.
2. Select Talk Time
or Wait Time from
a drop-down list.
3. Set the filtering
target duration
using one of the
following 2
methods.
To set a minimum
duration, click Min.,
and set the
duration time
(0:00–23:59).
To set a maximum
duration, click
Max., and set the
duration time
(0:00–23:59).
• Lost Call Filter:
Filtering according to
lost calls
1. Click Lost Call
Filter.

*1
Item Description

ACD Report - Call Report

Start Date The start date of the call.

Start Time The start time of the call. (HH:MM:SS)

End Date The end date of the call.

End Time The end time of the call. (HH:MM:SS)

Result The processing result. (Answered/Abandoned/Overflowed/Unanswered )

*3

ICDG The incoming ICD Group number.

176 PC Programming Manual

 8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export

Item Description

Incoming Agent The extension number of the agent that received the call.
*4

Answering Agent The answering member. (Extension Name/Extension Number)

Talk Time The talking time. (HH:MM:SS)

Wait Time The waiting time. (HH:MM:SS)

*5

Trunk The incoming trunk group number.

Caller ID/CLIP The caller’s number.

*2 If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also.
*3 Unanswered is displayed when the agent did not answer the call if the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform Call
Distribution or Priority Hunting.
*4 Displayed only when the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.
*5 The unanswered wait time is displayed when the call was Unanswered and the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform
Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.

8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export

On this screen, users can register or delete the schedule for the automatic export of ACD Report data. The
PBX system will automatically export the selected ACD Report data at the scheduled times to a USB
memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (ACD scheduled exports cannot be made to a local PC.) For
details about ACD reports, see 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report.

Follow the procedure below to schedule the automatic export of ACD Report data.
1. Click to create a new scheduled export.
2. In Description, enter a description for the export (maximum 32 characters). This information is shown
as the description of the ACD Scheduled Export.
3. Select a report profile to be used for the scheduled export. If no report profile is selected, all items will
be exported.
For the details about report profiles, see 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report—Description
—Report Profiles.
4. Specify the file name for the exported ACD report data (maximum 32 characters).
5. Set the frequency (daily, weekly, etc.) and time of day for when the export should take place.
6. Select the type of CSV separator value to be used for the exported CSV files.
7. In Device, select a USB memory device or NAS, and then specify the folder on the selected device
where you want to save the ACD scheduled export file.
8. Click OK.

Note
• Installer and User (Administrator) level accounts can select a supervisor from the Supervisor
selection drop-down list in 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report.
Each supervisor can register up to 10 schedules for the automatic export of ACD reports.
• If an ACD report export is scheduled and a USB memory device has been selected in Device,
but a USB memory device is not connected to the PBX at the time of the scheduled export, the
ACD scheduled export will not be performed.
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.

PC Programming Manual 177

8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History

Editing ACD export schedules

1. From the ACD Scheduled Export screen, select the schedule you wish to edit.
2. Click .
3. Edit the settings as desired.
4. Click OK.

Deleting a scheduled export

1. From the ACD Scheduled Export screen, select the schedule you wish to delete.
2. Click .
3. Click OK.

8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History

The export history for ACD Report data can be checked on this screen. The following items are recorded for
each export:
• Date/Time
• Description
• Parameters
• Report Profile
• Completion Status
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Note
Installer and User (Administrator) level accounts can select a supervisor from the Select Supervisor
drop-down list in 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report.
The date/time display can be switched between 12 hour and 24 hour in 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Time Display.

To back up the export history of ACD Report data

1. Click Backup.
2. Click OK.
3. Specify the folder and file name to export the history file to and click Save.
The export history of ACD Report data on the current screen is saved as a text file.
When you export the ACD report manually, a hyphen will be displayed for the report profile in the ACD
Report data export history.

To delete the records for exporting exports of ACD Report data

1. Click Clear.
2. Click OK.
The records for the export history of ACD Report data on the current screen are deleted.

178 PC Programming Manual

 Section 9
PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 179

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a
summary of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 9.2 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary).

To select a shelf in the PBX

Click one of the following buttons to view the shelf in the PBX:
• Physical: View the physical card shelf.
• Virtual: View the virtual card shelf.
• Legacy-GW1: View the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway connected to connection port 1 of the
STACK-M card.
• Legacy-GW2: View the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway connected to connection port 2 of the
STACK-M card.

Note
The Legacy-GW1 and Legacy-GW2 buttons will be greyed out if a STACK-M card has not been
installed or if pre-installation for the card has not been performed. For details, see To pre-install PBXs
connected to the STACK-M card below.

To install a new physical card to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed, and information about the card will be shown.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To add new virtual cards to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install at the top.
2. Select the number of cards to install of that type from the Total number of cards drop-down list. An
according number of cards will fill free virtual slots.

To access card properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over the
individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.

To access port properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over the
individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.

180 PC Programming Manual

 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

To remove a card from the PBX

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click OK to confirm.
The card will be removed.

Note
When deleting a physical combination card, both cards must be set to OUS before selecting Delete.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-line mode only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over
the individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.

To access IP-PT port properties

1. When you place the mouse cursor over the IP Phone Registration button on the Slot screen, the
following choices appear. Click an option to open a port properties programming screen:

IP-PT: For KX-NT300/KX-NT500 series and KX-NT265 (software version 2.00 or later) IP-PTs
(→ 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property)

SIP-MLT: For KX-UT series SIP phones, S-PSs, and SIP-CSs

(→ 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property)

Standard SIP Phone: For third party SIP Phones

(→ 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property)

Option: Opens the Site Property—Main screen.

(→ 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main)

To pre-install PBXs connected to the STACK-M card

Before programming a legacy gateway, it must be pre-installed to enable the Legacy-GW1 and Legacy-
GW2 shelf buttons.
1. Install the STACK-M card and connect the legacy gateway PBX to the STACK-M card using the supplied
stacking cable. For details, refer to 4.6 Stacking Cards in the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual.
2. In the Configuration—Slot physical shelf screen, click on the STACK-M card in the list on the right.
3. Click and drag the image of the STACK-M card to the slot, and release it. The card will move into the
slot space.
4. Click OK to confirm.
5. Place the mouse cursor over the STACK-M card, and in the menu that appears, click Pre-Install.
6. In Cabinet Type, select the model of the PBX connected to connection port 1 of the STACK-M card, and
then click the arrow button.

PC Programming Manual 181

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

7. If a second legacy gateway PBX is connected to connection port 2 of the STACK-M card, select the
model of the PBX connected to connection port 2, and then click the arrow button.
8. Click OK to complete pre-installation.
You can now click the Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 shelf buttons to programme the cards of the
legacy gateways.

Note
• If Pre-Install is not displayed as described in step 5, pre-installation has already been completed.
Click Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 on the slot screen to programme the PBXs connected to the
STACK-M card.
• For information about hardware configuration restrictions and conditions for legacy gateways, refer to
Conditions for Connecting Legacy Gateways in 4.6 Stacking Cards in the KX-NS1000 Installation
Manual.

Supported Card Types

Card Maximum Number/PBX Card Programming
LCOT2+SLC2: A combination card
including:
• 2 analogue trunk ports
LCOT2:
• 2 extension ports for SLTs 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
BRI4+SLC2: A combination card Configuration—Slot—Card Property
including: - LCO type
• 4 ISDN Basic Rate Interface ports SLC2:
• 2 extension ports for SLTs 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card
PRI30+SLC2: A combination card
Property
including:
1
• 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface port BRI/PRI:
(30B channels). 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
• 2 extension ports for SLTs Configuration—Slot—Card Property
- BRI type/PRI type
PRI23+SLC2: A combination card
including: STACK-M:
• 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface port 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(23B channels). Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/
Legacy-GW2
• 2 extension ports for SLTs
STACK-M: Stacking Master Card for
connecting PBXs as legacy gateways.
V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Extension Card 8*1/20*2/8*3 Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—
Card Property
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Extension Card 20*1/8*2/12*3 Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32
—Card Property
V-UTEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Proprietary Telephone Card 20*1/8*2/12*3 Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32
—Card Property

182 PC Programming Manual

 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Card Maximum Number/PBX Card Programming

V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Gateway Card 3*1/3*2/6*3 Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—
Shelf Property
V-SIPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel SIP 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Trunk Card 16*1/16*2/10*3 Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—
Shelf Property
V-IPCS4: Virtual 4 IP Cell Station 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Interface Card 16 Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—
Card Property

*1 If Standard Type is selected for System Capacity Selection in Easy Setup Wizard. For details, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup
Wizard" in the Installation Manual.
*2 If IP-Extension Type is selected for System Capacity Selection in Easy Setup Wizard. For details, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup
Wizard" in the Installation Manual.
*3 If System Resource Type is selected for System Capacity Selection in Easy Setup Wizard. For details, refer to "5.4.1 Easy
Setup Wizard" in the Installation Manual.
For more information on the virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections in the
Installation Manual:
→ 4.4 Virtual Cards
→ 4.5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards
For information about cards supported by legacy gateway PBXs, see "System Components for Legacy
Gateways" in the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual.

Common Programming Reference Items

When programming settings for cards, extensions, and other devices using Web Maintenance Console,
depending on the screen being accessed, the following items may be listed on the screen for your
reference:
Item Description
Site Indicates the site number (1–16) of the PBX in the One-look Network where the
card, extension, or device is located. For more information about One-look
Networking, see 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types.
Shelf Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located
in the PBX.
• Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the KX-NS1000 PBX.
• Shelf "2" corresponds to the physical shelf of the PBX connected to Legacy
Gateway 1.
• Shelf "3" corresponds to the physical shelf of the PBX connected to Legacy
Gateway 2.
Slot Indicates the slot number within the shelf where the card, extension, or device is
located.
Port Indicates the port number assigned to the extension or device.

PC Programming Manual 183

9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary

9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Summary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Click one of the following buttons to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX:
• Physical: View the physical card shelf.
• Virtual: View the virtual card shelf.
• Legacy-GW1: View the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway connected to connection port 1 of the
STACK-M card.
• Legacy-GW2: View the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway connected to connection port 2 of the
STACK-M card.

Physical Shelf
The Site, Shelf, and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Indicates the Card Type: PC Programming Manual
Type service cards SLC2: SLC2 card of an installed References
installed in the LCOT2+SLC2, BRI4+SLC2, 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
slots of the PRI30+SLC2, or PRI23+SLC2 card Configuration—Slot
physical shelf LCOT2: LCOT2 card of an installed 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(reference only). LCOT2+SLC2 card Configuration—Slot— SLC2 -
BRI4: BRI4 card of an installed Card Property
BRI4+SLC2 card 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
PRI23: PRI23 card of an installed Configuration—Slot—Card
PRI23+SLC2 card Property - LCO type
PRI30: PRI30 card of an installed 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
PRI30+SLC2 card Configuration—Slot—Card
DOORPHONE: DOORPHONE Property - BRI type/PRI type
Card
STACK-M: Stacking Master Card
for connecting PBXs as legacy
gateways
Status Indicates the card INS: The card is in service. PC Programming Manual
status (reference OUS: The card is out of service. References
only). Fault: The card is not 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
communicating with the network. Configuration—Slot
Pre-Install: A card has been added
to the slot.
IDLE: No card is installed in the
slot.
Version Indicates the Version number PC Programming Manual
software version References
of the installed 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
card (reference Configuration—Slot
only).

184 PC Programming Manual

 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary

Virtual Shelf
The Site, Shelf, and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Slot Indicates the type of Trunk, Extension PC Programming Manual
Type card slot (reference References
only). 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot
Card Indicates the type of V-SIPGW16, V-IPGW16, PC Programming Manual
Type virtual card installed V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, References
(reference only). V-IPCS4, V-UTEXT32 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot
Status Indicates the card INS: The card is in service. PC Programming Manual
status (reference OUS: The card is out of service. References
only). Fault: The card is not 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
communicating with the network. Configuration—Slot
Pre-Install: A card has been
added to the slot.

Legacy Gateway 1 Shelf/Legacy Gateway 2 Shelf

Name Description Value Range Links
Card Indicates the type of Card type. Available cards vary PC Programming Manual
Type card installed by the model of the legacy References
(reference only). gateway. 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot
Installation Manual
References
Equipment Compatibility for
Legacy Gateways
Status Indicates the card INS: The card is in service. PC Programming Manual
status (reference OUS: The card is out of References
only). service. 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Fault: The card is not Configuration—Slot
communicating with the
network.
Pre-Install: A card has been
added to the slot.
Version Indicates the Version number PC Programming Manual
software version of References
the installed card 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(reference only). Configuration—Slot

PC Programming Manual 185

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Activation Key Status
Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files on the Storage
Memory Card and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the
Activation Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
It is possible to programme how the number of available IP Trunk channels is to be divided for H.323 and
SIP trunks. In Number of activated IP-GW, type the number of IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323
trunks. The remaining number of IP Trunk channels will be used for SIP trunks.

Note
If you have changed the value for Number of activated IP-GW, you must click Execute to restart the
V-IPGW16 cards for the change to take effect.
Similarly, you can programme how many IP softphones can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Telephone activation key. In Number of activated IP-Softphone, type the number of IP softphones to be
used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key, and then click OK. The remainder is
the number of IP-PTs that can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. By
default, only IP softphones can be used.
Also, you can programme how many VPN connections can be used for multisite connections using an IPsec
(VPN) activation key. In Number of activated IPSec (VPN) for MultiSite, type the number of multisite
connections to be used through an IPsec (VPN) activation key, and then click OK. The remainder is the
number of IPsec (VPN) connections that can be used for another purpose over the VPN.
You can click the Activation Key Installation link to access the Activation Key Installation screen (see 7.6
Utility—Activation Key Installation) for installing activation keys.

Trial Activation Keys

The PBX includes free trials for some PBX features that normally require activation keys. The trials have a
60-day limit. To begin using the free trials:
1. Click Activate Pre-installed Activation keys. A list of trial activation keys is displayed in a new
window.
2. Select the check boxes next to the trial activation keys you want to activate.
3. Click OK.
The trial period for the selected trial activation keys will begin.
Trial activation keys:
• One-look Network
• Built-in Router
• IPsec (VPN) (16 sessions)
• Two-way Recording Control
• Message Backup
• UM/E-mail (128 users)
• Two-way Recording (30 users)
• CTI interface
• CSTA Multiplexer (session)
• Mobile Extension (30 users)
• CA PRO (128 users)
• CA Supervisor (1 user)

186 PC Programming Manual

 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

• CA Operator Console (1 user)

• CA Thin Client Server
• Call Centre Feature Enhancement
• Poltys CCAccounting
• Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise
• Poltys CCView
• Poltys CCView add. PBX
• Poltys CCView Supervisor (5 users)
• Poltys CCView CRM P-up (5 users)
• Poltys Number notice
• Poltys CCAgent (5 users)
• Poltys CCRecord SIP (4 ports)
Name Description Value Range Links
MPR-ID Indicates the ID number of the ID number of the mother board
mother board (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 187

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Activated Indicates the type of activation IP Phone Capacity (ch): IP Phone capacity
Feature keys (reference only). IP Trunk (ch): Activate H.323 IP-GW or SIP-
Note that the types of Trunk
activation keys are subject to IP Proprietary Telephone/IP Softphone/P-SIP
change without notice. For CA Extension (ch): Activate Soft-phone /IP-PT /SIP-
activation keys, refer to the MLT /P-SIP
documentation for CA. IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension (ch):
Activate IP-PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP
SIP Extension (ch): Activate SIP-Phone for 3rd
party /IP Conference Phone
IP-CS channel expansion (CS unit): IP-CS
channel expansion to 8ch
One-look Network: Multi site connection with
KX-NS1000 PBXs
QSIG Network: QSIG Networking
Built-in Router: Built-in Router function
IPsec (VPN) (16 sessions): IP-VPN (IPsec) for
Built-in Router
Recording Time Expansion: Recording time 2h
→ 15h
Two-way Recording Control: Two-way recording
(Manager control)
Message Backup: UM Message Back UP
UM Port (ch): Unified Message ports
UM/E-mail (user): Email (IMAP4) client / Email
Notification (Voice/Fax message)
Two-way Recording (user): Two-way
Recording / Two-way Transfer
CTI interface: CTI Server (3rd Party CTI link)
CSTA Multiplexer (session): CSTA(CTI) Multi-
session
Mobile Extension (user): Working with cellular
phone
CA Basic (No limit): CA Basic
CA Pro (user): CA PRO
CA Supervisor (user): CA ACD Supervisor
CA Network Feature (user): CA Network
CA Operator Console (user): CA Operator
Console
CA Thin Client Server: Thin Client Server
Connection
Call Centre Feature Enhancement: Built-in ACD
Report, Announcement of waiting number for
queuing
Queue Position Announcement: Announcement
of waiting number for queuing
Built-in ACD report: Built-in ACD report

188 PC Programming Manual

 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Poltys CCAccounting: CCAccounting
Poltys CCAccounting A.L.: CCAccounting
(annual licence)
Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise: CCAccounting
Enterprise Edition Additional Connection licence
Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise A.L.: CCAccounting
Enterprise Edition Additional Connection licence
(annual licence)
Poltys CCView: CCView
Poltys CCView A.L.: CCView (annual licence)
Poltys CCView add. PBX: CCView Enterprise
Edition. Additional PBX Connection licence
Poltys CCView add. PBX A.L.: CCView
Enterprise Edition. Additional PBX Connection
licence (annual licence)
Poltys CCView Supervisor: CCView Supervisor
Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L.: CCView
Supervisor (annual licence)
Poltys CCView CRM P-up: Independent
Desktop CRM Popup SW with 1st Party TSP
Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L.: Independent
Desktop CRM Popup SW with 1st Party TSP
(annual licence)
Poltys Number notice: Dial Number Notification
Poltys Number notice A.L.: Dial Number
Notification (annual licence)
Poltys CCAgent: CCAgent With Internal CRM
Poltys CCAgent A.L.: CCAgent With Internal
CRM (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord Analogue: CCRecord Analog
Extensions/Trunks
Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L.: CCRecord
Analog Extensions/Trunks (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord Digital: CCRecord Digital
Extensions
Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L.: CCRecord Digital
Extensions (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord PRI: CCRecord for E1/T1
(PRI)
Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L.: CCRecord for E1/T1
(PRI) (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord SIP: CCRecord SIP
Extensions/Trunks
Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L.: CCRecord SIP
Extensions/Trunks (annual licence)
PSDN Option-1: PSDN partner’s optional
licence No.1
PSDN Option-2: PSDN partner’s optional
licence No.2

PC Programming Manual 189

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Pre- Indicates the number of Not applicable.
installed channels (or CA users)
provided by the mother board
(reference only).
Activation Indicates the number of Not applicable.
Key channels (or CA users)
provided by activation key files
on the Storage Memory Card
(reference only).
Features in Indicates the total number of Not applicable.
total channels (or CA users)
provided by the mother board
and activation key files on the
Storage Memory Card
(reference only).
System Indicates the total number of Not applicable.
Total channels (or CA users)
provided by activation keys in
the One-look network.

190 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

System Property
The properties of the PBX system can be specified.

Main
Value
Name Description Links
Range
DSP CODEC G.711 Specifies whether or not to only use Enable,
only (SIP extension) the G.711 codec for SIP extension Disable
calls.
DSP CODEC G.711 Specifies whether or not to only use Enable,
only (IP-GW) the G.711 codec for IP trunk calls. Disable
DSP CODEC Specifies whether or not to only use Enable,
Priority-1 value only the priority 1 codec set for the following Disable
(others) types of calls:
• IP extension calls
• SIP trunk calls
System Speed Dial Specifies the maximum number of 0–300 PC Programming
Download For UT system speed dial entries that will be Manual References
Extensions downloaded to KX-UT series SIP 9.21 PBX Configuration
phones. —[1-1] Configuration—
Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port
Property—Option—
System Speed Dial
Download

System Status
Name Description Value Range Links
CPU Usage Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, expressed 0–100%
as a percentage of total capacity (reference only).
Memory Usage Displays the amount of system memory currently being used, 0–100%
displayed as a percentage of total capacity (reference only).

Multisite
Name Description Value Range Links
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for G. Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This
711 feature conserves bandwidth by detecting
silent periods during a call and suppressing
the packets of silence from being sent to the
network.
DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent Inband, Outband (RFC2833),
out. Outband (H.245)

PC Programming Manual 191

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones 96–127
using RFC2833. Programming this
parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to
Outband (RFC2833).
Multisite Specifies the re-sending time for message 500–8000 ms, in units of 500
message communication between the Master unit and ms
resend time Slave units.
Multisite Specifies the number of seconds after which 150–240 s
message a message being re-sent between the Master
resend expired unit and Slave units will timeout if it cannot
time be sent.
Multisite for Specifies the first of two contiguous UDP 1024–65534
PBX UDP port ports to be used for Type 1 message
number communication between the Master unit and
Slave units.
Multisite Specifies the UDP port to be used for Type 2 1024–65535
message UDP message communication between the Master
port number unit and Slave units. Note
The UDP port specified
here and the next
contiguous port will be
assigned for
transmission.
Example: If the value set
here is 4560, ports 4560
and 4561 will be
assigned.
Multisite Specifies the Keep Alive Time-Out time in 30, 40, 50, 60, 120, 180, 300,
Keepalive Time- seconds for communication between the 600, 1800, 3600 s
out time Master unit and Slave units.
Multisite Specifies the Keep alive time for Isolated 40, 50, 60, 120, 180, 300,
Keepalive time Mode in seconds for communication between 600, 1800, 3600, 7200,
for Isolated the Master unit and Isolated Slave units. 10800 s
Mode
Multisite startup Specifies the amount of time in seconds 300, 360, 420, 480, 540, 600,
monitoring time required to pass before a PBX that loses its 1800, 3600 s
connection with the Master PBX switches to
Master Backup or Isolated mode.
Master Specifies whether or not the Master unit Enable (Master unit enters
Suspend if enters suspended mode when it recovers suspended mode)
Backup Master from a fault, if it detects that a Master Backup Disable (Master unit does not
Detected unit exists. If the Master unit is suspended, enter suspended mode and
all extension and trunk lines controlled by the resumes normal operation)
Master unit are unusable.

192 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property

V-IPGW
Name Description Value Range Links
Call Signalling Model Specifies whether to carry out a call control Direct, GateKeeper
(H.225) process directly between the cards
or through a gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper Connection Specifies the time between periodic checks 0 (disabled), 1–1440
Checking Interval (*60s) of connection to the gatekeeper.
Terminal type to Specifies the connection service type Terminal, Gateway
Gatekeeper notified to the gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper ID to Specifies the authentication ID notified to Max. 20 Characters
Gatekeeper the gatekeeper.
Bandwidth to Specifies the used bandwidth information 1–255 kbps
Gatekeeper notified to the gatekeeper.
Primary Gatekeeper IP Specifies the IP address of the primary 1.0.0.0–
Address gatekeeper. 223.255.255.255
Primary Gatekeeper Port Specifies the port number of the primary 1–65535
Number gatekeeper.
Secondary Gatekeeper Specifies the IP address of the secondary 1.0.0.0–
IP Address gatekeeper. 223.255.255.255
Secondary Gatekeeper Specifies the port number of the secondary 1–65535
Port Number gatekeeper.
H.225 Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 1–65535
protocol (call control) in an H.323 protocol
suite.
RAS Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 1–65535
protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite.
QSIG Connectionless Specifies the TCP port number for 1–65535
Tunneling TCP Port connectionless tunnelling between gateway
Number devices at different locations in a QSIG
network.
QSIG Connectionless Specifies the UDP port number for 1–65535
Tunneling UDP Port connectionless tunnelling between gateway
Number devices at different locations in a QSIG
network.
H.323 Dynamic Port Specifies the starting port number from 1–65000
Number which 448 contiguous ports are used as
dynamic ports.

GW Settings–Main
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway Max. 20 characters
device for programming reference.
GW IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination 1.0.0.0–
gateway device. 223.255.255.255

PC Programming Manual 193

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property

Name Description Value Range Links

GW Group Specifies the number of the gateway group to 1–256, None
which the gateway entry belongs. A maximum of
256 gateway groups can be created.
Connection for Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection Disable (TDE), Enable
IP-GW16 feature between the V-IPGW and KX-TDE/ (TDA)
KX-TDAIP-GW cards.
Protocol Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless TCP, UDP
tunnelling between gateway devices at different
locations in a QSIG network.
Progress Tone Specifies whether to send call progress tones to External, Internal
Send Mode the destination. When selecting External, call
progress tones are audible at the destination.

GW Settings–Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway Max. 20 characters
device for programming reference.
IP Codec Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. For 1st:
Priority—1st, For fax communications, it is necessary to G.711A, G.711Mu, G.
2nd, 3rd specify G.711A or G.711Mu for 1st priority. 729A
For 2nd and 3rd:
None, G.711A, G.711Mu,
G.729A
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data during a ms, 60 ms
(G.711A) conversation. The smaller this number, the
higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data during a ms, 60 ms
(G.711Mu) conversation. The smaller this number, the
higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data during a ms, 60 ms
(G.729A) conversation. The smaller this number, the
higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

GW Settings–Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination Max. 20 characters
gateway device for programming
reference.

194 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
G.711 This feature conserves bandwidth by
detecting silent periods during a call and
suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network.
FAX Sending Specifies the method of transporting the G.711 Inband, T.38
Method fax signal.
Maximum Bit Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax No Speed Limit,
Rate signal. 2400 bps, 4800
bps, 7200 bps,
9600 bps, 12000
bps, 14400 bps
FAX Enables the use of the FAX Detection Disable, Enable PC Programming
Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a Manual
Ability codec other than G.711 cannot be References
received accurately at the destination, this
9.4 PBX
feature automatically switches the codec
Configuration—[1-1]
to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal
Configuration—Slot—
relay over the network.
System Property—
GW Settings–Option
1—IP Codec Priority
—1st, 2nd, 3rd
DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF Inband, Outband
tones. (RFC2833),
Outband (H.245)
Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF 96–127
tones using RFC2833. Programming this
parameter is only necessary if DTMF is
set to Outband (RFC2833).

GW Settings–Option 3
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination Max. 20
gateway device for programming reference. characters
T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when 272–512
using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Error Specifies whether to enable the redundancy Disable, Enable
Correction – Redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 0–7
Redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.
messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for data 0–3
Redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX Rate Management Specifies the rate management method Transferred TCF,
Method when using the T.38 protocol. Local TCF

PC Programming Manual 195

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property

DN2IP
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Number Specifies the leading digits in dialled numbers by which Max. 30 digits
to associate calls with the appropriate destination. (consisting of 0–9)
Remaining Specifies the number of digits to be dialled following 0–29
Number of Digits the leading number to access the destination.
GW No./GW Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a GW Group, GW
Group Selection gateway device or a gateway group. No.
GW Group Specifies the number of the destination gateway group. 1–256
This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group
Selection on this screen is set to GW Group.
GW No. Specifies the number of the destination gateway 1–512
device. This setting is only available when GW No./GW
Group Selection on this screen is set to GW No..

196 PC Programming Manual

 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property

9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Site Property
The properties of the PBX site can be specified. When you place the mouse cursor over the Site Property
button, Main, FAX Card, and NSVM buttons are displayed. Click a button to open that site property screen.

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site

Property—Main
Overall settings for the PBX site can be specified.

Main
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Storage Indicates the size of the installed storage Card Size
Memory Size memory card (reference only).
Multisite Specifies whether the PBX may connect Enable,
Connection to other PBX sites as part of a One-look Disable
Ability network.
Isolated Mode Specifies whether the PBX will continue Enable, PC Programming
to operate in Isolated mode if the PBX Disable Manual References
cannot connect to the Master unit or the 1.2.3.1 One-look
Backup Master unit (if set). Networking Survivability
Note Feature Manual
• This setting is available for Slave References
unit PBXs in a One-look network 4.2.3.1 Backup Master
that are not designated as the Mode and Isolated Mode
Backup Master unit.
• When this item is set to "Disable",
system functions for the site will
become unavailable if the Master
unit and/or Backup Master unit
fails.
Normal Mode Specifies whether a Slave unit in Disable, Feature Manual
Auto Recovery Isolated mode automatically switches to Enable References
Normal mode when the Master unit 4.2.3.1 Backup Master
recovers. Mode and Isolated Mode

PC Programming Manual 197

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Switch Time Specifies whether to set the Time Enable, PC Programming
Service to Service to Break mode when the PBX Disable Manual References
"Break" in enters Isolated Mode. 1.2.3.1 One-look
Isolated Mode Networking Survivability
10.6.2 PBX Configuration
—[2-6-2] System—
Numbering Plan—Quick
Dial—Use Quick Dial for
CO rerouting during Break
Mode.
Feature Manual
References
4.2.3.1 Backup Master
Mode and Isolated Mode
Area ID for Specifies the area ID for the Logical 1–16 PC Programming
logical partition Partitioning feature of the site. This Manual References
feature is available only in a One-look 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call
network. Control Log
10.9 PBX Configuration—
[2-9] System—System
Options—Option 2—
Applying logical
partitioning
Feature Manual
References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the 1–256 Feature Manual
site. References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection
P2P Group Indicates the selected peer-to-peer P2P Group Feature Manual
Name group’s name (reference only). Name References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection
LLDP Packet Specifies whether the PBX notifies Disable,
Sending Ability IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) to enable or Enable
disable the ability to send and receive
LLDP packets.
IP Terminal Specifies the IP terminal registration Manual, Full Installation Manual
Registration mode for registering IP telephones to the Automatic, References
Mode PBX. Extension 5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
Input
IP-CS Specifies the registration mode for Manual, Full
Registration registering IP-CSs to the PBX. Automatic
Mode

198 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
SIP over Specifies whether or not to use SIP over Disable,
TCP/IP (V- TCP/IP protocol for the site. When this Enable
SIPGW) *) setting is enabled, SIP trunks cannot
use the UDP/IP protocol.

Note
If this setting is changed, the
V-IPGW cards and/or V-SIPGW
cards installed at the site will be
deleted.

VoIP-DSP Options
The settings in this tab relate to IP extensions and IP trunks.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
IP Extension Count of Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to 0–117 Feature
BGM the mother board can send out BGM. Manual
References
2.28.1
Background
Music (BGM)
Echo Cancellation Ports Specifies the number of ports to be used 0–64
for echo cancellation.
Send Music On Hold to IP Enables the sending of hold music to an IP Disable,
trunk (for P2P trunk during a P2P connection call between Enable
conversation) an IP extension and IP trunk.
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for Disable,
Operation for G.711 voice communications using the G.711 Enable
codec.
P2P Group Jitter Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for Disable,
Compensation Operation fax communications using the G.711 codec. Enable
for G.711 FAX
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for Disable,
Operation for G.729A communications using the G.729A codec. Enable
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Specifies the minimum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
Voice buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. Specifies the maximum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
for Voice buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer 0–200 ms
Voice for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Specifies the length of time that the jitter 1000–65530
Period for Voice buffer is applied for voice communications. ms
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Specifies the minimum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
FAX buffer for fax communications.

PC Programming Manual 199

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. Specifies the maximum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
for FAX buffer for fax communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer 0–200 ms
FAX for fax communications.
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Specifies the length of time that the jitter 1000–65530
Period for FAX buffer is applied for fax communications. ms
DTMF Detection Level for Specifies the level of DTMF detection for -45– -12 dB
G.711A the G.711A codec.
DTMF Detection Level for Specifies the level of DTMF detection for -39– -6 dB
G.711Mu the G.711Mu codec.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 1 (ON) detects the CNG signal.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 2 (OFF) waits until another CNG signal is detected.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG 1–3
Detection Counter signal must be detected before the PBX
proceeds the fax operation.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be OFF, ON
Detection Pattern detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
operation.
CED Signal Fixation Specifies the minimum length of time 50 × n (n=1–
Detection Time - SIP required for the CED (called station 100) ms
Extension identification) signal to be detected by the
PBX.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20 × n (n=1–
Detection Width 1 (ON) - detects the CNG signal for SIP extensions. 250) ms
SIP Extension
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20 × n (n=1–
Detection Width 2 (OFF) - waits until another CNG signal is detected 250) ms
SIP Extension for SIP extensions.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG 1–3
Detection Counter - SIP signal must be detected before the PBX
Extension proceeds the fax operation for SIP
extensions.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be Off, On
Detection Pattern - SIP detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
Extension operation for SIP extensions.
CED Signal Fixation Specifies the minimum length of time 50 × n (n=1–
Detection Time - SIP required for the CED (called station 100) ms
Extension - SIP Extension identification) signal to be detected by the
PBX for SIP extensions.

200 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -13–2 dB
(Network to PBX) A-Law signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711A.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -7–8 dB
(Network to PBX) Mu-Law signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711Mu.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -13–2 dB
A-Law - SIP Extension signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711A for SIP extensions.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -7–8 dB
Mu-Law - SIP Extension signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711Mu for SIP extensions.

VoIP-DSP Options 2
The settings in this tab relate to communications within a One-look network.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo cancellation ability 64 ms, 128 ms,
Ability time. Off
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB
(Down) down voice path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
voice path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak, Feature
setting to control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong Manual
References
5.2.1 IP
Proprietary
Telephone (IP-
PT)
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature Disable, Enable
Operation for G.711 for voice communications using the G.711
codec.
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature Disable, Enable
Operation for G.729A for communications using the G.729A
codec.
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. Specifies the minimum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
for Voice buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Specifies the maximum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
Max. for Voice buffer for voice communications.

PC Programming Manual 201

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Jitter Buffer Delay Init. Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer 0–200 ms
for Voice for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Specifies the length of time that the jitter 1000–65530 ms
Period for Voice buffer is applied for voice
communications.
Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms,
(G.711A) measurements (samples) of sound data 40 ms, 50 ms,
during a conversation. The smaller this 60 ms
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms,
(G.711Mu) measurements (samples) of sound data 40 ms, 50 ms,
during a conversation. The smaller this 60 ms
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms,
(G.729A) measurements (samples) of sound data 40 ms, 50 ms,
during a conversation. The smaller this 60 ms
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.

Port Number
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Voice (RTP) UDP Specifies the UDP port used by the 1024– Feature Manual
Port No. (Server) system to transmit and receive RTP 64000 References
(Real-time Transfer Protocol) data. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
This must be changed if another Telephone (IP-PT)
network application is using the
same port.
For voice communications, the
system uses 128 contiguous UDP
ports, starting from the port number
specified here.
Voice (RTP) UDP Specifies the UDP port used to 1024– Feature Manual
Port No. (IP-PT / transmit and receive RTP (Real-time 65535 References
SIP-MLT) Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
side. This must be changed if Telephone (IP-PT)
another network application is using
the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-PT
uses 128 contiguous UDP ports,
starting from the port number
specified here.
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.

202 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
UDP Port No. for SIP Specifies the UDP port number used 1024– Feature Manual
Extension Server for the SIP Extension server. 65535 References
To change the value displayed here, 5.2.2 SIP (Session
click Common Settings and set the Initiation Protocol)
desired value. Extension
CWMP (HTTP) Port Specifies the HTTP port of the PBX- 0–65535 Feature Manual
No. for SIP-MLT side ACS for control communication (Setting "0" References
with KX-UT series SIP phones. will close 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote
port access Connection
for this
feature)
CWMP (HTTPS) Port Specifies the HTTPS port of the 0–65535 Feature Manual
No. for SIP-MLT PBX-side ACS for control (Setting "0" References
communication with KX-UT series will close 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote
SIP phones. port access Connection
for this
feature)
Data Transmission Specifies the HTTP port of the PBX- 0–65535 Feature Manual
Protocol (HTTP) Port side ACS for data communication (Setting "0" References
No. for SIP-MLT with KX-UT series SIP phones. will close 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote
port access Connection
for this
feature)
Data Transmission Specifies the HTTPS port of the 0–65535 Feature Manual
Protocol (HTTPS) PBX-side ACS for data (Setting "0" References
Port No. for SIP-MLT communication with KX-UT series will close 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote
SIP phones. port access Connection
for this
feature)
Firmware Update Specifies the IP-PT/IP-CS firmware 0–65535
Port No. for IP-PT/ update port number.
IP-CS (Media Relay)
LOGIN Port Number Specifies the port number used to 1024–
login to the PBX via the LAN. 65535
CTI Port Number Specifies the port number used to 1024– Feature Manual
operate CTI via the LAN. Selecting 65535 References
"0" disables the 3rd Party CTI 2.26 Computer Telephony
feature. Integration (CTI) Features

PC Programming Manual 203

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Built-in Specifies the port number for the 1024– PC Programming
Communication Communication Assistant (CA) 65535 Manual References
Assistant Server application. 12.1.1 PBX
Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension
Settings—Option 9—
Built-in Communication
Assistant
12.2.1 PBX
Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable
Station—Extension
Settings—Option 9—
Built-in Communication
Assistant
Feature Manual
References
2.26.2 CA
(Communication
Assistant)

LAN Status
Name Description Value Range Links
LINK for Main Port Indicates the current connection status of 1: Disconnect, 0:
the main port (reference only). Connect
LINK for Maintenance Indicates the current connection status of 1: Disconnect, 0:
Port the MNT port (reference only). Connect

Media Relay
Name Description Value Range Links
Common—NAT - Specifies the NAT device Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
External IP Address external IP address (common). 223.255.255.254 References
5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
—NAT - MGCP MGCP port of the PBX-side References
Server Port No. network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
connections. Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
—NAT - MGCP MGCP port of the PBX-side References
Server Port No. for network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
IP-CS connections. Remote Connection

204 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the type of Keep Alive Blank UDP, None Feature Manual
—Keep Alive Packet packets to be sent out for remote References
Type connections for IP extensions. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the type of Keep Alive Blank UDP, None Feature Manual
—Keep Alive Packet packets to be sent out for remote References
Type for IP-CS connections for IP-CS 5.2.2.3 Simple
(KX-NS0154 only). Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the time interval 10–60 s Feature Manual
—Keep Alive Packet between transmissions of Keep References
Sending Interval Time Alive packets. 5.2.2.3 Simple
(s) Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the port number of FTP 1–65535
—NAT - FTP Server server for IP-CS (KX-NS0154
Port No. only).
SIP Extension / UT Specifies the outside-facing port 1–65535 (except Feature Manual
Extension—NAT - SIP of the network gateway "50xx" and "x50xx") References
Proxy Server Port No. connected to the SIP proxy 5.2.2.3 Simple
server. Remote Connection
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
CWMP Server HTTP port of the PBX-side References
(HTTP) Port No. network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
connections. Remote Connection
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
CWMP Server HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
(HTTPS) Port No. network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
connections. Remote Connection
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
CWMP Server HTTP port of the PBX-side References
(HTTP) Port No. for network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
Network Survivability connections. This setting Remote Connection
specifies the port number used
for the secondary server for
network survivability.
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
CWMP Server HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
(HTTPS) Port No. for network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
Network Survivability connections. This setting Remote Connection
specifies the port number used
for the secondary server for
network survivability.

PC Programming Manual 205

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
SIP-MLT Data HTTP port of the PBX-side References
Download Server network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
(HTTP) Port No. connections used for Remote Connection
downloading data to KX-UT
series SIP phones.
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
SIP-MLT Data HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
Download Server network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
(HTTPS) Port No. connections used for Remote Connection
downloading data to KX-UT
series SIP phones.
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing port 1–65535 Feature Manual
NTP Server Port No. of the network gateway References
connected to the NTP server. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
UT Extension—Keep Specifies the type of Keep Alive Register, Blank Feature Manual
Alive Packet Type packets to be sent out for remote UDP, None References
connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
UT Extension—Keep Specifies the time interval 10–60 s Feature Manual
Alive Packet Sending between transmissions of Keep References
Interval Time (s) Alive packets. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
UT Extension—SIP Specifies the length of time that 10–3600 s Feature Manual
Register Expire Time will elapse before the current References
(s) registration expires. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
UT Extension— Specifies whether alive Disable, Enable Feature Manual
PERIODIC Ability monitoring is performed for References
connected remote extensions. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
UT Extension— Specifies the polling interval for 30–3600 s Feature Manual
PERIODIC Packet alive monitoring when PERIODIC References
Sending Interval Time Ability is set to Enable. 5.2.2.3 Simple
(s) Remote Connection
Option—NAT - RTP Specifies the RTP server’s IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
IP Address address. If using a separate IP 223.255.255.254 References
address from Common—NAT - 5.2.2.3 Simple
External IP Address, configure Remote Connection
this setting.

206 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Option—NAT - SIP Specifies the outside-facing IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
Proxy Server IP address or host name of the 223.255.255.254 References
Address network gateway connected to 5.2.2.3 Simple
the SIP proxy server. If using a Remote Connection
separate IP address from
Common—NAT - External IP
Address, configure this setting.
Option—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
CWMP Server IP address of the PBX-side network 223.255.255.254 References
Address gateway for remote connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
If using a separate IP address Remote Connection
from Common—NAT - External
IP Address, configure this
setting.
Option—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
CWMP Server IP address of the PBX-side network 223.255.255.254 References
Address for Network gateway for remote connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Survivability This setting specifies the port Remote Connection
number used for the secondary
server for network survivability.
Option—NAT - NTP Specifies the outside-facing IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
Server IP Address address of the network gateway 223.255.255.254 References
connected to the NTP server. If 5.2.2.3 Simple
using a separate IP address from Remote Connection
Common—NAT - External IP
Address, configure this setting.

SIP Extension
Name Description Value Range Links
SIP Location Hold Specifies the maximum length of 10–3600 s Feature Manual
Time Max. time that the PBX holds References
information on the location of SIP 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Extensions. Initiation Protocol)
Extension
SIP Location Hold Specifies the minimum length of 10–3600 s Feature Manual
Time Min. time that the PBX holds References
information on the location of SIP 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Extensions. Initiation Protocol)
Extension
SIP Location Hold Specifies the interval time that the 1–10 s Feature Manual
Time Interval PBX waits before starting to hold References
information on location of SIP 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Extensions. Initiation Protocol)
Extension

PC Programming Manual 207

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

SIP Session Timer Specifies the minimum length of 90–3600 s Feature Manual
Min. time that the PBX waits before References
disconnecting SIP sessions when 5.2.2 SIP (Session
no communication is detected. Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
assigned to Remote address or host name of the PBX- 223.255.255.255 References
SIP-MLT—NAT - side network gateway for remote (IP address), Max. 5.2.2.3 Simple
CWMP Server IP connections. 100 characters Remote Connection
Address (host name)
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing HTTP 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote port of the PBX-side network References
SIP-MLT—NAT - gateway for remote connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
CWMP Server (HTTP) Remote Connection
Port No.
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
SIP-MLT—NAT - network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
CWMP Server connections. Remote Connection
(HTTPS) Port No.
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing HTTP 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote port of the PBX-side network References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP- gateway for remote connections 5.2.2.3 Simple
MLT Data Download used for downloading data to Remote Connection
Server (HTTP) Port KX-UT series SIP phones.
No.
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP- network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
MLT Data Download connections used for downloading Remote Connection
Server (HTTPS) Port data to KX-UT series SIP phones.
No.
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
assigned to Remote address or host name of the 223.255.255.255 References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP network gateway connected to the (IP address), Max. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Proxy Server IP SIP proxy server. 100 characters Remote Connection
Address (host name)
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing port of 1–65535 (except Feature Manual
assigned to Remote the network gateway connected to "50xx" and "x50xx") References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP the SIP proxy server. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Proxy Server Port No. Remote Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
assigned to Remote address or host name of the 223.255.255.255 References
SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP network gateway connected to the (IP address), Max. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Server IP Address NTP server. 100 characters Remote Connection
(host name)

208 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing port of 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote the network gateway connected to References
SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP the NTP server. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Server Port No. Remote Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the type of Keep Alive Register, Blank Feature Manual
assigned to Remote packets to be sent out for remote UDP, None References
SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Alive Packet Type Remote Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the time interval 10–60 s Feature Manual
assigned to Remote between transmissions of the References
SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Keep Alive packet. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Alive Packet Sending Remote Connection
Interval Time (s) Note
• This interval must be
shorter than the NAT
binding time of the router.
The default value is
appropriate in most cases.
• This setting is available only
when NAT - Keep Alive
Packet Type is set to
"Blank UDP".
Setting parameters Specifies the length of time that 10–3600 s Feature Manual
assigned to Remote will elapse before the current References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP registration expires. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Register Expire Time Remote Connection
(s) Note
This setting is available only
when NAT - Keep Alive
Packet Type is set to
"Register".
Setting parameters for Specifies the outside-facing IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
Networking address or host name of the PBX- 223.255.255.255 References
Survivability, assigned side network gateway for remote (IP address), Max. 5.2.2.3 Simple
to Remote SIP-MLT— connections that is used when the 100 characters Remote Connection
NAT - CWMP Server gateway specified in Setting (host name)
IP Address parameters assigned to Remote
SIP-MLT is not available.
Setting parameters for Specifies the outside-facing HTTP 1–65535 Feature Manual
Networking port of the PBX-side network References
Survivability, assigned gateway for remote connections 5.2.2.3 Simple
to Remote SIP-MLT— that is used when the gateway Remote Connection
NAT - CWMP Server specified in Setting parameters
(HTTP) Port No. assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is
not available.

PC Programming Manual 209

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Setting parameters for Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
Networking HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
Survivability, assigned network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
to Remote SIP-MLT— connections that is used when the Remote Connection
NAT - CWMP Server gateway specified in Setting
(HTTPS) Port No. parameters assigned to Remote
SIP-MLT is not available.
Control Condition of Specifies whether alive monitoring Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Remote SIP-MLT— is performed for connected remote References
PERIODIC Ability extensions. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
Control Condition of Specifies the polling interval for 30–3600 s Feature Manual
Remote SIP-MLT— alive monitoring when PERIODIC References
PERIODIC Packet Ability is set to "Enable". 5.2.2.3 Simple
Sending Interval Time Remote Connection
(s)

Echo Cancellation
The settings in this tab are for non-IP calls.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms
Ability
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down -14–6 dB
(Down) voice path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
voice path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak,
setting to control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong

DSP Conference
Name Description Value Range Links
DSP Conference Priority Specifies the Conference Priority (the Preferential:
conference resource you want to use). Conference
resources on the
DSP card are used.
Alternative: Default
conference
resources are used.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
V-IPEXT side for voice path for conference calls using an
conference extension of a V-IPEXT card.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
V-SIPEXT side for voice path for conference calls using an
conference extension of a V-SIPEXT card.

210 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card

Name Description Value Range Links

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
V-UTEXT side for voice path for conference calls using an
conference extension of a V-UTEXT card.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
Multisite GW side for voice path for conference calls using a
conference gateway between sites.
Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time for OFF, 64 ms, 128
on TDM side for conferencing using TDM circuit mode ms
conference communication.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
TDM side for conference voice path for conferencing using TDM
circuit mode communication.
DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down -14–6 dB
on TDM side for voice path for conferencing using TDM
conference circuit mode communication.
EC Gain on TDM side for Specifies the error correction gain for -14–6 dB
conference conferencing using TDM circuit mode
communication.
NLP Setting on TDM side Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak,
for conference setting for conferencing using TDM circuit Normal, Strong
mode communication.

9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site

Property—FAX Card
Information and settings for the FAX Card for the PBX site can be confirmed and specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Status Indicates if a FAX Card is installed in the PBX (reference Installed, None
only).
Version Indicates the version of the FAX Card firmware Version Number
(reference only).
FAX Extension Specifies the extension number assigned to the FAX Extension number
number Card for making and receiving faxes directly from the
PBX.

9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site

Property—NSVM
Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms,
Ability 128 ms
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice -14–6 dB
(Down) path.

PC Programming Manual 211

9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM

Name Description Value Range Links

DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. -14–6 dB
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to Disable, Weak,
control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong
FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Disable,
Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 Enable
cannot be received accurately at the destination, this
feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to
enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 1 CNG signal.
(ON)
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 2 another CNG signal is detected.
(OFF)
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must 1–3
Detection Counter be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
operation.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected OFF, ON
Detection Pattern before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.
Maximum Silence Specifies the length of time of silence that the PBX 1000–60000
Time will detect as the end of a call. (ms)
Maximum Continuous Specifies the length of time of a continuous tone that 1000–60000
Tone Time the PBX will detect as the end of a call. (ms)
Unique Cyclic Tone Specifies whether the system will detect the end of a Disable,
Detection call when there is a unique cyclic tone. Enable
Maximum Cyclic Tone Specifies the length of time of a continuing cyclic 1000–60000
Time tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call. (ms)

212 PC Programming Manual

 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—UM Card Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms,
Ability 128 ms
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice -14–6 dB
(Down) path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice -14–6 dB
path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting Disable, Weak,
to control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong
FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability Disable, Enable
feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than
G.711 cannot be received accurately at the
destination, this feature automatically switches the
codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal
relay over the network.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 1 (ON) the CNG signal.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 2 another CNG signal is detected.
(OFF)
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must 1–3
Detection Counter be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
operation.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging OFF, ON
Detection Pattern system will respond to CNG signals.

PC Programming Manual 213

9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—UM Port Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified.

Main
The Port for each item is displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference
Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of
Number number of the port. 0–9)
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service. PC Programming
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of Manual References
click the desired cell in the service. 9.1 PBX Configuration—
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not [1-1] Configuration—
OUS for the port. communicating with the Slot–To change the
This option is only available in network. status (INS/OUS) of a
On-line mode. card (On-line mode only)
UM Group Selects the number of the UM 1–16
Number group.

214 PC Programming Manual

 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View

9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—Port Type View
Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be
accessed from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including
extension cards of legacy gateways. For information about legacy gateways, see 9.29 PBX Configuration
—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2. For information about extension cards for
legacy gateways, refer to the documentation for the legacy gateway PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Type Indicates the types of telephones, IP-EXT, SIP-MLT, SIP, PC Programming
devices, or CSs (reference only). DPT(40V) (KX-DT300 Manual References
series/KX-DT500 9.1 PBX Configuration—
series/KX-T7600 series [1-1] Configuration—Slot
DPTs), DPT(15V) (DPTs
other than KX-DT300
series/KX-DT500
series/KX-T7600 series),
APT (15V), SLT, DSS
Console, UM, VM, Other,
CS, High-density CS,
IP-CS, SIP-CS, S-PS
Total Indicates the total number of each Not applicable. PC Programming
Count type of telephone, device, and CS Manual References
connected to the PBX (reference 9.1 PBX Configuration—
only). CSs are counted on the basis of [1-1] Configuration—Slot
the number of ports in service plus the
number of extension ports to which
CSs are connected. For details about
CSs connected to the extension cards
of legacy gateways, refer to the
documentation for the legacy gateway
PBX or the CS.

PC Programming Manual 215

9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property
Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.
Icon Description for Parameter Type
Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Manual programming is optional.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
SIP Client Specifies the port number of the PBX used for 1024–65535
Port Number communications with the SIP server.
NAT Traversal Specifies the NAT traversal method. Off, Fixed IP Addr., STUN
– STUN: A STUN Server, used alongside the
SIP Server, finds out the global IP address
of the router with NAT enabled.
– Fixed IP Addr.: The global IP address of
the router with NAT enabled is fixed.

Note
Manual programming is optional except
when programming is required depending
on the network conditions.
NAT - Voice Specifies the starting port number of the 1024–65535
(RTP) UDP Port dynamic ports used for NAT Traversal.
No.
NAT - Keep Specifies whether to send Keep Alive packets Disable, Enable
Alive Packet in order to maintain the NAT binding
Sending Ability information. This setting may be compulsory
depending on the network conditions.
NAT - Keep Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be Blank UDP, None
Alive Packet Type sent out.
NAT - Keep Specifies the interval time until the next Keep 1–60 s
Alive Packet Alive packet is sent.
Sending Interval
Note
This interval must be shorter than the
NAT binding time of the router. The
default value is appropriate in most cases.
NAT - Fixed Specifies the global IP address of the router 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Global IP Address with NAT enabled. This setting is compulsory
if Fixed IP Addr. is selected in NAT
Traversal.

216 PC Programming Manual

 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

Name Description Value Range Links

STUN Ability Specifies whether to open a protocol port of Disable, Enable
the STUN server to enable STUN feature.
STUN Client Specifies the port number of the PBX used for 1–65535
Port Number communications with the STUN server.
STUN Specifies the number of times that a query is 0–8
External Address retried when no response is received from the
Detection Retry STUN server.
Counter
STUN Specifies the length of time until a query is 0–1600 ms
Resending retried when no response is received from the
Interval STUN server.
SIP Called Specifies whether to receive a SIP trunk call Disable (High->Low),
Party Number when receiving the INVITE message with an Disable (Low->High),
Check Ability incorrect target SIP-URI. The setting specified Enable
here is also applied when the request header
is blank or contains characters that cannot be
modified to a receivable number.
SIP Called Specifies the search mode for the notified SIP Mode 1: Searches SIP
Party Number Called Party Number information. accounts only.
Search Mode Mode 2: Searches SIP
accounts, then DDI/DID
numbers. Searches the
SIP trunks of the tenant of
the search-matched
DDI/DID number, in
ascending order (Low →
High).
Mode 3: Searches SIP
accounts, then DDI/DID
numbers. Searches the
SIP trunks of the tenant of
the search-matched
DDI/DID number, in
descending order (High →
Low).
Symmetric Enables this feature to request that the SIP Disable, Enable
Response server sends the response back to the source
Routing Ability IP address and port from which the request
originated.
100rel Ability Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel Disable: This feature is not
to the header field of the INVITE message. activated.
Enable (Active): Activates
this feature only if the
other device supports the
feature.
Enable (Passive):
Activates this feature only
when requested by the
other device.

PC Programming Manual 217

9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Ringback Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to Disable, Enable
Tone to Outside an outside caller when the network cannot
Caller send the tone.
SIP QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS, DSCP, HEX
Ability ToS field in the IP header.
SIP QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS field 0–7
Priority when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.
SIP QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when Normal, Monetary Cost,
Type "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability. Reliability, Throughput,
Delay

Timer
Name Description Value Range Links
SIP T1 Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE requests 5–255 × 100 ms
and responses.
SIP T2 Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE responses 40–255 × 100 ms
and non-INVITE requests.

218 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPGW—Card Property
Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
DNS SRV Record Specifies whether to request that the DNS server Disable,
Resolve Ability translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS Enable
SRV record. Click Common Settings to change this
setting.

PC Programming Manual 219

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPGW—Port Property
Programming Port Properties
Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each
virtual SIP gateway port.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.
Icon Description for Parameter Type
Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.
Manual programming is compulsory.

Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.

Manual programming is optional.

Automatic Programming
Some of the parameters on this screen can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP
provider for each virtual SIP gateway port. A maximum of 32 SIP providers can be programmed, and a
different SIP provider can be assigned to each virtual SIP gateway port.
Follow the steps below to configure a SIP provider.
1. Click Select Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. From the Provider menu, select the desired SIP provider.
3. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers
to be assigned to the SIP provider selected in step 2.
4. Click Execute.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Apply.
Appropriate setting values designated by the SIP provider will be set in the parameters for the virtual SIP
gateway ports.

Manual Programming
Follow the steps below to programme the parameters which are not automatically programmed by selecting
a provider.
1. Click a desired tab.
2. Enter information or select from the list for each parameter.
Adding Settings to Provider Profiles
Follow the steps below to add the settings to provider profiles.
1. Click Add Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers
to add the settings to provider profiles.

220 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

3. Click Execute.
Trunk Adaptor
To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
1. Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be
set are OUS.
2. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed.
3. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name.
4. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
5. To confirm that the setting is correct, click CONNECT. If the setting is correct, the Trunk Adaptor’s Web
Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window.
For details about the Trunk Adaptor’s Web Maintenance Console, refer to the documentation of the
Trunk Adaptor.
6. Click Next. The Set Trunk Adaptor window will open.
7. In Virtual SIP Gateway - Port Property - No. Range, specify From and To to select a range of SIP
connections to be used with the Trunk Adaptor. These numbers correspond to the No. column of the
main Port Property screen.
8. In Name: IP Address, select a name and IP address previously entered on the Trunk Adaptor List
screen.
9. In SIP Server Port Number, enter the SIP server’s port number.
10. In SIP Account / User Name, enter a 3- to 5-digit number in From.
11. Click Finish, and the following settings are implemented:
• Provider Name and SIP Server IP Address in the Main tab will be set to match the selected
Trunk Adaptor.
• The User Name and Authentication ID in the Account tab will be set to the value specified
in SIP Account / User Name, increased by 1 for each connection (i.e. if "401" was specified,
User Name and Authentication ID for No. 1 will be set to "401", and then for No. 2 they will be
set to "402", etc.).
12. In the Calling Party tab of the V-SIPGW—Port Property screen, set From Header—User Part to
PBX-CLIP for each port that was set to be used with the Trunk Adaptor.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
Connection change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of
click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in network.
On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 221

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Specifies whether to connect a SIP Provider, Trunk Adaptor Feature Manual
Connection port to a Trunk Adaptor or use it References
Attribute as a SIP gateway. 5.3.2 Trunk Adaptor
Connection
Trunk Specifies the networking type of Public, VPN
Property each SIP trunk.

Note
If Connection Attribute
is set to "Trunk Adaptor" for
the port, only "Public" will
be available for this setting.

222 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Channel Specifies the channel property Basic channel: The
Attribute of each port to enable several subscriber channel that is
sessions to be performed for assigned the SIP registration
one subscription with the SIP information.
provider. Additional channel for SlotN
(N=1–4) ChN (N=1–16): The
subordinate channel that
uses the same registration
information as a Basic
channel for SIP sessions.
Select the Slot number and
the Basic channel number to
which the Additional channel
belongs.
Not Used: The channel is
not in use.

Note
• The Basic channel
and Additional
channel can belong to
different V-SIPGW16
cards.
• When you save the
data on the Main
screen, for each
virtual SIP gateway
port that has Channel
Attribute set to Basic
channel, the following
items are checked for
duplication: SIP
Server Name, SIP
Server IP Address,
and SIP Service
Domain.
A maximum of 32
different SIP providers
can be programmed.
Provider Specifies the name of the SIP Max. 20 characters
Name provider.
SIP Specifies the domain name of Max. 100 characters Installation
Server Name the SIP proxy server. Manual
References
Note
8.6.5 DNS Client
Specify the domain name of
the outbound proxy server,
if provided by the SIP
provider.

PC Programming Manual 223

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

SIP Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Server IP SIP proxy server. This setting is
Address compulsory when not using the
DNS server.

Note
Specify the IP address of
the outbound proxy server,
if provided by the SIP
provider.
SIP Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Server IP SIP proxy server for failover.
Address for
Failover Note
Specify the IP address of
the outbound proxy server
for failover, if provided by
the SIP provider.
This setting cannot be
changed while the
V-SIPGW16 card is set to
INS.
SIP Specifies the port number of the 1–65535
Server Port SIP proxy server.
Number
SIP Specifies the domain name Max. 100 characters
Service provided by the SIP provider.
Domain
Specifies the number used as Max. 16 digits (consisting of
Subscriber the CLIP number. 0–9, , and #)
Number
Backup Specifies if the port will be used Normal, Backup PC Programming
in Master Backup mode to Manual
perform the functions of a port Note References
on the Master unit PBX when The "Backup" setting is 1.2.3.1 One-look
the Master unit PBX fails. only effective when the Networking
site the card is installed Survivability
in is designated as the
Master Backup unit. Feature Manual
References
4.2.3 One-look
Networking
Survivability

224 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

P2P Specifies the peer-to-peer 1–256 PC Programming
Group group of the IP-Trunk. Manual
References
9.5.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—
Site Property—Main
—Main—P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection
P2P Indicates the selected peer-to- P2P Group Name PC Programming
Group Name peer group’s name (reference Manual
only). References
9.5.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—
Site Property—Main
—Main—P2P Group
Name
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection

Account
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS for service.
the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
User Name Specifies the user name (SIP Account) Max. 64 characters
provided by the SIP provider.
Authentication Specifies the authentication ID required for Max. 64 characters
ID registration with the SIP server.

Authentication Specifies the authentication password used Max. 32 characters

Password for registration with the SIP provider.

Register
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

PC Programming Manual 225

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with
the network.
Register Specifies whether to send the Disable, Enable
Ability REGISTER message to the SIP server.
Register Specifies the maximum length of interval 10–86400 s
Sending Interval time after which the PBX sends the
REGISTER message.
Un-Register Specifies whether to unregister the Disable, Enable
Ability when port previous registration and send the
INS REGISTER message to the SIP server
when the port status is set back to INS.
Registrar Specifies the domain name of the SIP Max. 100 characters Installation
Server Name server. Manual
References
8.6.5 DNS
Client
Registrar Specifies the IP address of the SIP 1.0.0.0–
Server IP server. This setting is compulsory when a 223.255.255.255
Address register IP address is provided.
Registrar Specifies the IP address of the SIP 1.0.0.0–
Server IP registrar server for failover. 223.255.255.255
Address for
Failover Note
Specify the IP address of the
outbound registrar server for failover,
if provided by the SIP provider.
This setting cannot be changed while
the V-SIPGW16 card is set to INS.
Registrar Specifies the port number of the SIP 1–65535
Server Port server.
Number
Register Specifies the interval time for resending 0-65535 s
Resending the REGISTER message.
Interval (s)

NAT
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

226 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of
desired cell in the column, and then service.
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On- communicating with the
line mode. network.
STUN Server Specifies the domain name of a Max. 100 characters Installation
—Name STUN server. Manual
References
8.6.5 DNS
Client
STUN Server Specifies the IP address of the STUN 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
—IP Address server. This setting is compulsory
when the STUN method is selected
and a DNS server is not used.
STUN Server Specifies the port number of the 1–65535
Port Number STUN server.

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or OUS for the OUS: The port is out of
port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
Session Timer Enables the PBX to periodically refresh SIP Disable: This feature is
Ability sessions by sending repeated requests. not activated.
Enable (Active):
Activates this feature
only if the other device
supports the feature.
Enable (Passive):
Activates this feature
only when requested
by the other device.
Session Expire Specifies the length of time that the PBX 90–3600 s
Timer waits before terminating SIP sessions when
no reply to the repeated requests is
received.
Session Refresh Specifies the type of request that the PBX UPDATE, re-INVITE
Method sends to periodically refresh SIP sessions.
Session Incoming Specifies the type of method used for UAC, UAS
Refresher Request establishing the session interval.

PC Programming Manual 227

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

SIP 200 Response Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 0–18000 × 100 ms
Timer (*100 ms) SIP 200 (OK) response when establishing a
connection between two parties. (Specifying
"0" will disable the timer.)
SIP 18x Response Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 0–255 s
Timer (s) 18x response when establishing a
connection between two parties.
Proxy-Require Specifies option tags in a Proxy-Require Max. 100 characters
Option header field so that the SIP server is notified
that the client is behind a router with NAT
enabled and firewall.
Failover Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 0–30 s
Timer(INVITE) response for an INVITE request.
Failover Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 0–30 s
Timer(REGISTER) response for a REGISTER request.

Note
• If 0 is specified, failover operation
follows the T1/T2 timer.
• While monitoring failover with
OPTIONS, the applicable timer
setting is applied to OPTIONS as
well.
• This setting cannot be changed while
the V-SIPGW16 card is set to INS.
• This setting cannot be changed when
an additional channel is active.

Calling Party
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of service.
desired cell in the column, and then Fault: The port is not
select INS or OUS for the port. communicating with the network.
This option is only available in On-
line mode.
Header Type Specifies the header of the SIP From Header, P-Preferred-
message in which the caller Identity Header
information is stored.
From Header— Specifies the value to be stored in User Name, Authentication ID,
User Part the username part of the SIP-URI of PBX-CLIP
the From header.

228 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

From Header— Specifies the complete SIP-URI Max. 100 characters
SIP-URI address of the From header. The
configuration in From Header—User
Part will be invalid if this parameter is
set.
P-Preferred- Specifies the value to be stored in User Name, Authentication ID,
Identity Header— the username part of the SIP-URI of PBX-CLIP
User Part the P-Preferred-Identity header.
P-Preferred- Specifies the complete SIP-URI Max. 100 characters
Identity Header— address of the P-Preferred-Identity
SIP-URI header. The configuration in
P-Preferred-Identity Header—User
Part will be invalid if this parameter is
set.
Number Selects the format of the CLIP International, +International,
Format number to be sent to the called party. National
Remove Digit Specifies the number of leading digits 0–32
of the CLIP number to be removed.
This setting is compulsory when
PBX-CLIP is selected in From
Header—User Part or P-Preferred-
Identity Header—User Part.
Additional Dial Specifies the number to be added to Max. 20 digits (consisting of 0–9,
the CLIP number in the place of the *, and #)
removed digits. This setting is
compulsory when PBX-CLIP is
selected in From Header—User
Part or P-Preferred-Identity Header
—User Part.

PC Programming Manual 229

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Anonymous Specifies the format of the "From" Display name and SIP-URI,
format in "From" header when not sending caller ID. Display name only
header
Note
If "Display name and SIP-
URI" is selected, the display
name part and the SIP-URI of
the "From" header will be
displayed as "Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous
<sip:anonymous@anonymo
us.invalid>
If "Display name only" is
selected, only the display
name part of the "From"
header will be displayed as
"Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:
[email protected]>
P-Asserted- Select whether to include a Disable, Enable
Identity Header P-Asserted-Identity header with caller
information. This header will be sent Note
independent of the selection for • To copy values from one
Header Type (From Header/ location to another, click
P-Preferred-Identity Header). Copy to.
• If the Channel Attribute
setting of the port is
"Additional", the setting
cannot be changed.

Called Party
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Number Format Specifies the format of an incoming call International,
number. +International, National
Type Specifies the header of the incoming SIP Request-URI, To header
message in which the dialled number is
stored.

230 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

MEX - Prefix for Specifies the Mobile Device Access Max. 16 characters
Incoming/E.164 - prefix for incoming calls from MEX-
Prefix for own system enabled mobile devices.
MEX - Prefix for Specifies the Mobile Device Access Max. 16 characters
Outgoing/E.164 - outgoing prefix for calls made to MEX-
Prefix for other enabled mobile devices.
system
MEX/E.164 - Specifies additional digits to be inserted Max. 7 digits (consisting of
Additional Dial before the dialled number of an incoming 0–9, *, and #)
call from a MEX-enabled mobile device.

Voice/FAX
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
IP Codec Specifies the priority of the codecs to be G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A,
Priority—1st, used. None is only available for 2nd and None
2nd, 3rd 3rd priorities.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms,
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data 60 ms
(G.711A) during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms,
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data 60 ms
(G.711Mu) during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms,
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data 60 ms
(G.729A) during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for G. Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This
711 feature conserves bandwidth by detecting
silent periods during a call and suppressing
the packets of silence from being sent to
the network.

PC Programming Manual 231

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Informed Specifies whether to inform that Annex B Disable, Enable
Annex B Status for the G.729 codec is not supported.
(G.729A) Note
Annex B expansion
features for the G.729
codec are not supported
by the V-SIPGW16 card.
However, it is necessary to
inform some carriers of
this fact to avoid having
calls disconnected.
Carriers can be informed
by enabling this feature.
FAX Sending Specifies the method of transporting the G.711 Inband, T.38
Method fax signal.
Maximum Bit Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax No Speed Limit, 2400 bps,
Rate signal. 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps,
12000 bps, 14400 bps
FAX Enables the use of the FAX Detection Disable, Enable
Detection Ability Ability feature. This feature enables end-to-
end fax signal relay when the other party
prefers a codec other than G.711. This
feature functions only if the other party
supports G.711.
DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF Inband, Outband (RFC2833),
tones. Outband (SIP INFO)
Payload Specifies the payload type of RFC2833 for 96–127
Type DTMF tones.

Note
Manual programming is required if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

RTP/RTCP
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS for service.
the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
RTP QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored in ToS, DSCP, HEX
Ability the ToS field in the IP header.
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS field. 0–7
Priority

232 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Normal, Monetary Cost,
Type Reliability, Throughput,
Delay
RTP QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 0–63
DSCP DSCP for DiffServ.
RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
hexadecimal number.
RTCP Packet Specifies whether to enable each port to Disable, Enable
Sending Ability send RTCP packets.
RTCP Packet Specifies the interval time until the next 5–60 s
Interval RTCP packet is sent.
Keep Alive Specifies the length of time to send Keep 0 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 40 s,
Timer Alive packets for the connection. Specifying 50 s, 60 s
"0 s" will disable the sending of Keep Alive
packets.

T.38
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
T38 FAX Max Specifies the maximum datagram size 272–512
Datagram when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies whether to enable the Disable, Enable
Error Correction – redundancy feature when using the T.38
Redundancy protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 0–7
Redundancy count for T. messages when using the T.38 protocol.
30 messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for data 0–3
Redundancy count for when using the T.38 protocol.
data
T38 FAX Rate Specifies the rate management method Transferred TCF, Local
Management Method when using the T.38 protocol. TCF
Reject T.38 Request Specifies whether T.38 protocol data Disable, Enable
from Network requests are rejected or accepted.

PC Programming Manual 233

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

T.38 FAX NAT Specifies the NAT Traversal packet type Disable, Blank UDP
Traversal when sending or receiving faxes using
the T.38 protocol.

T.38 Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of INS: The port is in
the port, click the desired cell in the column, and service.
then select INS or OUS for the port. OUS: The port is out of
This option is only available in On-line mode. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
T38 FAX QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS, DSCP, HEX
Available ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38
protocol.
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when 0–7
ToS Priority using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when Normal, Monetary Cost,
ToS Type using the T.38 protocol. Reliability, Throughput,
Delay
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP 0–63
DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol. This
setting is compulsory when DSCP is selected in
T38 FAX QoS Available.
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
HEX hexadecimal number when using the T.38
protocol. This setting is compulsory when HEX
is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

DSP
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Echo Canceller Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms
Ability
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB
Gain (Down) down voice path.

234 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
Gain (Up) voice path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak, Normal,
setting to control echo sound quality. Strong

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
CLIP (Receive) Specify where caller information about P-Asserted-Identity Header,
an incoming call is obtained: From Header
• Prioritised: P-Asserted-Identity→P- Note
Preferred-Identity→From Header
• To copy values from
• Fixed: From Header one location to another,
click Copy to.
• If the Channel
Attribute setting of the
port is "Additional", the
setting cannot be
changed.
CLIR Specifies whether to allow restriction of Yes, No
the display of the CLIP number on the
called party’s telephone when making a
SIP trunk call.
CNIP (Send) Specifies whether to send the caller’s Yes, No
name to be displayed on the called
party’s telephone when making a SIP
trunk call.
CNIP (Receive) Specifies whether to receive the caller’s Yes, No
name to be displayed on the called
party’s telephone when receiving a SIP
trunk call.
Blind Specifies whether to allow blind Yes, No
Transfer(REFER) transfers using REFER.
Attended Specifies whether to allow attended Yes, No
Transfer(REFER) transfers using REFER.

PC Programming Manual 235

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Advanced
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Indicates the port status. To change the status INS: The port is in service.
Connection of the port, click the desired cell in the column, OUS: The port is out of
and then select INS or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line mode. Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
Diversion Enable this setting to allow the specified SIP Disable, Enable
Header trunks to detect incoming Mobile Device
Access calls from MEX-enabled mobile
devices.

236 PC Programming Manual

 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property
Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Gatekeeper Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. Disable, Enable
Available This setting can only be changed when
all V-IPGW cards are set to OUS.
RTCP Packet Specifies whether to enable the PBX to Disable, Enable
Sending Ability send RTCP packets.
RTCP Packet Specifies the length of time until the 5–60 s
Interval PBX retries to send RTCP packets when
no reply is received.
RTP QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored ToS, DSCP, HEX
Available in the ToS field of the packet.
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS 0–7
Priority field.
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Normal, Monetary
Type Cost, Reliability,
Throughput,
Delay
RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 0–63
DSCP for DiffServ.
RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
hexadecimal number.
T38 FAX QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored ToS, DSCP, HEX
Available in the ToS field in the IP header when
using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the priority level in the ToS 0–7
ToS Priority field when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Normal, Monetary
ToS Type when using the T.38 protocol. Cost, Reliability,
Throughput,
Delay
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 0–63
DSCP DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38
protocol. This setting is compulsory
when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX
QoS Available.
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
HEX hexadecimal number when using the T.
38 protocol. This setting is compulsory
when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS
Available.

PC Programming Manual 237

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Echo Canceller Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, 128 Feature Manual
Ability ms References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
(Down) down voice path. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
(Up) up voice path. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB Feature Manual
References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Disable, Weak, Feature Manual
Processor) setting to control echo sound Normal, Strong References
quality. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
QSIG-CT Enables a call to be transferred to a No, Yes Feature Manual
destination extension at another PBX in References
a QSIG network. 4.3.4.4 Call Transfer
(CT)—by QSIG
QSIG-CF Enables a call to be forwarded to a No, Yes Feature Manual
destination extension at another PBX in References
a QSIG network. 4.3.4.3 Call
Forwarding (CF)—
by QSIG
Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each Public, Private,
trunk. VPN

Outgoing Call
Name Description Value Range Links
First-digit Timer Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a 5–30 s
(T302-1) dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP trunk.
Inter-digit Timer Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits 1–10 s
(T302-2) of a dial number must be dialled.
Dial End Code Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of 0–9, #, *
a dialled number.

238 PC Programming Manual

 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Incoming Call
Name Description Value Range Links
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for G. Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
711 This feature conserves bandwidth by
detecting silent periods during a call and
suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network.
Voice Codec Specifies the highest priority codec type. G.711A, G.711Mu,
Priority 1st For fax communications, it is necessary G.729A
to specify G.711A or G.711Mu for this
parameter.
Voice Codec Specifies the second highest priority None, G.711A, G.
Priority 2nd codec type. 711Mu, G.729A
Voice Codec Specifies the third highest priority codec None, G.711A, G.
Priority 3rd type. 711Mu, G.729A
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40
Time for G.711A measurements (samples) of sound data ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40
Time for G.711Mu measurements (samples) of sound data ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40
Time for G.729A measurements (samples) of sound data ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
FAX Detection Enables the use of the FAX Detection Disable, Enable PC
Ability Ability feature. Since fax signals using a Programming
codec other than G.711 cannot be Manual
received accurately at the destination, References
this feature automatically switches the
9.12 PBX
codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax
Configuration—
signal relay over the network.
[1-1]
Configuration—
Slot—V-IPGW16
—Shelf Property
—Incoming Call—
Voice Codec
Priority 1st
FAX Sending Specifies the method of transporting the G.711 Inband, T.38
Method fax signal.

PC Programming Manual 239

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the No Speed Limit,
fax signal. 2400 bps, 4800
bps, 7200 bps,
9600 bps, 12000
bps, 14400 bps
DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be Inband, Outband
sent out. (RFC2833),
Outband (H.245)
Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF 96–127
tones using RFC2833. Programming
this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
T38 FAX Max Specifies the maximum datagram size 272–512
Datagram when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies whether to enable the Disable, Enable
Error Correction – redundancy feature when using the T.38
Redundancy protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 0–7
Redundancy count messages when using the T.38 protocol.
for T.30 messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for data 0–3
Redundancy count when using the T.38 protocol.
for data
T38 FAX Rate Specifies the rate management method Transferred TCF,
Management when using the T.38 protocol. Local TCF
Method

Timer
Name Description Value Range Links
T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–18000 × 100 ms
making a call.
T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an 0–600 × 100 ms
incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the SETUP (call setting) message.
T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an 0–3000 × 100 ms
outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–3000 × 100 ms
sending the DISC (disconnection) message.
T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
receiving the Release message.
T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect 0–3000 × 100 ms
the data link, before disconnecting the call.

240 PC Programming Manual

 9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance 0–3000 × 100 ms
message after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message.
T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Connect message.
T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–3000 × 100 ms
sending the Restart message.
T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Resume message.
T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Suspend message.
T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Status enquiry message.
T3D3 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish 0–3000 × 100 ms
L2 in "Permanent" mode.
T3D9 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect 0–3000 × 100 ms
L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

9.12.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings
Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Destination Specifies a telephone number to register Max. 30 digits (consisting of
Number with a gatekeeper. 0–9)
Device Name Specifies the name of the device for Max. 20 characters
programming reference.

9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf

Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route
incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX.
A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.

Hunt Pattern 1–16

Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading digits of Max. 30 digits
Number dialled numbers by which to (consisting of 0–9)
determine the call distribution
port group to direct incoming
calls.

PC Programming Manual 241

9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Distribution Specifies the number of the For 1st: PC Programming Manual
Port Group— call distribution port group to CDPG1–CDPG48 References
1st–16th which incoming calls are For 2nd–16th: 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
directed in priority. None, CDPG1– Configuration—Slot—
CDPG48 V-IPGW16—Port Property—
Call Distribution Port Group
Feature Manual References
4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port
Group

242 PC Programming Manual

 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property

9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPGW16—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Trunk Adaptor
To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
1. Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be
set are OUS.
2. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed.
3. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name.
4. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
5. To confirm that the setting is correct, click CONNECT. If the setting is correct, the Trunk Adaptor’s Web
Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window.
For details about the Trunk Adaptor’s Web Maintenance Console, refer to the documentation of the
Trunk Adaptor.
6. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell service.
in the column, and then select INS or OUS: The port is out of
OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
Connection Specifies whether to connect a port to Gateway, Trunk Feature Manual
Attribute a Trunk Adaptor or use it as an IP Adaptor References
gateway. 5.3.2 Trunk
Adaptor
Connection
Call Specifies a call distribution port group 1–48 Feature Manual
Distribution to which incoming trunk calls are References
Port Group directed through the virtual VoIP 4.3.2.3 Call
gateway port. Distribution Port
Group
Ringback Tone Enables the PBX to send a ringback Disable, Enable
to Outside tone to an outside caller when the
Caller network cannot send the tone.

PC Programming Manual 243

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPEXT32—Card Property
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Signalling Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to 1024– Feature Manual
(PTAP) UDP transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony 65535 References
Port No. Administration Protocol) data. This must be 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
(Server) changed if another network application is using the Telephone (IP-PT)
same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common
Settings and set the desired value.
Signalling Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to 1024– Feature Manual
(MGCP) UDP transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway 65535 References
Port No. Control Protocol) data. This must be changed if 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
(Server) another network application is using the same port. Telephone (IP-PT)
To change the value displayed here, click Common
Settings and set the desired value.
Signalling Indicates the UDP port used to transmit and receive 2427 Feature Manual
(MGCP) UDP MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on References
Port No. (IP- the IP-PT side (reference only). 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
PT) Telephone (IP-PT)
Keep Alive Specifies the length of time that the PBX will Disable, Feature Manual
Time-Out continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it 10–120 s References
receives no transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs. If no Telephone (IP-PT)
communications are received from an IP-PT for the
duration specified here, the PBX considers the
IP-PT to be unreachable, and sets the port status to
Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s.
Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for
debugging purposes, and IP-PTs cannot be
guaranteed to function normally in these
circumstances. Do not use debugging settings
unless instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common
Settings and set the desired value.
First Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits 500 × n Feature Manual
Resending before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic (n=1–16) References
Time (PTAP) Telephony Administration Protocol) data. ms 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
To change the value displayed here, click Common Telephone (IP-PT)
Settings and set the desired value.
Resending Specifies the length of time after which the PBX 150–240 s Feature Manual
Time Out terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony References
(PTAP) Administration Protocol) data. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
To change the value displayed here, click Common Telephone (IP-PT)
Settings and set the desired value.

244 PC Programming Manual

 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Value
Name Description Links
Range
First Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits 500 × n Feature Manual
Resending before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway (n=1–8) References
Time Control Protocol) data. ms 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
(MGCP) To change the value displayed here, click Common Telephone (IP-PT)
Settings and set the desired value.
Resending Specifies the length of time after which the PBX 75–120 s Feature Manual
Time Out terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway References
(MGCP) Control Protocol) data. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
To change the value displayed here, click Common Telephone (IP-PT)
Settings and set the desired value.
Echo Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 Feature Manual
Canceller ms, 128 References
Ability Note ms 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this Telephone (IP-PT)
setting, the setting for Echo Cancellation
Ability in 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card
Property—Main is applied.
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice -14–6 dB Feature Manual
Gain (Down) path. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Note
Telephone (IP-PT)
For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this
setting, the setting for DSP Digital Gain
(Down) in 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card
Property—Main is applied.
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice -14–6 dB Feature Manual
Gain (Up) path. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Note
Telephone (IP-PT)
For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this
setting, the setting for DSP Digital Gain (Up) in
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main is
applied.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB Feature Manual
References
Note
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this Telephone (IP-PT)
setting, the setting for EC Gain in 9.20 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main is applied.

PC Programming Manual 245

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Value
Name Description Links
Range
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to Disable, Feature Manual
control echo sound quality. Weak, References
Normal, 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Note Strong Telephone (IP-PT)
For KX-NT500 series phones, in place of this
setting, the setting for NLP Setting in 9.20
PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main is
applied.

246 PC Programming Manual

 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPEXT32—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port.

IP-PT Registration and De-registration

An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
IP-PT Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Note
Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration cannot be performed for ports set as secondary
extensions. For details, see Secondary Setting below.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Preparation Open 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic
Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of the mother board and
DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if
necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension
numbers and names are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT
will update to show "Registered".

PC Programming Manual 247

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Value
Name Description Links
Range
De- Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-
registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-PT will update to show "None".
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal
registration de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have
been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-PT will update to show "None".

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
Settings for ports that have been set as secondary ports for IP extensions in the Secondary Setting tab
cannot be changed on this screen.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number number of the port. of 0–9) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone
(IP-PT)

248 PC Programming Manual

 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name name of the port. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone
(IP-PT)
Connection Indicates the port status. INS: The port is in Feature Manual
To change the status of service. References
the port, click the desired OUS: The port is out of 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone
cell in the column, and service. (IP-PT)
then select INS or OUS Fault: The port is not
for the port. communicating with the
This option is only network.
available in On-line mode.
Status Indicates whether a None, Registered Feature Manual
certain IP-PT is registered References
(reference only). 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone
(IP-PT)
IP Phone Specifies the MAC 00:00:00:00:00:00– Feature Manual
Registration address of the IP-PT. FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF References
ID (MAC This parameter can only 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone
Address) be modified when (IP-PT)
Connection on this
screen is set to OUS.
Current IP Indicates the current IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
Address address of the IP-PT 223.255.255.255 References
(reference only). 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone
(IP-PT)
Program Ver. Indicates the programme Version number Feature Manual
software file version of the References
IP-PT (reference only). 5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone
(IP-PT)
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer 1–256 PC Programming Manual
group of the IP-PT. References
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Site
Property—Main—Main—P2P
Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection

PC Programming Manual 249

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

P2P Group Indicates the selected P2P Group Name PC Programming Manual
Name peer-to-peer group’s References
name (reference only). 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Site
Property—Main—Main—P2P
Group Name
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number port. (consisting of 0–9) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name port. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in Feature Manual
the status of the port, click the desired service. References
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
or OUS for the port. of service. Telephone (IP-PT)
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with
the network.
Headset Turns on or off the use of a headset Headset OFF, Feature Manual
OFF/ON with the IP-PT. Headset ON References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
C.Waiting When headset mode is enabled, PT-Tone, Headset Feature Manual
with Headset selects whether a call waiting tone is References
heard through the telephone's speaker 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting
phone or the ear piece of the headset. Tone
However, this setting is available only
for telephones that support both EHS
headsets and waiting tone path
switching. (KX-NT556, KX-NT553 only)

250 PC Programming Manual

 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 Feature Manual
of the ring tone for incoming calls. ms (852 Hz) References
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
ms (852 Hz) Telephone (IP-PT)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz),
128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96
ms (852 Hz)
IP Codec Specifies the codec used for G.711, G.729A, G.722 Feature Manual
Priority compression and decompression of References
transmitted data. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Some codecs may become unavailable Telephone (IP-PT)
depending on the value set here, as
follows:
– When G.722 is selected, the priority
is G.722 → G.711 → G.729A.
– When G.711 is selected, the priority
is G.711 → G.729A (G.722 is
unavailable).
– When G.729A is selected, both G.
711 and G.722 are unavailable.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
711/G.722) The smaller this number, the higher the Telephone (IP-PT)
quality of the transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
729A) The smaller this number, the higher the Telephone (IP-PT)
quality of the transmitted sound.
Announce Specifies if the extension’s built-in Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Mode ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. A References
KX-NT265, KX-NT300 series, or 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
KX-NT500 series phone in a remote Telephone (IP-PT)
location with ANNOUNCE enabled can
provide the PBX’s IP Address
information to other terminals in the
remote location in place of manually
programming the PBX’s IP address at
each terminal.

Voice
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

PC Programming Manual 251

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number port. (consisting of 0–9) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Note
Telephone (IP-PT)
This setting cannot be changed on
this screen until the port has been
assigned as a secondary port using
the Set Secondary command. See
Setting Secondary Ports below for
details.
Extension Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name port. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Note
Telephone (IP-PT)
This setting cannot be changed on
this screen until the port has been
assigned as a secondary port using
the Set Secondary command. See
Setting Secondary Ports below for
details.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in Feature Manual
status of the port, click the desired cell in service. References
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
for the port. of service. Telephone (IP-PT)
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with
the network.
DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be Inband, Outband Feature Manual
sent out. (RFC2833) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Payload Specifies the payload type for DTMF 96–127 Feature Manual
Type tones using RFC2833. Programming this References
parameter is only necessary if DTMF is 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
set to Outband (RFC2833). Telephone (IP-PT)

Secondary Setting
The settings on this screen are for programming the Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX feature for use
among IP extensions in a networked environment. For details and conditions regarding the use of this
feature, refer to "4.2.3.2 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX" in the Feature Manual.

Setting Secondary Ports

Follow the steps below to designate secondary ports for IP extensions.
1. Specify the secondary ports.
a. Access the port property screen of the site where the ports will be set as secondary ports.
b. In Primary/Secondary, set the unused ports that will be used as secondary ports to "Secondary".

252 PC Programming Manual

 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Note
Ports that have already been registered (A value other than the default of "00:00:00:00:00:00" is
set for IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) on the Main tab) cannot be set to
"Secondary" here.
2. Access the port property screen of the site where primary ports will be assigned secondary ports.
3. Click Set Secondary. A dialogue box will appear.
4. From the drop-down list, select a site where secondary ports will be assigned.
Note
The number displayed for Available ports indicates the maximum number of available ports at the
selected site that can be registered as secondary ports.
5. Extensions’ primary ports and names are displayed on the left. Select the extensions for which to want
to register secondary ports, and then click the right arrow.

Note
Ports that are already assigned as secondary ports will not be displayed in this list.
6. Click Execute. A message confirming the registration will be displayed.
7. Repeat steps 2–6 for each site where you want to designate secondary ports.
Removing Secondary Port Settings
Follow the steps below to remove secondary port settings for IP extensions.
1. Click Remove Secondary. A dialogue box will appear.
2. Primary ports of extensions that have secondary ports assigned are displayed on the left. Select the
extensions whose secondary setting you want to remove, and then click the right arrow.
3. Click Execute. A message confirming the setting removal will be displayed.

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the port. Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (consisting of 0–9) References
Note
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
This setting cannot be changed on this Telephone (IP-PT)
screen until the port has been assigned
as a secondary port using the Set
Secondary command. See Setting
Secondary Ports above for details.
Extension Specifies the extension name of the port. Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name References
Note
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
This setting cannot be changed on this Telephone (IP-PT)
screen until the port has been assigned
as a secondary port using the Set
Secondary command. See Setting
Secondary Ports above for details.

PC Programming Manual 253

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in Feature Manual
status of the port, click the desired cell in service. References
the column, and then select INS or OUS for OUS: The port is 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
the port. out of service. Telephone (IP-PT)
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is
mode. not communicating
with the network.
Primary/ Specifies the designation of the port as a Primary, Secondary Feature Manual
Secondary primary port or secondary port. References
4.2.3.2 Automatic
Note
Rerouting to
If an extension has been registered to Secondary PBX
the port, this setting cannot be changed
from "Primary" to "Secondary". De-
register the port to change this setting.
Pair Site Indicates the site where the assigned Site number and Feature Manual
secondary port is located (reference only). name References
4.2.3.2 Automatic
Note
Rerouting to
A value will be displayed here only after Secondary PBX
the Set Secondary command has been
executed (see above).
Pair Slot Indicates the number of the virtual card slot Virtual slot number Feature Manual
in the site where the assigned secondary References
port is located (reference only). 4.2.3.2 Automatic
Rerouting to
Note
Secondary PBX
A value will be displayed here only after
the Set Secondary command has been
executed (see above).
Pair Port Indicates the port number of the assigned Port number Feature Manual
secondary port (reference only). References
4.2.3.2 Automatic
Note
Rerouting to
A value will be displayed here only after Secondary PBX
the Set Secondary command has been
executed (see above).

Remote Place
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

254 PC Programming Manual

 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number port. of 0–9) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Note
Telephone (IP-PT)
This setting cannot be changed
on this screen until the port has
been assigned as a secondary
port using the Set Secondary
command. See Setting
Secondary Ports above for
details.
Extension Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name port. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Note
Telephone (IP-PT)
This setting cannot be changed
on this screen until the port has
been assigned as a secondary
port using the Set Secondary
command. See Setting
Secondary Ports above for
details.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in Feature Manual
the status of the port, click the service. References
desired cell in the column, and then OUS: The port is out of 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
select INS or OUS for the port. This service. Telephone (IP-PT)
option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
Phone Specifies the type of extension Local: The extension is Feature Manual
Location connected to the port. located on the same References
network as the PBX 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
(standard configuration). Telephone (IP-PT)
Remote (MRG): The
extension is accessing
the PBX remotely (use
Media Relay Gateway).

PC Programming Manual 255

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property
The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Canceller Specifies the echo canceller OFF, 64 ms, Feature Manual References
Ability ability time. 128 ms 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital -14–6 dB Feature Manual References
Gain (Down) Gain for the down voice path. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital -14–6 dB Feature Manual References
Gain (Up) Gain for the up voice path. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller -14–6 dB Feature Manual References
Gain. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non- Disable, Weak, Feature Manual References
Linear Processor) setting to Normal, Strong 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
control echo sound quality. Protocol) Extension

256 PC Programming Manual

 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number number of the port. of 0–9) References
5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
Password Specifies the password used 4–16 characters Feature Manual
for registering a SIP (consisting of 0–9, a–z, References
Extension to the PBX. While A–Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
it is possible to enter a Protocol) Extension
password manually for each
SIP Extension, you can copy
Extension Number to
Password by clicking the
Copy to button. This
parameter can only be
modified when the virtual
SIP extension port is set to
OUS, and the programmer
must be in On-line mode.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in Feature Manual
change the status of the service. References
port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
the column, and then select service. Protocol) Extension
INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available communicating with the
in On-line mode. network.
Current IP Indicates the current IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
Address address of the SIP Extension 223.255.255.255 References
(reference only). 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer 1–256 PC Programming Manual
group. References
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Site
Property—Main—Main—P2P
Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection

PC Programming Manual 257

9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

P2P Group Indicates the selected peer- P2P Group Name PC Programming Manual
Name to-peer group’s name References
(reference only). 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Site
Property—Main—Main—P2P
Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—
[3-10] Group—P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection
MWI Method Selects the method of Standard, Unsolicited Feature Manual
receiving Message Waiting References
Indications for SIP Note
2.20.1 Message Waiting
extensions. If "Standard" is 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
selected, a Protocol) Extension
maximum of 64 SIP
extensions can be
used.

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number port. (consisting of 0–9) References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to the (consisting of 0–9, a–z, References
PBX. While it is possible to enter a A–Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
password manually for each SIP Initiation Protocol)
Extension, you can copy the value for Extension
Extension Number to Password by
clicking the Copy to button. This
parameter can only be modified when
the virtual SIP extension port is set to
OUS, and the programmer must be in
On-line mode.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in Feature Manual
the status of the port, click the desired service References
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out of 5.2.2 SIP (Session
or OUS for the port. This option is only service Initiation Protocol)
available in On-line mode. Fault: The port is not Extension
communicating with
the network.

258 PC Programming Manual

 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Bearer Selects the bearer mode. When Automatic, Speech, Feature Manual
Automatic is selected, the bearer Audio References
mode is set to Speech automatically. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 50 ms, 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. The 5.2.2 SIP (Session
711/G.722) smaller this number, the higher the Initiation Protocol)
quality of the transmitted sound. Extension
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 50 ms, 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. The 5.2.2 SIP (Session
729A) smaller this number, the higher the Initiation Protocol)
quality of the transmitted sound. Extension

Remote Place
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number the port. 0–9) References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters (consisting Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to the of 0–9, a–z, A–Z) References
PBX. While it is possible to enter a 5.2.2 SIP (Session
password manually for each SIP Initiation Protocol)
Extension, you can copy the value Extension
for Extension Number to
Password by clicking the Copy to
button. This parameter can only be
modified when the virtual SIP
extension port is set to OUS, and
the programmer must be in On-line
mode.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service Feature Manual
change the status of the port, click OUS: The port is out of References
the desired cell in the column, and service 5.2.2 SIP (Session
then select INS or OUS for the Fault: The port is not Initiation Protocol)
port. This option is only available in communicating with the Extension
On-line mode. network.

PC Programming Manual 259

9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Phone Specifies the type of extension Local: The extension is Feature Manual
Location connected to the port. located on the same References
network as the PBX 5.2.2 SIP (Session
(standard configuration). Initiation Protocol)
Remote (MRG): The Extension
extension is accessing the
PBX remotely (Media Relay
Gateway).

FAX/T.38
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number of the port. (consisting of 0–9) References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to (consisting of 0–9, a– References
the PBX. While it is possible to z, A–Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
enter a password manually for Initiation Protocol)
each SIP Extension, you can Extension
copy the value for Extension
Number to Password by
clicking the Copy to button. This
parameter can only be modified
when the virtual SIP extension
port is set to OUS, and the
programmer must be in On-line
mode.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in Feature Manual
change the status of the port, service References
click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out 5.2.2 SIP (Session
column, and then select INS or of service Initiation Protocol)
OUS for the port. This option is Fault: The port is not Extension
only available in On-line mode. communicating with
the network.
FAX Detection Enables the use of the FAX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Ability Detection Ability feature. References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
FAX Sending Specifies the method of G.711 Inband, T.38 Feature Manual
Method transporting the fax signal. References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension

260 PC Programming Manual

 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Maximum Bit Specifies the maximum bit rate No Speed Limit, 2400 Feature Manual
Rate of the fax signal. bps, 4800 bps, 7200 References
bps, 9600 bps, 12000 5.2.2 SIP (Session
bps, 14400 bps Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX Max Specifies the maximum 272–512 Feature Manual
Datagram datagram size when using the T. References
38 protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies whether to enable the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Error Correction redundancy feature when using References
– Redundancy the T.38 protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count 0–7 Feature Manual
Redundancy for T.30 messages when using References
count for T.30 the T.38 protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
messages Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count 0–3 Feature Manual
Redundancy for data when using the T.38 References
count for data protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX Rate Specifies the rate management Transferred TCF, Feature Manual
Management method when using the T.38 Local TCF References
Method protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension

PC Programming Manual 261

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPCS4—Card Property
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Signalling Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and 1024–
(PTAP) UDP receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) 65535
Port No. data. This must be changed if another network application is
(Server) using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Signalling Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and 1024–
(MGCP) UDP receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. This 65535
Port No. must be changed if another network application is using the
(Server) same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Signalling Indicates the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP 2427
(MGCP) UDP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the IP-CS side
Port No. (IP- (reference only).
CS)
Voice (RTP) Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Real- 1024–
UDP Port No. time Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-CS side. This must be 65024
(IP-CS) changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-CS uses 128 contiguous UDP
ports, starting from the port number specified here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Keep Alive Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to Disable,
Time-Out consider an IP-CS to be active even if it receives no 10–120 s
transmissions from that IP-CS. The PBX constantly confirms the
status of IP-CSs. If no communications are received from an
IP-CS for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the
IP-CS to be unreachable, and sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60
s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes, and IP-CSs
cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these
circumstances. Do not use debugging settings unless instructed
to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
First Resending Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to 500 × n
Time (PTAP) resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) (n=1–16)
data. ms
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.

262 PC Programming Manual

 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Resending Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates 150–240 s
Time Out resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol)
(PTAP) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
First Resending Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to 500 × n
Time (MGCP) resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. (n=1–8) ms
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Resending Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates 75–120 s
Time Out resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data.
(MGCP) To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
CS Repeater Specifies the CS Repeater Mode setting. If Normal is selected, Normal,
Mode DECT communication will not be encrypted. Optional
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.

PC Programming Manual 263

9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPCS4—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port.

IP-CS Registration and De-registration

An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-CS later.
IP-CS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Note
Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration cannot be performed for ports set as secondary
IP-CSs. For details, see Secondary Setting below.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Preparation Open 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic
Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of the mother board and
DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration Follow the steps below to register the IP-CS.
1. Connect the IP-CS to be registered to the network and, if
necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) IP-CSs are
displayed on the left.
3. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for
registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully registered, the status of the IP-CS
will update to show "Registered".
De- Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-CS.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for de-
registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-
registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-CS will update to show "None".

264 PC Programming Manual

 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-CS when normal
registration de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have
been changed or deleted only on the IP-CS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for forced
de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-CS will update to show "None".

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Max. 20 characters
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the service.
desired cell in the column, and then OUS: The port is out of
select INS or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On- Fault: The port is not
line mode. communicating with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain IP-CS is None, Registered
registered (reference only).
Channel Specifies whether to expand the For KX-NS0154: Yes,
expansion number of channels for the IP-CS. No
This setting is available only for For other IP-CSs: -
KX-NS0154 IP-CSs. This setting will (hyphen)
be greyed out if the IP-CS’s port is
not set to OUS, or a non-supported
type of IP-CS (e.g., KX-NCP0158) is
connected to the port.
MAC Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
Address IP-CS (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Current IP Indicates the current IP address of 1.0.0.0–
Address the IP-CS (reference only). 223.255.255.255

PC Programming Manual 265

9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Program Ver. Indicates the programme software Version number
file version of the IP-CS (reference
only).
Air Sync Assigns an Air Synchronisation None, 1–16 PC Programming
Group No Group number to the IP-CS. Manual
This setting is available only if the References
IP-CS’s port is set to OUS.
19.2.1 PBX
Configuration—
[11-2-1] Maintenance
—CS
Synchronisation—Air
Synchronisation
LAN Sync Specifies the LAN sync group None, 1–16 PC Programming
Group No. number when using an IP-CS Manual
(KX-NS0154 only) in a LAN sync References
group. A maximum of 64 IP-CSs can
19.2.2 PBX
be assigned to one group.
Configuration—
This setting is available only if the
[11-2-2] Maintenance
IP-CS’s port is set to OUS.
—CS
Synchronisation—
LAN Synchronisation
19.2.3 PBX
Configuration—
[11-2-3] Maintenance
—CS
Synchronisation—
LAN Sync Group
Setting

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Max. 20 characters
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of INS: The port is in
the port, click the desired cell in the column, and service.
then select INS or OUS for the port. OUS: The port is out of
This option is only available in On-line mode. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
IP Codec Specifies the codec used for compression and G.711, G.729A
Priority decompression of transmitted data.
Packet Specifies the time interval between measurements 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time (samples) of sound data during a conversation. ms, 60 ms
(G.711) The smaller this number, the higher the quality of
the transmitted sound.

266 PC Programming Manual

 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Packet Specifies the time interval between measurements 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time (samples) of sound data during a conversation. ms, 60 ms
(G.729A) The smaller this number, the higher the quality of
the transmitted sound.
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection Disable, Enable
Detection for G. feature for the G.711 codec. This feature
711 conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods
during a call and suppressing the packets of
silence from being sent to the network.
Announce Specifies if the IP-CS’s (KX-NS0154 only) built-in Disable, Enable
Mode ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. An IP-CS
(KX-NS0154 only) in a remote location with
ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the PBX’s IP
Address information to other terminals in the
remote location in place of manually programming
the PBX’s IP address at each terminal.

Secondary Setting
The settings on this screen are for programming the Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX feature for use
among IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) in a networked environment. For details and conditions regarding the use
of this feature, refer to "4.2.3.2 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX" in the Feature Manual.

Setting Secondary Ports

Follow the steps below to designate secondary ports for IP-CSs.
1. Specify the secondary ports.
a. Access the port property screen of the site where the ports will be set as secondary ports.
b. In Primary/Secondary, set the unused ports that will be used as secondary ports to "Secondary".

Note
Ports that have already been registered (A value other than the default of "00:00:00:00:00:00" is set
for MAC Address on the Main tab) cannot be set to "Secondary" here.
2. Access the port property screen of the site where primary ports will be assigned secondary ports.
3. Click Set Secondary. A dialogue box will appear.
4. From the drop-down list, select a site where secondary ports will be assigned.
Note
The number displayed for Available ports indicates the maximum number of available ports at the
selected site that can be registered as secondary ports.
5. IP-CSs’ primary ports and names are displayed on the left. Select the IP-CSs for which to want to
register secondary ports, and then click the right arrow.

Note
Ports that are already assigned as secondary ports will not be displayed in this list.
6. Click Execute. A message confirming the registration will be displayed.
7. Repeat steps 2–6 for each site where you want to designate secondary ports.

PC Programming Manual 267

9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Removing Secondary Port Settings

Follow the steps below to remove secondary port settings for IP-CSs.
1. Click Remove Secondary. A dialogue box will appear.
2. Primary ports of IP-CSs that have secondary ports assigned are displayed on the left. Select the IP-CSs
whose secondary setting you want to remove, and then click the right arrow.
3. Click Execute. A message confirming the setting removal will be displayed.

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies the IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only) Max. 20 characters
name of the port.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or OUS for the OUS: The port is out
port. of service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is
mode. not communicating
with the network.
Primary/ Specifies the designation of the port as a Primary, Secondary Feature Manual
Secondary primary port or secondary port. References
4.2.3.2 Automatic
Note
Rerouting to
If an IP-CS has been registered to the Secondary PBX
port, this setting cannot be changed
from "Primary" to "Secondary". De-
register the port to change this setting.
Pair Site Indicates the site where the assigned Site number and Feature Manual
secondary port is located (reference only). name References
4.2.3.2 Automatic
Note
Rerouting to
A value will be displayed here only after Secondary PBX
the Set Secondary command has been
executed (see above).
Pair Slot Indicates the slot number of the assigned Slot number Feature Manual
secondary port (reference only). References
4.2.3.2 Automatic
Note
Rerouting to
A value will be displayed here only after Secondary PBX
the Set Secondary command has been
executed (see above).
Pair Port Indicates the port number of the assigned Port number Feature Manual
secondary port (reference only). References
4.2.3.2 Automatic
Note
Rerouting to
A value will be displayed here only after Secondary PBX
the Set Secondary command has been
executed (see above).

268 PC Programming Manual

 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Remote Place
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies the IP-CS Max. 20 characters
(KX-NS0154 only) name of the
port.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service. Feature Manual
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of service. References
click the desired cell in the Fault: The port is not 5.2.6 IP-CS
column, and then select INS or communicating with the (KX-NS0154)
OUS for the port. network.
This option is only available in
On-line mode.
Phone Specifies the location of IP-CS Local: The IP-CS is located on Feature Manual
Location (KX-NS0154 only) connected to the same network as the PBX References
the port. (standard configuration). 5.2.6 IP-CS
Remote (MRG): The IP-CS is (KX-NS0154)
accessing the PBX remotely
(use Media Relay Gateway).

PC Programming Manual 269

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-UTEXT32—Card Property
Various settings can be programmed for V-UTEXT32 cards.
Click Common Settings to change these settings.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 8, 16, 24,
Ability 32, 40, 48, 56,
64, 72, 80, 88,
96, 104, 112,
120, 128 ms
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down -14–6 dB
(Down) voice path.
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
(Up) voice path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak,
setting to control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong
PERIODIC Inform Specifies whether alive monitoring is Enable, Disable
performed for connected extensions.
PERIODIC Inform Specifies the polling interval for alive 30–3600 s
Interval monitoring when PERIODIC Inform is set to
"Enable".
INFORM Specifies the number of times the PERIODIC 2–10 times
retransmission Inform is sent for extensions when attempting
counter to establish a connection.
NTP Query Interval Specifies the interval at which connected 1–24 hours
extensions poll the specified NTP server for a
time update.
Failover Timer (For Specifies the time period after which a SIP- 0–64 s Feature
S-PS/SIP-CS) CS that cannot connect to its primary PBX will Manual
re-route to its assigned secondary PBX. References
Note 4.2.3.2
Automatic
For SIP-CSs, primary PBX and secondary Rerouting to
PBX settings must be made through the Secondary
Web programming interface of the Master PBX
SIP-CS or through configuration file
programming. For details, refer to the
documentation of the SIP-CS.

270 PC Programming Manual

 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-UTEXT32—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for the ports of V-UTEXT32 cards.

KX-UT Series SIP Phone, S-PS, and SIP-CS Registration and De-registration
A KX-UT series SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and
SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS later.
Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Note
Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration cannot be performed for ports set as secondary
extensions. For details, see Secondary Setting below.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Preparation Open 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic
Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of the mother board and
DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration Follow the steps below to register a SIP phone.
1. Connect the device to be registered to the network and, if
necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension
numbers and names are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the device is successfully registered, the status of the device
will update to show "Registered".

Note
S-PSs and SIP-CSs will be automatically registered to the PBX
after settings have been made via CS web programming for the
Super Master CS. For details, refer to the documentation for the
SIP-CS.

PC Programming Manual 271

9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Value
Name Description Links
Range
De- Follow the steps below to de-register a SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-
registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the device is successfully de-registered, the status of the
device will update to show "None".
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register a SIP phone, S-PS, or
registration SIP-CS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP
address settings have been changed or deleted only on the target
device.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the device is successfully de-registered, the status of the
device will update to show "None".
SIP-CS Web To access the system’s Super Master CS for related programming,
click SIP-CS Web. The CS Web login screen will open in your web
browser.

Note
For this button to be enabled, you must specify the URL of the
Super Master CS on the Utility—CS-Web Connection screen.
See 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection.

Main
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

272 PC Programming Manual

 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Note
Settings for ports that have been set as secondary ports for IP extensions in the Secondary Setting tab
cannot be changed on this screen.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number the port. 0–9) References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Extension Specifies the extension name of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name the port. References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Telephone Specifies the connected device UT: A KX-UT series SIP Feature Manual
Type type. phone is connected. References
S-PS: A SIP Portable Station 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Note phone is connected. Initiation Protocol)
• This setting cannot be SIP-CS: A SIP Cell Station is Extension
changed if a device has connected.
already been registered for Master-CS: A SIP Master
the port. De-register the Cell Station is connected.
device set for the port
before changing the setting.
• To change this setting when
programming in Off-line
mode, and a device is
already registered to the
port, change the setting of
IP Phone Registration ID
(MAC Address) for the port
to "00:00:00:00:00:00", and
then click Apply. The
setting can then be
changed.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service. Feature Manual
change the status of the port, click OUS: The port is out of References
the desired cell in the column, and service. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
then select INS or OUS for the Fault: The port is not Initiation Protocol)
port. communicating with the Extension
This option is only available in On- network.
line mode.
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters (consisting Feature Manual
registering a SIP phone, S-PS, or of 0–9, a–z, A–Z) References
SIP-CS to the PBX. This 5.2.2 SIP (Session
parameter can only be modified Initiation Protocol)
when the virtual SIP extension port Extension
is set to OUS.

PC Programming Manual 273

9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Status Indicates whether a certain SIP None, Registered Feature Manual
phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS is References
registered (reference only). 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
IP Phone Specifies the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00– Feature Manual
Registration SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS. FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF References
ID (MAC This parameter can only be 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Address) modified when Connection on this Note
Initiation Protocol)
screen is set to OUS. For S-PSs and SIP-CSs, Extension
this value will be
"FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF".
Current IP Indicates the current IP address of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Feature Manual
Address the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS References
(reference only). 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Program Indicates the programme software Version number Feature Manual
Ver. file version of the SIP phone References
(reference only). 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Note
Extension
Software file version numbers
are not displayed for S-PSs or
SIP-CSs.
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group. 1–256 PC Programming
Manual
References
11.10 PBX
Configuration—
[3-10] Group—P2P
Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection

274 PC Programming Manual

 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

P2P Group Indicates the selected peer-to-peer P2P Group Name PC Programming
Name group’s name (reference only). Manual
References
11.10 PBX
Configuration—
[3-10] Group—P2P
Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection

Option
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number port. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 characters
port.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the desired service.
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out
or OUS for the port. of service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with
the network.
System Speed Specifies if the connected SIP phone Enable, Disable PC
Dial Download will download system speed dial Programming
entries from the PBX. Manual
References
9.4 PBX
Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration
—Slot—System
Property—Main—
System Speed
Dial Download For
UT Extensions
SIP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by 0–63
a DSCP for DiffServ.
RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by 0–63
a DSCP for DiffServ.

PC Programming Manual 275

9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

UT Codec Specifies the priority of the codecs to G.722, G711A, G.
Priority - 1st— be used. None is only available for 729A, G711Mu, None
UT Codec 2nd, 3rd, and 4th priorities.
Priority - 4th
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms
Time measurements (samples) of sound
data during a conversation. The
smaller this number, the higher the
quality of the transmitted sound.
Jitter Buffer - Specifies the maximum size of the 3–50 ms
Maximum Delay jitter buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer - Specifies the minimum size of the 1–2 ms
Minimum Delay jitter buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer - Specifies the initial size of the jitter 1–7 ms
Initial Delay buffer for voice communications.
Gain Type Specifies the type of gain file to Default, Type1, Type2,
distribute to connected SIP devices. Type3

Secondary Setting
The settings on this screen are for programming the Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX feature for use
among IP extensions in a networked environment. For details and conditions regarding the use of this
feature, refer to "4.2.3.2 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX" in the Feature Manual.

Setting Secondary Ports

Follow the steps below to designate secondary ports for IP extensions.
1. Specify the secondary ports.
a. Access the port property screen of the site where the ports will be set as secondary ports.
b. In Primary/Secondary, set the unused ports that will be used as secondary ports to "Secondary".
Note
Ports that have already been registered (A value other than the default of "00:00:00:00:00:00" is
set for IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) on the Main tab) cannot be set to
"Secondary" here.
2. Access the port property screen of the site where primary ports will be assigned secondary ports.
3. Click Set Secondary. A dialogue box will appear.
4. From the drop-down list, select a site where secondary ports will be assigned.
Note
The number displayed for Available ports indicates the maximum number of available ports at the
selected site that can be registered as secondary ports.
5. Extensions’ primary ports and names are displayed on the left. Select the extensions for which to want
to register secondary ports, and then click the right arrow.

Note
Ports that are already assigned as secondary ports will not be displayed in this list.

276 PC Programming Manual

 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

6. Click Execute. A message confirming the registration will be displayed.

7. Repeat steps 2–6 for each site where you want to designate secondary ports.
Removing Secondary Port Settings
Follow the steps below to remove secondary port settings for IP extensions.
1. Click Remove Secondary. A dialogue box will appear.
2. Primary ports of extensions that have secondary ports assigned are displayed on the left. Select the
extensions whose secondary setting you want to remove, and then click the right arrow.
3. Click Execute. A message confirming the setting removal will be displayed.

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the port. Max. 5 digits
Number (consisting of 0–9)
Note
This setting cannot be changed on this
screen until the port has been assigned as
a secondary port using the Set
Secondary command. See Setting
Secondary Ports above for details.
Extension Specifies the extension name of the port. Max. 20 characters
Name
Note
This setting cannot be changed on this
screen until the port has been assigned as
a secondary port using the Set
Secondary command. See Setting
Secondary Ports above for details.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status INS: The port is in
of the port, click the desired cell in the column, service.
and then select INS or OUS for the port. OUS: The port is
This option is only available in On-line mode. out of service.
Fault: The port is
not communicating
with the network.
Primary/ Specifies the designation of the port as a Primary, Secondary Feature
Secondary primary port or secondary port. Manual
References
Note
4.2.3.2 Automatic
If an extension has been registered to the Rerouting to
port, this setting cannot be changed from Secondary PBX
"Primary" to "Secondary". De-register the
port to change this setting.

PC Programming Manual 277

9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Pair Site Indicates the site where the assigned Site number and Feature
secondary port is located (reference only). name Manual
References
Note
4.2.3.2 Automatic
A value will be displayed here only after Rerouting to
the Set Secondary command has been Secondary PBX
executed (see above).
Pair Slot Indicates the number of the virtual card slot in Virtual slot number Feature
the site where the assigned secondary port is Manual
located (reference only). References
Note 4.2.3.2 Automatic
Rerouting to
A value will be displayed here only after Secondary PBX
the Set Secondary command has been
executed (see above).
Pair Port Indicates the port number of the assigned Port number Feature
secondary port (reference only). Manual
References
Note
4.2.3.2 Automatic
A value will be displayed here only after Rerouting to
the Set Secondary command has been Secondary PBX
executed (see above).

Remote Place
The settings on this screen are for programming the Simple Remote Connection feature for connecting SIP
phones in remote locations to the PBX. For details and conditions regarding the use of this feature, refer to
"5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection" in the Feature Manual.

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Number of the port.
Extension Specifies the extension name of Max. 20 characters
Name the port.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of service.
click the desired cell in the Fault: The port is not
column, and then select INS or communicating with the network.
OUS for the port.
This option is only available in
On-line mode.

278 PC Programming Manual

 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Phone Specifies the type of extension Local: The extension is located Feature
Location connected to the port. on the same network as the PBX Manual
(standard configuration). References
Remote (SBC): The extension is
5.2.2.3 Simple
accessing the PBX remotely
Remote
(Simple Remote Connection).
Connection
Remote (MRG): The extension is
accessing the PBX remotely (use
Media Relay Gateway).
Web-MC Specifies whether the Web Enable, Disable Feature
Ability programming is allowed on the Manual
KX-UT series SIP phone References
connected to the port by enabling
5.2.2.3 Simple
the Web port setting on the
Remote
phone’s menu. For details about
Connection
Web programming for KX-UT
series SIP phones, refer to the
documentation of the phone.
Protocol for Specifies the protocol to use for HTTPS, HTTP Feature
Remote SIP- remote SIP phone data Manual
MLT communication. HTTPS is Note References
strongly recommended for A total of 20 HTTPS 5.2.2.3 Simple
remote SIP-MLT connections. connections can be set per Remote
PBX site. If "HTTPS" is Connection
selected but the total number
of HTTPS connections
available at the site will be
exceeded by changing this
setting, a warning message
will be displayed and the
setting change will be
cancelled.

PC Programming Manual 279

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

— SLC2 - Card Property
The property for the extension cards can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
SLT Pulse Dial Selects the type of pulse dial transmission Normal, Sweden, New
Mode appropriate to your area. Zealand
SLT Off Hook Specifies the minimum length that a pulse 8 × n (n=3–255) ms
Time dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX
to recognise it as an off-hook signal.
SLT Off Hook Specifies the length of guard time used for 8 × n (n=12–63) ms
Guard Time off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the
PBX mistaking them for pulse dials.
SLT Pulse Specifies the maximum length of the break 8 × n (n=9–20) ms
Maximum Break signal in a pulse dial.
Width
SLT Pulse Specifies the minimum length of the make 8 × n (n=1–5) ms
Minimum Make signal in a pulse dial.
Width
SLT Flash Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal Disable: The PBX Feature
Detection sent when an SLT user presses the disconnects the line to Manual
hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button. prevent placing the References
call on hold.
2.13.3 Call
Enable: The PBX
Splitting
places the call on
consultation hold.
Flash Timing - Specifies the minimum length that a signal 8 × n (n=3–63) ms
Min. sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to
recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.
Flash Timing - Specifies the maximum length that a signal 8 × n (n=3–191) ms
Range sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to
recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.
DTMF-R STD Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF 2 × n (n=1–31) ms
Detection Time tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as
a DTMF tone.
Hook Threshold Specifies the current threshold (A-law) for 1.5–4.0 mA
PD A-law switching from Power Save mode to an
active state. Please consult your certified
Panasonic dealer for more information.
Hook Threshold Specifies the current threshold (μ-law) for 1.5–4.0 mA
PD Mu-law switching from Power Save mode to an
active state. Please consult your certified
Panasonic dealer for more information.

280 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—SLC2 - Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.
To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
Other programming items that are displayed on this screen but not listed below are used only when
programming extensions connected to a legacy gateway (KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBX). For
additional information about programming items not described here, refer to the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX.
For information about legacy gateways, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Indicates the port type (reference only). SLT: SLT port (SLC)
Telephone Indicates the connected telephone type SLT: SLT is connected (or no
Type (reference only). telephone is connected to the SLT
port).
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell OUS: The port is out of service.
in the column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the PBX.
This option is only available in On-line
mode.
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Number port.
Extension Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 characters
Name port.

PC Programming Manual 281

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property - LCO type
The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Outgoing Guard Specifies the length of time after a 3–6 s
Time trunk is disconnected, during which
the PBX cannot seize the line.
First Dial Timer (CO) Specifies the minimum time that 0.5 × n (n=1–
the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, 16) s
before sending the dialled digits to
the telephone company. This
allows the telephone company to
have enough time to accept the
dialled digits correctly.
CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse No, Yes
feedback tone is turned on or not.
For outgoing trunk calls, audible
tones can be heard as the dialled
number is sent out, which informs
the extension user that the number
has been dialled.
Bell Detection—Bell Specifies the minimum length of a 24 × n (n=1–
Start Detection Timer bell signal that can be recognised 50) ms
by the PBX as the bell signal sent
from the telephone company,
before the PBX detects an arriving
call.
Bell Detection—Bell Specifies the duration of the bell off 1.0 s–15.0 s
Off Detection Timer detection timer. If the PBX receives
no bell signal from the telephone
company for the length of time
specified here, the PBX treats the
call as lost.
Pulse / DTMF Dial— Specifies the length of the DTMF 64 + 16 × n
DTMF Inter-digit inter-digit pause. This allows the (n=0–11) ms
Pause telephone company to have
enough time to accept the dialled
digits correctly.
Pulse / DTMF Dial— Specifies the length of the pulse 630 ms, 830
Pulse Inter-digit inter-digit pause. This allows the ms, 1030 ms
Pause telephone company to have
enough time to accept the dialled
digits correctly.

282 PC Programming Manual

 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Low Speed Pulse Specifies the % break for a low Other, 60%, PC Programming
Dial—Pulse % Break speed pulse dial. This is the ratio 67% Manual References
between the break (on-hook) signal 9.25 PBX Configuration
and make (off-hook) signal in a —[1-1] Configuration—
pulse dial. Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port
Low Speed Pulse Specifies the maximum length of 20 + (4 × n) PC Programming
Dial—Break Width the break signal in a low speed (n=1–15) ms Manual References
pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial- 9.25 PBX Configuration
Pulse % Break on this screen —[1-1] Configuration—
determines the value that can be Slot—Port Property -
specified here. LCO Port
Low Speed Pulse Specifies the minimum length of 4 × n (n=3–15) PC Programming
Dial—Make Width the make signal in a low speed ms Manual References
pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial- 9.25 PBX Configuration
Pulse % Break on this screen —[1-1] Configuration—
determines the value that can be Slot—Port Property -
specified here. LCO Port
High Speed Pulse Specifies the % break for a high Other, 60 %, PC Programming
Dial—Pulse % Break speed pulse dial. This is the ratio 67 % Manual References
between the break (on-hook) signal 9.25 PBX Configuration
and make (off-hook) signal in a —[1-1] Configuration—
pulse dial. Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port
High Speed Pulse Specifies the maximum length of 12+ (4 × n) PC Programming
Dial—Break Width the break signal in a high speed (n=1–15) ms Manual References
pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial- 9.25 PBX Configuration
Pulse % Break on this screen —[1-1] Configuration—
determines the value that can be Slot—Port Property -
specified here. LCO Port
High Speed Pulse Specifies the minimum length of 4 × n (n=3–15) PC Programming
Dial—Make Width the make signal in a high speed ms Manual References
pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial- 9.25 PBX Configuration
Pulse % Break on this screen —[1-1] Configuration—
determines the value that can be Slot—Port Property -
specified here. LCO Port
Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial Normal,
transmission appropriate to your Sweden, New
area. Zealand

PC Programming Manual 283

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Option Card Indicates the type of the card that None, Caller ID PC Programming
Equipment—Option is installed on the LCOT card Card, Pay Tone Manual References
1 and Option 2 (reference only). Card 9.25 PBX Configuration
—[1-1] Configuration—
Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port—Caller ID
Detection
Feature Manual
References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the type of Caller ID FSK, FSK (with Feature Manual
Signalling signalling provided by the Visual Caller References
telephone company. ID), DTMF 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Max Specifies the maximum number of 0 (no limit), 1, Feature Manual
Receive Time Caller ID series that are sent from 2, 3 References
the network. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Enables the PBX to detect the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
(FSK) Carrier carrier when receiving Caller ID. To References
Detection enable this setting, Caller ID— 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID Signalling on this screen
should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the method used to detect Length + Timer, Feature Manual
(FSK) END Detection the end of Caller ID information. Timer References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Enables the PBX to check the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
(FSK) Header header of received Caller ID References
Examination information. To enable this setting, 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on
this screen should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Specifies the length of time that the None, 80 × n Feature Manual
(FSK) Detection Start PBX waits before attempting to (n=1–15) ms References
Timer detect Caller ID information, after 2.19.1 Caller ID
receiving a call. To enable this
setting, Caller ID—Caller ID
Signalling on this screen should
be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Specifies the total time required by 1040 + (80 × n) Feature Manual
(FSK) Detection the PBX to detect Caller ID (n=0–37) ms References
Timer information. To enable this setting, 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on
this screen should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the DTMF code used to None, *, #, A, Feature Manual
(DTMF) Start Code 1 detect the beginning of a Caller ID B, C, D References
and Start Code 2 series. Start Code 1 is prior to Start 2.19.1 Caller ID
Code 2.

284 PC Programming Manual

 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the DTMF code used to None, *, #, A, Feature Manual
(DTMF) Information detect the beginning of the B, C, D References
Start Code information segment of a Caller ID 2.19.1 Caller ID
series.
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the DTMF code used to None, *, #, A, Feature Manual
(DTMF) End Code detect the end of a Caller ID series. B, C, D References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Specifies the number used to Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
(DTMF) Information identify each type of information (consisting of References
Code-PRIVATE, code. 0–9, *, and #) 2.19.1 Caller ID
OUT OF AREA,
TECHNICAL
REASON,
UNKNOWN
NUMBER,
RESTRICTED
NUMBER
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the type of the 3rd header DDN, Caller ID Feature Manual
Header[03] in a Caller ID signal. References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Selects the frequency of the pay 12 KHz, 16KHz Feature Manual
Frequency tone appropriate to your telephone References
company. 2.22.3 Call Charge
Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Specifies the signal strength of the 0–31 dB Feature Manual
Gain pay tone. References
2.22.3 Call Charge
Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Specifies the minimum length that 8 × n (n=1– Feature Manual
Pulse - MIN a received pay tone signal must be 250) ms References
for the PBX to recognise it as a pay 2.22.3 Call Charge
tone signal. Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Specifies the maximum length that None, 8 × n Feature Manual
Pulse - MAX a received pay tone signal can be (n=1–250) ms References
for the PBX to recognise it as a pay 2.22.3 Call Charge
tone signal. Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Specifies the maximum length of 8 × n (n=1– Feature Manual
Pulse - Interval time between pay tone signals. 250) ms References
2.22.3 Call Charge
Services
Pay Tone—Sending Enables the PBX to send a flash Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Flash while end talk signal at the end of call to demand References
a pay tone signal. 2.22.3 Call Charge
Services

PC Programming Manual 285

9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property - LCO Port
Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the service.
desired cell in the column, and then OUS: The port is
select INS or OUS for the port. out of service.
This option is only available in On-
line mode.
Busy Out Indicates the Busy Out status Normal, Busy Out Feature Manual
Status (reference only). References
2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to DTMF, Pulse Feature Manual
dial out to the analogue trunk. References
2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
CPC Signal Specifies the length of time required None, 6.5 ms, 8 × Feature Manual
Detection by the PBX to detect a CPC signal n (n=1–112) ms References
Time— on outgoing or incoming trunk calls 2.11.9 Calling Party Control
Outgoing, before disconnecting the line. When (CPC) Signal Detection
Incoming None is selected here, the line will
not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone 80 ms, 160 ms
sent to the analogue trunk.
Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse Low, High
dials are sent to the analogue trunk.
Reverse Selects the type of trunk call for Disable: For no Feature Manual
Detection which the reverse signal from the trunk call References
telephone company is detected. Outgoing: For 2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit
outgoing trunk
calls only
Both Call: For
both outgoing and
incoming trunk
calls

286 PC Programming Manual

 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Caller ID Enables the PBX to detect a Caller Disable, Enable PC Programming
Detection ID signal from the analogue trunk. Manual References
9.24 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Card Property - LCO type
Feature Manual
References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Paytone Enables the PBX to receive a pay Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Detection tone signal from the telephone References
company. 2.22.3 Call Charge Services
Note
This feature is available for
extensions connected to legacy
gateway PBXs only.
Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, Feature Manual
4.5 s References
2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access
Code (Access Code to the
Telephone Company from a
Host PBX)
2.5.4.9 Special Carrier
Access Code
Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash None, 16 × n Feature Manual
signal. (n=1–255) ms References
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)
Disconnect Specifies the length of time after a 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, Feature Manual
Time trunk is disconnected, during which 4.0 s, 12.0 s References
the PBX cannot seize the line. 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/
Terminate

PC Programming Manual 287

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the L2 ms
—T200 command to ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100 Feature
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after resending the request to ms Manual
—T202 use an ISDN line as a TIE line. References
4.3.1 TIE
Line Service
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time to detect no 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave communication status of L2. ms
—T203
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–18000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. ms
—T301
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave each digit on an incoming call. Applies to ms
—T302 overlap receiving.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call ms
—T303 setting) message to ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to ms
—T304 overlap sending.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the DISC ms
—T305 (disconnection) message to ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after receiving the Release ms
—T308 message from ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave to disconnect the data link, before ms
—T309 disconnecting the call.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a continuance message after ms
—T310 receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding
message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Connect ms
—T313 message.

288 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Name Description Value Range Links

ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Restart ms
—T316 message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Resume ms
—T318 message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Suspend ms
—T319 message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Status ms
—T322 enquiry message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. ms
—T3D3
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. ms
—T3D9
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T200 waits for a reply after sending the L2 ms
command to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T201 waits for a reply after resending the TEI check ms
request to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time to detect no 0–600 × 100
T203 communication status of L2. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–18000 × 100
T301 waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–600 × 100
T302 each digit on an incoming call. Applies to ms
overlap receiving.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T303 waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call ms
setting) message to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–3000 × 100
T304 each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to ms
overlap sending.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T305 waits for a reply after sending the DISC ms
(disconnection) message to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T306 waits for a reply after sending the DISC ms
(disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting
is used when inband tones are supplied.

PC Programming Manual 289

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Name Description Value Range Links

ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–6000 × 100
T307 maintains a suspended call, before restarting. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T308 waits for a reply after receiving the Release ms
message from ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
T309 to disconnect the data link, before ms
disconnecting the call.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T310 waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming ms
Call Proceeding message.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T312 waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call ms
setting) message to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T316 waits for a reply after sending the Restart ms
message.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T320 waits for packet protocol. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T322 waits for a reply after sending the Status ms
enquiry message.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
T3D3 to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
T3D9 to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. ms

290 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property - BRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public Feature
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network Manual
network must have a master port on Extension: For connecting to References
one PBX and a slave port on extension
4.1.2.1
another PBX. ISDN extensions can QSIG-Slave: For connecting to
Integrated
belong to an incoming call private network (slave port)
Services Digital
distribution group or idle extension QSIG-Master: For connecting
Network (ISDN)
hunting group. In this case, an MSN to private network (master port)
—SUMMARY
can be assigned.
4.3.4.1 QSIG
Standard
Features—
SUMMARY
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of service.
desired cell in the column, and then Fault: The port is not
select INS or OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in On- network.
line mode.
LLC Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Disable, Enable
Information Level Compatibility) information to
the network when an outgoing call is
made when the ISDN bearer mode
is speech.
Status Specifies whether the Status No Transmission: Status
Message Message is sent to the network. Message is not sent.
When Mandatory error
detection: Send the Status
Message when an error
(Mandatory) is detected.
When Option / Mandatory error
detection: Send the Status
Message when an error
(Option or Mandatory) is
detected.
Status Selects what happens to a call Ignore: Ignore the Status
Receive when the Status Message from the Message from the network.
network does not match the actual Disconnect: Disconnect the
status of the call. call.

PC Programming Manual 291

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

ISDN CO
Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a public network
QSIG network must have a Extension: For connecting
master port on one PBX and a to extension
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Slave: For
ISDN extensions can belong to connecting to private
an incoming call distribution network (slave port)
group or idle extension hunting QSIG-Master: For
group. In this case, an MSN connecting to private
can be assigned. network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of
click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in network.
On-line mode.
Subscriber Specifies the number used as Max. 16 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number the CLIP number. of 0–9, *, and #) References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Ringback Enables the PBX to send a Disable, Enable
Tone to ringback tone to an outside
Outside caller when the network
Caller cannot send the tone.

292 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

ISDN Selects the method used to En-bloc: The PBX sends PC Programming
Outgoing send dialled digits to the all of the dialled digits at Manual References
Call Type network. once after the extension 9.1 PBX Configuration—
user completes dialling. [1-1] Configuration—Slot
The PBX recognises the 10.3 PBX Configuration—
end of dialling when (1) # [2-3] System—Timers &
is dialled, if programmed, Counters—Dial / IRNA /
(2) a pre-programmed Recall / Tone—Dial—
telephone number is Extension Inter-digit
dialled, or (3) the inter-digit 10.9 PBX Configuration—
timer expires. [2-9] System—System
Overlap: The PBX sends Options—Option 2—
dialled digits one at a time. ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as
End of Dial for en Bloc
mode
11.1.4 PBX Configuration
—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk
Group—Dialling Plan
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
ISDN Enables the use of the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Centrex telephone company’s ISDN References
Centrex Service features. 4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
BRI Data Assigns one or two TEIs 1-link: One TEI is assigned
Link (P-MP) (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port.
Mode to the BRI CO port. To use the 2-link: Two TEIs are
ISDN Hold supplementary assigned to the BRI CO
service with point-to-multipoint port. (Available when
configuration, this parameter Access Mode on the
should be set to 2-link in some Network tab is set to
countries/areas. P-MP.)

Networking Enables transmission of Off, On PC Programming

Data extension status data to Manual References
Transfer connected PBXs in a network. 17 PBX Configuration—
This setting is only available [9] Private Network
when Port Type on this screen
has been set to QSIG-Slave or Feature Manual
QSIG-Master. References
A maximum of two ports of 4.3.5.1 Network Direct
each BRI card can be Station Selection (NDSS)
assigned to transmit extension
status information.

PC Programming Manual 293

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

ISDN Extension
Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public Feature Manual
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network References
network must have a master port on Extension: For connecting to 5.2.5.1 ISDN
one PBX and a slave port on extension Extension
another PBX. ISDN extensions can QSIG-Slave: For connecting
belong to an incoming call to private network (slave
distribution group or idle extension port)
hunting group. In this case, an MSN QSIG-Master: For
can be assigned. connecting to private
network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service. Feature Manual
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of References
desired cell in the column, and then service. 5.2.5.1 ISDN
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not Extension
This option is only available in On- communicating with the
line mode. network.
Ring Mode Selects the ring mode when Ring All Extension for MSN: Feature Manual
(ISDN MSN receiving an incoming call with an Ring all ISDN extensions References
Last No. 0 or MSN ending with "0" or "00". This that are addressed with 5.2.5.1 ISDN
00) setting is only available when Port MSN. Extension
Type on this screen is set to Ring an Extension for MSN:
Extension. Ring only one of the ISDN
extensions that are
addressed with MSN.
ISDN Enables the PBX to send call Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Extension progress tones to the ISDN References
Progress extension. This setting is only 5.2.5.1 ISDN
Tone available when Port Type on this Extension
screen is set to Extension.

Network
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public
Each ISDN connection in a network
QSIG network must have a Extension: For connecting to
master port on one PBX and a extension
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Slave: For connecting
ISDN extensions can belong to to private network (slave
an incoming call distribution port)
group or idle extension hunting QSIG-Master: For connecting
group. In this case, an MSN can to private network (master
be assigned. port)

294 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of
click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in network.
On-line mode.
Network Selects the network type of the 0–56 Feature Manual
Type port. (2 UK (Domestic), 5 References
Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 4.1.2.1 Integrated
SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN Services Digital
(Standard), 14 France Network (ISDN)—
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 SUMMARY
Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US
National ISDN 2)
L1 Mode Selects the active mode of L1 Call, Permanent Feature Manual
(Layer 1) on the BRI port. References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
L2 Mode Selects the active mode of L2 Call, Permanent Feature Manual
(Layer 2) on the BRI port. References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
Access Selects the configuration of the P-P: Point-to-Point Feature Manual
Mode BRI port. P-MP: Point-to-multipoint References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
TEI Mode Specifies the TEI mode Automatic, Fix 0–Fix 63 Feature Manual
assigned to the BRI port. References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

PC Programming Manual 295

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG public network
network must have a master port on Extension: For connecting
one PBX and a slave port on to extension
another PBX. ISDN extensions can QSIG-Slave: For
belong to an incoming call connecting to private
distribution group or idle extension network (slave port)
hunting group. In this case, an MSN QSIG-Master: For
can be assigned. connecting to private
network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of
desired cell in the column, and then service.
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On- communicating with the
line mode. network.
Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the Public: Public network Feature
port. Private: Private Network Manual
VPN: Virtual Private References
Network
4.3.1 TIE Line
Service
4.3.3 ISDN
Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-
VPN)
Calling Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to outgoing trunk calls Telephony, National
Numbering Plan routed through public and private Standard, Private
ID—Public, networks.
Private
Calling Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type of applies to outgoing trunk calls National, Network,
Number—Public, routed through public or private Subscriber
Private networks.
Called Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to incoming trunk calls Telephony, National
Numbering Plan routed through public and private Standard, Private
ID—Public, networks.
Private
Called Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type of applies to incoming trunk calls National, Network,
Number—Public, routed through public and private Subscriber
Private networks.

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

296 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a public network
QSIG network must have a Extension: For
master port on one PBX and connecting to extension
a slave port on another QSIG-Slave: For
PBX. ISDN extensions can connecting to private
belong to an incoming call network (slave port)
distribution group or idle QSIG-Master: For
extension hunting group. In connecting to private
this case, an MSN can be network (master port)
assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the service.
port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select service.
INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available communicating with the
in On-line mode. network.
COLP, CLIR, Specifies whether each For COLP, CLIR, COLR, Feature Manual
COLR, CNIP, ISDN or QSIG CNIP, CONP, CNIR, References
CONP, CNIR, supplementary service is CONR, CF (Rerouting), 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
CONR, CF used. CT, CCBS, AOC-D, Line Identification
(Rerouting), AOC-E: Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CT, CCBS, No, Yes 4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge
AOC-D, AOC- (AOC)
E, 3PTY For 3PTY: 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding
No, Yes-3Pty (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—
by ISDN
4.1.2.8 Three-party
Conference (3PTY)—by
ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of
Calls to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected
Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
and Calling/Connected
Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP/CONP)
—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding
(CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—
by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls
to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
—by QSIG

PC Programming Manual 297

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

CCBS Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG public network
network must have a master port on one Extension: For
PBX and a slave port on another PBX. connecting to extension
ISDN extensions can belong to an QSIG-Slave: For
incoming call distribution group or idle connecting to private
extension hunting group. In this case, an network (slave port)
MSN can be assigned. QSIG-Master: For
connecting to private
network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
CCBS Type Selects the type of the call from the ALL, Unknown, Feature
network initiated by the CCBS International, National, Manual
(Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) Network specific, References
feature, from which the specified number Subscriber, Abbreviated
4.1.2.10
of digits are deleted.
Completion of
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen
Calls to Busy
specifies the number of digits to delete
Subscriber
from the received number.
(CCBS)
CCBS Specifies the number of digits to delete 0–15 Feature
Delete Digits from the received number when Manual
receiving a call of the specified type References
initiated by the CCBS feature from the
4.1.2.10
network. CCBS Type on this screen
Completion of
specifies the applicable type of call.
Calls to Busy
Subscriber
(CCBS)

298 PC Programming Manual

 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property - PRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to Feature
public network Manual
Note Extension: For connecting References
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG to extension
4.1.2.1
network must have a master port QSIG-Slave: For connecting
Integrated
on one PBX and a slave port on to private network (slave
Services Digital
another PBX. port)
Network
QSIG-Master: For
• ISDN extensions can belong to an (ISDN)—
connecting to private
incoming call distribution group or SUMMARY
network (master port)
idle extension hunting group. In 4.3.4.1 QSIG
this case, an MSN can be Standard
assigned. Features—
SUMMARY
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell OUS: The port is out of
in the column, and then select INS or service.
OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Status Specifies whether the Status Message No Transmission: Status
Message is sent to the network. Message is not sent.
When error detection
(Mandatory): Send the
Status Message when an
error (Mandatory) is
detected.
When error detection
(Option / Mandatory): Send
the Status Message when
an error (Option or
Mandatory) is detected.
Status Selects what happens to a call when the Ignore: Ignore the Status
Receive Status Message from the network does Message from the network.
not match the actual status of the call. Disconnect: Disconnect the
call.

PC Programming Manual 299

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

CRC4 Mode Enables the use of CRC4 for error Disable, Enable
checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy
Check) is an error checking control
technique that uses a specific binary
prime divisor that results in a unique
remainder. It is usually a 16- to 32-bit
character. (Assignable only when using
the PRI30 card.)
Line Coding Selects the line coding type of the PRI B8ZS, AMI
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the
port. This setting is only available when
using the PRI23 card.
Frame Selects the type of frame sequence for Extended Multi frame
Sequence the port. This setting is only available (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame
when using the PRI23 card. (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame
(F12)

CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
public network
Note Extension: For
• Each ISDN connection in connecting to extension
a QSIG network must QSIG-Slave: For
have a master port on connecting to private
one PBX and a slave network (slave port)
port on another PBX. QSIG-Master: For
connecting to private
• ISDN extensions can network (master port)
belong to an incoming
call distribution group or
idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an
MSN can be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the port, service.
click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of
column, and then select INS or service.
OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in communicating with the
On-line mode. network.
Subscriber Specifies the number used as Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Number the CLIP number. (consisting of 0–9, *, and References
#) 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

300 PC Programming Manual

 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Ringback Enables the PBX to send a Disable, Enable
Tone to ringback tone to an outside
Outside caller when the network cannot
Caller send the tone.
ISDN Selects the method used to En-bloc: The PBX sends PC Programming
Outgoing send dialled digits to the all of the dialled digits at Manual References
Call Type network. once after the extension 9.1 PBX Configuration—
user completes dialling. [1-1] Configuration—Slot
The PBX recognises the 10.3 PBX Configuration—
end of dialling when (1) [2-3] System—Timers &
# is dialled, if Counters—Dial / IRNA /
programmed, (2) a pre- Recall / Tone—Dial—
programmed telephone Extension Inter-digit
number is dialled, or (3) 10.9 PBX Configuration—
the inter-digit timer [2-9] System—System
expires. Options—Option 2—ISDN
Overlap: The PBX sends en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of
dialled digits one at a Dial for en Bloc mode
time. 11.1.4 PBX Configuration
—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk
Group—Dialling Plan
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.1 Integrated Services
Digital Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
ISDN Enables the use of the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Centrex telephone company’s ISDN References
Centrex Service features. 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services
Digital Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
Networking Enables transmission of Off, On PC Programming
Data extension status data to Manual References
Transfer connected PBXs in a network. 17 PBX Configuration—[9]
This setting is only available Private Network
when Port Type on this screen
has been set to QSIG-Slave or Feature Manual
QSIG-Master. References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct
Station Selection (NDSS)
Loopback Enables a loopback test started Disable, Enable PC Programming
Test started from the network side, to be Manual References
by Network performed on the PRI23 card. Network Loopback Test

Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

PC Programming Manual 301

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Type Selects the type of the port. CO: For connecting to public
network
Note Extension: For connecting to
• Each ISDN connection in a extension
QSIG network must have a QSIG-Slave: For connecting to
master port on one PBX and a private network (slave port)
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Master: For connecting
to private network (master
• ISDN extensions can belong to port)
an incoming call distribution
group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN
can be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of
desired cell in the column, and then service.
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On- communicating with the
line mode. network.
Ring Mode Selects the ring mode when receiving Ring All Extension for MSN: Feature
(ISDN MSN an incoming call with an MSN ending Ring all ISDN extensions that Manual
Last No. 0 or with "0" or "00". are addressed with MSN. References
00) Ring AN Extension for MSN:
5.2.5.1 ISDN
Ring only one of the ISDN
Extension
extensions that are addressed
with MSN.

Network Configuration
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public
network
Note Extension: For connecting to
• Each ISDN connection in a extension
QSIG network must have a QSIG-Slave: For connecting to
master port on one PBX and a private network (slave port)
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Master: For connecting
to private network (master port)
• ISDN extensions can belong
to an incoming call distribution
group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an
MSN can be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of service.
desired cell in the column, and then Fault: The port is not
select INS or OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in On- network.
line mode.

302 PC Programming Manual

 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Network Selects the network type of the port. 0–56 Feature
Type (2 UK (Domestic), 5 Manual
Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 References
SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN
4.1.2.1
(Standard), 14 France
Integrated
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20
Services Digital
Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US
Network (ISDN)
National ISDN 2)
—SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
public network
Note Extension: For
• Each ISDN connection in a connecting to extension
QSIG network must have a QSIG-Slave: For
master port on one PBX and a connecting to private
slave port on another PBX. network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For
• ISDN extensions can belong to connecting to private
an incoming call distribution network (master port)
group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN can
be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the desired service.
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out of
or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the port. Public: Public network Feature
Private: Private Network Manual
VPN: Virtual Private References
Network
4.3.1 TIE Line
Service
4.3.3 ISDN
Virtual Private
Network
(ISDN-VPN)
Calling Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to outgoing trunk calls routed Telephony, National
Numbering Plan through public and private networks. Standard, Private
ID—Public,
Private

PC Programming Manual 303

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Calling Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type applies to outgoing trunk calls routed National, Network,
of Number— through public or private networks. Subscriber
Public, Private
Called Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to incoming trunk calls routed Telephony, National
Numbering Plan through public and private networks. Standard, Private
ID—Public,
Private
Called Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type applies to incoming trunk calls routed National, Network,
of Number— through public and private networks. Subscriber
Public, Private

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
public network
Note Extension: For
• Each ISDN connection in a connecting to
QSIG network must have a extension
master port on one PBX and QSIG-Slave: For
a slave port on another connecting to private
PBX. network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For
• ISDN extensions can belong connecting to private
to an incoming call network (master port)
distribution group or idle
extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be
assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the port, click service.
the desired cell in the column, and OUS: The port is out
then select INS or OUS for the of service.
port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On- communicating with
line mode. the network.

304 PC Programming Manual

 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

COLP, CLIR, Specifies whether each ISDN or For COLP, CLIR, Feature Manual
COLR, CNIP, QSIG supplementary service is COLR, CNIP, CONP, References
CONP, CNIR, used. CNIR, CONR, CF 4.1.2.2 Calling/
CONR, CF The available services depend on (Rerouting), CT, Connected Line
(Rerouting), the setting of Port Type on this CCBS, AOC-D, AOC- Identification
CT, CCBS, screen. E, E911: Presentation (CLIP/
AOC-D, AOC- No, Yes COLP)
E, E911, 4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge
3PTY For 3PTY: (AOC)
No, Yes-3Pty 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding
(CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
4.1.2.7 Call Transfer
(CT)—by ISDN
4.1.2.8 Three-party
Conference (3PTY)—by
ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of
Calls to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/
Connected Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name
Identification
Presentation (CNIP/
CONP)—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding
(CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer
(CT)—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of
Calls to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)—by QSIG
CCBS Type Selects the type of call from the ALL, Unknown, Feature Manual
network initiated by the CCBS International, National, References
(Completion of Calls to Busy Network specific, 4.1.2.10 Completion of
Subscriber) feature, from which the Subscriber, Calls to Busy Subscriber
specified number of digits are Abbreviated (CCBS)
deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this
screen specifies the number of
digits to delete from the received
number.

PC Programming Manual 305

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

CCBS Delete Specifies the number of digits to 0–15 Feature Manual
Digits delete from the received number References
when receiving a call of the 4.1.2.10 Completion of
specified type initiated by the Calls to Busy Subscriber
CCBS feature from the network. (CCBS)
CCBS Type on this screen
specifies the applicable type of
call.

306 PC Programming Manual

 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2

9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2
Settings for PBXs connected to the KX-NS1000 over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click
Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway.

Note
• Legacy gateways must first be pre-installed before they can be programmed. For details, see the
KX-NS1000 PC Programming Manual.
• For information about hardware configuration restrictions and conditions for legacy gateways, refer to
the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual.

To install a new physical card in a legacy gateway

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right. An image of the card will be displayed, and
information about the card will be shown.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it. The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a legacy gateway

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the shelf to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the shelf to out-of-service status.

To remove a legacy gateway from the STACK-M card

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Delete. The legacy gateway will be deleted from the system and the corresponding shelf button
will become greyed out.

Note
The legacy gateway must be set to OUS before it can be deleted.

Programming cards installed in a legacy gateway

You can access the card properties and port properties of the physical cards installed in a legacy gateway
using the KX-NS1000 Web Maintenance Console Interface. The settings, setting values, and other
information is similar to programming using the Unified PC Maintenance Console. Refer to the PC
Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for programming information.

Note
Unless noted otherwise, programming items and specifications for PBXs connected as legacy gateways
correspond to the following PBX software versions. When referencing the manuals of other PBXs, refer
to manuals matching these software versions.
• KX-TDE: PMMPR/PGMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx or later
• KX-NCP: PBMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx or later
• KX-TDA: PMPR/PLMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later

PC Programming Manual 307

9.29.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3

Programming Card Properties for cards installed in legacy gateways

For your reference, the following information is included on each Card Property screen for cards installed in
legacy gateways:
Site: The site number of the KX-NS1000 PBX to which the legacy gateway is connected.
Shelf: The shelf number of the STACK-M card Legacy Gateway connection:
• 2: Legacy-GW1
• 3: Legacy-GW2
Slot: The physical slot number within the legacy gateway where the card is installed.

Programming Port Properties for cards installed in legacy gateways

When programming KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBXs using the Unified PC Maintenance Console, a
Command button is available to change the status (INS/OUS) of ports being programmed. To change the
status of a port when programming via Web Maintenance Console, click the desired cell in the Connection
column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.

9.29.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-

GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3
The properties of the optional base card (OPB3) installed in a legacy gateway can be specified.

OPB3 Option Card Setup

OPB3 option card setup is available in Off-line mode only.
1. Add the OPB3 card to the legacy gateway. For details, see To install a new physical card in a legacy
gateway in 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the installed OPB3 card on the legacy gateway Slot screen. A menu will
be shown under the mouse pointer. Select Option Card.
3. Select a slot number, and click the right and left arrow buttons (">", "<") to add or remove option cards
from the currently selected slot. Click OK when finished. For details about the option cards that can be
used with each legacy gateway PBX, refer to the documentation of the legacy gateway PBX.

OPB3 Card Properties

The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified.
Move the mouse pointer over the installed OPB3 card on the legacy gateway Slot screen. A menu will be
shown under the mouse pointer. Select Card Property.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Slot—Card Property - OPB3 section in the
PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information.
The following programming items are specific to when programming legacy gateways using Web
Maintenance Console:
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf Indicates the shelf position of the KX-NS1000 for 2: Legacy-GW1
the legacy gateway in which the OPB3 card is 3: Legacy-GW2
installed (reference only).
Port Indicates the port status for installed option cards. INS: The port is in service.
Status To change the status of the port, click the desired OUS: The port is out of service.
cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for Fault: There is a
the port. communication error.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

308 PC Programming Manual

 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Status Specifies the port’s status. INS: The port is in service.
This option is only available in On-line OUS: The port is out of
mode. service.
Fault: There is a
communication error.
For Output - Device Selects the type of connected output Ringer, Relay, Door Opener
Type device (for output ports only).
For Sensor - Input Specifies the minimum duration of 32 × n (n=2–255) ms
Signal Decision continuous input from the triggered
Time sensor before the PBX recognises the
input and makes a sensor call.
For Sensor - Input Specifies the length of time after the 10 × n (n=1–255) s
Signal Detection sensor has been triggered during which
Reopening Time any further input from the sensor will be
ignored.

PC Programming Manual 309

9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—

Portable Station
Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed.

PS Registration and De-registration

A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used.
Programming instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the
Installation Manual.
It is possible to de-register the PS later.
PS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Registration Follow the steps below to register the PS.
1. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered
(available) extension numbers and names
are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the
right arrow to select them for registration.
Click Next.
3. Highlight PBX sites and click the right arrow
to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in progress, the
dialogue box will show "Registration
Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue
box will show "Registration Completed". Click
Close.
Once a PS is successfully registered, the
status of the PS will update to show
"Registered".

310 PC Programming Manual

 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Value
Name Description Links
Range
De- Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered
extension numbers and names are displayed
on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the
right arrow to select them for de-registration.
Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the
dialogue box will show "De-registration
Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered,
the status of the PS will update to show
"None".
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the
registration PS when normal de-registration has been
unsuccessful or de-registration has been
performed only on the PS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered
extension numbers and names are displayed
on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the
right arrow to select them for forced de-
registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the
dialogue box will show "Forced De-
registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered,
the status of the PS will update to show
"None".
Personal Specifies the Personal Identification Number 4 digits Feature Manual
Identification (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS (consisting References
Number to the wrong PBX. of 0–9) 5.2.4.1 Portable
Note that the same PIN should be entered at the Station (PS)
PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX. Connection

PC Programming Manual 311

9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Index Indicates the PS number (reference only). 1–512 Feature Manual
References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection
Extension Specifies the extension number of the PS. Max. 5 Feature Manual
No. In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be digits References
used as a sub telephone with a wired main (consisting 5.2.4.1 Portable
telephone (PT/SLT), and two of them will share of 0–9) Station (PS)
one extension number of the main telephone. Connection
However, note that the PS extension number 5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP
specified here will not be altered by the extension Parallel Mode
number of the main telephone even if the PS is in
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming
Name characters Manual
References
12.2.1 PBX
Configuration—
[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—
Extension Settings—
Main—Extension
Name
Feature Manual
References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection
Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered None, Feature Manual
(reference only). Registered References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection

312 PC Programming Manual

 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option

9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—

Option
System options can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
System Wireless Indicates the radio system ID used Not applicable.
—System ID to register a PS (reference only).
To clear the System ID
1. Click the Clear Master CS
button.
2. A warning will be displayed.
Confirm the contents of the
warning, and then click Yes.
System Wireless Selects whether to display the CO Enable, Disable
—CO Status status on the LCD of the PS when in
Display in Standby stand-by mode (KX-WT125 only).
(KX-WT125 only)
(Need System Note
Restart) • For users in Canada, this
setting is also available for
the KX-WT126.
• The KX-WT125 is available
only in Canada.
New Card Selects the initial status of cards In Service, Out of
Installation—Card after installation. Service
Status for any
Card
New Card Selects whether extension numbers Disable, Enable
Installation— are assigned to extension ports
Automatic automatically or manually.
Extension Number
Set for Extension
Card

PC Programming Manual 313

9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option

Name Description Value Range Links

New Card Specifies whether a PRI23 card is ISDN Standard Feature Manual
Installation—ISDN automatically set to ISDN Standard Mode: The CCBS, References
Standard Mode for Mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is CF, CT, and Unified 2.1.1.2 Direct In
PRI23 Card installed for the first time. Messaging features Line (DIL)
are supported. DIL 2.1.1.3 Direct
and DID call Inward Dialling
distribution are (DID)/Direct Dialling
available for the D In (DDI)
channel. 4.3.4.3 Call
T1-LCOT mode: DIL Forwarding (CF)—
and DID call by QSIG
distribution are 4.3.4.4 Call Transfer
available for all 23B (CT)—by QSIG
channels. The 4.3.4.5 Completion
CCBS, CF, CT, and of Calls to Busy
Unified Messaging Subscriber (CCBS)
features are not —by QSIG
available in this
mode.

314 PC Programming Manual

 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority

9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—

Clock Priority
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf- Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI and PRI None, Shelf and Slot
Slot cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an number
Number external source to the PBX. Shelf and slot numbers
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the are listed using the
telephone company provides. pattern "X-Y":
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
• X: Shelf number (1–3
1. Assign a Clock Priority to each slot. [2 and 3 correspond
to Legacy Gateway 1
2. Set the status of the present clock source card to or 2])
"OUS", then "INS".
• Y: Slot number (1–11)
Note
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private
network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.) without
being connected through the telephone company,
assign only one PBX as the clock source on the
network. That PBX should have a card connected to
a telephone company line selected as its clock
source. All other PBXs should have cards connected
to the network selected as the clock source. This
enables all PBXs on the network to synchronise their
timing.

PC Programming Manual 315

9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource

9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP

Resource
IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for
various functions of the PBX.
The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in
order to recommend which DSP card(s) should be used. Click DSP Resource Advisor to access this
feature. (See 9.34.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP
Resource Advisor.)

9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP

Resource—Setting
Set the amount of DSP resources to reserve for each PBX function that uses DSP resources.
Name Description Value Range Links
Option DSP Indicates the total amount of Resource amount (3 Feature Manual
Power available DSP resources based on digits) References
the installed DSP card(s) (reference 5.5.4 DSP
only). Resource Usage
The number of resources provided
by each type of DSP card is as
follows:
• DSP S card: 63
• DSP M card: 127
• DSP L card: 254
Up to 2 DSP cards can be installed
on the mother board.
Because the system reserves 2
resources for internal system
functions, the total amount of
available resources indicated will be
2 less than the total resources of the
installed card(s).
Option DSP #1, Indicates the type of the installed DSP S, DSP M, DSP L Feature Manual
Option DSP #2 DSP card(s) (reference only). References
5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Services—VoIP Specifies the number of 0–506 VoIP calls Feature Manual
(G.711) simultaneous VoIP calls to reserve References
DSP resources for. 5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Services— Specifies the number of UM ports 0–31 ports (UM: 30 Feature Manual
Unified (including a fax port) to reserve DSP ports, Fax: 1 port) References
message resources for. 5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage

316 PC Programming Manual

 9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Services—Two- Specifies the number of UM ports 0–30 ports (cannot Feature Manual
way Recording reserved in Services—Unified exceed the value set in References
message to use for Two-way Services—Unified 5.5.4 DSP
Recording. message) Resource Usage
Services— Specifies the number of OGM ports 0–64 ports Feature Manual
OGM to reserve DSP resources for. References
5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Services— Specifies the number of conference 0–24 conference rooms Feature Manual
Conference rooms to reserve DSP resources for. References
trunk 5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Services—Free Indicates the amount of free DSP 0–506 DSP resources Feature Manual
resources (G. resources available to allocate References
711) (reference only). 5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Select a time to Specifies when the settings made on • Set: Specify a date
apply the set this screen are applied. and time to apply the
values changes, and click
Note OK. The changes
Any calls being made that use will be applied at the
DSP resources will be specified date and
disconnected when setting time.
values are changed and applied. • Apply now: The
changes are applied
immediately. Click
OK to apply the
settings immediately.

9.34.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—

Setting—DSP Resource Advisor
The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX
functions.
1. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on
the DSP cards installed in the PBX.
2. In the Ports column, enter the number of ports to allocate to each PBX function.
3. For voice calls, it is useful to estimate how often each call function is used, as every extension or trunk
is not in use all the time. In the Busy Ratio (%) column, specify the anticipated ratio of time the type of
voice call function will be used.
4. As values are entered, the values in the Power column will increase to reflect the resource required for
the input amounts. Likewise, the value for Free resources (G.711) will decrease.

Note
Click Clear to reset the input values and start again.

PC Programming Manual 317

9.34.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage

5. When all items are allocated, confirm that the amount of resources input does not exceed the value
indicated in Total Power.
• Click Apply to insert the specified allocation settings into the DSP Resource—Setting screen.
• Click Cancel to return to the DSP Resource—Setting screen without making any changes.
For details, refer to "5.5.4.2 DSP Resource Advisor" in the Feature Manual.

9.34.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP

Resource—Usage
The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage
patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
• The graph displays DSP resource usage over time. The time frame displayed can be displayed in
increments of 1 hour, 4 hours, or 24 hours. Up to 30 days of usage data can be stored.
• Each site of a One-look network can be viewed.
• The DSP report feature is only accessible from the Master unit.
• Only DSP resources that have been reserved in 9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—
DSP Resource—Setting are displayed.

318 PC Programming Manual

 Section 10
PBX Configuration—[2] System

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 319

10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time

10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date &

Time
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date &
Time Setting
The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of
extensions (e.g., PT, PS).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Date & Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by Year: 2000–2035
Time clicking the parameter you want to change and typing the new Month: 01–12
value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time. Day: 01–31
Hour: 00–23
Note Minute: 00–59
• When this setting is changed and applied, it may take Second: 00–59
between 1 minute and several hours (depending on the
configuration of the PBX network) for all connected IP-PTs
to reflect this change on their displays.
• At default settings, KX-UT series SIP phones synchronise
to the PBX’s date and time once every hour.

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—

SNTP / Daylight Saving
Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be
programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
To set Summer time, click 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight
Saving—Daylight Saving.

Note
The NTP server function of the PBX must be enabled for connected KX-UT series SIP phones to receive
automatic time adjustment information from the PBX. See 28.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server
Feature—NTP.
Name Description Value Range Links
Automatic Time Specifies the synchronisation of Disable: Feature Manual
Adjustment— the time between the Master unit Synchronisation is not References
Synchronisation mode and Slave units of a One-look enabled (for the 5.5.5 Automatic
network. For the Master unit, Master unit and Setup
only "Disable" can be selected. Stand-alone units)
Enable:
Synchronisation is
enabled (for Slave
units)

320 PC Programming Manual

 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic Time Enables the PBX to Disable, ISDN & Feature Manual
Adjustment— automatically adjust its clock Caller ID (FSK), SNTP References
Automatic Time every day according to the time 5.5.5 Automatic
Correction on Stand- information provided by the Setup
alone mode network.
SNTP—SNTP Server Specifies the IP address or host 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
—IP Address name of the SNTP server. 223.255.255.255 (IP References
address), Max. 253 5.5.5 Automatic
characters (host Setup
name)
SNTP—SNTP Server Indicates the port number used 1–65535 Feature Manual
—Port Number for communication with an SNTP References
server (reference only). 5.5.5 Automatic
Setup
SNTP—Time Zone— Specifies your local UTC -14:00–+14:00 Feature Manual
Time Zone (Coordinated Universal Time) References
time zone using the up and 5.5.5 Automatic
down arrows. Setup
Note
If KX-UT series SIP phones
are connected to the PBX,
and this setting is changed,
they must be restarted for
the new time zone setting to
take effect.
SNTP—Time Zone— Indicates the UTC (Coordinated -14:00–+14:00 Feature Manual
Time Zone for PC Universal Time) time zone of the References
PC (reference only). 5.5.5 Automatic
Setup

10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP /

Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start
date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different
summer times can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Setting Enables Summer Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References
time. 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—
Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
5.5.5 Automatic Setup

PC Programming Manual 321

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Name Description Value Range Links

Start Date Specifies the start Year: 2000– PC Programming Manual References
—Year, date of daylight 2035 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—
Month, Day savings time. Month: 1–12 Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Day: 1–31
Feature Manual References
5.5.5 Automatic Setup
End Date— Specifies the end Year: 2000– PC Programming Manual References
Year, date of daylight 2035 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—
Month, Day savings time. Month: 1–12 Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Day: 1–31
Feature Manual References
5.5.5 Automatic Setup

322 PC Programming Manual

 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator

& BGM
Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
PBX Operator Specifies the extension number or Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
—Day, Lunch, floating extension number of (consisting of References
Break, Night incoming call distribution group to be 0–9) 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
designated as the PBX operator in System—Week Table
each time mode (day/lunch/break/ 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—
night). To select an extension [2-6-1] System—Numbering
number, click Destination Setting Plan—Main
(see 2.1.7 Extension Number 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
Setting). [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
If Automatic copy to UM Operator Distribution Group—Group
(No.1) is checked here, the PBX Settings
Operator extension number(s) set for 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2]
Day/Lunch/Break/Night will be Service Settings—Parameters
copied to the Unified Messaging —Automated Attendant—
service’s Operator Extension for Operator Service
Operator Service No. 1 (see 23.2
UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Feature Manual
Settings—Parameters— References
Automated Attendant—Operator 5.1.5 Operator Features
Service).
BGM and Selects the audio source of BGM. External BGM, Feature Manual
Music on Hold Internal BGM References
—Music 2.13.4 Music on Hold
Source of 2.28.1 Background Music
BGM (BGM)
BGM and Selects the audio source for Music Tone, BGM1, Feature Manual
Music on Hold on Hold. BGM2, BGM3, References
—Music on BGM4, BGM5, 2.13.4 Music on Hold
Hold BGM6, BGM7,
BGM8
BGM and Selects the audio source for Music Same as Feature Manual
Music on Hold for Transfer (either the same music Music on Hold, References
—Sound on source chosen for the Music on Ringback Tone 2.12.1 Call Transfer
Transfer Hold, or ringback tone).

PC Programming Manual 323

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &

Counters
Various system timers and counters can be programmed.

Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Automatic Specifies the number of times Automatic 0–10 Feature Manual
Redial—Repeat Redial is attempted before being References
Counter cancelled. 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Automatic Specifies the length of time between 10 × n Feature Manual
Redial—Repeat repeated Automatic Redial attempts. (n=1–120) References
Interval s 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Automatic Specifies the length of time that the PBX 10 × n Feature Manual
Redial—Redial waits for the called party to answer an (n=1–30) s References
Call Ring Automatic Redial attempt. This is the 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Duration length of time that the called party’s
extension will ring for each attempt.
Automatic Specifies the length of time before the 0–15 s Feature Manual
Redial— PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and References
Analogue CO cancels busy tone detection when 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Mute / Busy Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is
Detection Timer performed.
Dial—Hot Line Specifies the length of time between 0–180 s Feature Manual
(Pickup Dial) going off-hook and the start of automatic References
Start dialling when the Hot Line feature is set. 2.6.6 Hot Line
Dial—Extension Specifies the length of time after going 1–250 s Feature Manual
First Digit off-hook within which the first digit of a References
feature number or destination must be 2.5.2 Automatic Extension
dialled before a reorder tone is heard. Release
Dial—Extension Specifies the length of time within which 1–250 s Feature Manual
Inter-digit subsequent digits must be dialled before References
the PBX sends a reorder tone. 2.5.2 Automatic Extension
Release
Dial—Analogue Specifies the length of time within which 1–15 s
CO First Digit the first digit of a telephone number
must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no
digit is sent before this time expires, the
PBX recognises end of dialling and
stops muting the caller’s voice over the
analogue trunk.

324 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Dial—Analogue Specifies the length of time within which 1–15 s
CO Inter-digit subsequent digits of a telephone
number must be sent to an analogue
trunk. If no digit is sent before this time
expires, the PBX recognises end of
dialling and stops muting the caller’s
voice over the analogue trunk.
Dial—Analogue Specifies the length of time between the 0–60 s Feature Manual
CO Call end of dialling and the start of the References
Duration Start SMDR timer for outgoing analogue trunk 2.22.1.1 Station Message
calls. Detail Recording (SMDR)
Intercept Specifies the length of time until an 1–240 s PC Programming
Routing No unanswered trunk call is redirected to Manual References
Answer (IRNA) the intercept routing destination in each 12.1.1 PBX Configuration
—Day, Lunch, time mode. —[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Break, Night Note that this setting is only valid for Extension—Extension
extensions whose Intercept No Answer Settings—Intercept No
Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night is set Answer Time—Intercept No
to "0". Answer Time—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Recall—Hold Specifies the length of time until the 0 (disable Feature Manual
Recall holding extension receives a Hold the Hold References
Recall ring or alarm tone when a held Recall)– 2.13.1 Call Hold
call remains unretrieved. 240 s
Recall—Transfer Specifies the length of time that a 1–240 s PC Programming
Recall transferred call waits to be answered, Manual References
before being redirected to the Transfer 12.1.1 PBX Configuration
Recall destination assigned to the —[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
original transferring extension. Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration
—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.12.1 Call Transfer

PC Programming Manual 325

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Recall—Call Specifies the length of time that a 1–240 s PC Programming
Park Recall parked call waits to be retrieved, before Manual References
the Transfer Recall destination assigned 12.1.1 PBX Configuration
to the extension that parked the call —[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
hears a Call Park Recall ring. Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration
—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.13.2 Call Park
Recall— Specifies the length of time after an 60 × n (n = Feature Manual
Disconnect after extension with a trunk call on hold 1–30) s References
Recall receives a Hold Recall tone that the held 2.13.1 Call Hold
call is disconnected.
Tone Length— Specifies the length of time that a 1–15 s Feature Manual
Busy Tone / busy/DND tone is heard when a call is References
DND Tone made to an extension in busy status or 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent 2.10 Busy Line/Busy Party
when this timer expires. (For a call Features
through DISA, the call will be
disconnected when this timer expires.)
Tone Length— Specifies the length of time that a 1–15 s Feature Manual
Reorder Tone reorder tone is heard when using a PT References
for PT Handset handset. The PT will return to idle status 2.5.2 Automatic Extension
when this timer expires. Release
Tone Length— Specifies the length of time that a 1–15 s Feature Manual
Reorder Tone reorder tone is heard from the built-in References
for PT Hands- speaker of a PT in hands-free mode. 2.5.2 Automatic Extension
free The PT will return to idle status when Release
this timer expires. This setting is applied 2.11.1 Hands-free
to PSs as well as PTs. Operation

326 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA—Delayed Specifies the length of time 0–30 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Timer that the caller hears a ringback References
tone before hearing an OGM. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
DISA—Mute & Specifies the length of time 0.0–12.0 PC Programming Manual
OGM Start Timer until the caller hears an OGM s References
after answering after reaching the DISA line. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
DISA—No Dial Specifies the length of time 0–120 s PC Programming Manual
Intercept Timer after the OGM finishes playing References
in which the caller must begin 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
dialling before the call is System—Operator & BGM
redirected to the operator. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
Feature—Tenant—Operator
(Extension Number)
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
DISA—2nd Dial Specifies the length of time in 0–5 s PC Programming Manual
Timer for AA which the caller must dial the References
second digit before the DISA 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
AA Service activates. Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)

PC Programming Manual 327

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA—Intercept Specifies the length of time 0–60 s PC Programming Manual
Timer—Day, until an unanswered DISA call References
Lunch, Break, is intercepted and redirected to 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Night the intercept routing Extension—Wired Extension—
destination after the original Extension Settings—Intercept
destination receives the call in Destination—Intercept Destination—
each time mode. When called party does not answer—
Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination—Intercept Destination—
When called party does not answer—
Day, Lunch, Break, Night
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
DISA— Specifies the length of time 0–60 s PC Programming Manual
Disconnect Timer that an intercepted DISA call References
after Intercept rings at the intercept routing 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
destination before being Optional Device—Voice Message—
disconnected. DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
DISA—CO-to-CO Specifies the number of times 0–15 PC Programming Manual
Call Prolong that the caller can prolong a References
Counter trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
line. (Selecting "0" enables the Optional Device—Voice Message—
caller to prolong the trunk-to- DISA Message
trunk call without restriction.)
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
DISA—CO-to-CO Specifies the length of time 60 × n (n PC Programming Manual
Call Prolong that a trunk-to-trunk call on a = 0–7) s References
Time DISA line is prolonged each 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
time that the caller prolongs Optional Device—Voice Message—
the call. (Selecting "0" prevents DISA Message
the caller from prolonging the
trunk-to-trunk call.) Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)

328 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA—Progress Specifies the length of time 0–60 s PC Programming Manual
Tone that a progress tone is sent to References
Continuation the manager extension before 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Time before recording an OGM. Optional Device—Voice Message—
Recording DISA Message
Message
Feature Manual References
2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
DISA—Reorder Specifies the length of time 0–15 s PC Programming Manual
Tone Duration that a reorder tone is sent to References
the caller before the call is 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
disconnected. If "0" is Optional Device—Voice Message—
specified, no reorder tone is DISA Message
sent and the call is
disconnected immediately. Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
Doorphone—Call Specifies the length of time 10 × n PC Programming Manual
Ring Duration that a call from a doorphone (n=1–15) References
rings until the call is cancelled s 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
when there is no answer. Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Call Specifies the length of time 10 × n PC Programming Manual
Duration until an answered doorphone (n=0–30) References
call is disconnected. s 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone— Specifies the length of time 2–7 s PC Programming Manual
Open Duration that a door stays unlocked References
after being opened from an 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
extension. Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.2 Door Open
Timed Reminder Specifies the number of times 1–15 Feature Manual References
—Repeat that an alarm is repeated. 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
Counter
Timed Reminder Specifies the length of time 10 × n Feature Manual References
—Interval Time between the repeated alarms. (n=1– 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
120) s
Timed Reminder Specifies the length of time 10 × n Feature Manual References
—Alarm Ringing that an alarm rings. (n=1–30) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
Duration s

PC Programming Manual 329

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Unattended Specifies the length of time 60 × n (n Feature Manual References
Conference— until the conference originator = 0–60) s 2.14.2 Conference
Recall Start receives an Unattended
Timer Conference Recall tone.
Unattended Specifies the length of time 0–240 s Feature Manual References
Conference— until the parties involved in an 2.14.2 Conference
Warning Tone Unattended Conference
Start Timer receive a warning tone after
the conference originator
receives the Unattended
Conference Recall tone but
does not return to the
conference.
Unattended Specifies the length of time 0–240 s Feature Manual References
Conference— until an Unattended 2.14.2 Conference
Disconnect Timer Conference is disconnected
after the parties involved in the
conference receive a warning
tone but the conference
originator does not return to
the conference.

Miscellaneous
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Caller ID—Waiting to Specifies the length of time that the 0–15 s PC Programming
receive PBX waits to receive Caller ID from Manual References
an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—
received through an analogue trunk [3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group
card on which no Caller ID card is —Caller ID Modification
mounted or through a port to which 14.1 PBX Configuration—
Caller ID Detection is disabled, this [6-1] Feature—System
timer is not applicable. Speed Dial
Feature Manual
References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Visual Specifies the length of time that a 0–250 s Feature Manual
Caller ID Display Caller ID number, with the Call References
Waiting tone offered by an analogue 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
line from the telephone company, is 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
shown on the display. The Caller ID 2.19.1 Caller ID
number flashes on the display for five
seconds, followed by a 10-second
pause, then flashes again for five
seconds.

330 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension PIN— Specifies the number of successive None, 1– Feature Manual
Lock Counter incorrect PIN entries allowed before 15 References
the extension PIN is locked. A locked 2.7.5 Walking COS
extension PIN cannot be used until 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
reset from the extension assigned as 2.24.1 Extension Personal
manager. (Specifying "None" Identification Number (PIN)
disables this counter.)
External Sensor— Specifies the length of time that the 10 × n Feature Manual
Ring Duration PBX waits for the called party to (n=1–15) References
answer before cancelling a sensor s 2.18.3 External Sensor
call.
Incoming Call Inter- Specifies the length of time between 0–30 s PC Programming
digit Timer—DDI / digits when receiving a DDI/DID Manual References
DID number from a public network. The 18.3 PBX Configuration—
call will be redirected to a PBX [10-3] CO & Incoming Call—
operator when this timer expires. DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Incoming Call Inter- Specifies the length of time between 3–30 s PC Programming
digit Timer—TIE digits when receiving a dialled Manual References
number from a TIE line. The call will 17.1 PBX Configuration—
be redirected to a PBX operator [9-1] Private Network—TIE
when this timer expires. Table
Feature Manual
References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
PT Display—PT Last Specifies the length of time that the 1–15 s
Display Duration in current information remains on the
Idle Mode display after the extension returns to
idle status.
Air Synchronisation Specifies the length of time that a 60 × n PC Programming
—Watching Slave CS can maintain an ongoing (n=0– Manual References
Degeneracy (x60s) call after air synchronisation is lost. 300) s 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—
[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—Air
Synchronisation
Voice Mail (Caller Specifies the length of time from 1–30 s Feature Manual
from VM to CO)— when the voice mail seizes a trunk References
On-hook Wait Time (for example, to transfer a call) until 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
the voice mail goes on hook. If the System Overview
time specified here is too short, the
voice mail will be unable to dial the
number and make a connection.

PC Programming Manual 331

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
During Conversation Specifies the length of time that a 80 ms,
—DTMF Signal DTMF signal is sent when a number 160 ms,
Length is dialled from a PT or PS during a 240 ms,
conversation. 320 ms
During Conversation Specifies the length of time between 64 + 16 ×
—DTMF Inter-digit DTMF signals when numbers are n (n=0–
Pause dialled in succession from a PT or 15) ms
PS during a conversation.
During Conversation Specifies the length of the pause 1.5 s, 2.5 Feature Manual
—Pause Signal inserted when the PAUSE button is s, 3.5 s, References
Time pressed during a conversation. 4.5 s 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
System Wireless— When the destination of an incoming 0–30 s PC Programming
PS Out of Range call is a PS, specifies the length of Manual References
Timer time the PBX searches for the PS 10.9 PBX Configuration—
before setting its status to Out of [2-9] System—System
Range. Options—Option 4—System
If "0" is assigned, the timer is Wireless—Out of Range
controlled by the cell station. Registration
Feature Manual
References
4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by
Network ICD Group
Conference Group Specifies the length of time that a 0–120 s PC Programming
Call—Ring Duration conference group call will ring. The Manual References
conference group call will be 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—
established with members who [2-6-1] System—Numbering
answer within this time. If no Plan—Main—Features—
members answer the call before this Conference Group Call
timer expires, the call is cancelled. Operation
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Miscellaneous—Conference
Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—
[3-9] Group—Conference
Group
Feature Manual
References
2.15.1 Conference Group
Call
Call Pickup Group Specifies how long the indication of 5, 10, 15 Feature Manual
Monitor—LCD an incoming call that can be s References
Display Duration (s) answered by an extension in a call 2.4.3 Call Pickup
pickup group is shown on PTs’
displays.

332 PC Programming Manual

 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of
day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode
from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the
desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the
corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension (determined by
COS).
• To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time

Setting
The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected
Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
1. Day/Lunch/Night Enables the setting of the start time Disable, Feature Manual
—Day1 Start, Lunch for each time block. Enable References
Start, Day2 Start, 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Night Start—Setting 5.1.4 Time Service
1. Day/Lunch/Night Specifies the start time for each time 00:00– Feature Manual
—Day1 Start, Lunch block. Times can only be set when 1. 23:59 References
Start, Day2 Start, Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Night Start—Hour, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start 5.1.4 Time Service
Minute —Setting is set to Enable.
2. Break—Break 1–3 Enables the setting of the start time Disable, Feature Manual
Start—Setting for each break period. Enable References
5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Specifies the start time for each break 00:00– Feature Manual
Start—Hour, Minute period. Times can only be set when 2. 23:59 References
Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting is 5.1.3 Tenant Service
set to Enable. 5.1.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Specifies the end time for each break 00:00– Feature Manual
End—Hour, Minute period. Times can only be set when 2. 23:59 References
Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting is 5.1.3 Tenant Service
set to Enable. 5.1.4 Time Service

PC Programming Manual 333

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday

Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the
desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
You can click the UM Holiday Table tab to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified
Messaging system. These settings are synchronised with Unified Messaging system Holiday settings.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Holiday Table— Enables the setting of Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Setting the holiday. Enable 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings
—Holiday Table
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday Table— Specifies the month of 1–12 PC Programming Manual References
Start Date— the holiday start date. 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings
Month —Holiday Table
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday Table— Specifies the day of 1–31 PC Programming Manual References
Start Date— the holiday start date. 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings
Day —Holiday Table
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday Table— Specifies the month of 1–12 PC Programming Manual References
End Date— the holiday end date. 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings
Month —Holiday Table
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday Table— Specifies the day of 1–31 PC Programming Manual References
End Date—Day the holiday end date. 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings
—Holiday Table
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service

334 PC Programming Manual

 10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan

10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering

Plan
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—
Main
Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs
in a network can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.

Note
• Numbering does not necessarily have to be uniform; varying numbers of digits can be used for each
setting.
• To programme these settings, all installed V-SIPEXT32 and V-UTEXT32 cards must first be set to
OUS. For details, see 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 64
different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading number of Max. 3 digits PC Programming Manual
Number extension numbers and floating (consisting of References
extension numbers. 0–9) 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options—Option
Note
9—Extension / Mailbox Setting—
Changing this value will also Mailbox Number Synchronization
affect the following settings. with Extension Number
• Extension Number as set in 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
User Profiles and UM Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Configuration Group—Group Settings
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2]
• Mailbox Number when set to Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
synchronise with Extension
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Number settings
Extension—Wired Extension—
(However, Mailbox Number
Extension Settings
synchronisation depends on
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
the setting 10.9 PBX
Extension—Portable Station—
Configuration—[2-9] System
Extension Settings
—System Options—Option 9
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
—Extension / Mailbox
Optional Device—Voice Message
Setting—Mailbox Number
—DISA Message
Synchronization with
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
Extension Number.)
Maintenance—Main
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1]
Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting—
Mailbox Number

PC Programming Manual 335

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

No. of Specifies the number of additional None: 0 digit
Additional digits following the leading number. X: 1 digit
Digits X: 2 digits

Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available
while hearing a dial tone.
Name Description Value Range Links
Operator Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to call the operator. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
System—Operator & BGM
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
Feature—Tenant
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Operator Features
Idle Line Access Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
(Local Access) used to make a trunk call by (consisting of 0– References
Idle Line Access (selects an 9, *, and #) 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—
idle trunk automatically). [3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—
Local Access Priority
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Trunk Group Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Access used to make a trunk call (consisting of 0– References
using an idle trunk from a 9, *, and #) 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1]
certain trunk group. CO & Incoming Call—CO Line
Settings
TIE Line Access Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to make a TIE line call. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
Private Network—TIE Table
Feature Manual References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Redial Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
used to redial the last number (consisting of 0– 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
dialled. 9, *, and #)

336 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

System Speed Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Dialling / used to make a call using a (consisting of 0– References
Personal Speed System/Personal Speed 9, *, and #) 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—
Dialling Dialling number. [4-1-3] Extension—Wired
Extension—Speed Dial
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/
System
Personal Speed Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Dialling - used to programme Personal (consisting of 0– 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/
Programming Speed Dialling numbers at an 9, *, and #) System
extension.
DOORPHONE Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Call used to make a call to a (consisting of 0– References
doorphone. 9, *, and #) 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Group Paging Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to page a certain paging (consisting of 0– References
group. 9, *, and #) 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
Group—Paging Group
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
External BGM Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
On / Off available for manager (consisting of 0– References
extensions, used to turn on or 9, *, and #) 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
off the external BGM. System—Operator & BGM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

PC Programming Manual 337

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

OGM Record / Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Clear / Playback available for manager (consisting of 0– References
extensions, used to record, 9, *, and #) 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—
clear, or play back a certain [5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice
OGM. Message—DISA Message
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual References
2.28.2 Outgoing Message
(OGM)
Single CO Line Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Access used to make a trunk call (consisting of 0– References
using a certain trunk. 9, *, and #) 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1]
CO & Incoming Call—CO Line
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parallel Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits
Telephone (Ring) used to set or cancel an SLT (consisting of 0–
Mode Set / connected in parallel with a 9, *, and #)
Cancel DPT to ring when receiving
an incoming call.

Note
This feature is restricted
to extensions connected
to legacy gateway PBXs.
For information about
connecting SLTs and
DPTs in parallel, refer to
the documentation of the
connected legacy
gateway PBX.
Group Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Pickup used to answer a call ringing (consisting of 0– References
at a certain call pickup group. 9, *, and #) 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3]
Group—Call Pickup Group
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup

338 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Directed Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Pickup used to answer a call ringing (consisting of 0– References
at a certain extension. 9, *, and #) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—
[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings—
Option 3—Call Pickup Deny
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
TAFAS Answer Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to answer a trunk call (consisting of 0– References
notified through an external 9, *, and #) 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2]
pager. Optional Device—External
Pager
Feature Manual References
2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)
Group Paging Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Answer used to answer a page to a (consisting of 0– References
paging group. 9, *, and #) 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
Group—Paging Group
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
Automatic Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Callback Busy used to cancel Automatic (consisting of 0– 2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy
Cancel Callback Busy. 9, *, and #) (Camp-on)
User Remote Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Operation / used to change the COS of (consisting of 0– References
Walking COS / an extension temporarily, and 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
Verification Code also change the feature [2-7-1] System—Class of
settings (for example, FWD, Service—COS Settings—
DND) of an extension from Optional Device & Other
another extension or through Extensions—Remote Operation
DISA. by Other Extension
Feature Manual References
2.7.5 Walking COS
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

PC Programming Manual 339

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Wireless XDP Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Parallel Mode used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
Set / Cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode. 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Accept Wireless
XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
Feature Manual References
5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel
Mode
Account Code Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Entry used to enter an Account (consisting of 0– 2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry
Code. 9, *, and #)
Call Hold / Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Hold Retrieve used to hold a call or retrieve (consisting of 0– 2.13.1 Call Hold
a call on hold from the 9, *, and #)
holding extension.
Call Hold Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Retrieve: used to retrieve a held call (consisting of 0– 2.13.1 Call Hold
Specified with a from a different extension by 9, *, and #)
Holding specifying a holding
Extension extension number.
Number
Call Park / Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Park Retrieve used to hold a call in a (consisting of 0– 2.13.2 Call Park
parking zone or retrieve a call 9, *, and #)
held in a parking zone.
Hold Retrieve: Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Specified with a used to retrieve a held trunk (consisting of 0– 2.13.1 Call Hold
Held CO Line call from a different extension 9, *, and #)
Number by specifying the held trunk
number.
Door Open Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to open a door. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.2 Door Open
External Relay Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Access used to activate a relay. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4]
Optional Device—External Relay
Feature Manual References
2.18.4 External Relay Control

340 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

External Feature Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Access used to access the features (consisting of 0– 2.11.7 External Feature Access
of a host PBX or the 9, *, and #) (EFA)
telephone company.
SIP Refer(Blind) Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
used to perform a blind (consisting of 0– 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
transfer from the PBX to the 9, *, and #) Protocol) Extension
SIP trunk.

Note
This feature is not
available from an ISDN
extension or a SIP
extension.
ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
used to hold a call using the (consisting of 0– 4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by
ISDN service of the telephone 9, *, and #) ISDN
company, instead of the PBX
feature.
COLR Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel used to set or cancel COLR, (consisting of 0– References
which suppresses the 9, *, and #) 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
presentation of the called Configuration—Slot—Port
party’s number to the caller. Property - BRI Port—
Supplementary Service—COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting),
CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—
Supplementary Service—COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting),
CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by
QSIG

PC Programming Manual 341

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

CLIR Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel used to set or cancel CLIR, (consisting of 0– References
which suppresses the 9, *, and #) 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
presentation of the caller’s Configuration—Slot—Port
number to the called party. Property - BRI Port—
Supplementary Service—COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting),
CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—
Supplementary Service—COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting),
CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by
QSIG
Switch CLIP of Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
CO Line / used to send either the CLIP (consisting of 0– References
Extension number of the trunk in use 9, *, and #) 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(subscriber’s number) or the Configuration—Slot—Port
extension to the network. Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO
—Subscriber Number
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—CO Setting
—Subscriber Number
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—
[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
—CLIP—CLIP ID
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings—
CLIP—CLIP ID
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)

342 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

MCID Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
used to ask the telephone (consisting of 0– 4.1.2.9 Malicious Call
company to trace a malicious 9, *, and #) Identification (MCID)
call. This feature can be used
during a call or while hearing
a reorder tone after the caller
hangs up.
ISDN-FWD Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
(MSN) Set / used to set or cancel the (consisting of 0– 4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—
Cancel / Confirm FWD of incoming ISDN calls 9, *, and #) by ISDN (P-MP)
to an outside party using the 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—
ISDN service of the telephone by ISDN (P-P)
company (instead of the
PBX), or confirm the FWD
setting.
Extension users can set the
FWD destination to the
network on an MSN basis.
Message Waiting Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel / used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– 2.20.1 Message Waiting
Call Back Message Waiting, or call back 9, *, and #)
the caller.
FWD/DND Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
CO & Extension FWD/DND for incoming trunk 9, *, and #) 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
and intercom calls. [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND) Features
FWD/DND Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
CO FWD/DND for incoming trunk 9, *, and #) 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
calls. [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND) Features

PC Programming Manual 343

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

FWD/DND Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
Extension FWD/DND for incoming 9, *, and #) 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
intercom calls. [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND) Features
FWD No Answer Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Timer Set used to set the length of time (consisting of 0– References
before a call is forwarded. 9, *, and #) 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel FWD for (consisting of 0– References
CO & Extension incoming trunk and intercom 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
calls to an incoming call [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
distribution group. Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel FWD for (consisting of 0– References
CO incoming trunk calls to an 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
incoming call distribution [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
group. Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

344 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel FWD for (consisting of 0– References
Extension incoming intercom calls to an 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
incoming call distribution [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
group. Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Call Pickup Deny Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel used to set or cancel Call (consisting of 0– 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing 9, *, and #)
other extensions from picking
up calls to your extension).
Paging Deny Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Set / Cancel used to set or cancel Paging (consisting of 0– References
Deny (i.e., preventing other 9, *, and #) 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
extensions from paging your Group—Paging Group
extension).
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
Walking Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Extension used to use the same (consisting of 0– 2.24.3 Walking Extension
extension settings at a new 9, *, and #) Features
extension.
Data Line Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Security Set / used to set or cancel Data (consisting of 0– 2.11.5 Data Line Security
Cancel Line Security (i.e., preventing 9, *, and #)
signals from other extensions
during data transmission).
Manual Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Waiting for used to set or change the (consisting of 0– 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Extension Call method of receiving a Call 9, *, and #)
Waiting notification from an
extension.
Automatic Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Waiting used to set or cancel a Call (consisting of 0– 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Waiting notification from a 9, *, and #)
trunk, doorphone, or a call via
an incoming call distribution
group.

PC Programming Manual 345

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Executive Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Override Deny used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
Set / Cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
preventing other extensions [2-7-1] System—Class of
from joining your Service—COS Settings—
conversation). Executive—Executive Busy
Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Executive—Executive Busy
Override Deny
Feature Manual References
2.10.2 Executive Busy Override
Not Ready Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
(Manual Wrap- used to enter or leave Not (consisting of 0– References
up) Mode On / Ready mode. 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
Off [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
Log-in / Log-out Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to join or leave an (consisting of 0– References
incoming call distribution 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
group. [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
Incoming Call Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Queue Monitor available only for extensions (consisting of 0– References
assigned as a supervisor, 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
used to monitor the status of [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
an incoming call distribution Distribution Group—Group
group with the extension Settings—Miscellaneous—
display. Supervisor Extension Number
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature

346 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Hot Line (Pickup Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Dial) Program used to set/cancel the Hot (consisting of 0– References
Set / Cancel Line feature, or programme 9, *, and #) 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
the number to be System—Timers & Counters—
automatically dialled. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial
—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Manual References
2.6.6 Hot Line
Absent Message Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel used to set or cancel the (consisting of 0– 2.20.2 Absent Message
display of an Absent 9, *, and #)
Message.
BGM Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel used to set or cancel the (consisting of 0– References
BGM heard through the 9, *, and #) 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
telephone speaker while on- System—Operator & BGM
hook.
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)
Remote Timed Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Reminder used to set or cancel a Timed (consisting of 0– 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
(Remote Wakeup Reminder remotely (Wake-up 9, *, and #)
Call) Call).
Timed Reminder Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel used to set or cancel a Timed (consisting of 0– 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
Reminder. 9, *, and #)
Printing Message Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to select a Printing (consisting of 0– References
Message to be output on 9, *, and #) 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
SMDR. Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main
—SMDR for External Hotel
Application 2—Printing Message
1–8
Feature Manual References
2.22.2 Printing Message
Extension Dial Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Lock Set / used to lock or unlock an (consisting of 0– 2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
Cancel extension to make certain 9, *, and #)
trunk calls and change the
forwarding destination, using
the Extension Dial Lock
feature.

PC Programming Manual 347

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Time Service Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
(Day / Lunch / available for manager (consisting of 0– References
Break / Night) extensions, used to change 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
Switch the time mode manually. [2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Time Service Switch
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Remote Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension Dial available for manager (consisting of 0– References
Lock Off extensions, used to unlock 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
other extensions using the [2-7-1] System—Class of
Extension Dial Lock feature. Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual References
2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
Remote Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension Dial available for manager (consisting of 0– References
Lock On extensions, used to lock other 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
extensions using the [2-7-1] System—Class of
Extension Dial Lock feature. Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual References
2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
Extension Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Feature Clear used to reset certain features (consisting of 0– 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
of an extension to the default 9, *, and #)
values.
Extension PIN Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel used to set a PIN for an (consisting of 0– 2.24.1 Extension Personal
extension. 9, *, and #) Identification Number (PIN)
Dial Information Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
(CTI) used to send dial information (consisting of 0– 2.26.1 Computer Telephony
to the CTI feature instead of 9, *, and #) Integration (CTI)
the PBX.

348 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Conference Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Group Call used to make a conference (consisting of 0– References
Operation group call. 9, *, and #) 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
System—Timers & Counters—
Miscellaneous—Conference
Group Call—Ring Duration
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Miscellaneous—Conference
Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9]
Group—Conference Group
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call
Centralised BLF Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Monitor Cancel used to cancel monitoring of (consisting of 0– References
an extension using an NDSS 9, *, and #) 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
button. Private Network—TIE Table
Feature Manual References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to cancel the Busy Out (consisting of 0– References
status of an analogue trunk. 9, *, and #) 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options—
Option 5—Busy Out—Busy Out
for Analogue CO
Feature Manual References
2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Other PBX Extension

Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different
locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be
entered in this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Dial Specifies the leading Max. 3 digits PC Programming Manual References
extension number of (consisting of 0–9, *, 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private
the other PBX. and #) Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG—
Leading Number
Feature Manual References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

KX-T7710
The settings of the MESSAGE key and One-touch keys on the KX-T7710 can be programmed.

PC Programming Manual 349

10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Note
• This tab is for programming extensions connected to legacy gateway PBXs. For information about
setting up a legacy gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
• For further information about programming for KX-T7710 phones, refer to the documentation of the
connected legacy gateway PBX.
Name Description Value Range Links
Dial Indicates the DTMF tone dial B: For MESSAGE Key
required by the PBX to recognise it A1: For One-touch Dial 01
and dial the pre-programmed Key
number for each key (reference A2: For One-touch Dial 02
only). Key
A3: For One-touch Dial 03
Key
A4: For One-touch Dial 04
Key
A5: For One-touch Dial 05
Key
A6: For One-touch Dial 06
Key
A7: For One-touch Dial 07
Key
A8: For One-touch Dial 08
Key
Message Specifies the feature number or Max. 32 digits (consisting of PC Programming
Key— telephone number dialled when the 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] Manual
Phone MESSAGE key on the KX-T7710 is [Secret], P [Pause], and F References
Number pressed. By default, this is set to [Flash])
10.6.1 PBX
the feature number used to call
Configuration—
back a caller who left a message
[2-6-1] System—
waiting indication, Message
Numbering Plan—
Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.
Main—Features—
This is available only when the
Message Waiting
position of the Mode switch lever
Set / Cancel / Call
on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".
Back
One-touch Specifies the number dialled when Max. 32 digits (consisting of
Dial 01–08 a one-touch key on the KX-T7710 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ]
—Phone is pressed. [Secret], P [Pause], and F
Number This is available only when the [Flash])
position of the Mode switch lever
on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".

10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—

Quick Dial
Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without
having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other
registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks" in the Feature Manual).
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.

350 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Name Description Value Range Links

Use Quick Specifies whether Quick On, Off PC Programming Manual
Dial for CO Dialling can be used to make References
rerouting a trunk call via an extension 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
during Break registered at another site in a Configuration—Slot—Site Property
Mode. One-look network, when the —Main—Main—Switch Time
Time Service mode is Break Service to "Break" in Isolated
mode. Mode
Feature Manual References
2.6.5 Quick Dialling
5.1.4 Time Service
Use quick dial Specifies whether Quick On, Off Feature Manual References
for rerouting Dialling can be used for 2.6.5 Quick Dialling
to public CO rerouting to a public trunk
when TIE line when a TIE line is not
does not operating.
work.
Dial Specifies the Quick Dialling 1–4000: Max. 8 Feature Manual References
number. digits (consisting 2.6.5 Quick Dialling
of 0–9, *, and #) 4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol
(VoIP) Network
5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed
Numbering
Phone Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual References
Number dialled when the (consisting of 0–9, 2.6.5 Quick Dialling
corresponding Quick Dialling *, #, T [Transfer], 4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol
number is used. [ ] [Secret], P (VoIP) Network
[Pause], and F 5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed
[Flash]) Numbering

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—

B/NA DND Call Feature
Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are
available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.

PC Programming Manual 351

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Value
Name Description Links
Range
BSS / Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– PC Programming Manual References
OHCA / used to notify a busy 9, *, or #) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Whisper extension of a second call by Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
OHCA / Call Waiting, or call an Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for
DND extension in DND mode. Extension Call
Override 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for
Extension Call
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Executive Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– PC Programming Manual References
Busy used to interrupt an existing 9, *, or #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System
Override call to establish a three-party —Class of Service—COS Settings—
conference call. Executive—Executive Busy Override
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Executive Override
Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Executive Override
Deny
Feature Manual References
2.10.2 Executive Busy Override
Alternate Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– Feature Manual References
Calling - used to allow a caller to 9, *, or #) 2.5.3 Intercom Call
Ring / Voice change the called
extension’s preset call
receiving method to ring tone
or voice.
Message Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– Feature Manual References
Waiting Set used to leave a Message 9, *, or #) 2.20.1 Message Waiting
Waiting notification.

352 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Call Monitor Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– PC Programming Manual References
used to listen to a busy 9, *, or #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System
extension’s conversation. —Class of Service—COS Settings—
Executive—Call Monitor
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Executive Override
Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Executive Override
Deny
Feature Manual References
2.10.3 Call Monitor
Automatic Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– Feature Manual References
Callback used to reserve a busy line 9, *, or #) 2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Busy and receive callback ringing
when the line becomes idle.
BSS / Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– PC Programming Manual References
OHCA / used to notify a busy 9, *, or #) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Whisper extension of a second call by Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
OHCA / Call Waiting, or call an Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for
DND extension in DND mode. Extension Call
Override-2 This is the same setting as 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
BSS / OHCA / Whisper Extension—Portable Station—Extension
OHCA / DND Override on Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for
this screen, and can be used Extension Call
to provide two methods of
activating the specified Feature Manual References
features. This can be useful, 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
for example, if users prefer 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
to use a separate feature 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
number to activate DND 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Override.

PC Programming Manual 353

10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service

10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of

Service
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—
COS Settings
Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of
Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A
maximum of 512 COS levels can be programmed.

TRS
Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
of the COS. 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
TRS Level Specifies the Toll 1: Allows all trunk PC Programming Manual References
—Day, Restriction (TRS)/ calls 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—
Lunch, Call Barring 2–6: Restricts trunk Week Table
Break, (Barring) level for calls according to 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—
Night making trunk calls the combination of Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
in each time mode. the Denied and 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—
Exception Code Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Tables Settings—Main—COS
7: Restricts all trunk 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
calls Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional
Device—Doorphone—COS
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—
Denied Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—
Exception Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

354 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

TRS Level Specifies the TRS/ 1: Allows all trunk PC Programming Manual References
on Barring level for calls 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension making trunk calls 2–6: Restricts trunk Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Lock when an extension calls according to Settings—Main—COS
is locked using the the combination of 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension Dial the Denied and Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Lock feature. Exception Code Settings—Main—COS
Tables 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—
7: Restricts all trunk Denied Code
calls 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—
Exception Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
TRS Level Specifies the TRS/ 1: Allows all trunk PC Programming Manual References
for System Barring level for calls 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Speed making a trunk call 2–6: Restricts trunk Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Dialling using System calls according to Settings—Main—COS
Speed Dialling the combination of 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
numbers, which the Denied and Extension—Portable Station—Extension
overrides the TRS/ Exception Code Settings—Main—COS
Barring set for the Tables 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—
current time mode. 7: Restricts all trunk System Speed Dial
calls 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—
Miscellaneous—TRS Override by System
Speed Dialling
Feature Manual References
2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

CO & SMDR
Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Name Specifies the name of Max. 20 Feature Manual References
the COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 355

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension- Enables the extension- Disable, PC Programming Manual References
CO Line Call to-trunk call duration Enable 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—
Duration feature. The maximum System Options—Option 2—Extension - CO
Limit call duration can be set Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
using Extension-CO 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—
Duration Time (*60s) Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
on 11.1.1 PBX 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
Configuration—[3-1-1] —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
Group—Trunk Group —COS
—TRG Settings. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
Feature Manual References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Transfer to Enables the transferring Disable, PC Programming Manual References
CO of calls to trunks. Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
Feature Manual References
2.12.1 Call Transfer
Call Forward Enables the forwarding Disable, PC Programming Manual References
to CO of calls to trunks. Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension
—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension
—Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Account Specifies whether the Option, PC Programming Manual References
Code Mode entry of an account code Forced 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
is optional or mandatory —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
when making a trunk —COS
call. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
Feature Manual References
2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

356 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
CF (MSN) Enables forwarding of Disable, Feature Manual References
ISDN calls to an outside Enable 4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
party using the ISDN 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
service of the telephone
company, instead of the
PBX, on an MSN basis.
Outgoing Enables the automatic Disable, PC Programming Manual References
CO Call recording of information Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
Printout about outgoing trunk —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
(SMDR) calls on SMDR. —COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—
Main
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)

Assistant
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
of the COS. 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Call Pickup Enables using a Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
by DSS DSS button to pick References
up a call to a 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
specified extension. Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—Main—COS
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4]
Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible
Button
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3]
Extension—Portable Station—Flexible
Button
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup

PC Programming Manual 357

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

DND Enables making a Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Override call to an extension References
in DND mode by 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
entering the feature Extension—Wired Extension—
number. Extension Settings—Main—COS
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
OHCA / Enables using Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Whisper OHCA/Whisper References
OHCA OHCA as a method 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
of second call Extension—Wired Extension—
notification by Extension Settings—Main—COS
entering the feature 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
number. Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
Feature Manual References
2.10.4 Second Call Notification to Busy
Extension
2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Transfer to Enables a Disable: The call is not PC Programming Manual
busy transferred call to be transferred. (If the References
Extension queued when the transfer destination 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System
w/o BSS transfer destination has enabled the call —Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA /
Operation is busy. waiting notification Recall / Tone—Recall—Transfer Recall
feature, it is possible to
inform the destination Feature Manual References
about the call transfer.) 2.12.1 Call Transfer
Enable: The
transferred call is
queued for the time
period specified in
Recall—Transfer
Recall in 10.3 PBX
Configuration—[2-3]
System—Timers &
Counters.

358 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic Enables a caller to Disable: Even if the Feature Manual References
Answer have calls destination has set 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback
(Caller) automatically Hands-free
answered when the Answerback, the call
destination has set will not be
Hands-free automatically
Answerback. answered.
Enable: The call will be
automatically
answered.

Executive
Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 Feature Manual References
of the COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Call Monitor Enables listening to Disable, PC Programming Manual References
a busy extension’s Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
conversation. Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
2.10.3 Call Monitor
Executive Enables interrupting Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Busy an existing call to Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Override establish a three- Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
party conference COS
call. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
2.10.2 Executive Busy Override
Executive Enables preventing Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Busy other extensions Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Override from interrupting Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Deny calls. COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 359

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Manager
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
name of the COS. 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Group Enables setting Disable: An PC Programming Manual
Forward Set call forwarding for extension cannot set References
calls to an call forwarding for 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
incoming call any group. Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group
distribution group. Enable-All: An —Group Settings—Member List
extension can set 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
call forwarding for all Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
groups. Settings—Main—COS
Enable-Group: An 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
extension can only Extension—Portable Station—Extension
set call forwarding Settings—Main—COS
for the group to
which the extension Feature Manual References
belongs. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
PT Specifies the level Disable: A PT user PC Programming Manual
Programming of authorisation cannot perform any References
Mode for performing PT programming. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
programming. Enable: A PT user Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
can perform only Settings—Main—COS
personal 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
programming. Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
Feature Manual References
5.5.3 PT Programming
Manager Specifies the Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
authorisation to References
use manager 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
features. Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Manager Features

360 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Time Service Enables manual Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Switch switching of time References
modes. 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—
Week Table
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service

PDN/SDN
An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick
up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for
extensions at each COS level.
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
SDN Key Mode Selects what happens when Enhanced DSS: Feature Manual References
an extension user presses an The registered 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
SDN button while on hook. (owner) (PDN)/Secondary Directory
extension is Number (SDN) Extension
called.
Standard SDN:
A dial tone is
heard.
Making call by Selects whether an extension Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
COS of SDN that uses an SDN button to References
key's owner make calls is given the COS of 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
the SDN button’s registered [2-7-1] System—Class of Service
(owner) extension. —COS Settings—PDN/SDN—
This setting is only available COS Name
when SDN Key Mode above is
set to "Standard SDN". Feature Manual References
2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension
SDN Key Selects whether PT users can Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
Assignment by create SDN buttons on their 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
PT Program own extensions using PT (PDN)/Secondary Directory
programming. Number (SDN) Extension

PC Programming Manual 361

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Optional Device & Other Extensions

Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 Feature Manual References
of the COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Door Unlock Enables using the Disable, PC Programming Manual References
door opener feature. Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
2.18.2 Door Open
External Enables access to Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Relay Access external relays. Enable 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—
External Relay
Feature Manual References
2.18.4 External Relay Control
Accept the Enables reception of Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Call from calls from DISA. Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
DISA Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional
Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Remote Allows the Walking Allow, Deny PC Programming Manual References
Operation by COS feature to be 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Other used from a remote Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Extension location (inside the COS
PBX, or outside the 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
PBX using DISA). Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
2.7.5 Walking COS
Accept Allows Wireless Allow, Deny PC Programming Manual References
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
XDP Parallel to be set by a PS. Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Mode Set by COS
PS
Feature Manual References
5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

362 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block

CA
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
Name COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
CA Chat Enables the chat feature Disable, PC Programming Manual References
when using Enable 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
Communication Assistant Class of Service—COS Settings—CA—CA
(CA) Client. ICD Group Log Out
Feature Manual References
2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)
CA ICD Enables logging out of ICD Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Group groups when using Enable 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
Log Out Communication Assistant Class of Service—COS Settings—CA—CA
(CA) Client. Chat
Feature Manual References
2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Miscellaneous
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 Feature Manual References
of the COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Conference Enables making Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Group Call conference group Enable 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—
Operation calls. Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—
Conference Group Call—Ring Duration
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—
Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
Conference Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—
Conference Group
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call
Accept a collect Enables accepting Disable,
call (for Brazil) collect calls. Enable

10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—

External Call Block
Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode
(day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.

PC Programming Manual 363

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Outgoing Specifies the Block PC Programming Manual References
Trunk Group available trunk (blue), 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
1–96 groups. Non Block 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—
CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—

Internal Call Block
Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming
call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive
intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Number of Specifies the Block PC Programming Manual References
the Extension combinations of (blue), 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—
Which Receive COS levels for Non Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
the Call from which intercom Block —Main—COS
Other Extension calls are blocked. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
1–512 Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—
Doorphone—COS
Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

364 PC Programming Manual

 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns

10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone

Patterns
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns
—Call from CO
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the
calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table
can be selected for use by an extension.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Ring Tone Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Pattern tone pattern for Double, 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—
Plan 1–8 incoming trunk Triple, CO Line Settings—Trunk Group Number
calls. Option1, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Option2 Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
Pattern Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns

—Call from DOORPHONE
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port
that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any
pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Name Description Value Range Links
Ring Tone Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Pattern tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Plan 1–8 incoming Triple, S- Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
doorphone calls. Double, Pattern Table
Option 1, 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Option 2 Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
Pattern Table
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—
Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

PC Programming Manual 365

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns

—Call from Others
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX
features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables
can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature Manual.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension— Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Ring Tone tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Pattern Plan 1– incoming intercom Triple, Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option
8 calls. Option 1, 1—Ring Pattern Table
Option 2 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1
—Ring Pattern Table
Timed Reminder Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
—Ring Tone tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Pattern Plan 1– Timed Reminder Triple, Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option
8 alarms. Option 1, 1—Ring Pattern Table
Option 2 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1
—Ring Pattern Table
Call Back—Ring Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Tone Pattern tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Plan 1–8 callback ringing by Triple, S- Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option
Automatic Callback Double, 1—Ring Pattern Table
Busy. Option 1, 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Option 2 Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1
—Ring Pattern Table
Live Call Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Screening— tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Ring Tone LCS warning Triple, Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option
Pattern Plan 1– tones. Option 1, 1—Ring Pattern Table
8 Option 2 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1
—Ring Pattern Table
External Sensor Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
—Ring Tone tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Pattern Plan 1– calls from an Triple, Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option
8 external sensor. Option 1, 1—Ring Pattern Table
Option 2 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1
—Ring Pattern Table

366 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System

Options
Various system settings can be programmed.

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
PT LCD—Date Selects the order that the Date-Month, Month-
Display month and date are shown Date
on the displays of
extensions.
PT LCD—Time Selects the time format 12H, 24H Feature Manual
Display shown on the displays of References
extensions. The time 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
display format assigned
here applies when setting
the Timed Reminder
feature.
PT LCD— Selects whether passwords Hide, Display Feature Manual
Password / PIN and PINs (Personal References
Display Identification Number) are 2.24.1 Extension Personal
hidden or shown on the Identification Number (PIN)
displays of extensions while
being entered.
PT Fwd / DND Selects the light pattern of On (Solid): Red on PC Programming Manual
—Fwd LED the FWD/DND button while Flash: Slow red References
the FWD feature is flashing 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
activated. [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual
References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication

PC Programming Manual 367

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

PT Fwd / DND Selects the light pattern of On (Solid): Red on PC Programming Manual
—DND LED the FWD/DND button while Flash: Slow red References
the DND feature is flashing 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
activated. [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual
References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND Selects the function of the FWD/DND Setting PC Programming Manual
—Fwd/DND key FWD/DND button (fixed Mode: Enter References
mode when Idle button) when it is pressed in programming mode 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
idle status. (A FWD/DND for the FWD/DND [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
button customised on a setting. Extension—FWD/DND
flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
FWD/DND Cycle Switch Switch: Switch the [4-2-2] Extension—Portable
mode, and the mode cannot FWD on/DND on/Off Station—FWD/DND
be changed.) mode instead of
entering the Feature Manual
programming mode References
for the FWD/DND 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
setting. (When there (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
are separate —SUMMARY
FWD/DND settings
for calls from trunks
and calls from
extensions, mode
switching cannot be
performed.)
PT Fwd / DND Specifies whether Do Not Page, Page PC Programming Manual
—Paging to extensions can receive References
DND Extension paging when in DND mode. 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
Group—Paging Group
Feature Manual
References
2.17.1 Paging

368 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

PT Fwd / DND Specifies whether an Idle, Busy PC Programming Manual
—Extension extension is shown as idle References
Status of Mobile or busy when it forwards a 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
Integration call to a trunk on no answer. [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
(FWD NA to Extension—FWD/DND
CO) 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual
References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
PT Operation— Enables the use of Off-Hook Disable: The PT Feature Manual
Off Hook Monitor with D-PTs and user’s voice is sent References
Monitor IP-PTs. through the 2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor
handsfree
microphone. The
other party’s voice is
heard through the
hands-free speaker.
Enable: The PT
user’s voice is sent
through the handset
microphone. The
other party’s voice is
heard through both
the hands-free
speaker and the
handset.
PT Operation— Selects the function of the Enable: Pressing the Feature Manual
Privacy Release S-CO button during a trunk S-CO button References
by SCO key call. activates the Privacy 2.14.3 Privacy Release
Release feature
Disable: Pressing the
S-CO button
switches the
information shown on
the PT display.
PT Operation— Specifies whether calls in Enable, Disable Feature Manual
One-touch Busy progress can be joined References
Override by (Executive Busy Override) 2.10.2 Executive Busy
SCO key simply by pressing the S- Override
CO button.
PT Operation— Selects the speed at which Normal, High Speed
JOG Dial Speed items scroll on the display
when the Jog Dial is used.

PC Programming Manual 369

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

PT Operation— Specifies whether incoming Disable, Enable Feature Manual
PT Ring Off call ringing can be turned off References
Setting at individual extensions. If 2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern
disabled, users cannot Selection
prevent incoming calls from
ringing.
PT Operation— Specifies the number of No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Feature Manual
Automatic times a PT in Hands-free Rings, 3 Rings References
Answer for Call Answerback mode will ring 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback
from CO after before a conversation is
established automatically
when it receives a call from
a trunk.
PT Operation— Selects whether calls are Disable (Disconnect), PC Programming Manual
Automatic Hold disconnected or held when Enable References
by ICM / CO / an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—
ICD Group Key or ICD Group button is [4-1-4] Extension—Wired
pressed while having a Extension—Flexible Button
conversation. 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-3] Extension—Portable
Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual
References
2.13.1 Call Hold
PT Operation— Selects which extensions Hold: Any extension Feature Manual
Hold key mode can retrieve a held call or a can retrieve a held References
call that is transferred by call. 2.13.1 Call Hold
Call Transfer without Exclusive Hold: Only
Announcement feature. the holding extension
can retrieve a held
call.

Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Clear Specifies whether the Call Clear, Do not Feature Manual
—Call Waiting Waiting setting is cleared clear References
when Extension Feature Clear 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
is performed.
Extension Clear Specifies whether the Clear, Do not Feature Manual
—Fwd/DND FWD/DND setting is cleared clear References
when Extension Feature Clear 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
is performed.
Extension Clear Specifies whether the Hot Clear, Do not Feature Manual
—Hot Line (Pick- Line setting is cleared when clear References
up Dial) Extension Feature Clear is 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
performed.

370 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

CODEC— Selects the codec type for A-Law, Mu-Law
System CODEC PSs.
CODEC— Selects the codec type for A-Law, Mu-Law
Network CODEC ISDN lines.
CODEC—Priority Specifies whether the priority Enable, Disable
Notification from notification from the SIP
SIP Network (for network is used in place of the
Incoming Call) PBX’s codec priority for SIP
trunks.
ISDN en Bloc Specifies whether to Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Dial—[#] as End automatically send "#" as an References
of Dial for en Bloc end code when dialling to an 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
mode ISDN line; if used as the end Configuration—Slot—Port
code, "#" will not be dialled Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO
out as part of a number even —ISDN Outgoing Call Type
when the "#" key is pressed. 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—CO
Setting—ISDN Outgoing Call
Type
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.1 Integrated Services
Digital Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
Redial— Selects whether Automatic Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Automatic Redial Redial to an ISDN line is References
when No Answer performed when the called 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
(ISDN) party does not answer within a System—Timers & Counters—
pre-programmed time period. Automatic Redial—Redial Call
Ring Duration
Feature Manual
References
2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Redial— Selects whether Automatic Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Automatic Redial Redial to an analogue trunk is References
for Analogue CO performed when the called 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
party does not answer within a System—Timers & Counters—
pre-programmed time period. Automatic Redial—Redial Call
Ring Duration
Feature Manual
References
2.6.3 Last Number Redial

PC Programming Manual 371

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Redial—Save Specifies whether any digits Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Dial After dialled after the called party References
Connection to answers (for example, to 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Redial Memory access a specific extension
within another company) are
also saved as part of the
redial number.
Redial—Call Log Enables display of the Enable, Disable Feature Manual
by Redial key Outgoing Call Log on a References
display PT by pressing the 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
REDIAL button while on hook.
Extension - CO Selects whether the time limit Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Call Limitation— for extension-to-trunk calls References
For Incoming Call applies to outgoing calls only 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
or for both outgoing and [2-7-1] System—Class of
incoming calls. COS Service—COS Settings—CO &
determines the use of this SMDR—Extension-CO Line
feature, and the length of the Call Duration Limit
time limit can be assigned on 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—
a trunk group basis. [3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—
TRG Settings—Main—
Extension-CO Duration Time
(*60s)
Feature Manual
References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
CO - CO Call Selects whether to allow a call Enable: The call Feature Manual
Limitation—After between 2 outside will be References
Conference destinations to continue after disconnected. 2.14.2 Conference
the originator of the Disable: The call 4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features
conference has left the will continue.
conference.
Applying logical Selects whether to use the Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
partitioning logical partitioning feature. References
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control
Log
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Site
Property—Main—Area ID for
logical partition

372 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Option 3
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 1: Called by Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Enable References
Voice Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it 2.18.1 Doorphone Call
receives a call in voice-calling mode. 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 2: Paged / Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Enable References
Automatic Answer Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it 2.4.4 Hands-free
receives a call in Hands-free Answerback
Answerback mode, or paging. 2.17.1 Paging
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 3-1: Start Talking Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Enable References
after Making Call / Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Call from when, for example, it pages another
DOORPHONE extension, or from a doorphone
when the doorphone button is
pressed.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 3-2: Start Talking Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Enable References
after Answering Call Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
when answering a call by, for
example, the Call Pickup feature.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 4-1: Start Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Enable References
Conference Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension 2.14.2 Conference
when a new party joins a conference 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
call.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 4-2: Finish Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Enable References
Conference Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension 2.14.2 Conference
when a party leaves a conference 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
call.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 5: Hold Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Enable References
Tone 5 is heard from an extension 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
when it holds a call.
Dial Tone—Distinctive Enables the PBX to send dial tones Disable, Feature Manual
Dial Tone at different frequencies depending Enable References
on the setting of the extension. 2.25.1 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone Selects the dial tone the PBX sends Type A, Feature Manual
for Extension to extensions to inform about the Type B References
features activated on them. 2.25.1 Dial Tone

PC Programming Manual 373

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Dial Tone—Dial Tone Selects the dial tone the PBX Type A, PC Programming
for ARS (instead of the network) sends to the Type B Manual References
caller when a call is made using the 9.27 PBX Configuration—
ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc [1-1] Configuration—Slot—
dialling. Port Property - BRI Port
9.28 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Port Property - PRI Port
16.1 PBX Configuration—
[8-1] ARS—System Setting
Feature Manual
References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
2.25.1 Dial Tone
Echo Cancel— Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable, Feature Manual
Conference for conference calls. Enable References
2.14.2 Conference
Echo Cancel—CO-to- Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable,
CO for trunk-to-trunk calls. Enable
Echo Cancel— Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable,
Extension to Analogue for extension-to-analogue trunk Enable
Line calls.
Echo Cancel— Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable,
Extension to Digital for extension-to-ISDN line calls. Enable
Line If set to "Enable", echo cancelling is
used for extension-to-ISDN line
calls.
If set to "Disable", echo cancelling is
not used for extension-to-ISDN line
calls.

Option 4
Name Description Value Range Links
DSS Key—DSS Enables the use of a DSS button On or Flash, Off Feature Manual
key mode for to pick up an incoming call to References
Incoming Call another extension or an ICD 2.4.3 Call Pickup
group. 2.21.3 LED Indication

374 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

DSS Key—Call Specifies whether a DSS button Disable: The DSS Feature Manual
Pick-up by DSS will light up or flash when a call button will light up References
key for Direct rings at the specified extension. when a call arrives, 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Incoming Call To enable this setting, DSS Key but pressing it will
—DSS key mode for Incoming not pick up the call.
Call on this screen must be set Enable: The DSS
to "ON or Flash". button will flash
when a call arrives,
and pressing it will
pick up the call.
DSS Key—Call Specifies whether a DSS button Disable: The DSS Feature Manual
Pick-up by DSS will light up or flash when a call button will light up References
key for ICD Group rings at the specified incoming when a call arrives, 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Call call distribution group. but pressing it will
To enable this setting, DSS Key not pick up the call.
—DSS key mode for Incoming Enable: The DSS
Call on this screen must be set button will flash
to "ON or Flash". when a call arrives,
and pressing it will
pick up the call.
DSS Key— Specifies whether pressing a Disable: The PBX Feature Manual
Automatic DSS or SDN button during an disconnects the References
Transfer for extension-to-extension call current call, and 2.12.1 Call Transfer
Extension Call disconnects the current call or calls the extension
places the call on consultation assigned to the
hold. DSS or SDN
button.
Enable: The PBX
places the current
call on consultation
hold.
DSS Key—Caller Specifies whether incoming Enable: Pressing Feature Manual
Information caller information is displayed the DSS button References
Display before after pressing the DSS button displays the caller’s 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Call Pick-up when a call is ringing at the information.
designated extension, instead of Disable: Pressing
answering the call. the DSS button
answers the call.
Private Network— Specifies the minimum length of 0–15 Feature Manual
Public Call Caller ID required for a call from References
through Private a private network to be 2.19.1 Caller ID
Network— considered as a call from a
Minimum Public public network.
Caller ID Digits

PC Programming Manual 375

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Private Network— Enables extensions at two PBXs Disable, Enable PC Programming
TIE Call by connected in a network to have Manual References
Extension the same leading number. For 17.1 PBX Configuration
Numbering example, extension 101 is —[9-1] Private Network—
registered at PBX 1, and TIE Table—Priority 1–
extension 102 is registered at Priority 8—Leading
PBX 2. Only the Extension Number
Number Method is supported.
If disabled, different leading Feature Manual
numbers need to be assigned for References
extensions at each PBX. 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Send CLIP of CO Enables the transfer of related Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Caller—when call CLIP information when a party References
is transferred to on hold is transferred. When set 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
CO (CLIP of Held to "Enable", the transfer Line Identification
Party) destination will receive the Presentation (CLIP/
original caller’s CLIP information, COLP)
not the information of the
extension that performed the
transfer.
Send CLIP of CO Selects whether the CLIP Disable: The CLIP Feature Manual
Caller—when call number of the calling party or the number assigned to References
is forwarded to CLIP number of the forwarding the forwarding 2.2.2.3 Outside
CO extension or virtual PS is sent to extension or virtual Destinations in Incoming
the forwarding destination to PS is sent. Call Distribution Group
identify the origin of a trunk call. Enable: The CLIP 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
number of the Line Identification
calling party is sent. Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
4.3.6 Network ICD Group
Send CLIP of Selects whether the CLIP Disable: The CLIP Feature Manual
Extension Caller number of the calling extension number assigned to References
—when call is or the CLIP number of the the forwarding 2.2.2.3 Outside
forwarded to CO forwarding extension or virtual extension or virtual Destinations in Incoming
PS is sent to the forwarding PS is sent. Call Distribution Group
destination to identify the origin Enable: The CLIP 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
of a call. number of the Line Identification
calling extension is Presentation (CLIP/
sent. COLP)
4.3.6 Network ICD Group

376 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

System Wireless Selects whether the PBX can set Disable, Enable PC Programming
—Out of Range the status of a PS to Out of Manual References
Registration Range if no signal is received 10.3 PBX Configuration—
from the PS for a preset length [2-3] System—Timers &
of time. This feature must be Counters—Miscellaneous
enabled to allow PS roaming. —System Wireless—PS
Out of Range Timer
Feature Manual
References
4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by
Network ICD Group
System Wireless Selects whether call information Disable, Enable PC Programming
—SDN Delayed (such as Caller ID) is shown on Manual References
Ringing with LCD the display of a PDN extension 12.2.3 PBX Configuration
PS (i.e., a PS with one or more —[4-2-3] Extension—
PDN buttons) when a call is Portable Station—Flexible
received while delayed ringing is Button—Parameter
set. Selection (for SDN)
Feature Manual
References
2.9.1 Primary Directory
Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension
Transfer— Enables transferred calls Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Automatic Answer (including direct extension calls) References
for Transferred to be automatically answered, 2.4.4 Hands-free
Call when using the Hands-free Answerback
Answerback feature.
Display If Automatic Walking COS is Extension Number, Feature Manual
Information from being used, this selects whether MEX CLIP References
Mobile Extension to show the CLI destination's 2.16.1 Direct Inward
(MEX)—when extension number as the CLIP System Access (DISA)
using Automatic information (Extension Number),
Walking COS or the MEX CLIP information
(MEX CLIP) when the incoming
call is recognised as coming
from a MEX terminal.

Option 5
Name Description Value Range Links
SLT—SLT Hold Mode Selects how to hold a line and Mode 1, Mode 2, Feature
transfer a call with an SLT. For Mode 3, Mode 4 Manual
details of each mode, see "2.13.1 References
Call Hold" in the Feature Manual.
2.13.1 Call Hold

PC Programming Manual 377

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

SLT—Message Specifies the Message Waiting 1–12 Feature
Waiting Lamp Pattern Lamp light pattern of SLTs. Manual
References
2.20.1 Message
Waiting
Whisper OHCA—for Enables the use of Whisper OHCA Disable, Enable Feature
SLT to SLTs and IP-PTs Manual
References
2.10.4.4 Whisper
OHCA
Call Waiting— Selects whether Busy Station Disable, Enable Feature
Automatic Call Signalling (BSS) is automatically Manual
Waiting for Extension performed when an extension user References
Call calls a busy extension.
2.1.3.3 Call
Waiting
Busy Out—Busy Out Enables the PBX to automatically Disable, Enable Feature
for Analogue CO set a trunk to Busy Out status when Manual
a loop current is not detected, References
preventing that trunk from being
2.5.4.6 Trunk
used.
Busy Out
ISDN Voice Path Enables the voice path of an ISDN Disable, Enable
Connection—Connect line to connect even when an "Alert"
when "Alert" is sent signal is received from the
from ISDN telephone company.
PT Feature Access— Specifies the System Feature None, Call Back
No. 1–8 Access Menu (1–8) shown on the Cancel, Call Pickup
display of an extension. Direct, Call Pickup
Group,
DOORPHONE Call,
Door Open, Relay
On, External BGM,
Paging
ISDN Option—Fwd Specifies whether alert messages Mode1: Disable
from ISDN to ISDN are sent to the ISDN network. This Mode2: Enable
setting should be enabled for
networks that disconnect a call if an
alert message is not received.
ISDN Option—Calling Specifies whether the name of the Enable, Disable
Party Name calling party is displayed when
Presentation to PRI23 making a call to the ISDN network.
ISDN Option—Calling Specifies the sending format of the Display, Facility
Party Name Sending calling party name when making a
Format call to the ISDN network.

378 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Option 6 (CTI)
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Built-in Communication Specifies the length of time until the alive 0–60 s Feature Manual
Assistant—System check is retried when no response is References
status retry interval received, for First Party Call Control CTI 2.26.1 Computer
timer such as Communication Assistant (CA). Telephony
Integration (CTI)
Built-in Communication Specifies the number of times that the 0–10 Feature Manual
Assistant—System alive check is repeated for First Party Call References
status retry counter Control CTI such as Communication 2.26.1 Computer
Assistant (CA). When the alive check has Telephony
been attempted the programmed number Integration (CTI)
times without success, the PBX assumes
that the logical connection with the CTI
application software has been lost.
3rd Party CTI—System Specifies the length of time until the alive 0–60 s Feature Manual
status retry interval check is retried when no response is References
timer received, for Third Party Call Control CTI. 2.26.1 Computer
Telephony
Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—System Specifies the number of times that the 0–10 Feature Manual
status retry counter alive check is repeated for Third Party Call References
Control CTI. When the alive check has 2.26.1 Computer
been attempted the programmed number Telephony
of times without success, the PBX Integration (CTI)
assumes that the logical connection with
the CTI application software has been
lost.
3rd Party CTI—CDR Specifies the length of time until the alive 0–60 s Feature Manual
retry interval timer check of CDR is retried when no response References
is received, for Third Party Call Control 2.26.1 Computer
CTI. Telephony
Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—CDR Specifies the number of times that the 0–10 Feature Manual
retry counter alive check of CDR is repeated for Third References
Party Call Control CTI. When the alive 2.26.1 Computer
check has been attempted the Telephony
programmed number times, the Integration (CTI)
association is released automatically.
CTI Make Call—SLT Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a Enable,
Ring call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT. Disable

PC Programming Manual 379

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Value
Name Description Links
Range
CTI Hold—Forced Idle Selects whether to force an extension to Enable, Feature Manual
when Hold by become idle while having a call held on a Disable References
PDN/SDN Key PDN/SDN button. 2.9.1 Primary
Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary
Directory Number
(SDN) Extension

Option 7
Name Description Value Range Links
Incoming Call Log Specifies whether the following types of Enable (Not Feature Manual
—Busy/Intercept calls are recorded in the incoming call Answered), References
(when Called Party log of the original destination. Disable 2.19.2 Incoming Call
is Busy)
• Calls received when the extension is Log
busy.
• Calls rerouted via the Intercept
Routing—Busy feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are
recorded as "Not Answered".
Incoming Call Log Specifies whether the following types of Enable (Not Feature Manual
—Fwd All/Fwd calls are recorded in the incoming call Answered), References
Busy log of the original destination. Disable 2.19.2 Incoming Call
• Calls rerouted via the FWD—All Calls Log
feature.
• Calls rerouted via the FWD—Busy
feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are
recorded as "Not Answered".
Incoming Call Log Specifies how calls answered using the Answered, Not Feature Manual
—Call Pickup Call Pickup feature are recorded in the Answered References
incoming call log of the original 2.19.2 Incoming Call
destination. Log
Incoming Call Log Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are Enable, Feature Manual
—Extension / TIE recorded in the answering extension’s Disable References
Call incoming call log. 2.19.2 Incoming Call
Log
Outgoing Call Log Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are Enable, Feature Manual
—Extension Call recorded in the calling extension’s Disable References
outgoing call log. 2.6.3 Last Number
Redial

380 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Option 8
Name Description Value Range Links
P2P Group—Priority Specifies the order of Priority Voice 1: Feature Manual
Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/ priority of the codecs to use G.729, G.711, G. References
Priority Voice 3 for P2P groups. 722 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Priority Voice 2/ Connection
Priority Voice 3:
G.729, G.711, G.
722, None
P2P Group—Video Specifies the availability of Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Conference video conferencing for References
capable extensions within 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
P2P groups. Connection
Extension - Trunk P2P Specifies whether P2P Disable, Enable Feature Manual
—IP Extension - SIP connections are enabled References
Trunk P2P between SIP trunks and IP 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
extensions. Connection
Conference Group— Specifies the maximum 8 Party, 32 Party Feature Manual
Maximum Number of number of participants that References
Speakers During a can speak during a 2.14.1 Conference
Conference Group Call Conference Group Call. Features—SUMMARY
2.14.2 Conference

Option 9
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension / Mailbox Enables the Enable, PC Programming Manual References
Setting—Mailbox synchronisation of Disable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Number Mailbox Number and Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Synchronization Extension Number Settings—Main—Extension Number
with Extension settings. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Number Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—Extension Number
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox
Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
—Mailbox Number
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

PC Programming Manual 381

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension / Mailbox Enables the Enable, PC Programming Manual References
Setting—Mailbox synchronisation of a Disable 8.1 Users—User Profiles
COS user’s Ext. COS 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Synchronization setting and Mailbox Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
with Extension COS COS setting. Settings—Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox
Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
—Class of Service (Mailbox)
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
Walking Extension Selects whether to Enable, PC Programming Manual References
Option—Home use the Home position Disable 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—
position control control feature for Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Walking
Walking Extension or Extension
Enhanced Walking
Extension. Feature Manual References
2.24.3 Walking Extension Features
2.24.3.2 Enhanced Walking Extension
2.24.3.3 Walking Extension-Home position
control

382 PC Programming Manual

 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings

10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—

Extension CID Settings
Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Caller Specifies the modulation V.23(ETSI), Feature Manual
ID Modulation frequency to be used when Bell202(Bellcore) References
Type sending Caller ID information to 2.19.1 Caller ID
an SLT.
Channel Seizure Specifies the number of seizure 10 × n (n=3–40) bits Feature Manual
Signal Bits bits to send when sending Caller References
ID information to an SLT. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Mark Signal Bits Specifies the number of mark 10 × n (n=3–40) bits Feature Manual
bits to send when sending Caller References
ID information to an SLT. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Specifies the length of time that 64 × n (n=5–35) ms Feature Manual
Wait Time the PBX waits before starting to References
send the seizure signal following 2.19.1 Caller ID
the first ring when sending Caller
ID information to an SLT.
Caller ID Signal Specifies the type of signal FSK Feature Manual
Type modulation to be used when References
sending Caller ID information to 2.19.1 Caller ID
an SLT (reference only).
Additional Local Enables the PBX to Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Trunk Access automatically add a Trunk References
Code to Extension Access number to the received 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID telephone number when sending
the Caller ID number of an
incoming trunk call to an SLT.
Send Caller ID Enables the PBX to send the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Date & Time to date and time of an incoming call References
Extension when sending Caller ID 2.19.1 Caller ID
information to an SLT.
Send Caller ID Enables the PBX to send the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Name to Extension caller’s name when sending References
Caller ID information to an SLT. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Enables the PBX to send a call Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Long Distance to qualifier (Long Distance) (if References
Extension received from the trunk) when 2.19.1 Caller ID
sending Caller ID information to
an SLT.
FSK Transmission Specifies the transmission level -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, Feature Manual
Level for FSK signal modulation. -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 References
dB, 0 dB 2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 383

10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

FSK Transmission Specifies the transmission level -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, Feature Manual
Level (for MCSLC for FSK signal modulation for -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 References
Card) MCSLC cards. dB, 0 dB 2.19.1 Caller ID

384 PC Programming Manual

 10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain

10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio

Gain
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—
Paging/MOH
Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
PBX Model Selects the PBX model that KX-NS1000, PC Programming Manual
performs paging/MOH gain KX-NS700, References
settings. KX-NS500, 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
Settings that cannot be performed KX-NS300 Group—Paging Group
by the selected PBX model will be
greyed out. The gain values of Feature Manual References
those settings will be the same for 2.17.1 Paging
the whole system. Therefore, when 4.2 One-look Networking
operating in a One-look network, if
different PBX models are
registered as Slave units, the
corresponding common values are
used.
Paging—EPG Specifies the paging volume for -15.5–15.5 PC Programming Manual
1–6 (External External Pager port. dB References
Pager 1–6) EPG numbers that cannot be set 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
according to the model selected in Group—Paging Group
PBX Model will be greyed out.
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
Paging— Specifies the volume when paging -15 dB, -12 PC Programming Manual
Paging Level is broadcast through the speaker dB, -9 dB, -6 References
from PT of a PT. dB, -3 dB, 0 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
Speaker dB, 3 dB, 6 Group—Paging Group
dB
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
External MOH Specifies the music volume for -31.5–31.5 PC Programming Manual
—MOH 1–8 External BGM port. dB References
(Music On MOH numbers that cannot be set 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
Hold 1–8) according to the model selected in System—Operator & BGM
PBX Model will be greyed out.
Feature Manual References
2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

PC Programming Manual 385

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card

Name Description Value Range Links

Internal MOH Specifies the music volume for -31.5–31.5 PC Programming Manual
—MOH 1–8 each internal BGM (MOH 1–8). dB References
(Music on MOH numbers that cannot be set 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
Hold 1–8) according to the model selected in System—Operator & BGM
PBX Model will be greyed out.
Feature Manual References
2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card

Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.
Name Description Value Range Links
Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected -31.5–31.5 dB
type of card to the PBX.
Down Gain (From Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to -15.5–15.5 dB
PBX) the selected type of card.

386 PC Programming Manual

 Section 11
PBX Configuration—[3] Group

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 387

11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group

11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG
Settings
Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the
group. A maximum of 96 trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group" in the Feature Manual.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
group for programming characters References
reference. 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
COS Specifies the COS of the trunk 1–512 PC Programming Manual
group, applied when making a References
call from a trunk to another 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
trunk with TIE Line Service. System—Class of Service—COS
If you wish to prevent such Settings
calls from being made, ensure 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
that the COS specified here Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
has a TRS level of "7"
assigned for all relevant time Feature Manual References
modes in 10.7.1 PBX 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Configuration—[2-7-1]
System—Class of Service—
COS Settings.
Line Hunting Specifies the trunk hunting High -> Low, PC Programming Manual
Order sequence for the trunk group. Low -> High, References
The hunting sequence can be Rotation 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
programmed to start from the Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
lowest or highest numbered
trunks, or to rotate uniformly Feature Manual References
among all trunks. 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
CO-CO Specifies the length of time None, 1–60 PC Programming Manual
Duration Time that a trunk-to-trunk call can be (× 60 s) References
(*60s) maintained before being 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
disconnected. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

388 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension-CO Specifies the length of time None, 1–60 PC Programming Manual
Duration Time that an extension-to-trunk call (× 60 s) References
(*60s) can be maintained before 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
being disconnected. System—Class of Service—COS
Settings
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Caller ID Specifies the table to be used 1–4 PC Programming Manual
Modification for modifying caller information References
Table (telephone number). 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3]
Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID
Modification
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Dialling Plan Specifies the table to be used 1–4 PC Programming Manual
Table for en-bloc dialling. References
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4]
Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Tone Detection
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Group Name Specifies the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
the trunk group for characters 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
programming reference. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
DISA Tone Enables the Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Detection— disconnection of a DISA- Enable 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional
Silence originated trunk-to-trunk Device—Voice Message—DISA System
call by silence detection. 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

PC Programming Manual 389

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA Tone Enables the Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Detection— disconnection of a DISA- Enable 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional
Continuous originated trunk-to-trunk Device—Voice Message—DISA System
call by continuous signal 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
detection. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Tone Enables the Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Detection— disconnection of a DISA- Enable 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional
Cyclic originated trunk-to-trunk Device—Voice Message—DISA System
call by cyclic signal 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
detection. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Host PBX Access Code

Name Description Value Range Links
Group Specifies the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name the trunk group for characters References
programming reference. 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Host PBX Specifies the feature Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
Access number used to access (consisting of 0– References
Code 1–10 a trunk from the host 9, *, and #) 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
PBX. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access
Code to the Telephone Company from a
Host PBX)

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)

Name Description Value Range Links
Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group Max. 20 PC Programming
for programming reference. characters Manual
References
18.1 PBX
Configuration—[10-1]
CO & Incoming Call—
CO Line Settings
Collect Call Enables the PBX to automatically reject Disable, Enable
Reject (for collect calls. This setting is only for
Brazil)—Mode users in Brazil.

390 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

Name Description Value Range Links

Collect Call Selects the length of time that the PBX 500 ms, 1000 ms,
Reject (for waits before sending a flash signal to 1500 ms, 2000
Brazil)—Wait reject a collect call. This setting is only ms
Time for users in Brazil.
Collect Call Selects the length of the flash signal 1000 ms, 1500
Reject (for that the PBX sends to reject a collect ms, 2000 ms,
Brazil)—Flashing call. This setting is only for users in 2500 ms
Time Brazil.

11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local

Access Priority
Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access,
the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Trunk Specifies the trunk group assigned Trunk Group PC Programming Manual
Group No. to the corresponding priority level. No. 1–96 References
& Name Select the blank option to not 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
assign a trunk group to the priority. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller

ID Modification
The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed
modification tables, and then recorded for calling back.

Leading Digits
After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables,
the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID
Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number
to the modified number. If this number is stored as a System Speed Dialling number, the caller’s name can
be shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of
4 Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code,
can be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here, the PBX applies the Long
Distance Code settings to the modified number.
Name Description Value Range Links
Area Code (for Specifies the leading Max. 6 digits Feature Manual References
Local / number (area code) to (consisting of 0– 2.19.1 Caller ID
International look for in the incoming 9, *, and #)
Call Data 1–10) caller’s number.

PC Programming Manual 391

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Name Description Value Range Links

Removed Specifies the number of 0–9 PC Programming Manual
Number of digits to be removed References
Digits from the beginning of 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
the incoming caller’s Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
number. —Caller ID Modification Table
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Added Number Specifies the number to Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
be added to the (consisting of 0– References
incoming caller’s 9, *, and #) 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
number in the place of Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
the removed digits. —Caller ID Modification Table
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

Length of Digits
The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as
programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. This modification is
applied to incoming trunk calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is
Unknown or not specified.
A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National), the
caller’s number is not modified.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Minimum Specifies the minimum 1–31 PC Programming Manual
Caller ID Digits number of digits required in References
(for the caller’s number for it to 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
International) be recognised as an Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
international call. The value Port—Calling Party Number—Type of
specified here must be larger Number—Public, Private
than Minimum Caller ID 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Digits (for National). Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
Port—Called Party Number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

392 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Minimum Specifies the minimum 0–30 PC Programming Manual
Caller ID Digits number of digits required in References
(for National) the caller’s number for it to 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
be recognised as a national Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
call. The value specified here Port—Calling Party Number—Type of
must be smaller than Number—Public, Private
Minimum Caller ID Digits 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(for International). Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
Port—Called Party Number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Added Number Specifies the number to be Max. 8 PC Programming Manual
(for added to the incoming digits (0– References
International) telephone number when the 9, *, and 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
total number of digits #) Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
exceeds Minimum Caller ID Port—Calling Party Number—Type of
Digits (for International). Number—Public, Private
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
Port—Called Party Number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Added Number Specifies the number to be Max. 8 PC Programming Manual
(for National) added to the incoming digits (0– References
telephone number when the 9, *, and 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
total number of digits #) Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
exceeds Minimum Caller ID Port—Calling Party Number—Type of
Digits (for National) but Number—Public, Private
does not exceed Minimum 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Caller ID Digits (for Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
International). Port—Called Party Number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

CLIP
When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan
is International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the
Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used
for sending to the network as a CLIP number.
A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.

PC Programming Manual 393

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Name Description Value Range Links

Removed Specifies the number of 0–9 PC Programming Manual References
Number of leading digits to be 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
Digits removed from the Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Calling Party
incoming caller’s Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
number for each type of 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
network numbering Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Called Party
plan. Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Added Specifies the number to Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual References
Number be added to the (consisting of 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
incoming caller’s 0–9, *, and #) Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Calling Party
number in the place of Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
the removed digits for 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
each type of network Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Called Party
numbering plan. Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—

Dialling Plan
The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can
recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number
and contains the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognises the end of dialling to an analogue trunk, the PBX cancels the muting of the
caller’s voice sent to the analogue trunk immediately. If the PBX cannot recognise the end of dialling, the
PBX mutes the caller’s voice sent to an analogue trunk from the time at which the last digit is dialled until the
analogue trunk inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to programme
from the Dialling Plan Table list.
To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.

394 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Name Description Value Range Links

Leading Specifies the leading Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number to be regarded (consisting of 0–9, *, #, References
as the beginning of N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
dialling. 1], and X [0–9, *, and System—Timers & Counters—Dial /
#]) IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analogue
CO First Digit
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
System—Timers & Counters—Dial /
IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analogue
CO Inter-digit
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
—Main—Dialling Plan Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Removed Specifies the number 0–15 Feature Manual References
Number of of leading digits to be 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital
Digits removed from the Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
number dialled by en-
bloc dialling.
Added Specifies the number Max. 32 digits Feature Manual References
Number to be added to the (consisting of 0–9, *, 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital
number dialled by en- and #) Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
bloc dialling in the
place of the removed
digits.

11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling

Plan—Auto Assign
It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.

PC Programming Manual 395

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Name Description Value Range Links

Select Auto Selects the set of preset leading Type A: PC Programming
Assigning number values to assign to the Manual References
• 1: N11
Table active dialling plan table. When 11.1.4 PBX
Type D is selected, you will be • 2: NXX XXXX
Configuration—[3-1-4]
prompted to enter a 3-digit area • 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX Group—Trunk Group—
code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through Dialling Plan
47 of the dialling plan table. • 4–50: Not stored
Type B:
• 1: N11
• 2: NNX XXXX
• 3: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored
Type C:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NNX XXXX
• 4: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 5–50: Not stored
Type D:
• 1–47: Not stored
• 48: N11
• 49: NXX XXXX
• 50: 1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—

Charge Rate
The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk
group.
Name Description Value Range Links
Trunk Indicates the name of the trunk group Max. 20
Group (reference only). characters
Name

396 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Name Description Value Range Links

Rate Specifies the call charge rate. 0–9999999 PC Programming Manual
The number of decimal places that can be References
specified here depends on the value set in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Feature—Hotel & Charge
Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
Feature—Hotel & Charge. Feature Manual
References
2.22.3 Call Charge Services

PC Programming Manual 397

11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group

11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group

Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group
can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups
and several paging groups. A maximum of 32 or 128 tenants can be programmed.

Note
The maximum number of tenants depends on the System Capacity Selection setting made when the
Easy Setup Wizard was run for the PBX. If the System Resource Type was selected, the maximum
number of tenants is 128. If the Standard Type or IP-Extension Type was selected, the maximum
number of tenants is 32. For details, see "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard" in the Installation Manual.
Name Description Value Range Links
User Specifies the Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Group name of the References
Name extension user 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—
group. Call Pickup Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—
Paging Group
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—Main—User Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Main—User Group
Feature Manual References
5.1.2 Group
Tenant Specifies the 1–32 or 1–128 PC Programming Manual
Number tenant to which References
the extension Note
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
user group The maximum number of Extension—Wired Extension—
belongs. tenants depends on the Extension Settings
System Capacity 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Selection setting made Extension—Portable Station—
when the Easy Setup Extension Settings
Wizard was run for the
PBX. If the System Feature Manual References
Resource Type was 5.1.2 Group
selected, the maximum 5.1.3 Tenant Service
number of tenants is 128. If
the Standard Type or
IP-Extension Type was
selected, the maximum
number of tenants is 32.
For details, refer to "5.4.1
Easy Setup Wizard" in the
Installation Manual.

398 PC Programming Manual

 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group

11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup

Group
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 96 call pickup groups can be
programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
User Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Group extension user group characters 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Name (reference only). Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group
Pickup Selects the call pickup groups None, 01:– PC Programming Manual References
Group— that the extension user group 256: 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
1st–8th belongs to. One extension Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
user group can be assigned to Settings
a maximum of 8 call pickup 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
groups on this screen. To Extension—Portable Station—Extension
assign an extension user Settings
group to more than 8 call
pickup groups, click All Feature Manual References
Setting. 2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All

Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.

PC Programming Manual 399

11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Call Pickup Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Group call pickup group. characters References
Name 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group
Main—Call For a pickup group, specifies Enable, Feature Manual References
Pickup whether display indications Disable 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Group and tones are enabled to
Monitor notify extension users when
Feature a call that can be answered
by an extension in the
pickup group arrives.
User Group Specifies whether the ON (blue), PC Programming Manual
1–256 extension user group OFF References
belongs to the 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
corresponding pickup group. Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

400 PC Programming Manual

 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging

Group
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers
can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple
paging groups. A maximum of 96 paging groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to
paging groups easily, click All Setting.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
User Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Group extension user group characters 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Name (reference only). Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group
Paging Selects the paging groups None, 01– PC Programming Manual References
Group— that the extension user group 256 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
1st–8th belongs to. One extension Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
user group can be assigned Settings
to a maximum of 8 paging 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
groups on this screen. To Extension—Portable Station—Extension
assign an extension user Settings
group to more than 8 paging
groups, click All Setting. Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All

Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user
group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Name Description Value Range Links
Paging Specifies the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Group the paging group. characters 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Name Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 401

11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager

Name Description Value Range Links

User Specifies whether the ON (blue), PC Programming Manual References
Group 1– extension user group OFF (white) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
256 belongs to the Wired Extension—Extension Settings
corresponding paging 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
group. Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—

External Pager
External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging
groups.
Name Description Value Range Links
Paging Indicates the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Group the paging group characters 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Name (reference only). Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group
External Specifies whether the ON (blue), PC Programming Manual References
Pager 1– external pager OFF 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
16 belongs to the Wired Extension—Extension Settings
corresponding paging 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
group. Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

402 PC Programming Manual

 11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group

11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming

Call Distribution Group
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings
Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call
distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming
call distribution groups can be programmed.
To set the Call Forwarding (FWD) settings of ICD groups easily, click Group FWD. To assign extensions to
ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY"
in the Feature Manual.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits
Extension extension number of the (consisting of 0–9)
Number incoming call distribution
group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
incoming call distribution
group.
Distribution Selects the method for Ring, UCD, Priority Feature Manual References
Method distributing calls to idle Hunting 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
extensions of the incoming
call distribution group.
Call Waiting Selects the call waiting All, Distribution Feature Manual References
Distribution distribution method for 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
busy extensions of the
incoming call distribution
group.
FWD Mode Specifies whether No Ring, Ring PC Programming Manual
extensions in FWD mode References
ring when a call is 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
received at the incoming [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
call distribution group. Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

PC Programming Manual 403

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

DND Mode Specifies whether No Ring, Ring PC Programming Manual
extensions in DND mode References
ring when a call is 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
received at the incoming [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
call distribution group. Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Tenant Specifies the tenant to 1–32 or 1–128 PC Programming Manual
Number which the incoming call References
distribution group belongs, Note
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
to determine the Time The maximum System—Operator & BGM
Table and the audio number of tenants 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
source for the group. (The depends on the System—Week Table
tenant number System Capacity 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
corresponds to the Time Selection setting Feature—Tenant—Music On
Table number.) made when the Hold
Easy Setup Wizard
was run for the Feature Manual References
PBX. If the System 2.13.4 Music on Hold
Resource Type 5.1.3 Tenant Service
was selected, the
maximum number
of tenants is 128. If
the Standard Type
or IP-Extension
Type was selected,
the maximum
number of tenants
is 32. For details,
refer to "5.4.1 Easy
Setup Wizard" in
the Installation
Manual.
COS Specifies the COS of the 1–512 PC Programming Manual
incoming call distribution References
group. Depending on the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
COS, calls from certain [2-7-1] System—Class of Service
extensions are restricted —COS Settings
as determined by the 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—
Internal Call Block feature. [2-7-2] System—Class of Service
Also, when calls are —External Call Block
forwarded or overflowed to 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—
a trunk, the TRS/Barring [2-7-3] System—Class of Service
assigned for the COS of —Internal Call Block
the incoming call
distribution group applies. Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

404 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

CLIP on ICD Specifies the CLIP number Max. 16 digits Feature Manual References
Group sent to the network when (consisting of 0–9, *, 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Button making calls using the ICD and #) Identification Presentation (CLIP/
Group button. COLP)

Overflow Queuing Busy

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits
Number extension number of the (consisting of 0–9)
incoming call distribution
group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
incoming call distribution
group.
Queuing Busy— Specifies the overflow Max. 32 digits PC Programming
Destination-Day, destination of calls that (consisting of 0–9, *, Manual References
Lunch, Break, cannot be queued in each #, [ ] [Secret], and P 10.4 PBX Configuration—
Night time mode. [Pause]) [2-4] System—Week Table
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature
Queuing Busy— Specifies the number of calls None, 1–100 Feature Manual
Queue Call that can wait in a queue. References
Capacity 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Overflow No Answer
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits
Extension extension number of the (consisting of 0–
Number incoming call distribution 9)
group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20
incoming call distribution characters
group.
Time out & Specifies the overflow Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Manual Queue destination of queued calls (consisting of 0– References
Redirection— when they are not answered 9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
Destination-Day, or are redirected by Manual and P [Pause]) System—Week Table
Lunch, Break, Queue Redirection in each
Night time mode. Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature

PC Programming Manual 405

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Time out & Specifies the length of time None, 10 × n Feature Manual
Manual Queue calls wait in a queue before (n=1–125) s References
Redirection they are redirected to the 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Overflow Time overflow destination. 2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature
Hurry-up Level Specifies the number of calls None, 1–30 PC Programming Manual
to hold in the queue before References
prompting Manual Queue 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—
Redirection by flashing the [4-1-4] Extension—Wired
Hurry-up button. Extension—Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-3] Extension—Portable
Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Queuing Time Table

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Extension number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
Number distribution group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming Max. 20
call distribution group. characters
Queuing Time Specifies the Queuing Time Table to None, Table 1– PC Programming
Table—Day, be used in each time mode. Table 128 Manual References
Lunch, Break, 10.4 PBX Configuration
Night —[2-4] System—Week
Table
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Queuing Time Enables the PBX to play Disable (Ringback
Table When messages/BGM to the caller Tone), Enable
Extension according to the Queuing Time
Ringing Table, when the call arrives at an
extension without being queued or
after being queued.

Miscellaneous
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Extension number of the incoming call distribution (consisting of 0–9)
Number group.

406 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call Max. 20
distribution group. characters
Extension No Specifies the length of time that a call None, 10 × n Feature Manual
Answer queues at an extension before it is (n=1–15) s References
Redirection Time redirected to the next member 2.2.2.2 Group Call
extension of the incoming call Distribution
distribution group, in UCD or Priority 2.2.2.4 Queuing
Hunting distribution method. Feature
No. of Specifies the number of consecutive None, 1–15 Feature Manual
Unanswered unanswered calls before a member References
Calls for extension is automatically logged out 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-
Automatic Log- from the incoming call distribution out
out group.
Maximum No. of Specifies the number of extensions Max.: Call arrives Feature Manual
Busy Extension that can accept calls simultaneously in at an idle References
the incoming call distribution group. extension. 2.2.2.2 Group Call
1–32: Call will not Distribution
arrive at an idle
extension when
the number of
busy extensions
exceeds the
assigned number.
Status of FWD for Specifies whether a virtual PS in an Idle, Busy Feature Manual
Virtual PS ICD group is shown as idle or busy References
when it forwards a call to a trunk on no 2.3.2 Call
answer. Forwarding (FWD)
Last Extension Specifies whether the last extension Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Log-out logged-in to the incoming call References
distribution group is allowed to log out. 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-
out
VIP Call Mode Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritise Disable, Enable Feature Manual
calls received from multiple incoming References
call distribution groups. 2.2.2.6 VIP Call
Supervisor Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Extension incoming call distribution group’s (consisting of 0–9) References
Number supervisor. The supervisor can monitor 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
and control the status of each member Feature
of the group using a 6-line display PT.
The supervisor extension need not
belong to the group.
Programmed Specifies the mailbox number of the Max. 16 digits
Mailbox No. (16 incoming call distribution group’s (consisting of 0–9,
Digits) mailbox for Voice Processing Systems *, and #)
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.

PC Programming Manual 407

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Group Log / Group FWD

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Number number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
distribution group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
incoming call distribution group.
Incoming Call Log Specifies the number of 0–100 Feature Manual
Memory unanswered calls to the incoming References
call distribution group that can be 2.19.2 Incoming Call
logged in the call log memory. Log
Group FWD Call Indicates the current FWD status Off, On Feature Manual
from CO—Setting for incoming trunk calls References
(reference only). 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Group FWD Call Specifies the forward destination Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
from CO— of incoming trunk calls directed (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Destination to the incoming call distribution #, [ ] [Secret], and P 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
group. [Pause]) (FWD)
Group FWD Call Indicates the current FWD status Off, On Feature Manual
from Extension— for incoming intercom calls References
Setting (reference only). 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Group FWD Call Specifies the forward destination Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
from Extension— of incoming intercom calls (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Destination directed to the incoming call #, [ ] [Secret] and P 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
distribution group. [Pause]) (FWD)

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and
each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member
of multiple incoming call distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and network
ICD groups (ICD groups at other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "5.2.4.6 Virtual PS" in the Feature
Manual). The forward destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone) can act as a member of an
ICD group. Select the desired ICD group (1–128) from the ICD Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting). To copy the members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and
click OK.

408 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number of each member. In addition to (consisting of References
the extension numbers of PT, 0–9) 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group
SLT, and PS extensions, floating —PS Ring Group
extension numbers of PS Ring
groups can also be specified. Feature Manual References
2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution
Group Features—SUMMARY
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name extension (reference only). characters References
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group
—PS Ring Group
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution
Group Features—SUMMARY
Delayed Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1– Feature Manual References
Ring setting of each member. 6 Rings, No 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
(Applicable when the call Ring
distribution method of the
incoming call distribution group is
set to Ring.)
Wrap-up Specifies the length of time that 10 × n (n=0– PC Programming Manual
Timer must pass after completing a call 300) s References
before the member extension 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3]
can accept another call. Group—Incoming Call Distribution
This timer is used when Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
"Options—Wrap-up Timer Wrap-up Timer based on
based on" is set to "ICD Group 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Member" in 11.5.3 PBX Extension—Wired Extension—
Configuration—[3-5-3] Group— Extension Settings—Option 8—
Incoming Call Distribution Wrap-up Timer
Group—Miscellaneous. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Option 8—
Wrap-up Timer
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are
handled. A maximum of 128 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

PC Programming Manual 409

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

Queuing Specifies the None: Redirects the call to the next sequence. Feature Manual
Sequence command Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow References
— activated by the destination when there is no answer. 2.2.2.4 Queuing
Sequence corresponding Disconnect: Disconnects the line. Feature
01–16 sequence. Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a 2.2.2.7 Overflow
different sequence. Feature
Wait 5 × n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, 2.13.4 Music on
plays the Music on Hold for the specified period Hold
of time; if not preceded by an OGM, sends a 2.28.2 Outgoing
ringback tone for the specified period of time. Message (OGM)
OGM 01–64: Sends a certain OGM.
Queue No.: Announces how many calls
precede the caller in the waiting queue.
Queue No. and Time: Announces how many
calls precede the caller in the waiting queue
and the estimated wait time.

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Options—Call Log to Selects whether answered calls Disable, Enable Feature Manual
ICD Group when to an ICD Group are also logged References
ICD Member in the Incoming Call Log for the 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
Answered group, in addition to the log of the Distribution Group
extension that answered the call. Features—SUMMARY
Options—Call Log to Selects whether the calls to an Disable, Enable Feature Manual
ICD Group when ICD Group that are redirected References
Overflow Destination and are answered by the 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
Answered overflow destination are also Distribution Group
logged in the Incoming Call Log Features—SUMMARY
for the group, in addition to the
log of the extension that
answered the call.
Options—ICD Group Selects whether ICD Group Group DN, PC Programming
Key Mode buttons at extensions operate as Enhanced Manual References
normal or in Enhanced Phantom Phantom 11.5.1.1 PBX
button mode. Configuration—[3-5-1]
When set to Enhanced Phantom Group—Incoming Call
mode, creating an ICD Group Distribution Group—
button at an extension using PT Group Settings—Member
personal programming List—Delayed Ring
automatically registers the
extension as a member of the Feature Manual
relevant ICD Group. The References
extension user can also specify 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
the delayed ringing settings. Distribution Group
Features—SUMMARY

410 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

Options—Longest Selects whether incoming calls Disable (UCD), Feature Manual
Idle Distribution are distributed to idle extensions Enable (ACD) References
evenly in order (UCD), or to the 2.2.2.2 Group Call
extension that has been idle the Distribution
longest (ACD).
Options—Wrap-up Selects whether the ICD Group Extension: The PC Programming
Timer based on member wrap-up timer or timer is activated Manual References
extension wrap-up timer is used. after all calls to 11.5.1.1 PBX
If Extension is selected here, or from the Configuration—[3-5-1]
Wrap-up Timer on 11.5.1.1 PBX extension, Group—Incoming Call
Configuration—[3-5-1] Group— including a Distribution Group—
Incoming Call Distribution retrieved call on Group Settings—Member
Group—Group Settings— hold. List—Wrap-up Timer
Member List becomes ICD Group 12.1.1 PBX
unavailable. If ICD Group Member: The Configuration—[4-1-1]
Member is selected, Wrap-up timer is only Extension—Wired
Timer on 12.1.1 PBX activated after Extension—Extension
Configuration—[4-1-1] calls to the Settings—Option 8—
Extension—Wired Extension— extension Wrap-up Timer
Extension Settings and 12.2.1 through an ICD 12.2.1 PBX
PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Group. Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station— Extension—Portable
Extension Settings become Station—Extension
unavailable. Settings—Option 8—
Wrap-up Timer
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
Options—Overflow Specifies whether overflow Enable (Queuing Feature Manual
immediately when redirection is processed when all Busy References
All Logout members of an ICD group are Destination), 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
logged out. Disable (Keep Distribution Group
Queuing) Features—SUMMARY
Options—Call Log Specifies whether to log call Enable Feature Manual
for Built-in ACD information for the Built-in ACD (Logging), References
Report Report. This feature requires an Disable 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
activation key. Distribution Group
Features—SUMMARY
Note
2.2.2.10 Supervisory
When this setting is enabled, Feature (ACD)
certain hospitality features 2.23.2 Room Status
cannot be used. For details, Control
refer to the relevant chapter 2.23.3 Call Billing for
in the Feature Manual. Guest Room

PC Programming Manual 411

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

Options—Call Log Specifies whether to log call Enable, Disable Feature Manual
for Built-in ACD information of unanswered calls References
Report—ICD Group when the ICD group distribution 2.2.2.10 Supervisory
Unanswered Call method is set to Uniform Call Feature (ACD)
Log Distribution or Priority Hunting,
for the Built-in ACD Report.
Options—ICD Group Specifies the screen update 5–60 Feature Manual
Call Monitor View— interval time for the ICD Group References
Screen Update Time Call Monitor View. 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
(s) Distribution Group
Features—SUMMARY
Options— Specifies the method to Average Feature Manual
Announcement of announce the estimated wait waiting time: References
Estimated Waiting time to calls waiting in an ICD The average 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Time—Calculated group queue. The amount of time wait time is used
based on (the announced is calculated using for calculating
following time x the time set here for each call in the announced
number of calls in the queue. amount of wait
queue) time.
Predefined
time: A set
amount of time
(10–3600 s) is
used for
calculating the
announced
amount of wait
time.
Options— Specifies the threshold wait time 10–60 min Feature Manual
Announcement of for when calls waiting in an ICD References
Estimated Waiting group queue will hear the special 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Time—Threshold announcement.
Time for Special
Announce (10-60
min)
Options—UM Specifies the announcement Guidance No.1– Feature Manual
System Guidance— heard by callers in an ICD queue 8 References
UM System about the estimated wait time. 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Guidance for Queue Select an announcement from
No. / Queue No. and the specified Unified Messaging
Time System Guidance messages.
Options—ICD Group Select the distribution method for FIFO, Circular Feature Manual
Distribution order member extensions that belong References
to multiple ICD groups and 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
become idle.

412 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor

Name Description Value Range Links

Options—2nd line Select the information displayed Last destination, Feature Manual
LCD display on the second line of the PT's First destination References
information for ICD display when an incoming call is 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Group redirected call redirected to the ICD group that
the extension belongs to.

11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor
This screen is only available at Installer level.

Description
After specifying an ICD Group to be monitored, specify a User (User) or User (Administrator) as an ACD
supervisor to begin monitoring. The ACD supervisor can monitor an ICD Group, manage and analyse
statistical information, and create an ACD report.
For details about ICD Group management by the ACD supervisor, see 8.4 Users—ICDG Management.

To set the ACD Supervisor

1. Click the button. The Set ACD Supervisor screen is displayed.
2. From the users listed in the Normal User window, click a user to select it as the ACD supervisor, and
then click the right arrow button to move the selected user to the ACD Supervisor window. To remove a
selected user, click a user on the ACD Supervisor window to select it, and then click the left arrow
button.
3. Click OK.
The ACD supervisor selected above is displayed as follows.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
First The first name of the ACD supervisor (reference only).
Name
Last The last name of the ACD supervisor (reference only).
Name
Ext. No. The extension number of the ACD supervisor (reference only). Feature
To assign the ICD Groups that are monitored by the ACD Manual
Supervisor. References
1. In the ICD Group column, click the Edit button for the ACD 2.2.2.10
supervisor. The Set ACD Supervisor ICD Group screen is Supervisory
displayed. Feature (ACD)

2. From the ICD Groups listed in the Available ICD Group

window, click an ICD Group to select it for assignment to the
ACD supervisor, and then click the right arrow button to
move the selected ICD Group to the Selected ICD Group
list. To remove a selected ICD Group, click an ICD Group on
the Selected ICD Group list to select it, and then click the
left arrow button.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 413

11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group

11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension

Hunting Group
If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can
be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a pre-programmed hunting type.
If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which
can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 128 hunting groups
can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Hunting Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Group Name hunting group. References
2.2.1 Idle Extension
Hunting
Hunting Type Specifies the hunting Circular: Circulates until the Feature Manual
type for the hunting call is answered or References
group. overflowed 2.2.1 Idle Extension
Terminated: Terminates at the Hunting
last extension 5.1.2 Group
Overflow— Specifies the overflow Max. 32 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Day, Lunch, destination of an 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] References
Break, Night unanswered call in each [Secret], P [Pause], and F 2.2.1 Idle Extension
time mode. [Flash]) Hunting

11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting

Group—Member List
Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the
Hunting Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension
No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the hunting (consisting of 0– References
group member. 9) 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—
Extension Hunting Group
Feature Manual References
2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name extension, when an characters References
extension number is 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—
specified in Extension Extension Hunting Group
Number above (reference
only). Feature Manual References
2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

414 PC Programming Manual

 11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group

11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group

11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System
Settings
The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating
extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc.
When a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice
message or dial a number to reach the desired party.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Call Waiting Enables the queuing of calls when all Disable, PC Programming Manual
on VM extension ports of the UM group are Enable References
Group busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
any UM port.) Configuration—Slot—UM Port
Property
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group
Intercept to Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, PC Programming Manual
Mailbox for number of the called extension to the Enable References
Call to Unified Messaging system when a call 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Extension is redirected to the UM group by Configuration—Slot—UM Port
Intercept Routing. When the Unified Property
Messaging system receives the 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
mailbox number, the Unified Extension—Wired Extension—
Messaging system answers the call Extension Settings—Intercept
with the appropriate mailbox. Destination—Intercept Destination
—When called party does not
answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination—Intercept Destination
—When called party does not
answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group

PC Programming Manual 415

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Overflow to Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, Feature Manual References
Mailbox for number of the called extension to the Enable 2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution
Call to ICD UM when a call is redirected from an Group Features
Group incoming call distribution group to the
UM group by Intercept Routing. When
the Unified Messaging system receives
the mailbox number, it answers the call
with the appropriate mailbox.
Transfer Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, PC Programming Manual
Recall to number of the transfer destination Enable References
Mailbox extension to the Unified Messaging 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
system in these situations: (1) when a Configuration—Slot—UM Port
call is transferred to an extension by Property
the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature using the Feature Manual References
Automated Attendant (AA) service of 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
the Unified Messaging system, and the Overview—UM Ports and the UM
call is not answered within a Group
programmed time period; (2) when the
Unified Messaging system is assigned
as the Transfer Recall destination of a
certain extension. When the Unified
Messaging system receives the
mailbox number, the Unified
Messaging system answers the call
with the appropriate mailbox.

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit

Settings
A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls
and incoming calls. In a One-look network, each PBX has its own UM group, and each group has its own
floating extension number.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension number of the UM group. (consisting of 0– References
No. 9) 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—UM Port
Property
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group

416 PC Programming Manual

 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Group Specifies the name of the UM Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name group, which will be shown on characters References
the display of extensions that 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
call the UM group. Configuration—Slot—UM Port
Property
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group
Site name Indicates the Site Name of the Site Name
PBX that UM group belongs to
(reference only).
Fail Over Specifies the Site number and Unassigned, PC Programming Manual
Site Name Site name of the PBX to be Site number and References
used for UM Group Failover. Site name 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking
During a PBX operation failure, Survivability
incoming calls routed to the UM
group of the offline PBX will be Feature Manual References
automatically redirected to the 4.2.3.3 UM Group Failover
specified PBX’s UM group.

11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit

Settings—Member List
Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group.
Name Description Value Range Links
No. Indicates the UM port 1–24 PC Programming Manual References
number (reference 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—
only). UM Group—Unit Settings
Extension Indicates the Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual References
No. extension number (consisting of 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—
assigned to the UM 0–9) UM Group—Unit Settings
port (reference only).
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—
UM Ports and the UM Group
UM Group Indicates the UM UM Group PC Programming Manual References
No. group number and number and 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—
name (reference name UM Group—Unit Settings
only).
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—
UM Ports and the UM Group

PC Programming Manual 417

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring

Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating
extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring
groups can be programmed, each containing up to 512 PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension number of Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Extension the PS ring group. (consisting of References
Number 0–9) 5.2.4.2 PS Ring
Group
Group Name Specifies the name of the PS ring group, Max. 20 Feature Manual
which will be shown on the display of characters References
extensions that call the PS ring group when 5.2.4.2 PS Ring
Incoming Trunk Call Information Display Group
on this screen is set to Called Number.
Incoming Specifies the information of the incoming Caller ID, Feature Manual
Trunk Call trunk call to be shown on the displays of Called Number References
Information the PSs that belong to the PS ring group. If 5.2.4.2 PS Ring
Display the caller’s name or called party’s name is Group
not recognised, the telephone number will
be shown.

11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—

Member List
Each PS Ring Group can have up to 512 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the
PS Ring Group Number list.
To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the
group, and click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual References
Number extension number of 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring
the PS assigned to Group
the PS Ring Group. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

418 PC Programming Manual

 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Indicates the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Name the PS (reference characters 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring
only). Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

PC Programming Manual 419

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference

Group
A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a
conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up
to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups. To assign members to a group, click
Member List.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Name Description Value Range Links
Conference Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual
Group Name conference group. characters References
2.15.1 Conference Group
Call
Broadcast Specifies whether only the original Disable: The Feature Manual
Mode caller can speak or up to 8 people original caller and References
can speak at the start of a up to 7 2.15.1 Conference Group
conference group call. participants can Call
speak at the start
of a conference
group call.
Enable: Only the
original caller can
speak at the start
of a conference
group call.
Ability to Talk Enables PT, SLT and PS users to Disable, Enable PC Programming
use the push-to-talk feature during Manual References
a conference group call, when 11.9 PBX Configuration—
Broadcast Mode is set to [3-9] Group—Conference
"Enable". The push-to-talk feature Group—Broadcast Mode
allows PT, SLT and PS users to
speak during the call by pressing Feature Manual
any of their dial keys. References
2.15.1 Conference Group
Call
Automatic Specifies if the extensions of the Disable, Enable PC Programming
Answer w/o conference will automatically Manual References
Extension answer a conference group call, 11.9 PBX Configuration—
Setting even if Hands-free Answerback is [3-9] Group—Conference
not set for those extensions. This Group—Broadcast Mode
setting can be used with PTs and
KX-WT125 (Canada only)/ Feature Manual
KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275/ References
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/ 2.15.1 Conference Group
KX-TCA385 PSs. Call

420 PC Programming Manual

 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List

11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—

Member List
Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the
Conference Group No. list.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
To copy the numbers to another group, click Member list copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK.
To assign destinations for conference groups easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Dial Specifies the destination Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of each member (consisting of 0–9, References
of the conference group. *, #, [ ] [Secret], 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group
and P [Pause]) —Conference Group
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name extension, when an References
extension number is 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
specified in Dial Number Extension—Wired Extension—
above (reference only). Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call

PC Programming Manual 421

11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group

11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P

Group
Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
P2P Group Specifies the name of the P2P Max. 20 Feature Manual
Name group. characters References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection
Bandwidth Specifies whether to use the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Control bandwidth precedence setting of References
the P2P group for calling among 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
different P2P groups. Connection

422 PC Programming Manual

 11.11 PBX Configuration—[3-11] Group—VM(DPT) Group

11.11 PBX Configuration—[3-11] Group—VM(DPT)

Group
11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—
System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of
KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBXs. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT)
Group. Settings for these groups can be programmed.

Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Group—VM(DPT) Group—System
Settings section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information.

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—

Unit Settings
A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers
and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).

Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit
Settings section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information.

11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit

Settings—Member List
Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports.
Only ports set to VM(DPT) for DPT Type—Type in the extension’s Port Property screen will be displayed.
For details, see To access port properties in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit
Settings—Member List section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more
information.
The Site, Shelf, and Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see
Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

PC Programming Manual 423

11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—VM(DTMF) Group

11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—

VM(DTMF) Group
11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group
—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of
KX-TDE/KX-NCP/KX-TDA PBXs. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF)
Group. Settings for these groups can be programmed.

Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System
Settings section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information.

11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group

—Group Settings
A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all
programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List
View).

Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group
Settings section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information.

11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—

Group Settings—Member List
Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and then
click OK.

Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group
Settings—Member List section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more
information.
Only ports set to VM(DPT) for DPT Type—Type in the extension’s Port Property screen will be displayed.
For details, see To access port properties in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
The Site, Shelf, and Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see
Common Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

424 PC Programming Manual

 Section 12
PBX Configuration—[4] Extension

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu
of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 425

12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension

12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired

Extension
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension
—Extension Settings
For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For
each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned.
To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and
click Find Next.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/
DND, personal speed dialling, and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–
Number the extension. 9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.
Port Type Indicates the extension port type DPT: DPT port (DLC)
(reference only). SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/
CSLC/MCSLC/EMSLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port
(DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of
Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP
port of Super Hybrid port
(DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port
of DPT port (DLC)
ISDN: ISDN port (BRI/PRI)
OPX: T1-OPX port (T1)
IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (V-
IPEXT)
SIP: General SIP Extension
port (V-SIPEXT)
SIP-MLT: KX-UT series SIP
phone/S-PS/SIP-CS Extension
port (V-UTEXT)
UM: Unified Messaging System
Extension port

426 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Telephone Indicates the type of telephone DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is
Type connected to the extension port connected.
(reference only). APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is
connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
ISDN-Extension: ISDN
telephone is connected.
OPX: T1-OPX port (T1)
CS: CS is connected.
IP-PT: IP-PT belonging to the
V-IPEXT card is connected.
P-SIP: Panasonic SIP Phone is
connected.
UT: KX-UT series SIP phone is
connected.
SIP: General SIP Extension is
connected.
S-PS: SIP Portable Station is
connected.
SIP-CS: SIP Cell Station is
connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is
connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is
connected with its slave port.
FAX: Fax Extension
No Connection: No telephone
is connected.
UNKNOWN: SLT is connected
(or no telephone is connected
to the Super Hybrid or SLT
port).
User Specifies the extension user 1–256 Feature Manual
Group group to which the extension References
belongs. Extension user groups 5.1.2 Group
are used to compose tenants, call 5.1.3 Tenant
pickup groups and paging groups. Service

PC Programming Manual 427

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

COS Specifies the COS of the 1–512 PC
extension. Programming
Manual
References
10.7.1 PBX
Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—
Class of Service—
COS Settings
Feature Manual
References
5.1.1 Class of
Service (COS)
Extension Specifies the PIN of the Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0– Feature Manual
PIN extension. 9) References
2.24.1 Extension
CAUTION
Personal
There is a risk that fraudulent Identification
telephone calls will be made if Number (PIN)
a third party discovers a
personal identification number
(PIN) (verification code PIN or
extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be
billed to the owner/renter of
the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this
kind of fraudulent use, we
strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex,
random PINs that cannot
be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs
frequently.
To change an Extension PIN:
1. Click Edit under Extension
PIN for the extension to
change.
2. In the window that appears,
enter the new extension PIN
and then enter it again to
confirm it.
3. Click OK.

428 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Intercept Destination
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits
Number number of the extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
extension.
Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits PC Programming
Destination— Routing destination of calls in (consisting of 0–9, *, Manual References
When called party each time mode for Intercept #, [ ] [Secret], and P 12.1.1 PBX Configuration
does not answer Routing–No Answer and [Pause]) —[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
—Day, Lunch, Intercept Routing–DND. Extension—Extension
Break, Night Note that Intercept Routing– Settings—Intercept
Busy calls are routed using Destination—Intercept
Intercept Destination— Destination—When Called
When Called Party is Busy Party is Busy
below.
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Destination— Routing destination of calls (consisting of 0–9, *, References
When Called when the extension is busy. #, [ ] [Secret], and P 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Party is Busy [Pause])

Intercept No Answer Time

Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits
Number of the extension. (consisting of 0–
9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20
Name extension. characters
Intercept No Specifies the length of time until 0–240 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Time— an unanswered call is References
Day, Lunch, redirected to the intercept 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
Break, Night routing destination in each time System—Timers & Counters—
mode. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
When this setting is set to "0", Intercept Routing No Answer
the system timer is used. (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

CLIP
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number number of the extension. of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 429

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.
CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP Max. 16 digits (consisting Feature Manual References
number sent to the public of 0–9, *, and #) 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
network to show on the Identification Presentation
called party’s telephone (CLIP/COLP)
display when making a
trunk call.
CLIP on Selects the CLIP number Extension: Show the PC Programming Manual
Extension/C to show on the called CLIP number specified in References
O party’s telephone. CLIP ID. 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
CO: Show the CLIP Configuration—Slot—Port
number specified in Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—
Subscriber Number in Subscriber Number
9.27 PBX Configuration 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
—[1-1] Configuration— Configuration—Slot—Port
Slot—Port Property - Property - PRI Port—CO Setting
BRI Port or 9.28 PBX —Subscriber Number
Configuration—[1-1] 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—
Configuration—Slot— [4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Port Property - PRI Extension—Extension Settings
Port. —CLIP—CLIP ID
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
CLIR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of the 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
CLIP number on the Identification Presentation
called party’s telephone (CLIP/COLP)
when making a public
network trunk call.
COLR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of the 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
CLIP number of the Identification Presentation
extension on the caller’s (CLIP/COLP)
telephone display when
answering a call.

UM
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
Number the extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.

430 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Two-way Specifies whether to enable the Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Recording two-way recording feature for the References
extension using the Unified 3.2.2.34 Two-way
Messaging system. Record/Two-way
Transfer

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
Number the extension. (consisting of 0–
9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20
Name extension. characters
Wireless XDP / Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Shared the PS with which Wireless XDP (consisting of 0– References
Extension Parallel Mode is established. To 9) 2.11.10 One-numbered
enable Wireless XDP Parallel Extension
Mode, the PS must be turned off 5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel
once and then turned on after Mode
assigning this setting.
This setting also specifies the sub
extension for the main extension of
a one-numbered extension.

Note
When Wireless XDP, S-PSs
cannot be used with this
setting.
Ring Pattern Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern 1–8 PC Programming Manual
Table Table to be used by the extension. References
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone
Patterns—Call from CO
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—
[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone
Patterns—Call from
DOORPHONE
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—
[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone
Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Manual
References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern
Selection

PC Programming Manual 431

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Programmed Specifies the mailbox number of Max. 16 digits
Mailbox No. the incoming call distribution (consisting of 0–
group’s mailbox for Voice 9, *, and #)
Processing Systems (VPS) with
DTMF Integration.
Transfer Recall Specifies the transfer recall Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Destination destination when an extension (consisting of 0– References
user transfers a call with the Call 9) 2.12.1 Call Transfer
Transfer without Announcement
feature and the transferred call is
not answered within a certain time
period.
ARS Itemised Specifies the itemised billing code Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
Code used by the ARS feature for (consisting of 0– References
identifying calls made from the 9, *, and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—
extension for accounting and [8-5] ARS—Carrier
billing purposes.
Feature Manual
References
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
Number the extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.
Manual C. Selects the method of receiving Off: No notification Feature Manual
Waiting for call waiting notification from other BSS: Tone from the References
Extension extensions. handset or built-in 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Call speaker 2.10.4.1 Second Call
OHCA: Voice from Notification to Busy
the built-in speaker Extension—SUMMARY
W-OHCA: Voice
from the handset
Automatic C. Specifies whether to receive call Off, On Feature Manual
Waiting waiting notifications for calls from References
a trunk, doorphone calls, and 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
calls via an incoming call
distribution group.

432 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Pickup Dial Sets or cancels the Hot Line Off, On PC Programming
Set feature. The number specified in Manual References
Pickup Dial No. on this screen is 10.3 PBX Configuration—
dialled automatically after going [2-3] System—Timers &
off-hook when the Hot Line Counters—Dial / IRNA /
feature is active. Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot
Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Manual
References
2.6.6 Hot Line
Pickup Dial Specifies the number to be dialled Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
No. automatically after going off-hook (consisting of 0–9, *, References
when the Hot Line feature is #, T [Transfer], [ ] 2.6.6 Hot Line
active. [Secret], P [Pause],
and F [Flash])
Data Mode Sets or cancels the protection Off, On Feature Manual
against tones or interruptions References
from other extensions during 2.11.5 Data Line Security
communication.

Option 3
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–
Number number of the extension. 9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.
Call Pickup Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other extension Feature Manual
Deny picked up by other extensions. users to pick up calls to your References
extension 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Enable: Prevents other
extension users from picking
up calls to your extension
Call Pickup Specifies how incoming calls Display & Tone1, Display & Feature Manual
Group that can be answered by an Tone2, Display & Tone3, References
Monitoring extension in a pickup group Display only, Disable 2.4.3 Call Pickup
are indicated on a PT (display,
tone, etc.). Note
• Supported terminals are:
DPT, DPT (S-DPT), S-
Hybrid, S-Hybrid (S-
DPT), IP-EXT
• Depending on system
programming, the
number of terminals may
be limited to 256. For
more information,
consult your dealer.

PC Programming Manual 433

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Executive Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other extension Feature Manual
Override interrupted by other users to interrupt an existing References
Deny extensions. call 2.10.2 Executive
Enable: Prevents other Busy Override
extension users from
interrupting an existing call
Absent Specifies the Personal Absent Max. 16 characters Feature Manual
Message Message which, unlike the References
System Absent Message, can 2.20.2 Absent
be customised for each Message
extension.
Charge Specifies the maximum limit of 0–9999999 PC Programming
Limit call charges allowed for the Manual
extension. When this limit is References
reached, the extension cannot
14.2 PBX
be used to make further trunk
Configuration—[6-2]
calls.
Feature—Hotel &
The number of decimal places
Charge
that can be specified here
depends on the value set in Feature Manual
Charge Options—Digits References
After Decimal Point in 2.7.2 Budget
14.2 PBX Configuration— Management
[6-2] Feature—Hotel &
Charge.
Intercom Selects the method of Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Feature Manual
Call by receiving intercom calls. When Voice Call References
Voice Deny Voice Call is selected, 2.5.3 Intercom Call
the extension will always ring
when receiving calls,
regardless of how the caller
wants to make the call.

Option 4
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Number number of the extension.
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.

434 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Outgoing Selects the line to be No Line: No line is seized. PC Programming
Preferred seized after going off- Idle: An idle trunk is seized Manual References
Line hook to make a call. automatically from the 12.1.4 PBX
programmed trunk groups. Configuration—[4-1-4]
ICM/PDN: An extension line is Extension—Wired
seized, or, for a PDN extension, Extension—Flexible
an idle PDN button is selected. Button
F-1–F-84: A trunk programmed
for a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is Feature Manual
seized. A flexible button References
customised as a Single-CO, 2.5.5.2 Line Preference—
Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Outgoing
Group button must be selected.
Incoming Selects the line on which No Line: No line is selected. PC Programming
Preferred an incoming call is Select a line by pressing the Manual References
Line answered after going off- desired Line Access button to 12.1.4 PBX
hook. answer a call. Configuration—[4-1-4]
Note that even if a Ringing Line: The longest ringing Extension—Wired
specific PDN button is call is selected. Extension—Flexible
selected here, a call PDN: The call arriving at any Button
ringing at any PDN PDN button is selected.
button on the extension F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a Feature Manual
will be answered when flexible button (F-1–F-84) is References
going off-hook. selected. A flexible button 2.4.2 Line Preference—
customised as a Single-CO, Incoming
Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD
Group button must be selected.
Call Waiting Selects the type of Call CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Feature Manual
Tone Type Waiting tone sent to the References
busy extension. 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting
Tone
LCS Specifies whether to Stop Record, Keep Record Feature Manual
Recording continue or stop References
Mode recording the message in 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
the extension’s mailbox System Overview
when the extension user
answers a call that was
being monitored.
LCS Answer Specifies whether the Hands free: Monitor through the Feature Manual
Mode extension’s mailbox is built-in speaker References
monitored in Hands-free Private: Monitor through the 2.11.1 Hands-free
or Private mode. handset or the built-in speaker Operation
after hearing a warning tone 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview

PC Programming Manual 435

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Option 5
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the extension. Max. 20 characters
Name
Display Selects the display language of the Language1– Feature Manual
Language extension telephone. Language5 References
2.21.4 Display
Information
Incoming Call Selects which caller information is Caller ID Name, Feature Manual
Display shown on the first line of the extension’s CO Line Name, References
display. DDI/DID Name 2.21.4 Display
Information
Automatic LCD Enables the first line of the display to Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Switch when show the call duration automatically References
Start Talking after answering a trunk call. 2.21.4 Display
Information
Key Pad Tone Specifies whether key pad tones are Off, On
heard when dialling.
Automatic Enables the extension to answer an Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Answer for CO incoming trunk call automatically after a References
Call certain number of rings without going 2.4.4 Hands-free
off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback Answerback
has been set on the extension. This
setting is only effective when Forced
Automatic Answer on this screen has
been set to Off.

Option 6
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Max. 20 characters
Forced Specifies whether the extension Off, On
Automatic automatically answers all incoming calls
Answer (both intercom and trunk calls) without
going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-
free Answerback setting.
Flexible Button Specifies whether the extension user No Limitation, One-
Programming can modify all flexible buttons without touch Dial
Mode limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling
buttons. When the mode is set to One-
touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2"
before the number when customising a
One-touch Dialling button.

436 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

ICM Tone Selects the ring tone for incoming calls IP-PT (except
arriving at the INTERCOM button or KX-NT265/KX-NT321):
PDN buttons. Note that the ring tone 1–30
specified here is applied to all PDN KX-NT265/KX-NT321:
buttons on an extension. 1–8 (Even if ring tone
9–30 is selected, ring
tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8
(Even if ring tone 9–30
is selected, ring tone 2
is heard.)
Display Lock Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log Unlock, Lock Feature
display (i.e., specifies whether other Manual
extension users can see the Incoming References
Call Log information at the extension).
2.19.2 Incoming
Call Log
Paging Deny Specifies whether paging of the Disable, Enable Feature
extension from other extensions is Manual
enabled. References
2.17.1 Paging

Option 7
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Number Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
the extension. (consisting of 0–
9)
Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Max. 20
characters
Character Input Selects the character table to be Table 1: Standard
Mode used for entering characters. mode
Table 2: Option
mode
Flash Mode Selects the function of the FLASH/ EFA, Terminate, Feature Manual
during CO RECALL button during a trunk Flash Recall References
Conversation conversation. 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/
Terminate
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)
Incoming Call Log Specifies the number of incoming 0–100 Feature Manual
Memory trunk calls that are retained in the References
extension’s Incoming Call Log 2.19.2 Incoming Call
memory. Log

PC Programming Manual 437

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Outgoing Call Log Specifies the number of telephone 1–100 Feature Manual
Memory numbers dialled by the extension References
that are retained in the extension’s 2.6.3 Last Number
Outgoing Call Log memory. Redial
ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. Automatic, Feature Manual
When Automatic is selected, the Speech, Audio References
bearer mode is set automatically 4.1.2.1 Integrated
depending on the extension’s Services Digital
telephone type as follows: Network (ISDN)—
PT: Speech SUMMARY
SLT: Audio

Option 8
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number extension. (consisting of
0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the extension. Max. 20
Name characters
Group CW Enables an incoming call to an incoming Disable,
w/o Tone call distribution group to arrive at a Enable
(Ring after previously busy extension at the moment
Call) that the extension goes on-hook for the
previous call.
Extension Enables the extension to send Caller ID Disable, Feature Manual
Caller ID information to an SLT. Enable References
Sending 2.19.1 Caller ID
Incoming Call Specifies the length of time that the ringing 0–15 s Feature Manual
Wait Timer for a call is delayed when the call follows References
for Extension immediately after the previous 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID unanswered call. When receiving two calls
in quick succession (e.g., when a call
waiting in a queue is directed to an
extension immediately after the previous
unanswered call stops ringing), some
SLTs require a pause, after the first call
stops ringing, to receive the second call’s
Caller ID information.
SLT MW Enables the use of the Message Waiting Disable, MW- Feature Manual
Mode Lamp on an SLT extension connected to Lamp References
the extension port. 2.20.1 Message Waiting

438 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Wrap-up Specifies the length of time that must pass 0–3000 s PC Programming
Timer after completing a call before an extension Manual References
will accept another call when logged in as 11.5.1.1 PBX
a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Configuration—[3-5-1]
Group. Group—Incoming Call
This timer is used when "Options—Wrap- Distribution Group—Group
up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" Settings—Member List—
in 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Wrap-up Timer
Group—Incoming Call Distribution 11.5.3 PBX Configuration
Group—Miscellaneous. —[3-5-3] Group—
Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Miscellaneous—
Options—Wrap-up Timer
based on
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Option 9
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Number Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits
number of the extension. (consisting of 0–
9)
Extension Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20
extension. characters
PDN Delayed Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1 Feature Manual
Ringing setting for calls to a PDN Ring, 2 Rings, 3 References
extension (an extension with Rings, 4 Rings, 5 2.9.1 Primary Directory
one or more PDN buttons). Rings, 6 Rings Number (PDN)/Secondary
Directory Number (SDN)
Extension
Built-in Specifies whether to enable or Disable, Basic PC Programming Manual
Communication disable the Communication Only, Enable References
Assistant Assistant (CA) application for 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—
each extension. [1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Site Property—Main—Port
Number—Built-in
Communication Assistant
Server
Feature Manual
References
2.26.2 CA (Communication
Assistant)

PC Programming Manual 439

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Mobile Extension Specifies whether to enable or Disable, Enable Feature Manual
disable mobile extension References
features (with a cellular phone 2.27.1 Cellular Phone
or other outside destination) Features—SUMMARY
for the extension.

FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and
DND settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits
Number number of the extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20
Name extension. characters
FWD Mode for Indicates the forwarding None, FWD All, PC Programming Manual
Call from CO type of incoming trunk FWD Busy, FWD References
calls (reference only). N/A, FWD Busy 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
N/A Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Indicates the forwarding Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination for destination of incoming (consisting of 0–9, References
Call from CO trunk calls (reference *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
only). and P [Pause]) Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Mode for Indicates the forwarding None, FWD All, PC Programming Manual
Call from type of incoming intercom FWD Busy, FWD References
Extension calls (reference only). N/A, FWD Busy 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
N/A Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Indicates the forwarding Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination for destination of incoming (consisting of 0–9, References
Call from intercom calls (reference *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
Extension only). and P [Pause]) Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

440 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

FWD No Specifies the length of 0–120 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Time time that an incoming call References
rings at the extension 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
before the call is Extension—Wired Extension—
forwarded. FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Keep ring after Specifies whether an Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
FWD NA to CO extension continues to ring References
after forwarding an 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
incoming call to an outside Extension—Wired Extension—
destination via FWD N/A FWD/DND
or FWD Busy N/A.
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Remote FWD Specifies the COS that Disable, 1–512 Feature Manual References
COS allows the FWD setting on 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
the extension to be
changed from another
extension. This COS must
then be set for the
extensions that will
remotely change the FWD
setting.

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—

Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-
assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Name Description Value Range Links
Location Entry Specifies the extension Wired PC Programming Manual
—Beginning number of the first location extension References
Entry Location to be programmed. number 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
(Ext. Number) Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)

PC Programming Manual 441

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Name Description Value Range Links

Location Entry Specifies the number of 1–total number PC Programming Manual
—Number to locations to be of connected References
Generate programmed. wired 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
A CLIP number will only be extensions Extension—Wired Extension—
assigned to connected Extension Settings
wired extensions, even if
the number entered here is Feature Manual References
larger than the total 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
number of wired Identification Presentation (CLIP/
extensions. COLP)
Parameter— Specifies the number of 0–5 PC Programming Manual
Deleting Digits digits to be deleted from References
the start of an extension 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
number when using it as Extension—Wired Extension—
part of the CLIP number. Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a prefix number Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Head of ID to be applied to all (consisting of References
generated CLIP numbers. 0–9, *, and #) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a suffix number Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Tail of ID to be applied to all (consisting of References
generated CLIP numbers. 0–9, *, and #) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension

—FWD/DND
For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be
programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension
Number / Name list.
To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.

442 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial

Name Description Value Range Links

Forward / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for Always (All), Feature Manual
DND—For external calls. Busy, No References
external calls If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Answer, Busy / 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD No Answer, Do (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
destination field can be set. Not Disturb, Off (DND)—SUMMARY
Forward / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for Always (All), Feature Manual
DND—For internal calls. Busy, No References
internal calls If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Answer, Busy / 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD No Answer, Do (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
destination field can be set. Not Disturb, Off (DND)—SUMMARY
If For both external calls and internal
calls is checked, this setting becomes
unavailable, and the value set for external
calls is applied to internal calls.

12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension

—Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed
dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for
each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Name Description Value Range Links
Speed Dialling Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
- Personal Personal Speed Dialling number References
Name to call using the Personal Speed 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Dialling Directory shown on the Personal/System
extension’s display.
Speed Dialling Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
- Personal dialled by the Personal Speed (consisting of 0–9, *, #, References
Number Dialling number. T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
P [Pause], and F Personal/System
[Flash])

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension

—Flexible Button
Overview
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84
flexible buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension
Number / Name list.

Note
• Rows whose Key Location field is colored can be customised.
• The number of available flexible buttons is displayed in Available Keys on the screen.
• This feature is available only for DPTs and IP-PTs.

PC Programming Manual 443

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

KX-NT505 Flexible Buttons

KX-NT553/KX-NT556 IP-PTs can be connected to up to 4 KX-NT505 48 key add-on units. When an
extension that has one or more KX-NT505 units connected is selected in the Extension Number / Name
list, Number of Connections NT505 and NT505 Location No. are displayed. In Number of Connections
NT505, specify the number of connected KX-NT505 units (a maximum of 4). This configuration is available
at the Installer level only. Then, in NT505 Location No., select a KX-NT505 to program. Up to 48 flexible
buttons can be programmed for each KX-NT505 unit.

Note
Up to 64 KX-NT505 units can be connected to the PBX system.

Copying Flexible Button Settings

To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. This operation
(Copy to) is available at the User (Administrator) level.

Note
The Copy to button can be used with KX-NT505 units, even if the number of connected KX-NT505 units
differs between extensions. Settings for NT505 Location No. will be copied to the same number of the
copy target extension. However, if a matching NT505 Location No. does not exist at the target
destination, those settings will not be copied.

For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Once flexible buttons have been programmed, the Terminal Label Print utility can be used to print label
sheets, which can be attached to extension telephones for quick reference. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing
and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.
To access the Super Master CS for related programming, click SIP-CS Web. The CS Web login screen will
open in your web browser.

Note
For this button to be enabled, you must specify the URL of the Super Master CS in the Utility—CS-Web
Connection screen. See 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection.

444 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Type Specifies the feature to be Not Stored, Loop CO, Single PC Programming
assigned to the flexible CO, Group CO, DSS, One- Manual References
button. touch, ICD Group, Message 12.1.4.1 PBX
Waiting, FWD/DND (Both), Configuration—[4-1-4]
FWD/DND (External), Extension—Wired
FWD/DND (Internal), Group Extension—Flexible
Fwd (Both), Group Fwd Button—Flexible
(External), Group Fwd button data copy
(Internal), Account,
Conference, Terminate, EFA,
Charge, Call Park, Call Log,
Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up,
Wrap-up, System Alarm,
Time Service, Answer,
Release, TRS Level Change,
ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR,
ISDN Hold, Headset, Time
Service - Automatic/Manual,
Check In, Check Out,
Cleaned Up, Two-way
Record, Two-way Transfer,
LCS, Voice Mail Transfer,
NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN, DN

Notice
For each KX-UT series
SIP phone that is
connected to the PBX, at
least one DN button must
be assigned to the
extension. Without a DN
button assigned, the
extension will not be able
to make or receive calls.
Parameter Specifies the trunk to be 1–600 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Single CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies the trunk group to 1–96 Feature Manual
Selection (for be accessed. References
Group CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies whether a call is Automatic, Specific Feature Manual
Selection (for parked in an idle parking References
Call Park) zone automatically or in a 2.13.2 Call Park
specific parking zone.

PC Programming Manual 445

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter Specifies which incoming call None: The incoming call Feature Manual
Selection (for distribution groups that the distribution group is selected References
Log-in/Log- extension belongs to are manually. 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
out) logged in to or logged out All: All incoming call
from. distribution groups that the
extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-
specified incoming call
distribution group
Parameter Selects which time modes are All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Feature Manual
Selection (for switched manually. Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/ References
Time Service) Lunch, Day/Night 5.1.4 Time Service
Parameter Specifies the TRS/Barring Level 1–Level 7 Feature Manual
Selection (for level to be used temporarily References
TRS Level on a certain extension. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
Change) (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone
Transfer
Parameter Specifies the Time Table to Table 1–Table 32 or Table 1– Feature Manual
Selection (for be used when the Time Table 128 References
Time Service - Service Switching Mode is set 5.1.4 Time Service
Automatic/ to Automatic. Note
Manual) The maximum number of
time tables (1 per tenant)
depends on the System
Capacity Selection
setting made when the
Easy Setup Wizard was
run for the PBX. If the
System Resource Type
was selected, the
maximum number of
tenants (and therefore,
time tables) is 128. If the
Standard Type or
IP-Extension Type was
selected, the maximum
number of tenants is 32.
For details, refer to "5.4.1
Easy Setup Wizard" in
the Installation Manual.
Parameter Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, Feature Manual
Selection (for setting for calls arriving at an 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 References
SDN) SDN button. Rings, No Ring 2.9.1 Primary
Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary
Directory Number
(SDN) Extension

446 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits (consisting of
Number (for extension to be accessed. 0–9)
DSS)
Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits (consisting of
Number (for extension number of an 0–9)
ICD Group) incoming call distribution
group to be accessed.
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits (consisting of
Number (for extension or floating 0–9)
Message extension number of an
Waiting) incoming call distribution
group for which messages
are checked. If this cell is left
empty, the extension will
check its own messages only.
Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (for extension number of an 0–9) References
Group Fwd incoming call distribution 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Both)) group or the extension (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
number to set FWD remotely (DND)—SUMMARY
whose intercom and trunk 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
calls will be forwarded. (FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (for extension number of an 0–9) References
Group Fwd incoming call distribution 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(External)) group or the extension (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
number to set FWD remotely (DND)—SUMMARY
whose trunk calls will be 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
forwarded. (FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (for extension number of an 0–9) References
Group Fwd incoming call distribution 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Internal)) group or the extension (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
number to set FWD remotely (DND)—SUMMARY
whose intercom calls will be 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
forwarded. (FWD)
Extension Specifies the extension’s own Max. 5 digits (consisting of
Number (for number or the floating 0–9)
Call Log) extension number of an
incoming call distribution
group for which call log
information is displayed. If the
cell is left empty, the
extension will display its own
call log information.

PC Programming Manual 447

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (for extension number of an 0–9) References
Log-in/Log- incoming call distribution 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
out) group to log-in to or log-out
from.
Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (for extension number of the 0–9) References
Hurry-up) incoming call distribution 2.2.2.4 Queuing
group whose longest waiting Feature
call will be redirected (Manual
Queue Redirection).
Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (for extension number of the UM 0–9) References
Two-way group containing the 3.1.1 Unified
Record) extension’s mailbox. Messaging System
Overview
Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (for extension number of the UM 0–9) References
Two-way group containing the desired 3.1.1 Unified
Transfer) mailbox. Messaging System
Overview
Extension Specifies the floating Max. 8 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (for extension number of the UM 0–9) References
Voice Mail group containing the desired 3.1.1 Unified
Transfer) mailbox. Messaging System
Overview
Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (for extension number of the PDN 0–9) References
SDN) extension corresponding to 2.9.1 Primary
this SDN button. Directory Number
Note that the extension (PDN)/Secondary
specified here must have a Directory Number
PDN button registered for the (SDN) Extension
SDN button to function.
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension, when an extension
number is specified
(reference only).
Dial (for One- Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
touch) dialled. The PBX can have a 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] References
maximum of 2000 One-touch [Secret], P [Pause], and F 2.6.2 One-touch
Dialling buttons for [Flash]) Dialling
extensions.

448 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Dial (for ISDN Specifies the number Max. 32 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Service) required to access the 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] References
telephone company’s ISDN [Secret], P [Pause], and F 4.1.2.11 ISDN Service
service. [Flash]) Access by Keypad
Protocol
Dial (for Specifies the network Max. 16 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
NDSS) extension number of the 0–9) References
extension to be accessed 4.3.5.1 Network Direct
using Network Direct Station Station Selection
Selection. (NDSS)
Note that only extension
numbers that have been
previously registered in 17.4
PBX Configuration—[9-4]
Private Network—NDSS
Key Table can be specified
here.
Label Name Specifies the name of each Max. 12 characters Feature Manual
flexible button for KX-NT366 References
and KX-NT553/KX- Note
2.21.2 Flexible Buttons
NT556/KX-NT560 IP-PTs, The maximum length for
and KX-UT248 and KX-UT248 and
KX-UT670 SIP-MLTs. The KX-UT670 labels is 10
name specified here is characters.
displayed on the LCD for
each button.
Optional Specifies the Time Table to Table 1–Table 32 or Table 1– Feature Manual
Parameter be used for changing time Table 128 References
(Ringing Tone modes in the Automatic 5.1.4 Time Service
Type Number) Switching mode. Note
(for Time The maximum number of
Service) time tables (1 per tenant)
depends on the System
Capacity Selection
setting made when the
Easy Setup Wizard was
run for the PBX. If the
System Resource Type
was selected, the
maximum number of
tenants (and therefore,
time tables) is 128. If the
Standard Type or
IP-Extension Type was
selected, the maximum
number of tenants is 32.
For details, refer to "5.4.1
Easy Setup Wizard" in
the Installation Manual.

PC Programming Manual 449

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Optional Specifies the ring tone type. IP-PT (except KX-NT265/
Parameter KX-NT321): 1–30
(Ringing Tone KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8
Type Number) (Even if ring tone 9–30 is
(for Loop CO, selected, ring tone 1 is
Single CO, heard.)
Group CO, S-PS: Not available.
ICD Group, Other telephones: 1–8 (Even
SDN) if ring tone 9–30 is selected,
ring tone 2 is heard.)
Optional Specifies the number of the Park 00–Park 99 Feature Manual
Parameter parking zone a call is to be References
(Ringing Tone parked in when a Call Park 2.13.2 Call Park
Type Number) button with Parameter
(for Call Park) Selection (for Call Park) on
this screen set to Specific is
pressed.
Ext No. of Specifies the number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Mailbox (for extension whose mailbox will 0–9) References
Two-way be used to record 3.1.1 Unified
Transfer) conversations using One- Messaging System
touch Two-way Transfer. (For Overview
example, a secretary can
record a conversation into the
mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension
user must specify the number
of an extension each time.

12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—

Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different
extensions.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Destination Select the number and name of the extension PC Programming
Extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple Manual References
Line extensions can be selected. To select all 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—
extensions at once, click Select All. [4-1-4] Extension—Wired
When selecting multiple extensions, note that Extension—Flexible Button
if the source extension has an SDN button,
the copy operation cannot be performed.

450 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button

12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension

—PF Button
Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A
maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the
Extension Number / Name list.
Name Description Value Range Links
Type Specifies whether to store a Not Stored, One Touch Feature Manual
dialling number for the one- References
touch access. 2.21.2 Flexible Buttons
Dial Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, Feature Manual
dialled. *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P References
[Pause], and F [Flash]) 2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension

—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Network BLF Selects whether extension status OFF, ON PC Programming Manual
Data to NDSS data is transmitted over the network References
Key of Other PBX for the selected extension. This 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
- Other PBX setting is automatically set to ON Private Network—TIE Table
(Network PBX when the feature is used, and can
ID=1) only be manually changed from ON Feature Manual References
to OFF, to cancel data transmission. 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension

—CLIP ID Table
Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wired extension.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Number extension (reference only).
Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
CLIP 1–8 Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9,
extension. *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 451

12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station

12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—

Portable Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station
—Extension Settings
For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 512 PSs can be
programmed.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes
FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to
extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—
User Group for more details.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of the PS Max. 5 digits PC Programming
Number (reference only). (consisting of Manual References
0–9) 9.31 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—
Portable Station—
Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming
Name characters Manual References
9.31 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—
Portable Station—
Extension Name
Property Indicates the property (reference only). Portable
Station
User Specifies the extension user group to which 1–256 Feature Manual
Group the PS belongs. The extension user group References
is used to compose tenants, call pickup 5.1.2 Group
groups and paging groups. 5.1.3 Tenant Service
COS Specifies the COS of the PS. 1–512 PC Programming
Manual References
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual
References
5.1.1 Class of Service
(COS)

452 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the PIN of the PS. Max. 10 digits Feature Manual
PIN (consisting of References
CAUTION 0–9) 2.24.1 Extension Personal
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone Identification Number (PIN)
calls will be made if a third party
discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or
extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to
the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of
fraudulent use, we strongly
recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs
that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
To change an extension PIN:
1. Click Edit under Extension PIN for
the extension to change.
2. In the window that appears, enter the
new extension PIN and then enter it
again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.

Intercept Destination
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (consisting of 0–9) References
(reference only). 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
PS. References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name

PC Programming Manual 453

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination— Routing destination of calls (consisting of 0–9, References
When called in each time mode for *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—
party does not Intercept Routing–No and P [Pause]) [4-2-1] Extension—Portable
answer—Day, Answer and Intercept Station—Extension Settings—
Lunch, Break, Routing–DND. Intercept Destination—Intercept
Night Note that Intercept Destination—When Called Party
Routing–Busy calls are is Busy
routed using Intercept
Destination—When Feature Manual References
Called Party is Busy 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
below.
Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits Feature Manual References
Destination— Routing destination of calls (consisting of 0–9, 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
When Called when the extension is *, #, [ ] [Secret],
Party is Busy busy. and P [Pause])

Intercept No Answer Time

Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (consisting of References
(reference only). 0–9) 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name PS. characters References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension Name
Intercept No Specifies the length of time 0–240 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Time until an unanswered call is References
—Day, Lunch, redirected to the intercept 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System
Break, Night routing destination in each —Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA /
time mode. Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No
When this setting is set to Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break,
"0", the system timer is Night
used.
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

CLIP
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS of 0–9) References
(reference only). 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension No.

454 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the name of Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name the PS. References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension Name
CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP Max. 16 digits Feature Manual References
number sent to the (consisting of 0–9, *, 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
public network to show and #) Identification Presentation (CLIP/
on the called party’s COLP)
telephone display when
making a trunk call.
CLIP on Selects the CLIP Extension: Show the PC Programming Manual
Extension/C number to show on the CLIP number specified References
O called party’s telephone. in CLIP ID. 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
CO: Show the CLIP Configuration—Slot—Port Property
number specified in - BRI Port—ISDN CO—Subscriber
Subscriber Number in Number
9.27 PBX 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property
Configuration—Slot— - PRI Port—CO Setting—
Port Property - BRI Subscriber Number
Port or 9.28 PBX 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Configuration—[1-1] Extension—Portable Station—
Configuration—Slot— Extension Settings—CLIP—CLIP
Port Property - PRI ID
Port.
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
CLIR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of the 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
CLIP number on the Identification Presentation (CLIP/
called party’s telephone COLP)
when making a public
network trunk call.
COLR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of the 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
CLIP number of the PS Identification Presentation (CLIP/
on the caller’s telephone COLP)
display when answering
a call.

UM
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
Number the PS (reference only). (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 455

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 characters
Name
Two-way Specifies whether to enable the two- Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Recording way recording feature for the PS References
using the Unified Messaging system. 3.2.2.34 Two-way
Record/Two-way
Transfer

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (reference (consisting of 0– References
only). 9) 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name characters References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension Name
Ring Pattern Specifies the Ring Tone 1–8 PC Programming Manual
Table Pattern Table to be used by References
the PS. 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1]
System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call
from CO
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2]
System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call
from DOORPHONE
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3]
System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call
from Others
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern
Selection
Programmed Specifies the mailbox number Max. 16 digits
Mailbox No. of the incoming call (consisting of 0–
distribution group’s mailbox 9, *, and #)
for Voice Processing Systems
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.

456 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Transfer Recall Specifies the transfer recall Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Destination destination when an (consisting of 0– 2.12.1 Call Transfer
extension user transfers a call 9)
with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and
the transferred call is not
answered within a certain
time period.
ARS Itemised Specifies the itemised billing Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
Code code used by the ARS (consisting of 0– References
feature for identifying the calls 9, *, and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5]
made from the PS for ARS—Carrier
accounting and billing
purposes. Feature Manual References
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection
(ARS)

Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number of the PS (reference only). (consisting of 0–9) References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name
Manual C. Selects the method of receiving Off: No notification Feature Manual References
Waiting for call waiting notification from BSS: Tone from 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Extension other extensions. the handset or
Call built-in speaker
Automatic C. Specifies whether to receive Off, On Feature Manual References
Waiting call waiting notification for a call 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
from trunk, a doorphone call or
a call via an incoming call
distribution group.

PC Programming Manual 457

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Pickup Dial Sets or cancels the Hot Line Off, On PC Programming Manual
Set feature. The number specified References
in Option 2 on this screen is 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
dialled automatically after going System—Timers & Counters—
off-hook when the Hot Line Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial
feature is active. —Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Manual References
2.6.6 Hot Line
Pickup Dial Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual References
No. dialled automatically after going (consisting of 0–9, 2.6.6 Hot Line
off-hook when the Hot Line *, #, T [Transfer],
feature is active. [ ] [Secret], P
[Pause], and F
[Flash])

Option 3
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of Max. 5 digits PC Programming
Number the PS (reference only). (consisting of 0–9) Manual References
9.31 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 characters PC Programming
Name Manual References
9.31 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension Name
Call Pickup Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other Feature Manual
Deny picked up by other extensions. extension users to References
pick up calls to your 2.4.3 Call Pickup
PS
Enable: Prevents
other extension users
from picking up calls
to your PS
Executive Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other Feature Manual
Override interrupted by other extensions. extension users to References
Deny interrupt an existing 2.10.2 Executive Busy
call Override
Enable: Prevents
other extension users
from interrupting an
existing call
Absent Specifies the Personal Absent Max. 16 characters Feature Manual
Message Message which, unlike the References
System Absent Message, can be 2.20.2 Absent Message
customised for each PS.

458 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Charge Specifies the maximum limit of 0–9999999 PC Programming
Limit call charges allowed for the PS. Manual References
When this limit is reached, the PS 14.2 PBX Configuration—
cannot be used to make further [6-2] Feature—Hotel &
trunk calls. Charge
The number of decimal places
that can be specified here Feature Manual
depends on the value set in References
Charge Options—Digits After 2.7.2 Budget Management
Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX
Configuration—[6-2] Feature—
Hotel & Charge.

Option 4
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0– PC Programming
Number number of the PS 9) Manual References
(reference only). 9.31 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—
Portable Station—Extension
No.
Extension Specifies the name of Max. 20 characters PC Programming
Name the PS. Manual References
9.31 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—
Portable Station—Extension
Name
Outgoing Selects the line to be No Line: No line is seized. PC Programming
Preferred seized after going off- Idle: An idle trunk is seized Manual References
Line hook to make a call. automatically from the 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
programmed trunk groups. [4-2-3] Extension—Portable
ICM/PDN: An extension line is Station—Flexible Button
seized, or, for a PDN
extension, an idle PDN button Feature Manual
is selected. References
F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed 2.5.5.2 Line Preference—
for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) Outgoing
is seized. A flexible button
customised as a Single-CO,
Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD
Group button must be selected.

PC Programming Manual 459

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Incoming Selects the line on which No Line: No line is selected. PC Programming
Preferred an incoming call is Select a line by pressing the Manual References
Line answered after going desired Line Access button to 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
off-hook. answer a call. [4-2-3] Extension—Portable
Note that even if a Ringing Line: The longest Station—Flexible Button
specific PDN button is ringing call is selected.
selected here, a call PDN: The call arriving at any Feature Manual
ringing at any PDN PDN button is selected. References
button on the extension F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a 2.4.2 Line Preference—
will be answered when flexible button (F-1–F-12) is Incoming
going off-hook. selected. A flexible button
customised as a Single-CO,
Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD
Group button must be selected.
Call Waiting Selects the type of Call CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Feature Manual
Tone Type Waiting tone sent to the References
busy extension. 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
LCS Specifies whether to Stop Record, Keep Record Feature Manual
Recording continue or stop References
Mode recording the message 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
in the PS’s mailbox System Overview
when the PS user
answers a call that was
being monitored.

Option 5
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (reference (consisting of 0–9) References
only). 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name
Display Selects the display language Language1– Feature Manual References
Language of the PS. Language5 2.21.4 Display Information
Incoming Call Selects which caller Caller ID Name, CO Feature Manual References
Display information is shown on the Line Name, 2.21.4 Display Information
first line of the PS’s display. DDI/DID Name
Automatic Enables the first line of the Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
LCD Switch display to show the call 2.21.4 Display Information
when Start duration automatically after
Talking answering a trunk call.

460 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Option 6
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number of the PS (reference only). (consisting of 0– References
9) 9.31 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension No.
Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
characters References
9.31 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension Name
Flexible Button Specifies whether the PS user No Limitation, Feature Manual
Programming can modify all flexible buttons One-touch Dial References
Mode without limitation, or only the 2.6.2 One-touch Dialling
One-touch Dialling buttons.
When the mode is set to One-
touch Dial, there is no need to
enter "2" before the number when
customising a One-touch Dialling
button.

Option 7
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number of the PS (reference only). (consisting of 0– References
9) 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension No.
Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
characters References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension Name
Character Input Selects the character table to Table 1:
Mode be used for entering characters. Standard mode
Table 2: Option
mode
Flash Mode Selects the function of the EFA, Terminate, Feature Manual
during CO FLASH/RECALL button during Flash Recall References
Conversation a trunk conversation. 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)
Incoming Call Specifies the number of 0–100 Feature Manual
Log Memory incoming trunk calls that are References
retained in the PS’s Incoming 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log
Call Log memory.

PC Programming Manual 461

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Outgoing Call Specifies the number of 1–100 Feature Manual
Log Memory telephone numbers dialled by References
the PS that are retained in the 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
PS’s Outgoing Call Log
memory.
ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. Automatic, Feature Manual
When Automatic is selected, Speech, Audio References
the bearer mode is set 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services
automatically depending on the Digital Network (ISDN)—
type of the PS. SUMMARY

Option 8
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number the PS (reference only). (consisting of References
0–9) 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name characters References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name
Group CW Enables an incoming call to an Disable,
w/o Tone incoming call distribution group to Enable
(Ring after arrive at a previously busy extension
Call) at the moment that the extension
goes on-hook for the previous call.
Wrap-up Specifies the length of time that 0–3000 s PC Programming Manual
Timer must pass after completing a call References
before a PS will accept another call 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—
when logged in as a member of an [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Incoming Call Distribution Group. Distribution Group—Group
This timer is used when "Options— Settings—Member List—Wrap-
Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to up Timer
"Extension" in 11.5.3 PBX 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—
Configuration—[3-5-3] Group— [3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call
Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Group—
—Miscellaneous. Miscellaneous—Options—Wrap-
up Timer based on
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

462 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Option 9
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (reference (consisting of 0– References
only). 9) 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
PS. characters References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name
PDN Delayed Specifies the delayed Immediate, 1 Feature Manual References
Ringing ringing setting for calls to a Ring, 2 Rings, 3 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
PDN extension (an Rings, 4 Rings, (PDN)/Secondary Directory
extension with one or more 5 Rings, 6 Rings Number (SDN) Extension
PDN buttons).
Built-in Specifies whether to enable Disable, Basic PC Programming Manual
Communication or disable the Only, Enable References
Assistant Communication Assistant 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(CA) application for each Configuration—Slot—Site
extension. Property—Main—Port Number—
Built-in Communication Assistant
Server
Feature Manual References
2.26.2 CA (Communication
Assistant)
Mobile Extension Specifies whether to enable Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
or disable mobile extension 2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—
features (with a cellular SUMMARY
phone or other outside
destination) for the
extension.

FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND
settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—
Portable Station—FWD/DND.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (consisting of 0– References
(reference only). 9) 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension No.

PC Programming Manual 463

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name PS. characters References
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension Name
FWD Mode for Indicates the forwarding None, FWD All, PC Programming Manual
Call from CO type of incoming trunk FWD Busy, FWD References
calls (reference only). N/A, FWD Busy 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
N/A Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Indicates the forwarding Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination for destination of incoming (consisting of 0– References
Call from CO trunk calls (reference 9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
only). and P [Pause]) Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Mode for Indicates the forwarding None, FWD All, PC Programming Manual
Call from type of incoming intercom FWD Busy, FWD References
Extension calls (reference only). N/A, FWD Busy 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
N/A Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Indicates the forwarding Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination for destination of incoming (consisting of 0– References
Call from intercom calls (reference 9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension only). and P [Pause]) Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD No Specifies the length of 0–120 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Time time that an incoming call References
rings at the PS before the 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
call is forwarded. Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

464 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Keep ring after Specifies whether a PS Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
FWD NA to CO continues to ring after References
forwarding an incoming 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
call to an outside Extension—Portable Station—
destination via FWD N/A FWD/DND
or FWD Busy N/A.
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Remote FWD Specifies the COS that Disable, 1–512 Feature Manual References
COS allows the FWD setting 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
on the extension to be
changed from another
extension. This COS
must then be set for the
extensions that will
remotely change the
FWD setting.

12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—

Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-
assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Name Description Value Range Links
Location Entry Specifies the extension PS extension PC Programming Manual
—Beginning number of the first location number References
Entry Location to be programmed. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
(Ext. Number) Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Location Entry Specifies the number of 1–total number PC Programming Manual
—Number to locations to be of connected References
Generate programmed. PS extensions 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
A CLIP number will only be Extension—Portable Station—
assigned to registered PS Extension Settings
extensions, even if the
number entered here is Feature Manual References
larger than the total 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
number of PS extensions. Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)

PC Programming Manual 465

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter— Specifies the number of 0–4 PC Programming Manual
Deleting Digits digits to be deleted from References
the start of an extension 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
number when using it as Extension—Portable Station—
part of the CLIP number. Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a prefix number Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Head of ID to be applied to all (consisting of References
generated CLIP numbers. 0–9, *, and #) 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a suffix number Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Tail of ID to be applied to all (consisting of References
generated CLIP numbers. 0–9, *, and #) 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station

—FWD/DND
For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for
incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
Name Description Value Range Links
Forward / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for Always (All), Feature Manual
DND—For external calls. Busy, No References
external calls If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Answer, Busy / 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD No Answer, Do (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
destination field can be set. Not Disturb, Off (DND)—SUMMARY

466 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Forward / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for Always (All), Feature Manual
DND—For internal calls. Busy, No References
internal calls If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Answer, Busy / 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD No Answer, Do (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
destination field can be set. Not Disturb, Off (DND)—SUMMARY
If For both external calls and internal
calls is checked, this setting becomes
unavailable, and the value set for external
calls is applied to internal calls.

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station

—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12
flexible buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name
list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Name Description Value Range Links
Type Specifies the feature to be Not Stored, Loop CO, PC Programming
assigned to the flexible button. Single CO, Group Manual References
CO, DSS, One-touch, 12.2.3.1 PBX
ICD Group, Message Configuration—[4-2-3]
Waiting, FWD/DND Extension—Portable
(Both), FWD/DND Station—Flexible Button
(External), FWD/DND —Flexible button data
(Internal), Group Fwd copy
(Both), Group Fwd
(External), Group
Fwd (Internal),
Account, Conference,
Terminate, EFA,
Charge, Call Park,
Log-in/Log-out,
Hurry-up, Wrap-up,
Time Service, TRS
Level Change, ISDN
Service, CLIR,
COLR, ISDN Hold,
Time Service -
Automatic/Manual,
Two-way Record,
Two-way Transfer,
LCS, Voice Mail
Transfer, NDSS, CTI,
PDN, SDN
Parameter Specifies the trunk to be 1–600 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Single CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

PC Programming Manual 467

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter Specifies the trunk group to be 1–96 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Group CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies whether a call is parked Automatic, Specific Feature Manual
Selection (for in an idle parking zone References
Call Park) automatically, or in a specific 2.13.2 Call Park
parking zone.
Parameter Specifies which incoming call None: The incoming Feature Manual
Selection (for distribution groups that the PS call distribution group References
Log-in/Log-out) belongs to are logged in to or is selected manually. 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
logged out from. All: All incoming call
distribution groups
that the PS belongs
to.
Incoming Group: A
pre-specified
incoming call
distribution group
Parameter Selects which time modes are All (Day/Night/Lunch/ Feature Manual
Selection (for switched manually. Break), Day/Night/ References
Time Service) Break, Day/Night/ 5.1.4 Time Service
Lunch, Day/Night
Parameter Specifies the TRS/Barring level to Level 1–Level 7 Feature Manual
Selection (for be used temporarily on a certain References
TRS Level PS. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
Change) (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Specifies the Time Table to be Table 1–Table 32 Feature Manual
Selection (for used when the Time Service References
Time Service - Switching Mode is set to 5.1.4 Time Service
Automatic/ Automatic.
Manual)
Parameter Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 PC Programming
Selection (for setting for calls arriving at an Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Manual References
SDN) SDN button. Rings, 5 Rings, 6 10.9 PBX Configuration
The value specified here is only Rings, No Ring —[2-9] System—System
used when System Wireless— Options—Option 4—
SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD System Wireless—SDN
on 10.9 PBX Configuration— Delayed Ringing with
[2-9] System—System Options LCD
is set to "Enable".
Feature Manual
References
2.9.1 Primary Directory
Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension

468 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits
Number (for extension to be accessed. (consisting of 0–9)
DSS)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
ICD Group) distribution group to be accessed.
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits
Number (for extension or floating extension (consisting of 0–9)
Message number of an incoming call
Waiting) distribution group for which
messages are checked. If this cell
is left empty, the PS will check its
own messages only.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Both)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom and (DND)—SUMMARY
trunk calls will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(External)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose trunk calls will be (DND)—SUMMARY
forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Internal)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom calls (DND)—SUMMARY
will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
Log-in/Log-out) distribution group to log-in to or
log-out from.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Hurry-up) distribution group whose longest 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
waiting call will be redirected
(Manual Queue Redirection).
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM group (consisting of 0–9) References
Two-way containing the PS’s mailbox. 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Record) System Overview

PC Programming Manual 469

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM group (consisting of 0–9) References
Two-way containing the desired mailbox. 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Transfer) System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 8 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM group (consisting of 0–9) References
Voice Mail containing the desired mailbox. 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Transfer) System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the corresponding (consisting of 0–9) References
SDN) (owner) extension for the SDN 2.9.1 Primary Directory
button. Number (PDN)/
Note that the extension specified Secondary Directory
here must have a PDN button Number (SDN) Extension
registered for the SDN button to
function.
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension, when an extension
number is specified (reference
only).
Dial (for One- Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
touch) dialled. The PBX can have a (consisting of 0–9, *, References
maximum of 500 One-touch #, T [Transfer], [ ] 2.6.2 One-touch Dialling
Dialling buttons for PSs. [Secret], P [Pause],
and F [Flash])
Dial (for ISDN Specifies the number required to Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Service) access the telephone company’s (consisting of 0–9, *, References
ISDN service. #, T [Transfer], [ ] 4.1.2.11 ISDN Service
[Secret], P [Pause], Access by Keypad
and F [Flash]) Protocol
Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
number of the extension to be (consisting of 0–9) References
accessed using Network Direct 4.3.5.1 Network Direct
Station Selection. Station Selection (NDSS)
Note that only extension numbers
that have been previously
registered in 17.4 PBX
Configuration—[9-4] Private
Network—NDSS Key Table can
be specified here.
Optional Specifies the Time Table to be Table 1–Table 32 Feature Manual
Parameter (or used for changing time modes in References
Ringing Tone the Automatic Switching mode. 5.1.4 Time Service
Type Number)
(for Time
Service)

470 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send

Name Description Value Range Links

Optional Specifies the number of the Park 00–Park 99 Feature Manual
Parameter (or parking zone a call is to be References
Ringing Tone parked in when a Call Park button 2.13.2 Call Park
Type Number) with Parameter Selection (for
(for Call Park) Call Park) on this screen set to
Specific is pressed.
Ext No. of Specifies the number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Mailbox (for extension whose mailbox will be (consisting of 0–9) References
Two-way used to record conversations 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Transfer) using One-touch Two-way System Overview
Transfer. (For example, a
secretary can record a
conversation into the mailbox of a
boss.) If the cell is left empty, the
extension user must specify the
number of an extension each
time.

12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—

Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Destination Select the number and name of the PS that PC Programming
Extension will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs Manual References
Line can be selected. To select all PSs at once, 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
click Select All. [4-2-3] Extension—Portable
When selecting multiple extensions, note that Station—Flexible Button
if the source extension has an SDN button,
the copy operation cannot be performed.

12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station

—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 471

12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Network BLF Selects whether extension status OFF, ON PC Programming Manual
Data to NDSS data is transmitted over the network References
Key of Other PBX for the selected extension. This 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4]
- Other PBX setting is automatically set to ON Private Network—NDSS Key
(Network PBX when the feature is used, and can Table
ID=1) only be manually changed from ON
to OFF, to cancel data transmission. Feature Manual References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station

—CLIP ID Table
Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wireless extension.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Number PS (reference only).
Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS (reference Max. 20 characters
only).
CLIP 1–8 Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the PS. Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9,
*, and #)

472 PC Programming Manual

 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS

Console
A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT connected to the same PBX. The DPT Type—Type of
the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in the Port Property screen of the
extension card that the DSS console is connected to. For details, see To access port properties in 9.1
PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Extension—DSS Console section in
the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information.
To copy DSS Console setting values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
Once DSS console buttons have been programmed, the Terminal Label Print utility can be used to print
label sheets, which can be attached to DSS consoles for quick reference. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing
and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.

PC Programming Manual 473

12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

474 PC Programming Manual

 Section 13
PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 475

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—

Doorphone
The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed.
To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
DOORPHONE Indicates the number of the Doorphone number Feature Manual
Number doorphone (reference only). References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Name Specifies the doorphone Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
name. References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Destination— Specifies the destination Max. 32 digits PC Programming
Day, Lunch, number of doorphone calls (consisting of 0–9, *, #, Manual References
Break, Night for each port in each time [ ] [Secret], and P 10.4 PBX Configuration—
mode. [Pause]) [2-4] System—Week Table
Feature Manual
References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

476 PC Programming Manual

 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Name Description Value Range Links

Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number 1–32 or 1–128 PC Programming
for the doorphone port in Manual References
order to apply the Time Note
10.4 PBX Configuration—
Table (day/lunch/break/ The maximum [2-4] System—Week Table
night). number of time
tables (1 per tenant) Feature Manual
depends on the References
System Capacity 2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Selection setting 5.1.3 Tenant Service
made when the
Easy Setup Wizard
was run for the
PBX. If the System
Resource Type
was selected, the
maximum number of
tenants (and
therefore, time
tables) is 128. If the
Standard Type or
IP-Extension Type
was selected, the
maximum number of
tenants is 32. For
details, refer to
"5.4.1 Easy Setup
Wizard" in the
Installation Manual.
COS Specifies the Class of 1–512 PC Programming
Service (COS) number. COS Manual References
programming determines the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration
doorphone ports that are —[2-7-1] System—Class of
able to make trunk calls, and Service—COS Settings—
sets restrictions on intercom TRS—TRS Level—Day,
calls from certain extensions Lunch, Break, Night
(Internal Call Block). 10.7.3 PBX Configuration
—[2-7-3] System—Class of
Service—Internal Call
Block
Feature Manual
References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

PC Programming Manual 477

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Name Description Value Range Links

Service Group Specifies the Service Group None, 1–64 Feature Manual
Number number sent to the Unified References
Messaging system when the 2.18.1 Doorphone Call
incoming call destination is 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
the floating extension System Overview
number of a UM group.
The Service Group number
is used to allow the Unified
Messaging system to send
the applicable greeting
message to the caller.
VM Trunk Specifies the number of the 1–48
Group No. VM trunk group sent to the
VPS when the incoming call
destination is the floating
extension number of a VM
(DPT) Group (connected to
a KX-NCP/KX-TDE series
PBX). The VM trunk group
number is used to allow the
VPS to send the applicable
greeting message to the
caller.

478 PC Programming Manual

 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—

External Pager
Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified.
Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.5 Tool—
Extension List View).
Name Description Value Range Links
ID Indicates the Site ID 1–16
corresponding to the site
numbers of PBXs in the One-
look network (reference only).
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Extension number of the external pager. (consisting of 0– 2.17.1 Paging
Number 9) 2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)
Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
external pager. characters 2.17.1 Paging
2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

PC Programming Manual 479

13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message

13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—

Voice Message
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice
Message—DISA System
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller
were using an SLT extension of the PBX.
For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Manual.

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
DISA Security— Selects the DISA security None: Intercom calls, TIE Feature Manual
DISA Security mode to prevent unauthorised line calls, and trunk calls References
Mode access to the PBX. In Trunk or can be made. 2.7.5 Walking COS
All Security mode, the caller is Trunk: Intercom calls and 2.7.6 Verification Code
required to override security by TIE line calls without Entry
Walking COS or Verification PBX code can be made.
Code Entry in order to enable TIE line calls with PBX
the restricted feature code and trunk calls are
temporarily. restricted.
All: All calls are
restricted.
DISA Security— Enables registered caller ID Disable, Enable (Get
Remote Walking numbers to be automatically DISA)
COS through recognised as PBX extensions
DISA without when calling through DISA,
PIN (Activation and to use the Walking COS
Key Required) features without entering a
PIN.
DISA Intercept— Selects how DISA calls are Busy Tone, Enable, Busy
Intercept when handled if the destination sets Message
destination DND, and disables Idle
through DISA Extension Hunting.
sets DND
DISA Intercept— Selects how DISA calls are to Operator, to AA-0, to
Intercept when handled if all DISA ports are AA-9, Disable (Busy
all DISA ports currently in use. Tone)
are busy
DISA Intercept— Selects how DISA calls are to Operator, to AA-0, to
Intercept when handled if the caller does not AA-9, Disable (Reorder
No Dial after select any option from the Tone)
DISA answers menu.

480 PC Programming Manual

 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Name Description Value Range Links

CO-CO with Specifies whether the DISA Disable (Release DISA): PC Programming
DISA—DISA to port is released when a trunk- The DISA port is Manual References
Public CO to-public trunk call using DISA released when a trunk- 13.3.1 PBX
is established. To enable this to-public trunk call using Configuration—[5-3-1]
setting, "CO-CO with DISA— DISA is established. Optional Device—
Fwd/Transfer to Public CO" Enable: DISA stays Voice Message—DISA
on this screen should be set to connected for the System—Option 1—
"Enable". duration of the call, to CO-CO with DISA—
Setting this to "Disable" will allow detection of the Fwd/Transfer to Public
free up DISA ports faster, but end of the call. CO
prevent DISA being used to
detect the end of a call and
disconnect the trunk quickly.
CO-CO with Specifies whether the DISA Disable (Release DISA): PC Programming
DISA—DISA to port is released when a trunk- The DISA port is Manual References
Private Network to-private trunk call using DISA released when a trunk- 13.3.1 PBX
is established. to-private trunk call using Configuration—[5-3-1]
To enable this setting, "CO-CO DISA is established. Optional Device—
with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Enable: DISA stays Voice Message—DISA
Private Network" on this connected for the System—Option 1—
screen should be set to duration of the call, to CO-CO with DISA—
"Enable". allow detection of the Fwd/Transfer to Private
Setting this to "Disable" will end of the call. Network
free up DISA ports faster, but
prevent DISA being used to
detect the end of a call and
disconnect the trunk quickly.
CO-CO with Enables trunk-to-public trunk Disable: Trunk-to-public PC Programming
DISA—Fwd/ calls to be established using trunk calls are Manual References
Transfer to DISA. established without using 13.3.1 PBX
Public CO DISA. Configuration—[5-3-1]
Enable (Get DISA): Optional Device—
Trunk-to-public trunk Voice Message—DISA
calls are established System—Option 1—
using DISA, and DISA CO-CO with DISA—
can be used to detect the Fwd/Transfer to Public
end of the call. CO
CO-CO with Enables trunk-to-private trunk Disable: Trunk-to-private PC Programming
DISA—Fwd/ calls to be established using trunk calls are Manual References
Transfer to DISA. established without using 13.3.1 PBX
Private Network DISA. Configuration—[5-3-1]
Enable (Get DISA): Optional Device—
Trunk-to-private trunk Voice Message—DISA
calls are established System—Option 1—
using DISA, and DISA CO-CO with DISA—
can be used to detect the Fwd/Transfer to Private
end of the call. Network

PC Programming Manual 481

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Name Description Value Range Links

CO-CO with Specifies whether an outside Disable: "#" is ignored if
DISA—Transfer party such as a cellular phone dialled.
by DTMF "#" can transfer a trunk call to an Enable (as "Flash"): The
(Activation Key extension within the PBX by current trunk call will be
Required) dialling "#" + extension placed on hold, then
number. transferred to the
extension whose number
is entered.
CO-CO with Enables a trunk caller to return Disable, Enable
DISA—Return to to the DISA top menu by
DISA Top Menu pressing " " while hearing a
by DTMF "*" ringback, reorder, or busy tone.
If disabled, retrying the call is
possible by pressing " ".

Option 2
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Timed Reminder Specifies the pre-recorded None, 1– PC Programming Manual
Message—Day, message to play when a 64 References
Lunch, Break, Timed Reminder call is 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Night answered in each time Optional Device—Voice Message—
mode. DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.24.4 Timed Reminder

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice

Message—DISA Message
Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—
Extension List View). To assign AA destinations easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Extension extension number of the (consisting of 0– 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Number OGM. 9) 2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
5.5.8 Floating Extension
Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
OGM. characters 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)

482 PC Programming Manual

 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Name Description Value Range Links

1 Digit AA Specifies the destination for Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Destination each DISA Automated (consisting of 0– 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
(Extension Attendant (AA) number. After 9, *, and #) 2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Number)—Dial listening to an OGM, the Access (DISA)
0–9 caller can be directed to the
destination by dialling a 1-
digit DISA AA number.
Busy / DND Selects the OGM to be None, 1–64 PC Programming Manual
Message No. played for the caller when References
the destination party is busy 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1]
or sets DND. Optional Device—Voice Message
—DISA System
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
Fax Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
number to which to transfer a (consisting of 0– 2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer
call when a fax signal is 9)
detected.

PC Programming Manual 483

13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay

13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—

External Relay
Settings related to external relays can be programmed.
Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the DOORPHONE
card’s property settings. (→ 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—
Card Property)
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
External Indicates the number of the 1–80 Feature Manual References
Relay No. external relay (reference 2.18.4 External Relay Control
only).
Name Specifies the relay name. Max. 20 Feature Manual References
characters 2.18.4 External Relay Control
Relay Specifies the length of time 1–7 s Feature Manual References
Activate that the relay stays on when 2.18.4 External Relay Control
Time activated.
COS Specifies the Class of 1–512 PC Programming Manual
Number Service (COS) number. COS References
programming determines the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
extensions that are able to System—Class of Service—COS
activate relays. Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—External Relay Access
Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.4 External Relay Control

484 PC Programming Manual

 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—

External Sensor
Settings related to external sensors can be programmed.
To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
External Indicates the number of 1–80 Feature Manual
Sensor No. the external sensor References
(reference only). 2.18.3 External Sensor
Name Specifies the sensor Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
name. References
2.18.3 External Sensor
Destination— Specifies the destination Max. 32 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Day, Lunch, number of sensor calls 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P References
Break, Night for each port in each [Pause]) 2.18.3 External Sensor
time mode.
Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to 1–32 or 1–128 PC Programming
which the sensor Manual References
belongs, to determine Note
10.4 PBX Configuration—
the Time Table for the The maximum number of [2-4] System—Week Table
sensor. (The tenant tenants depends on the
number corresponds to System Capacity Feature Manual
the Time Table number.) Selection setting made References
when the Easy Setup 2.18.3 External Sensor
Wizard was run for the 5.1.3 Tenant Service
PBX. If the System
Resource Type was
selected, the maximum
number of tenants is 128.
If the Standard Type or
IP-Extension Type was
selected, the maximum
number of tenants is 32.
For details, refer to "5.4.1
Easy Setup Wizard" in
the Installation Manual.
Sensor Alarm Enables e-mail Enable, Disable Feature Manual
—Email notification when the References
notification sensor detects an alarm. 2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Sensor Alarm Specifies the e-mail Max.128 characters Feature Manual
—Email address that will receive References
Address a notification when the 2.18.3 External Sensor
sensor detects an alarm. 5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 485

13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

Name Description Value Range Links

Sensor Alarm Specifies comments in Max. 256 characters Feature Manual
—Email the e-mail received when References
Comment the sensor detects an 2.18.3 External Sensor
alarm. 5.1.3 Tenant Service

486 PC Programming Manual

 Section 14
PBX Configuration—[6] Feature

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 487

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System

Speed Dial
The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should
be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution).
The System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
In Basic Memory, a maximum of 1000 System Speed Dialling numbers (e.g., telephone numbers, feature
numbers) can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Memory Selects the System Basic Memory: the standard PC Programming
Speed Dialling Table to table Manual References
be programmed. Expansion for Tenant 1–32 or 14.6 PBX Configuration—
Whether a tenant uses 1–128: additional tables [6-6] Feature—Tenant—
the basic System Speed System Speed Dial
Dialling Table or the Note
additional table depends • If "Expansion for Tenant" Feature Manual
on the setting of System is selected, and the PBX References
Speed Dial in 14.6 PBX has been setup using the 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Configuration—[6-6] System Resource Type Personal/System
Feature—Tenant. configuration, a 2.19.1 Caller ID
maximum of 300 System 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Speed Dialling numbers
can be saved for each
tenant. For details, refer
to "5.4.1 Easy Setup
Wizard" in the Installation
Manual.
• The maximum number of
time tables (1 per tenant)
depends on the System
Capacity Selection
setting made when the
Easy Setup Wizard was
run for the PBX. If the
System Resource Type
was selected, the
maximum number of
tenants (and therefore,
time tables) is 128. If the
Standard Type or
IP-Extension Type was
selected, the maximum
number of tenants is 32.
For details, refer to "5.4.1
Easy Setup Wizard" in
the Installation Manual.

488 PC Programming Manual

 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Name Description Value Range Links

Name Specifies a name for the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
System Speed Dialling References
number. 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Personal/System
2.19.1 Caller ID
CO Line Specifies the telephone Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0– Feature Manual
Access number (including the 9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], References
Number + Trunk Access number) P [Pause], and F [Flash]) 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Telephone or feature number Personal/System
Number assigned to the System 2.19.1 Caller ID
Speed Dialling number.
CLI Specifies the CLI Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming
Destination destination (extension) Manual References
to which incoming calls 18.2 PBX Configuration—
from the programmed [10-2] CO & Incoming Call
telephone number are —DIL Table & Port Settings
routed. If a Caller ID —CLI for DIL—CLI Ring for
Modification Table is DIL—Day, Lunch, Break,
being used, the modified Night
number must match the 18.3 PBX Configuration—
telephone number above [10-3] CO & Incoming Call
(CO Line Access —DDI / DID Table—CLI
Number + Telephone Ring for DDI/DID—Day,
Number) in order for the Lunch, Break, Night
call to be routed
correctly. Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.5 Calling Line
Identification (CLI)
Distribution
2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 489

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &

Charge
Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Hotel Operator— Specifies the numbers of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Extension 1–4 extensions designated as (consisting of 2.23.1 Hospitality Features—
hotel operators. 0–9) SUMMARY
2.23.2 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Selects whether check-in and No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
Hotel Application 1 check-out data is output on References
—Room Status SMDR. 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
Control Maintenance—Main
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Selects whether Timed No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
Hotel Application 1 Reminder data is output on References
—Timed Reminder SMDR. 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
(Wake-up Call) Maintenance—Main
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.24.4 Timed Reminder
SMDR for External Specifies the text of the Max. 16 PC Programming Manual
Hotel Application 2 message output on SMDR characters References
—Printing when this Printing Message is 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
Message 1–8 selected from an extension. Maintenance—Main
The "%" character can be
used in a message, and Feature Manual References
requires a number to be 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
entered in its place when the Recording (SMDR)
message is selected from an 2.22.2 Printing Message
extension. This character can
be used a maximum of seven
times in a Printing Message.
Timed Reminder Specifies the message Max. 20 Feature Manual References
Message for SIP- displayed on a SIP-MLT or characters 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
MLT / Standard Standard SIP Phone LCD
SIP Phone— screen for the Timed
Message Reminder feature.

490 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Bill
Name Description Value Range Links
Checkout Billing— Activates call billing features OFF, ON PC Programming Manual
Billing for Guest for the PBX. References
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Site
Property
Feature Manual
References
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
LCD for "Telephone" item 1 as shown on the characters References
display of the hotel operator 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
extension when entering room Room
charges.
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
LCD for "Minibar" item 2 as shown on the characters References
display of the hotel operator 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
extension when entering room Room
charges.
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
LCD for "Others" item 3 as shown on the characters References
display of the hotel operator 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
extension when entering room Room
charges.
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
Bill (SMDR) for item 1 as printed on the guest characters References
"Telephone" bill. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
Bill (SMDR) for item 2 as printed on the guest characters References
"Minibar" bill. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
Bill (SMDR) for item 3 as printed on the guest characters References
"Others" bill. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
SMDR for External Specifies the language used Language 1– Feature Manual
Hotel Application— for standard items shown on Language 5 References
Language for Bill guest bills printed out using 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
(SMDR) the Call Billing feature. Room
SMDR for External Specifies the text printed at Max. 80 Feature Manual
Hotel Application— the top of the guest bill. characters References
Header 1–3 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room

PC Programming Manual 491

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Name Description Value Range Links

SMDR for External Specifies the text printed at Max. 80 Feature Manual
Hotel Application— the bottom of the guest bill. characters References
Footer 1–3 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room

Charge
Name Description Value Range Links
Margin & Tax— Specifies the 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Margin Rate for percentage margin to 2.22.3 Call Charge Services
"Telephone" (%) be added to telephone 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
charges displayed on
the guest bill.
Margin & Tax— Specifies the 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Tax Rate for percentage tax rate to 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
"Telephone" (%) be used when
calculating guest
telephone charges.
Margin & Tax— Specifies the 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Tax Rate for percentage tax rate to 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
"Minibar" (%) be used when
calculating guest
charges for charge
item 2.
Margin & Tax— Specifies the 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Tax Rate for percentage tax rate to 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
"Others" (%) be used when
calculating guest
charges for charge
item 3.
Charge Options Specifies the number 0–6 PC Programming Manual
—Digits After of digits to display References
Decimal Point after the decimal point 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
for the currency in Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
use. Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature
—Verification Code—Budget
Management
Feature Manual References
2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

492 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Name Description Value Range Links

Charge Options Specifies the currency Max. 3 PC Programming Manual
—Currency characters shown on characters References
the display of the 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
extension and the Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
SMDR. Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature
—Verification Code—Budget
Management
Feature Manual References
2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Charge Options Specifies whether the Head, Tail PC Programming Manual
—Currency currency characters References
Display Position are displayed before 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
or after the call Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
charge. Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature
—Verification Code—Budget
Management
Feature Manual References
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
Charge Options Selects what happens Alarm: Only a PC Programming Manual
—Action at when the amount of warning tone is References
Charge Limit the call charge heard. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
reaches the pre- Alarm + Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
programmed limit Disconnect: A Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
during a conversation. warning tone is 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
heard, and then Extension—Portable Station—Extension
the call is Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
disconnected.
Feature Manual References
2.7.2 Budget Management

PC Programming Manual 493

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Name Description Value Range Links

Charge Options Enables the PBX to Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
—Meter Start on start counting the call References
Answer charge when the 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Detection answer signal from the Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
telephone company is Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
detected. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
Feature Manual References
2.22.3 Call Charge Services

494 PC Programming Manual

 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—

Verification Code
A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in
use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes.
A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 codes are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Verification Specifies the verification code. Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Code (consisting of References
0–9, *, and #) 2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
User Name Specifies the user name assigned to the Max. 20 Feature Manual
verification code. characters References
2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
Verification Specifies the PIN to be entered when Max. 10 digits Feature Manual
Code PIN making a trunk call with the verification (consisting of References
code. 0–9) 2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent
telephone calls will be made if a third
party discovers a personal
identification number (PIN)
(verification code PIN or extension
PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to
the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of
fraudulent use, we strongly
recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random
PINs that cannot be easily
guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.

PC Programming Manual 495

14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

Name Description Value Range Links

COS Number Specifies the COS that applies when 1–512 PC Programming
making a trunk call with the verification Manual References
code. 10.7.1 PBX Configuration
—[2-7-1] System—Class
of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
5.1.1 Class of Service
(COS)
Itemised Specifies the itemised billing code used Max. 10 digits PC Programming
Billing Code by the ARS feature for identifying calls (consisting of Manual References
for ARS made with a verification code for 0–9, *, and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—
accounting and billing purposes. [8-5] ARS—Carrier
Feature Manual
References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Budget Specifies the limit of the call charge that 0–9999999 Feature Manual
Management will be counted on the verification code. References
The number of decimal places that can 2.7.2 Budget
be specified here depends on the value Management
set in Charge Options—Digits After
Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX
Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &
Charge.

496 PC Programming Manual

 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone

14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second

Dial Tone
A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and
the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a
pre-programmed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed. 20 codes are displayed at a time.
To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Second Dial Specifies the Second Dial Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Tone Waiting Tone Waiting code. (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Code and #) 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
Pause Repeating Specifies the number of 0–20 Feature Manual
Counter pauses to be inserted when References
waiting for the second dial 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
tone.

PC Programming Manual 497

14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message

14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent

Message
When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing
the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user
can select one of them.

Note
When using this feature in conjunction with the Unified Messaging (UM) system, changing a message
here will create a difference between the displayed message and the UM’s pre-recorded greeting that
corresponds to the absent message. To use both features in synchronisation, you must record a
corresponding greeting for each absent message changed. For details about changing UM system
prompts, see 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation.
Name Description Value Range Links
Absent Message Specifies the message for Max. 16 characters Feature Manual References
display. 2.20.2 Absent Message

498 PC Programming Manual

 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

*1
A maximum of 32 or 128 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user
groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources.
To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).
*1 The maximum number of tenants depends on the System Capacity Selectionsetting made when the Easy Setup Wizard was
run for the PBX. If the System Resource Type was selected, the maximum number of tenants is 128. If the Standard Type or
IP-Extension Type was selected, the maximum number of tenants is 32. For details, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard" in the
Installation Manual.

Name Description Value Range Links

Music On Specifies the audio Same as System Setting, PC Programming Manual
Hold source to be used for BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, References
Music on Hold. BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8, 10.2 PBX Configuration—
Tone [2-2] System—Operator &
BGM
Feature Manual
References
2.13.4 Music on Hold
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Operator Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0– PC Programming Manual
(Extension number or the floating 9) References
Number) extension number of an 10.2 PBX Configuration—
incoming call [2-2] System—Operator &
distribution group to be BGM
designated as the
tenant operator. When Feature Manual
this parameter is left References
unspecified, the PBX 5.1.3 Tenant Service
operator serves as the 5.1.5 Operator Features
tenant operator.
ARS Mode Specifies the ARS Off: ARS is disabled. PC Programming Manual
mode used when On for Local Access Operation: References
making a trunk call. ARS operates when an 16.1 PBX Configuration—
extension user makes a call [8-1] ARS—System Setting
using any Idle Line Access
method. Feature Manual
On for Any CO Access References
Operation: ARS operates when 2.8.1 Automatic Route
an extension user makes a call Selection (ARS)
using any Trunk Access 5.1.3 Tenant Service
method.
Same as System Setting: The
setting specified in ARS Mode
in 16.1 PBX Configuration—
[8-1] ARS—System Setting is
applied.

PC Programming Manual 499

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

Name Description Value Range Links

System Specifies which system Same as System Setting: PBX PC Programming Manual
Speed Dial speed dialling table is common system speed dialling References
used by the tenant. numbers are used. 14.1 PBX Configuration—
Tenant Exclusive: Individual [6-1] Feature—System Speed
tenant system speed dialling Dial
numbers are used.
Feature Manual
References
2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Personal/System
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Time Specifies which PBX’s Normal: Use the clock of the Feature Manual
Service clock in a One-look PBX to which the device or References
Mode network is used as trunk for a service (e.g., 5.1.3 Tenant Service
reference for the incoming call features) is 5.1.4 Time Service
tenant’s Time Service connected.
functions and for ICD 1–16: Use the clock of the PBX
Group functions. in the One-look network with
the selected Site ID.
Extension Specifies whether the System: All system Speed Feature Manual
Directory display for the Speed Dialling numbers are References
Dialling numbers is for displayed. 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
the entire system, or Tenant: Only the extensions of Personal/System
only for the extensions the tenant group that the 5.1.3 Tenant Service
of the tenant group that extension belongs to are
the extension belongs displayed.
to.

500 PC Programming Manual

 Section 15
PBX Configuration—[7] TRS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 501

15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code

15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each
time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes
here and excepted codes in 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code. If the leading digits
of the dialled number are not found in the applicable Denied Code tables, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Level 2– Specifies the Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual References
Level 6 leading digits of toll (consisting of 0–9, 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
restricted numbers *, #, and X) Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS
for each level. Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception
Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

502 PC Programming Manual

 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code

15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception

Code
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each
time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes in
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code and excepted codes here. A call denied by the
applicable Denied Code tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code tables, and if a match is
found, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Level 2– Specifies the leading Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual References
Level 6 digits of the numbers to (consisting of 0–9, 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
be exempted from toll *, #, and X) Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS
restriction/call barring Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
for each level. 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied
Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

PC Programming Manual 503

15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special

Carrier
If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each
time a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/
Call Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the
telephone number only. If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will
look only at the following digits.
A maximum of 100 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Special Specifies a Special Carrier Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Carrier Access Code. Special Carrier (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Access Access Codes and Host PBX and #) 2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access
Code Access codes should be Code
unique. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call
Barring (Barring)

504 PC Programming Manual

 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial

15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency

Dial
Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The
restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—
Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Emergency Specifies the numbers used for Max. 32 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number making emergency calls. It is not of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], P References
necessary to start the emergency [Pause], and F [Flash]) 2.5.4.2 Emergency
number with a Trunk Access Call
number.

PC Programming Manual 505

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—

Miscellaneous
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The
following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or
switch between TRS/Barring methods.
Name Description Value Range Links
TRS Override Enables an outgoing trunk call Disable, Enable PC Programming
by System to override TRS/Barring when Manual References
Speed Dialling the call is made using System 14.1 PBX Configuration—
Speed Dialling. [6-1] Feature—System
Speed Dial
Feature Manual
References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/
Call Barring (Barring)
TRS Check for Enables a TRS/Barring check No Check, Check Feature Manual
Dial " * # " for the user-dialled " " and References
"#". This is useful in 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/
preventing unauthorised calls Call Barring (Barring)
which could possibly be made
through certain telephone
company exchanges.
Mode when Selects whether a trunk is Disconnect: The trunk PC Programming
Dial Time-out disconnected if the TRS/ is disconnected as Manual References
before TRS Barring check has not been soon as the timer 10.3 PBX Configuration—
Check completed when the trunk expires. [2-3] System—Timers &
Inter-digit timer expires. Keep: The TRS/Barring Counters
check is performed
when the timer expires. Feature Manual
References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/
Call Barring (Barring)
Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed None, 1–7 Feature Manual
Limitation on the number of digits which References
After can be dialled after an 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/
Answering— extension user receives a Call Barring (Barring)
Dial Digits trunk call. If the number of 2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
dialled digits exceeds the
programmed limit, the line will
be disconnected.
TRS Check Enables TRS/Barring to check Disable, Enable Feature Manual
after EFA the digits dialled after External References
Feature Access (EFA) during 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/
a trunk call. Call Barring (Barring)
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)

506 PC Programming Manual

 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

TRS Table Selects the method of TRS/ Deny Table 2_N + Feature Manual
Mode for Level Barring to be used for Except Table N_6: The References
N (N=2_6) restricting calls. The level of Denied Code Tables for 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/
TRS/Barring is determined by the higher levels are Call Barring (Barring)
the telephone codes set in the applied to all levels
Denied Code Tables and below it, and the
Exception Code Tables. Exception Code Tables
for the lower levels are
applied to all levels
above it.
Deny Table N + Except
Table N: Each level has
its own separate set of
denied codes and
exception codes, which
are only applied to that
level.

PC Programming Manual 507

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

508 PC Programming Manual

 Section 16
PBX Configuration—[8] ARS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 509

16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting

16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System

Setting
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is
made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in
order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
Name Description Value Range Links
ARS Mode Selects the condition to Off: ARS is disabled. Feature Manual
determine when to On for Local Access Operation: References
operate ARS. ARS operates when an extension 2.5.5.3 Trunk
user makes a call using Idle Line Access
Access method. 2.8.1 Automatic
On for Any CO Access Operation: Route Selection
ARS operates when an extension (ARS)
user makes a call using Idle Line
Access, Trunk Access, or S-CO
Line Access method.
Mode When Selects what happens Disconnect: the line will be Feature Manual
Any Carrier is when the dialled number disconnected. References
not programmed is not found in Leading Local Access: the dialled number 2.8.1 Automatic
for the Dial Number in 16.2 PBX will be handled by Idle Line Access Route Selection
Configuration—[8-2] method. (ARS)
ARS—Leading
Number.

510 PC Programming Manual

 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number

16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading

Number
Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS
feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can
select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number. The additional
(remaining) number of digits must be specified only when "#", for example, is needed after the dialled
number. The "#" will be added after the programmed number of digits of the user-dialled number (excluding
the leading number).
100 leading numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of leading numbers, click the applicable
tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Number number. (consisting of 0–9, *, References
#, and X) 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Additional Specifies the additional 0–15 Feature Manual
Number of (remaining) number of digits References
Digits following each leading 2.8.1 Automatic Route
number. Selection (ARS)
Routing Plan Specifies the Routing Plan 1–48 Feature Manual
Number Table number used for each References
leading number. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 511

16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time

16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan

Time
The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There
are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired
Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
• To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—

Time Setting
The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for
the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Time-A–D— Enables the setting of the start time for each time Disable, Feature Manual
Setting block. Enable References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Time-A–D— Specifies the start time for each time block. 00:00– Feature Manual
Hour, 23:59 References
Minute Note
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Time-A must be the earliest block in the day, Selection (ARS)
and the following blocks must be set in
chronological order.

Correct programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 17:00
Time-C: 21:00

Incorrect programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 13:00
Time-C: 11:30
Time-D: 17:00

512 PC Programming Manual

 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority

16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan

Priority
The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day
of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired
day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Time-A–Time- Specifies the carrier to be given None, 1–128 Feature Manual References
D priority for each time zone. 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection
(ARS)

PC Programming Manual 513

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

Carrier
It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A
maximum of 128 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.
Name Description Value Range Links
Carrier Name Specifies the carrier name. Max. 20 Feature Manual
characters References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Removed Specifies the number of leading digits to 0–15 Feature Manual
Number of remove from the user-dialled number. References
Digits 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Modify Specifies the commands to modify the Max. 16 Feature Manual
Command user-dialled number to access the carrier. characters References
For details of each command, see the (consisting of 0–9, 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Feature Manual. *, #, C, P, A, G, I Selection (ARS)
and H)
CLIP Table Sets the CLIP numbers established for 1–8 Feature Manual
No. each extension (wired/wireless) of a References
carrier. The CLIP IDs for each CLIP 2.8.1 Automatic Route
number are set in 12.1.7 PBX Selection (ARS)
Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—
Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table and
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5]
Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID
Table.
Carrier Specifies the carrier access code. The Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Access Code carrier access code can be added to the (consisting of 0–9, References
user-dialled number by specifying "C" in *, #, and P 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Modify Command on this screen. [Pause]) Selection (ARS)

TRG Priority
Selects the order in which trunk groups are seized when making calls via each carrier.
Name Description Value Range Links
Trunk Group— Specifies which trunk group is None, 1–96 Feature Manual
Priority 1–Priority seized in the order of priority 1 to References
4 priority 4. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

TRG 01–TRG 96
Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier.

514 PC Programming Manual

 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

Name Description Value Range Links

TRG 01– Enables each trunk group for each carrier. OFF (white), Feature Manual
TRG 96 If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk ON (blue) References
group is enabled for use with that carrier. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

Authorisation Code for Tenant

Specifies an Authorisation code for each tenant. The Authorisation codes can be added to the user-dialled
number by specifying "A" command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Authorisation Specifies the Authorisation code of each Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Code for Tenant carrier for each tenant. (consisting of References
—Tenant 1– 0–9, *, and #) 2.8.1 Automatic
Tenant 32/Tenant Note
Route Selection
128 The maximum number of tenants (ARS)
depends on the System Capacity 5.1.3 Tenant
Selection setting made when the Easy Service
Setup Wizard was run for the PBX. If the
System Resource Type was selected,
the maximum number of tenants is 128. If
the Standard Type or IP-Extension
Type was selected, the maximum number
of tenants is 32. For details, refer to
"5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard" in the
Installation Manual.

PC Programming Manual 515

16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception

16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading

Number Exception
Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled
number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access
method if ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
A maximum of 200 different leading number exceptions can be programmed. 20 leading number exception
entries are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other sets, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading Max. 16 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number number exception. 0–9, *, #, and X) References
Exception 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

516 PC Programming Manual

 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG

16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation

Code for TRG
An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be
added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of
screen 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier.
8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
TRG—TRG Specifies the Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
01–TRG 96 Authorisation code of (consisting of 0–9, *, References
each carrier for each and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—
trunk group. Carrier—Carrier—Modify Command
Feature Manual References
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 517

16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG

518 PC Programming Manual

 Section 17
PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 519

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—

TIE Table
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations.
A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make
unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to
be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
There are two types of routing methods: the Extension Number Method, where all extensions in the network
are given a unique extension number; and the PBX Code Method, where each PBX is given a unique code,
which is dialled before the extension number to call an extension at another PBX.
Two priority sets (from a total of 8) are displayed at a time. To display other priority sets, click the applicable
tab.
Using a private network, up to 8 PBXs can share one voice mail system (centralised VM) connected to
another PBX. This can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network.
Name Description Value Range Links
Own PBX Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX, Max. 7 digits Feature Manual
Code when using PBX Code Method numbering (consisting of 0–9) References
on a TIE line network. If this cell is left 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
empty, the Extension Number Method is
used.

Priority 1–Priority 8
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading number for Max. 3 digits Feature Manual
Number other PBX extension numbers or the (consisting of 0–9, *, References
PBX code of others in the TIE line and #) 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
network.
Removed Specifies the number of leading 0–15 Feature Manual
Number of digits of the dialled number to be References
Digits removed for each priority. 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Added Specifies the number to be added to Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Number the dialled number in place of the (consisting of 0–9, *, References
removed digits for each priority. #, and P [Pause]) 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group to be used None, 1–96 Feature Manual
for TIE line calls for each priority. References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Enhanced QSIG
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading number for other Max. 3 digits Feature Manual
Number PBX extension numbers or the PBX (consisting of 0–9, References
code of other PBXs in the TIE line *, and #) 4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced
network. Features

520 PC Programming Manual

 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Enhanced QSIG Enables Network Message Waiting Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Call Information information to be sent from the PBX to References
(Activation Key which the voice mail system is 4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced
Required) attached to extensions connected to Features
other PBXs in the network.

PC Programming Manual 521

17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission

17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—

Network Data Transmission
Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting
notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed.
Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a
Network DSS (NDSS) button. Network Message Waiting notifications are used for the Centralised VM
feature, and a voice mail system can send notifications to extensions connected to any PBX in the network.
Name Description Value Range Links
Network Data Specifies the Network ID of the 0: The PBX Feature Manual
Transmission for PBX, for Network Direct retransmits References
Centralised Station Selection (NDSS). This BLF data sent 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Operator Feature— parameter must be set in by other Selection (NDSS)
Network PBX ID correspondence with the PBXs.
Network IDs assigned to other 1: The PBX
PBXs in the network. receives BLF
Network IDs 1-8 can only be data sent by
assigned to one PBX each other PBXs.
within a network. Assigning the 2–8: The PBX
same Network ID to two PBXs transmits BLF
will cause network data data over the
transmission problems. network.
Changing this value in On-line
mode will automatically clear
any NDSS Link Data.
Network Data Selects whether to re-send Disable, PC Programming Manual
Transmission for BLF data received from a VoIP Enable References
Centralised port through any ISDN ports 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Operator Feature— that are set to transmit BLF Configuration—Slot—Port
Data Transmission data. Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO
VoIP->ISDN —Networking Data Transfer
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—CO
Setting—Networking Data
Transfer
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

522 PC Programming Manual

 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Name Description Value Range Links

Network Data Selects whether to re-send Disable, PC Programming Manual
Transmission for BLF data received from an Enable References
Centralised ISDN port through any VoIP 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3]
Operator Feature— ports that are set to transmit Private Network—Network
Data Transmission BLF data. Operator (VoIP)—IP-GW Card
ISDN->VoIP Slot No. to notify BLF data to
Network Operator
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Network Data Specifies the maximum 1–63 Feature Manual
Transmission for number of "hops", or References
Centralised transmissions between two 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Operator Feature— PBXs, before a packet of BLF Selection (NDSS)
Data Transmission data is discarded.
Counter
Network Data Specifies the frequency of BLF 100 × n (n=0– Feature Manual
Transmission for data transmission. The PBX 30) ms References
Centralised will send data over the network 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Operator Feature— periodically according to the Selection (NDSS)
Data Broadcasting interval specified here.
Interval Timer
Network MSW Data Specifies the number of times 0–10 PC Programming Manual
Transmission for re-transmission of network References
Centralised VM message waiting notifications 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
Feature—Data Re- is repeated before being Private Network—TIE Table—
transmission: cancelled. Enhanced QSIG Call
Repeat Counter Information (Activation Key
Required)
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
Network MSW Data Specifies the length of time 10–240 s PC Programming Manual
Transmission for between repeated re- References
Centralised VM transmission of network 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
Feature—Data Re- message waiting notifications. Private Network—TIE Table—
transmission: Enhanced QSIG Call
Repeat Timer Information (Activation Key
Required)
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

PC Programming Manual 523

17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)

17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—

Network Operator (VoIP)
This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote
PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on
this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored (Network Data Transmission for
Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8). Up to 8 network operators can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Network Specifies the number of an Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Operator extension at the monitor PBX (the (consisting of References
Extension PBX whose Network Data 0–9, *, and #) 17.2 PBX Configuration—
No. Transmission for Centralised [9-2] Private Network—
Operator Feature—Network PBX Network Data Transmission—
ID is set to 1 in 17.2 PBX Network Data Transmission
Configuration—[9-2] Private for Centralised Operator
Network—Network Data Feature—Network PBX ID
Transmission). Any extension at the
monitor PBX can be specified here. Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Site Specifies the PBX in the One-look Site name in
network where the V-IPGW16 card is the One-look
installed for sending extension status network
data.
IP-GW Card Specifies the slot number of the card Undefined, PC Programming Manual
Slot No. to used to send extension status data. Shelf No. – Slot References
notify BLF This setting is only required when No. 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
data to using VoIP to transmit data. Configuration—Slot
Network
Operator Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

524 PC Programming Manual

 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table

17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—

NDSS Key Table
Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can
be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an
extension, the extension must be registered here first.
To clear NDSS link data, click the NDSS Clear button. The NDSS Clear button can be used only in On-line
mode.
Note that the parameters on this screen can only be set when the Network Data Transmission for
Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in the 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private
Network—Network Data Transmission screen.
Name Description Value Range Links
Network Specifies the number of the Max. 16 digits Feature Manual References
Extension No. remote extension (attached to (consisting of 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
another PBX) that will be 0–9, *, and #) 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
monitored. The number input Selection (NDSS)
here can use either Extension
Number Method or PBX Code
Method.
Network Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
Extension Name network extension. This name characters 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
for Programming is only shown here, not on the Selection (NDSS)
Reference displays of extensions.
Network PBX ID Indicates the Network Data None, 1–8 PC Programming Manual
of Network Transmission for Centralised References
Extension to be Operator Feature—Network 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2]
monitored PBX ID of the PBX that the Private Network—Network Data
extension is connected to Transmission—Network Data
(reference only). Transmission for Centralised
Operator Feature—Network
PBX ID
Feature Manual References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 525

17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit

17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—

Centralised UM/VM Unit
View and programme settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To
view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—
Extension List View).
Name Description Value Range Links
Unit No. Indicates the unit number of the UM system or VM unit, Unit No.
as assigned by the PBX (reference only).
Floating Specifies the floating extension number of the Max. 8 digits
Extension No. centralised UM or VM (VPS) group. This floating (consisting of 0–9)
(TIE) extension number must start with the number used to
access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX.
Group Name (20 Specifies the name of the centralised UM or VM (VPS) Max. 20
characters) group, which will be shown on the display of Characters
extensions that call it.

526 PC Programming Manual

 Section 18
PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 527

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call

—CO Line Settings
Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 256 trunk groups.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the type of card to which the trunk is Card type
connected (reference only).
CO Name Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the Max. 20 Feature Manual
extension’s display when receiving a call from characters References
the trunk. 2.21.4 Display
Information
Trunk Specifies the trunk group number to which the 1–96 Feature Manual
Group trunk belongs. References
Number When a V-IPGW card is installed, the value is 5.1.2 Group
automatically set to "7" for the corresponding
trunks.

528 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call

—DIL Table & Port Settings
Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as
the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to which DIL
distribution is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/
night). If desired, Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution can be used in conjunction with DIL distribution.

DIL
For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on
the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Generally, DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue
trunks. Tenant number and service group number can also be programmed for each trunk.
To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the trunk card type Card type Feature Manual
(reference only). References
2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk
Call Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Indicates the networking type Public, Private(TIE), VPN Feature Manual
Property of each trunk (reference References
only). 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk
Call Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-VPN)
Distribution Selects the distribution DIL: Distribution depends Feature Manual
Method method for incoming trunk on the trunk through which References
calls. The value range of this the calls arrive 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk
setting depends on the card DDI/DID: Distribution Call Features—SUMMARY
type and Trunk Property depends on the DDI/DID
assigned for each trunk. number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends
on the MSN of the calls
DIL Specifies the DIL destination Max. 5 digits (consisting of PC Programming
Destination— in each time mode. 0–9) Manual References
Day, Lunch, 10.6.1 PBX Configuration
Break, Night —[2-6-1] System—
Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual 529

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Tenant Specifies the tenant number, 1–32 or 1–128 Feature Manual
Number to determine the Time Table References
by which calls are distributed Note
2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
depending on the time of The maximum number 5.1.3 Tenant Service
day. of tenants depends on 5.1.4 Time Service
the System Capacity
Selection setting
made when the Easy
Setup Wizard was run
for the PBX. If the
System Resource
Type was selected, the
maximum number of
tenants is 128. If the
Standard Type or
IP-Extension Type
was selected, the
maximum number of
tenants is 32. For
details, refer to "5.4.1
Easy Setup Wizard" in
the Installation Manual.
UM Service Specifies the Service Group None, 1–64 Feature Manual
Group No. number sent to the Unified References
Messaging system when the 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
incoming call destination is 3.2.1 System Features—
the floating extension 3.2.1.40 Service Group
number of a UM group.
The Service Group number
is used to allow the Unified
Messaging system to send
the applicable greeting
message to the caller.
VM Trunk Specifies the number of the 1–48
Group No. VM trunk group sent to the
VPS when the incoming call
destination is the floating
extension number of a VM
(DPT) Group (connected to a
KX-NCP/KX-TDE series
PBX). The VM trunk group
number is used to allow the
VPS to send the applicable
greeting message to the
caller.

CLI for DIL

When CLI distribution is enabled for a trunk to which DIL distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DIL destinations) if the caller’s identification number is
found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.

530 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the trunk card Card type Feature Manual
type (reference only). References
2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Property Indicates the networking Public, Private(TIE), Feature Manual
type of each trunk VPN References
(reference only). 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-VPN)
Distribution Selects the distribution DIL: Distribution Feature Manual
Method method for incoming trunk depends on the trunk References
calls. The value range of through which the calls 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
this setting depends on arrive Features—SUMMARY
the card type and Trunk DDI/DID: Distribution
Property assigned for depends on the
each trunk. DDI/DID number of the
calls
MSN: Distribution
depends on the MSN of
the calls
CLI Ring for Enables CLI distribution in Disable, Enable Feature Manual
DIL—Day, each time mode. References
Lunch, Break, 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
Night 2.1.1.5 Calling Line
Identification (CLI) Distribution

DDI / DID / TIE / MSN

For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen
is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be
programmed.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the trunk card Card type Feature Manual References
type (reference only). 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Indicates the networking Public, Private(TIE), Feature Manual References
Property type of each trunk VPN 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
(reference only). Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-VPN)

PC Programming Manual 531

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Distribution Selects the distribution DIL: Distribution Feature Manual References
Method method for incoming trunk depends on the 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
calls. The value range of trunk through which Features—SUMMARY
this setting depends on the the calls arrive 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
card type and Trunk DDI/DID: Distribution (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Property assigned for each depends on the 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
trunk. DDI/DID number of Number (MSN) Ringing Service
the calls
MSN: Distribution
depends on the
MSN of the calls
DDI/DID/TIE/ Specifies the number of 0–15 Feature Manual References
MSN— leading digits to be 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
Remove Digit removed from the incoming (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
called number for DDI/DID 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
distribution or for TIE line Number (MSN) Ringing Service
service. 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
DDI/DID/TIE/ Specifies the number to be Max. 8 digits Feature Manual References
MSN— added to the incoming (consisting of 0–9, *, 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
Additional Dial called number in the place and #) (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
of the removed digits for 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
DDI/DID distribution or for Number (MSN) Ringing Service
TIE line service. 4.3.1 TIE Line Service

532 PC Programming Manual

 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call

—DDI / DID Table
Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID
number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will
be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification
number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table. CLI distribution
can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a DDI/DID number basis.
A maximum of 1000 DDI/DID numbers can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
To assign DDI/DID destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting). It is possible to programme DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time
mode (day/lunch/break/night) for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration, or
to programme DDI/DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate.
Name Description Value Range Links
DDI / DID Specifies the DDI/DID Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number. (consisting of 0–9, *, References
and #) 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—
[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—
DDI / DID Table—Automatic
Registration
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
DDI / DID Specifies the name for the Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name DDI/DID number which is References
shown on the extension’s 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—
display when receiving a [10-3] CO & Incoming Call—
call with the DDI/DID DDI / DID Table—Name
number. The name of the Generate
DDI/DID number can be 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
printed out on SMDR. Maintenance—Main—SMDR
Options—Option—DDI/DID
Number & Name
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

PC Programming Manual 533

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Name Description Value Range Links

DDI / DID Specifies the DDI/DID Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination— destination in each time (consisting of 0–9) References
Day, Lunch, mode. 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—
Break, Night [2-6-1] System—Numbering
Plan—Main
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—
[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—
DDI / DID Table—Automatic
Registration
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Tenant Specifies the tenant 1–32 or 1–128 PC Programming Manual
Number number, to determine the References
Time Table by which calls Note
10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
are distributed depending The maximum System—Week Table
on the time of day. number of tenants
depends on the Feature Manual References
System Capacity 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
Selection setting (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
made when the
Easy Setup Wizard
was run for the
PBX. If the
System Resource
Type was
selected, the
maximum number
of tenants is 128. If
the Standard Type
or IP-Extension
Type was
selected, the
maximum number
of tenants is 32.
For details, refer to
"5.4.1 Easy Setup
Wizard" in the
Installation
Manual.

534 PC Programming Manual

 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration

Name Description Value Range Links

UM Service Specifies the Service None, 1–64 Feature Manual References
Group No. Group number sent to the 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
Unified Messaging system (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
when the incoming call 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
destination is the floating Overview
extension number of a UM
group.
The Service Group
number is used to allow
the Unified Messaging
system to send the
applicable greeting
message to the caller.
VM Trunk Specifies the number of 1–48
Group No. the VM trunk group sent to
the VPS when the
incoming call destination is
the floating extension
number of a VM (DPT)
Group (connected to a
KX-NCP/KX-TDE series
PBX). The VM trunk group
number is used to allow
the VPS to send the
applicable greeting
message to the caller.
CLI Ring for Enables CLI distribution in Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
DDI/DID— each time mode. References
Day, Lunch, 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Break, Night Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification
(CLI) Distribution

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID

Table—Automatic Registration
Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.

PC Programming Manual 535

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate

Name Description Value Range Links

Beginning Specifies the number of the first 1–1000 PC Programming Manual
Entry Location location to be programmed. References
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Generate Specifies the DID number of the Max. 32 PC Programming Manual
DDI/DID first location to be programmed. digits References
Number DDI/DID numbers for subsequent (consisting of 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
(From) locations will be generated 0–9) CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
automatically, by adding one to Table
the value of the previous location.
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Number of Specifies the number of locations 1–1000 PC Programming Manual
Registration to be programmed. References
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Destination— Specifies the number of the Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Day, Lunch, DDI/DID destination in each time (consisting of References
Break, Night mode for the first location to be 0–9) 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
programmed. If the same CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
destination is to be used for all Table
locations for a certain time mode,
click the appropriate Same all Feature Manual References
check box. If the Same all check 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
box for a certain time mode is not (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
clicked, the destination numbers
for subsequent locations will be
generated automatically, by
adding one to the value of the
previous location for that time
mode.

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID

Table—Name Generate
Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded.

536 PC Programming Manual

 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Beginning Specifies the number of 1–1000 PC Programming Manual References
Entry the first location to be 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
Location programmed. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
Number to Specifies the number of 1–1000 PC Programming Manual References
Generate locations to be 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
programmed. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
No. of Digits Specifies the number of 0–32 PC Programming Manual References
to Delete digits to be deleted from 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
the start of a DDI/DID Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
number when using it as
part of the DDI/DID name. Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
Name Prefix Specifies the text to be Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
included at the start of characters 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
each DDI/DID name. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
Name Suffix Specifies the text to be Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
included at the end of each characters 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
DDI/DID name. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)

PC Programming Manual 537

18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming

Call—MSN Table
Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be
distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/
lunch/break/night).
A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port.
To use this feature, Access Mode in 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property
- BRI Port must be set to P-MP.

MSN
To assign MSN destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Site Indicates the site number of 1– 16
the PBX in the One-look
network (reference only).
Shelf Indicates the shelf type 1 (Physical), Virtual
and/or position (reference
only).
Slot Indicates the slot position of Slot number
the BRI card that is set to
MSN distribution (reference
only).
Port Indicates the port number of Port number
the BRI card that is set to
MSN distribution (reference
only).
MSN Specifies the MSN. Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Number (consisting of 0–9, *, References
and #) 9.27 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
Number (MSN) Ringing
Service

538 PC Programming Manual

 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Name Description Value Range Links

MSN Name Specifies the name for the Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
MSN which is shown on the References
extension’s display when 9.27 PBX Configuration—
receiving a call with the MSN. [1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
Number (MSN) Ringing
Service
MSN Specifies the MSN Max. 5 digits (consisting PC Programming Manual
Destination destination in each time of 0–9) References
—Day, mode. 9.27 PBX Configuration—
Lunch, [1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Break, Night Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
Number (MSN) Ringing
Service
Tenant Specifies the tenant number, 1–32 or 1–128 PC Programming Manual
Number to determine the Time Table References
by which calls are distributed Note
9.27 PBX Configuration—
depending on the time of day. The maximum [1-1] Configuration—Slot—
number of tenants Port Property - BRI Port
depends on the 10.4 PBX Configuration—
System Capacity [2-4] System—Week Table
Selection setting
made when the Feature Manual
Easy Setup Wizard References
was run for the 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
PBX. If the System Number (MSN) Ringing
Resource Type Service
was selected, the
maximum number
of tenants is 128. If
the Standard Type
or IP-Extension
Type was selected,
the maximum
number of tenants
is 32. For details,
refer to "5.4.1 Easy
Setup Wizard" in
the Installation
Manual.

PC Programming Manual 539

18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Name Description Value Range Links

UM Service Specifies the Service Group None, 1–64 PC Programming Manual
Group No. number sent to the Unified References
Messaging system when the 9.27 PBX Configuration—
incoming call destination is [1-1] Configuration—Slot—
the floating extension number Port Property - BRI Port
of a UM group.
The Service Group number is Feature Manual
used to allow the Unified References
Messaging system to send 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
the applicable greeting Number (MSN) Ringing
message to the caller. Service
VM Trunk Specifies the number of the 1–48
Group No. VM trunk group sent to the
VPS when the incoming call
destination is the floating
extension number of a VM
(DPT) Group (connected to a
KX-NCP/KX-TDE series
PBX). The VM trunk group
number is used to allow the
VPS to send the applicable
greeting message to the
caller.

CLI for MSN

When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls
will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller’s identification
number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.
Name Description Value Range Links
Site Indicates the site number of the PBX 1– 16
in the One-look network (reference
only).
Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or 1 (Physical),
position (reference only). Virtual
Slot Indicates the slot position of the BRI Slot number
card that is set to MSN distribution
(reference only).
Port Indicates the port number of the BRI Port number
card that is set to MSN distribution
(reference only).

540 PC Programming Manual

 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Name Description Value Range Links

CLI Ring for Enables CLI distribution in each time Disable, PC Programming Manual
MSN—Day, mode. Enable References
Lunch, 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Break, Configuration—Slot—Port
Night Property - BRI Port
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
Number (MSN) Ringing Service
2.1.1.5 Calling Line
Identification (CLI) Distribution

PC Programming Manual 541

18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call

—Miscellaneous
The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when
there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination.
Name Description Value Range Links
Intercept—Intercept Enables the Intercept Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a Feature Manual
Routing - DND Routing—DND feature busy tone to the caller. References
(Destination sets to activate when the (However, a call through an 2.1.1.6 Intercept
DND.) original destination is in LCOT card will ring at the Routing
DND mode. original destination while the 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb
caller hears a ringback tone.) (DND)
Enable: Redirects the call to
the intercept destination
Intercept—Routing to Enables the Intercept Disable (Reorder Tone): Feature Manual
Operator - No Routing—No Sends a reorder tone to the References
Destination Destination feature to caller. (However, a call 2.1.1.7 Intercept
(Destination is not activate when there is through an LCOT card will ring Routing—No
programmed.) no destination for the at the original destination Destination
call. while the caller hears a
ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to
an operator
Intercept—Intercept Enables the Intercept Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Routing for Routing feature to References
Extension Call operate for extension 2.1.1.7 Intercept
calls. Routing—No
Destination

542 PC Programming Manual

 Section 19
PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 543

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and
outgoing calls.
Name Description Value Range Links
SMDR Format— Selects the format of Type A: 80 digits Feature Manual References
Type SMDR output. without call charge 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
information Recording (SMDR)
Type B: 80 digits
with call charge
information
Type C: 120 digits
SMDR Format— Selects the Serial Interface None, Feature Manual References
Port port that is used to output LAN(TELNET), 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
the SMDR data. RS-232C Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format— Specifies the number of No Print, 4–99 Feature Manual References
Page Length lines on a page of output 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
(Number of paper. Match the SMDR Recording (SMDR)
Lines) output to the paper size
being used in the printer.
SMDR Format— Specifies the number of 0–95 Feature Manual References
Blank Footer lines to be skipped at the 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Length (Number end of every page. The Recording (SMDR)
of Lines) number of lines for the skip
perforation should be
shorter than the page
length.
SMDR Format— Selects the printed date MM-DD-YY, DD- Feature Manual References
Date Format format. MM-YY, YY-MM- 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
DD, YY-DD-MM Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format— Selects whether times are 12H, 24H Feature Manual References
Time Format displayed using the 12- or 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
(12H / 24H) 24-hour format. Recording (SMDR)
Print Information Specifies whether the No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
—Outgoing Call dialled digits of outgoing References
trunk calls are printed. 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
Class of Service (COS) [2-7-1] System—Class of
programming determines Service—COS Settings—CO &
the printable records. SMDR—Outgoing CO Call
Printout (SMDR)
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)

544 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Print Information Specifies whether the No Print, Print Feature Manual References
—Incoming Call information relating to 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
incoming trunk calls, such Recording (SMDR)
as caller’s identification
name and number, is
printed.
Print Information Specifies whether the No Print, Print Feature Manual References
—Intercom Call dialled digits of outgoing 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
intercom calls are printed. Recording (SMDR)
Print Information Specifies whether the log- No Print, Print Feature Manual References
—Log-in / Log- in/log-out status is printed. 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
out 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
Print Information Selects whether check-in No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
—Hotel Room and check-out data is References
Status output on SMDR. 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
Feature—Hotel & Charge
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control
Print Information Selects whether Timed No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
—Timed Reminder data is output on References
Reminder SMDR. 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
(Wake-up Call) Feature—Hotel & Charge
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.24.4 Timed Reminder
Print Information Specifies whether PBX No Print, Print Feature Manual References
—Error Log error log information is 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
output to SMDR. Recording (SMDR)
5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

PC Programming Manual 545

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

SMDR Options
Name Description Value Range Links
Option—ARS Selects the type of the dialled Dial before ARS Feature Manual
Dial number to be printed for a call Modification: The References
with the ARS feature. user-dialled number 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access
Dial after ARS Code (Access Code to the
Modification: The Telephone Company from a
ARS modified Host PBX)
number 2.8 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Features
2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Caller Selects the printing format of None, Number, Feature Manual
ID Number & caller identifications for Name, Name + References
Name incoming trunk calls. Number 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option— Selects the printing format of None, Number, Feature Manual
DDI/DID incoming trunk calls with a Name, Name + References
Number & DDI/DID number. Number 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Name Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Secret Selects the printing format of Print "...." (Secret), Feature Manual
Dial calls with a secret dial. The Print Dialled References
secret dial conceals all or part Number 2.6.1 Memory Dialling
of the dialled number. Note Features—SUMMARY
that selecting Dial before ARS 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Modification in Option—ARS Detail Recording (SMDR)
Dial on this screen indicates
the dialled numbers as dots
regardless of this setting.
Option— Selects whether private Print Dialled PC Programming
Privacy Mode dialling is enabled or disabled, Number: Disables Manual References
and how many digits to hide private dialling; all 19.1 PBX Configuration—
when enabled. dialled numbers are [11-1] Maintenance—Main—
To enable this setting, Print shown on SMDR. SMDR—Print Information—
Information—Outgoing Call No Print: No dialled Outgoing Call
on the SMDR tab should be number will be
set to Print. shown on SMDR. Feature Manual
Print "X", Print "XX", References
Print "XXX", Print 2.22.1.1 Station Message
"XXXX": The Detail Recording (SMDR)
selected number of
digits at the end of
dialled telephone
numbers, and any
additional digits
dialled after
connection, are
shown on SMDR as
"X".

546 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Option— Specifies whether the time of No Print, Print Feature Manual
Condition Code receiving an incoming trunk References
"RC" call is printed. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option— Specifies whether the time of No Print, Print Feature Manual
Condition Code answering an incoming trunk References
"AN" call is printed. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Caller Specifies whether Caller ID Before Modification, PC Programming
ID Modification numbers are recorded on After Modification Manual References
SMDR as received (before 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—
being modified by the PBX) or [3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group
after being modified. —Caller ID Modification
Feature Manual
References
2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Emergency Call Specifies if an emergency call End of Call, Start Feature Manual
Notification is recorded on SMDR only and End of Call References
when the call is completed, or 2.22.1.1 Station Message
when the call is initially dialled Detail Recording (SMDR)
as well.
LAN—SMDR Specifies the port number 1–65535 Feature Manual
Port Number used to output SMDR data via References
the LAN. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
LAN—SMDR Specifies the password used Max. 10 characters Feature Manual
Password to output the SMDR data via References
the LAN. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
LAN—New Line Specifies the new line code for CR + LF, CR Feature Manual
Code for Telnet a terminal emulator. References
If the terminal emulator 2.22.1.1 Station Message
automatically feeds lines with Detail Recording (SMDR)
a carriage return, select CR
(Carriage Return).
If not, select CR + LF (Line
Feed).

PC Programming Manual 547

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

RS-232C
Name Description Value Range Links
Communication— Specifies the data transmission speed 2400 bps, PC Programming
Baud Rate from the PBX to the printer or personal 4800 bps, Manual References
computer. 9600 bps, 19.1 PBX
To ensure stable transmission, when 19200 bps, Configuration—[11-1]
changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 38400 bps, Maintenance—Main—
bps, set Communication—Flow on this 57600 bps, RS-232C—
screen to Hardware. 115200 bps Communication—Flow
Feature Manual
References
2.22.1.1 Station
Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
Communication— Selects a parity bit code that indicates None, Mark, Feature Manual
Parity Bit what type of parity is used to detect an Space, Even, References
error in the string of bits composing a Odd 2.22.1.1 Station
character. Message Detail
Make an appropriate selection depending Recording (SMDR)
on the requirements of the printer or
personal computer.
Communication— Enables the hardware flow control. None,
Flow Hardware
Communication— Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the CR + LF, CR Feature Manual
NL Code printer or personal computer. References
If the printer or personal computer 2.22.1.1 Station
automatically feeds lines with a carriage Message Detail
return, select CR (Carriage Return). If not, Recording (SMDR)
select CR + LF (Line Feed).
Communication— Specifies the number of bits in each byte 7 bit, 8 bit Feature Manual
Word Length of a character. References
When connecting the Maintenance 2.22.1.1 Station
Console to the PBX using an RS-232C Message Detail
cable, assign the following values to the Recording (SMDR)
Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the
PBX:
Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: None,
Stop Bit: 1 bit

Notice
Do not use the following
combinations:
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit:
Space, Stop Bit: 1 bit
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit:
Mark, Stop Bit: 2 bit
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit:
Space, Stop Bit: 2 bit

548 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Communication— Selects a stop bit code that indicates the 1 bit, 2 bit Feature Manual
Stop Bit end of a bit string which composes a References
character. 2.22.1.1 Station
Select an appropriate value depending on Message Detail
the requirements of the printer or personal Recording (SMDR)
computer.
External Modem Specifies the command to automatically Max. 30
Command— initialise an external modem when it is characters
Automatic plugged into the Serial Interface
Initialisation (RS-232C) port of the PBX.

Maintenance
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Local Alarm Specifies the extension numbers of Max. 5 Feature Manual
Display— PTs that will be notified by the PBX digits References
Extension 1, about local alarms. When the PBX (consisting 5.6.4 Local Alarm
Extension 2 detects a PBX error, the System of 0–9) Information
Alarm button on the PT turns on red.
When this button is pressed, the
display will show the error number,
and the button light will turn off
automatically.
Daily Test Start Enables the daily self check of the Disable, Feature Manual
Time—Set PBX for local alarm and error log. Enable References
5.6.4 Local Alarm
Information
Daily Test Start Specifies the hour of the PBX daily 0–23 Feature Manual
Time—Hour self check start time. References
5.6.4 Local Alarm
Information
Daily Test Start Specifies the minute of the PBX daily 0–59 Feature Manual
Time—Minute self check start time. References
5.6.4 Local Alarm
Information
Error Log for UM Enables error information to be Disable, PC Programming
Port Busy— logged in the PBX if UM ports were Enable Manual References
Detection of All all busy specified in Detection of All 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
UM Port Busy UM Port Busy. This item is recorded
by Syslog. If this Log is frequently
recorded in your customer, it
indicates insufficiency of UM port.
Recommend to purchase Activation
Keys for expand UM port.

PC Programming Manual 549

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Error Log for UM Enables error information to be 3-300 (sec) PC Programming
Port Busy— logged in the PBX if UM ports were Manual References
Detection Busy all busy time specified in Detection 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
Threshold Time Busy Threshold Time. This item is
recorded by Syslog. If this Log is
frequently recorded in your customer,
it indicates insufficiency of UM port.
Recommend to purchase Activation
Keys for expand UM port.
Error Log for Enables error information to be Disable, PC Programming
Centralised VM— logged in the PBX if network Enable Manual References
Network MSW message waiting information is 17.1 PBX Configuration—
Transmission deleted after re-transmission is [9-1] Private Network—TIE
(Counter) repeated for the number of times Table—Enhanced QSIG
specified in Network MSW Data Call Information (Activation
Transmission for Centralised VM Key Required)
Feature—Data Re-transmission: 17.2 PBX Configuration—
Repeat Counter in 17.2 PBX [9-2] Private Network—
Configuration—[9-2] Private Network Data Transmission
Network—Network Data —Network MSW Data
Transmission. Transmission for
Centralised VM Feature—
Data Re-transmission:
Repeat Counter
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice
Mail
Error Log for Enables error information to be Disable, PC Programming
Centralised VM— logged in the PBX if the quantity of Enable Manual References
Network MSW network message waiting information 17.1 PBX Configuration—
Transmission being re-transmitted is larger than the [9-1] Private Network—TIE
(Buffer) transmission buffer. Table—Enhanced QSIG
Call Information (Activation
Key Required)
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice
Mail

Password
Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer.

550 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Manager Password - Specifies the manager 4–10 digits (consisting Feature Manual
PT Programming— password to authorise the of 0–9, *, and #) References
Prog *1 PT user to access manager 5.1.6 Manager
programming. Features

PC Programming Manual 551

19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation

19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation
19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
You can programme and view settings for Air Synchronisation Groups.
Select an Air Synchronisation Group (1-16) to programme from the Air Synchronisation Group Number
drop-down list.
It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the air synchronisation group.
Click Sort to reorder CSs with traditional CSs first, followed by IP-CSs.
To open the screen described in 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group, click
CS Status Monitor.
Air Synchronisation Groups can be programmed only in On-line mode.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
CSs connected to legacy gateways can be used together with IP-CSs connected to the KX-NS1000
system. CSs connected to legacy gateways must be registered to Air Synchronisation Group Number 1.
Do not register CSs connected to legacy gateways to any other Air Synchronisation Group Number.

Adding CSs
Follow the steps below to add CSs to the air synchronisation group.
1. Connect the CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Add.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition.
4. Click OK.

Deleting CSs
Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the air synchronisation group.
1. Click Delete.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Air Synchronisation Select the air synchronisation group to 1–16
Group Number programme.
Index Indicates the CS number (reference only). 1–16
CS Name Indicates the name of the CS (reference Max. 20 characters
only).

552 PC Programming Manual

 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain CS is -, Registered
registered (reference only).
CS Class Specifies the classification of each CS. Sync Master CS1, Sync
This parameter can only be modified Master CS2, Sync Slave
when Connection on this screen is set to CS
OUS.
Primary CS—Index Specifies the number of the primary CS. 1–16
Primary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary Slot number
CS (reference only).
Primary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the primary Port number
CS (reference only).
Primary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the primary CS Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
Secondary CS—Index Specifies the number of the secondary 1–16
CS.
Secondary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the Slot number
secondary CS (reference only).
Secondary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the Port number
secondary CS (reference only).
Secondary CS—CS Indicates the name of the secondary CS Max. 20 characters
Name (reference only).

19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
You can programme and view settings for LAN Synchronisation Groups.
Select a LAN Synchronisation Group (1-16) to programme from the LAN Synchronisation Group Number
drop-down list.
It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the LAN synchronisation group.
Click Sort to reorder CSs.
To open the screen described in 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group,
click CS Status Monitor.
LAN Synchronisation Groups can be programmed only in On-line mode.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
Only KX-NS0154 IP-CSs can be added to a LAN synchronisation group.

PC Programming Manual 553

19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation

Adding CSs
Follow the steps below to add CSs to the LAN synchronisation group.
1. Connect the CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Add.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition.
4. Click OK.

Deleting CSs
Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the LAN synchronisation group.
1. Click Delete.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Select the LAN synchronisation 1–16 PC
Synchronisation group to programme. Programming
Group Number Manual
Note References
You must specify a LAN
19.2.1 PBX
synchronisation group number
Configuration—
or an air synchronisation
[11-2-1]
group number for each IP-CS.
Maintenance—
Do not leave both of these
CS
settings unspecified.
Synchronisation
—Air
Synchronisation
—Air
Synchronisation
Group Number
IP Address for Specifies the IP address for the 239.0.0.0–
Group Control group. This is the same value 239.255.255.255
specified in Group Control
Setting—IP Address for Group
Control in 19.2.3 PBX
Configuration—[11-2-3]
Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—LAN Sync
Group Setting.
Index Indicates the CS number 1–64
(reference only).
CS Name Indicates the name of the CS Max. 20 characters
(reference only).

554 PC Programming Manual

 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, click OUS: The port is out of
the desired cell in the column, and service.
then select INS or OUS for the Fault: The port is not
port. communicating with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain CS is -, Registered
registered (reference only).
CS Class Specifies the classification of each Sync Master CS1, Sync
CS. This parameter can only be Master CS2-1, Sync
modified when Connection on Master CS2-2, Sync Slave
this screen is set to OUS.
Note
Sync Master CS1 ,
Sync Master CS2-1,
and Sync Master
CS2-2 can each be
assigned to only 1
IP-CS in the same
LAN synchronisation
group.
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
IP-CS (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Current IP Indicates the current IP address of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Address the IP-CS (reference only).

19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting
You can programme the settings for a LAN synchronisation group.
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Synchronisation Group Select the LAN synchronisation 1–16
Number group to programme.
Group Control Setting—Type of Select the method for performing Multicast, Broadcast
Control Packet LAN synchronisation.
Group Control Setting—IP Specifies the IP address for the 239.0.0.0–
Address for Group Control group. 239.255.255.255
If Broadcast is selected for Group
Control Setting—Type of Control
Packet, this setting is greyed out.
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the threshold for 0–8192 ns
Level of Synchronisation establishing LAN synchronisation.
Establish (ns)
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the limit for determining 0–8192 ns
Limit level of Synchronisation synchronisation holding.
holding (ns)

PC Programming Manual 555

19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the maximum duration for 0–256 s
Maximum duration of synchronisation holding.
Synchronisation holding (s)
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the level at which re- 0–32768 ns
Level of Synchronisations Lost synchronisation is performed.
and Restart (ns)
Synchronisation Monitoring Specifies the number of hours 2–168 hours
Report Setting—Long Term between performing in-operation
Diagnosis Monitoring timer (h) monitoring (long term).

556 PC Programming Manual

 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer

19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—

Power Failure Transfer
Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
For information about programming Power Failure Transfer settings, refer to the corresponding
Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway
PBX. The following programming items are specific to the KX-NS1000 Web Maintenance Console.
Using the Site selection drop-down list, select the site where the legacy gateway PBX is connected, and
then programme the settings.
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf Specifies the legacy gateway PBX shelf 2: Legacy- PC Programming
(reference only). GW1 Manual References
3: Legacy- 9.29 PBX Configuration
GW2 —[1-1] Configuration—
Slot—Legacy-GW1/
Legacy-GW2
PFT Card Specifies the position of the card(s) with Pair - 1–Pair -
Position power failure transfer ports (reference only). 12

Note
The number of available PFT cards and
PFT ports depends on the model of the
legacy gateway PBX. For details, refer to
the documentation for the legacy gateway
PBX.

PC Programming Manual 557

19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer

558 PC Programming Manual

 Section 20
UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 559

20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

A maximum of 1022 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a
telephone to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using
Web Maintenance Console. Each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber.
Click each tab on the Mailbox Settings screen to specify the desired parameters.

Adding Mailboxes
1. Click the icon.
2. Edit each parameter in the "Mailbox" dialogue box.
3. Click OK.
A range of mailboxes can be added that use the default mailbox settings.
1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the range of mailboxes to add in From and To. Check Use the same number for Mailbox
and Extension to assign each mailbox to the same number extension.
3. Enter the number of mailboxes to create in Number Of Mailboxes:. To edit the default settings to be
used for each new mailbox, click Edit Default Mailboxes and make changes as necessary.
4. When all settings have been made, click OK to create the range of mailboxes.

Editing Mailboxes
To edit a specific mailbox, select the desired mailbox, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Settings screen.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select a mailbox.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click OK.

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting

With Quick Settings, you can set the necessary minimum settings for Unified Messaging mailboxes. This
setting is available at the User (Administrator) level.
Name Description Value Range Links
Mailbox Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox 2–[the value PC Programming Manual
Number number. The maximum number of digits set in References
that can be used for mailbox numbers is Mailbox No. 10.9 PBX Configuration—
set in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] Max. Length [2-9] System—System
System Parameters—Parameters— (3-8)] digits Options—Option 9
Mailbox—Mailbox No. Max. Length
(3-8), or when you initialise the system. Feature Manual
References
Note 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
The mailbox number can only be set System Overview
when adding a mailbox; when editing 3.2.2 Subscriber Features—
a mailbox, you cannot change the 3.2.2.20 Mailbox
assigned mailbox number.

560 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number of the 2–8 digits PC Programming Manual
mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension References
number including an Extension Group 10.9 PBX Configuration—
number can be assigned. [2-9] System—System
Options—Option 9
Note
If an Extension Group number is Feature Manual
assigned to a mailbox, all group References
members are able to access the 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
messages stored in the mailbox. System Overview
3.2.2 Subscriber Features—
3.2.2.20 Mailbox
First Name Specifies the first name of the subscriber. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
If there are non-alphabetical characters in characters References
the first 4 letters of the first name, the 21.1 UM Configuration—[2]
mailbox is not included in the directory. Class of Service—Directory
Listing
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name
Last Name Specifies the last name of the subscriber. Max. 20
If there are non-alphabetical characters in characters
the first 4 letters of the first name, the
mailbox is not included in the directory.

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Mailbox Parameters
Name Description Value Range Links
Mailbox Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox 2–[the value set in PC Programming
Number number. The maximum number of Mailbox No. Max. Length Manual
digits that can be used for mailbox (3-8)] digits References
numbers is set in 24.4 UM
10.9 PBX
Configuration—[5-4] System
Configuration—[2-9]
Parameters—Parameters—
System—System
Mailbox—Mailbox No. Max.
Options—Option 9
Length (3-8), or when you initialise
the system. Feature Manual
References
Note
3.1.1 Unified
The mailbox number can only Messaging System
be set when adding a mailbox; Overview
when editing a mailbox, you 3.2.2 Subscriber
cannot change the assigned Features—3.2.2.20
mailbox number. Mailbox

PC Programming Manual 561

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number of 2–8 digits PC Programming
the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid Manual
extension number including an References
Extension Group number can be
10.9 PBX
assigned.
Configuration—[2-9]
Note System—System
Options—Option 9
If an Extension Group number is
assigned to a mailbox, all group Feature Manual
members are able to access the References
messages stored in the mailbox. 3.1.1 Unified
Messaging System
Overview
3.2.2.20 Mailbox
First Name Specifies the first name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming
subscriber. If there are non- Manual
alphabetical characters in the first 4 References
letters of the first name, the mailbox
21.1 UM
is not included in the directory.
Configuration—[2]
Class of Service—
Directory Listing
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name
Last Name Specifies the last name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming
subscriber. If there are non- Manual
alphabetical characters in the first 4 References
letters of the first name, the mailbox
21.1 UM
is not included in the directory.
Configuration—[2]
Class of Service—
Directory Listing
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name

562 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Mailbox Specifies the password needed to Max. 16 digits PC Programming
Password access the mailbox. If a default Manual
password is programmed by an References
administrator, that password will be
26.1 UM
assigned automatically when
Configuration—[7]
creating all mailboxes.
System Security—
Administrators can change and
Subscriber
delete the password.
To change a password for a Feature Manual
mailbox: References
1. On the Mailbox Parameters 3.1.2.4 Password
Screen, click Edit under Administration
Mailbox Password for the
mailbox extension to change.
2. In the window that appears,
enter the new password and
then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Mailbox Specifies the password needed to 4–16 characters (A–Z, a– PC Programming
Password access the mailbox when using a z, 0–9) Manual
(Message client software programme. If a References
Client) default password is programmed by
26.1 UM
an administrator, that password will
Configuration—[7]
be assigned automatically when
System Security—
creating all mailboxes.
Subscriber
Administrators can change and
delete the password. Feature Manual
References
Note
3.1.2.4 Password
This setting requires the Administration
installation of an Activation Key
for Unified Messaging E-mail
Notification (KX-NSU2xx) for the
number of users that will be
accessing their UM mailbox
using a client software
programme.
To change a password for a
mailbox:
1. On the Mailbox Parameters
Screen, click Edit under
Mailbox Password (Message
Client) for the mailbox
extension to change.
2. In the window that appears,
enter the new password and
then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 563

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Class of Determines the set of services COS No. 1–514 PC Programming
Service available to the subscriber. Manual
(Mailbox) References
Note
10.9 PBX
• We recommend that Configuration—[2-9]
parameters for each COS System—System
number be defined before Options—Option 9
assigning a Class of Service 21.1 UM
(COS) to each mailbox or Configuration—[2]
creating new mailboxes. Class of Service
• COS No. 513 and 514 are Feature Manual
assigned by default to the References
Message Manager and to the
System Manager, 3.1.1 Unified
respectively. No other Messaging System
mailboxes can be assigned to Overview
COS No. 513 and 514. 3.2.1.11 Class of
Service (COS)
Covering Forwards calls to a second 1–8 digits Feature Manual
Extension extension when the first extension’s References
subscriber is not available to take 3.2.1.14 Covering
the call. The Covering Extension is Extension
one of the Incomplete Call Handling
options that can be enabled or
disabled by the subscriber. The
caller can also be transferred the
Covering Extension by pressing [0]
while a Personal Greeting is being
played, or while leaving a message.

Note
Extension Groups or Logical
Extensions (extensions whose
calls are set to always be
directed their mailboxes) cannot
be assigned as covering
extensions.
Interview Assigns an interview mailbox to the 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
Mailbox subscriber’s mailbox. In order for it Mailbox No. Max. Length References
to function properly, the interview (3-8)] digits 3.2.1.25 Interview
mailbox number must not be the Service
same number as an existing
mailbox and an existing mailbox
group.

Note
Each caller’s replies to an
interview session are saved as
one message.

564 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

All Calls If this parameter is set to "Yes", the No, Yes Feature Manual
Transfer to extension is considered to be a References
Mailbox Logical Extension and therefore 3.2.1.3 Automated
calls directed to the extension via Attendant (AA)
Automated Attendant service are
automatically forwarded to the
extension mailbox. The extension
does not ring when a call is
received.
Call Specifies the method for the Call System, Other PC Programming
Transfer Transfer Sequence used by the Manual
Sequence mailbox. Allows each mailbox to be Note References
(Selection) assigned its own Call Transfer When "System" is 24.4 UM
Sequence (Personal Transfer selected, the Unified Configuration—[5-4]
Sequence). Messaging system System Parameters—
uses the extension Parameters—PBX
Note transfer sequence pre- Parameters—PBX
This sequence has higher programmed in 24.4 Environment—
priority than the alternate UM Configuration— Alternate Extension
extension transfer sequence [5-4] System Transfer Sequence
specified in 24.4 UM Parameters— (Up to 16 digits / [0-9
Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—PBX * # D R F T X , ;])
Parameters—Parameters— Parameters—PBX
PBX Parameters—PBX Environment— Feature Manual
Environment—Alternate Alternate Extension References
Extension Transfer Sequence Transfer Sequence 3.2.2.8 Call Transfer
(Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 Status
T X , ;]). * # D R F T X , ;]).
Call Specifies the Call Transfer Enter a maximum of 16 Feature Manual
Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. characters consisting of References
Sequence Only specified if Call Transfer 0–9, , # and special 3.2.2.8 Call Transfer
(Other) Sequence (Selection) is set to codes: Status
"Other". D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone
Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

PC Programming Manual 565

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

No Answer Specifies the length of time that the System, Other (If "Other" PC Programming
Time Unified Messaging system waits is selected, specify 10–60 Manual
(Selection/ before handling unanswered calls to s) References
Other) the extension.
24.4 UM
Note Configuration—[5-4]
System Parameters—
When "System" is selected, the Parameters—Dialling
Unified Messaging system uses Parameters/MSW
the time pre-programmed in Notification—Dialling
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] Parameters—Call
System Parameters— Transfer No Answer
Parameters—Dialling Time (10-60 s)
Parameters/MSW Notification
—Dialling Parameters—Call
Transfer No Answer Time
(10-60 s).
Call Determines how the Unified None: Rings the Feature Manual
Transfer Messaging system handles a call subscriber’s extension. References
Status when it reaches the subscriber’s Call blocking: Handles 3.2.2.8 Call Transfer
extension. Click Edit for the the call according to the Status
extension to change, programme Incomplete Call Handling
the settings, and click OK to finish. for No Answer setting for
the subscriber’s
Note extension. The
This setting can be changed by subscriber’s extension will
subscribers. not ring.
Call screening: The caller
is prompted to record his
or her name. The Unified
Messaging system then
calls the subscriber and
plays back the caller
name. The subscriber can
choose whether to answer
the call.
Intercom Paging: Pages
the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to Mailbox:
Transfers the caller to the
mailbox.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Transfer to specified
telephone number 1–5:
Transfers the caller to one
of the specified telephone
numbers in numerical
order of priority.

566 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Incomplete Specifies how the Unified Leave a Message: Allows Feature Manual
Call Messaging system handles a call the caller to record a References
Handling for when there is no answer. Click Edit message. 3.2.2.18 Incomplete
No Answer for the extension to change, Transfer to a covering Call Handling Service
programme the settings, and click extension: Transfers the
OK to finish. caller to a covering
extension.
Note Page the mailbox owner
• This setting can be changed by intercom paging:
by subscribers. Pages the subscriber by
intercom.
• More than one option can be Transfer to operator:
selected. Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu: Lets
the caller return to top
menu and try another
extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Incomplete Specifies how the Unified Leave a Message : Feature Manual
Call Messaging system handles a call Allows the caller to record References
Handling for when the extension is busy. Click a message. 3.2.2.18 Incomplete
Busy Edit for the extension to change, Transfer to a covering Call Handling Service
programme the settings, and click extension: Transfers the
OK to finish. caller to a covering
extension.
Note Page the mailbox owner
• This setting can be changed by intercom paging:
by subscribers. Pages the subscriber by
intercom.
• More than one option can be Transfer to operator :
selected. Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu :
Lets the caller return to
top menu and try another
extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu :
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Call Specifies whether callers can input Enable, Disable
Transfer an extension number to transfer
Anytime in their call while the Automated
Incomplete Attendant service is playing an
Handling Incomplete Call Handling menu.
Menu

PC Programming Manual 567

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Notification Parameters
The Unified Messaging system is able to notify a subscriber when a new message is recorded in his or her
mailbox. There are 3 methods the system can use for notification:
– Lighting the Message Waiting Lamp on the subscriber’s extension telephone.
– Calling a pre-programmed device (external telephone, etc.). A maximum of 3 devices (Device 1, 2, 3) can
be programmed per mailbox.
– Sending an e-mail to a designated address.
Name Description Value Range Links
Message If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of Disable, Enable Feature
Waiting Lamp the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a new Manual
message is recorded. References
3.2.1.30
Message
Waiting
Notification—
Lamp
Telephone Specifies the Message Waiting Notification Feature
Device schedule for each device. The following Manual
parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, References
and 3. Click Edit for the extension to change,
3.2.1.31
set Device Notification for Unreceived
Message
Message to "Yes", and programme the settings,
Waiting
then click OK to finish.
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies the type of message for which All Messages, Feature
Device— notification is sent. Notification can be sent for Voice Messages, Manual
Device No. 1, all messages, or voice messages or fax Fax Messages References
2, 3— messages only.
3.2.1.31
Notification
Message
Type
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies if notifications will be sent only for Yes, No Feature
Device— messages designated as urgent. Manual
Device No. 1, References
2, 3—Only
3.2.1.31
Urgent
Message
Messages
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device

568 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Telephone Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or Max. 32 digits Feature
Device— 3. The subscriber can also specify the number consisting of 0–9, Manual
Device No. 1, to be dialled by entering it from his or her , # and special References
2, 3—Dial telephone, allowing the subscriber to set this codes:
3.2.1.31
Number [0-9 * feature on a case by case basis. ,: Dial Pause
Message
# T X , ;] (default 1 s)
Note Waiting
;: Dial Pause
Notification—
When the Unified Messaging system calls a (default 3 s)
Telephone
trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" T: Dial Tone
Device
after the telephone number (1112223333 in Detection
the example here): X: Callback
9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Number Entry
Pause) Code
0–9, , #: Dial
Code
Telephone Specifies the number of times the Unified 0–9 times Feature
Device— Messaging system will try to send notification if Manual
Device No. 1, the device is busy or if there is no answer. References
2, 3—No. of
3.2.1.31
Retries
Message
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified 0–120 min Feature
Device— Messaging system waits before retrying Manual
Device No. 1, message notification when the called device is References
2, 3—Busy busy.
3.2.1.31
Delay Time
Message
(min)
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified 1–120 min Feature
Device— Messaging system waits before retrying Manual
Device No. 1, message notification when the called device References
2, 3—No does not answer.
3.2.1.31
Answer Delay
Message
Time (min)
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device

PC Programming Manual 569

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Telephone Specifies if and how each device is used for Not use: The Feature
Device— message notification. The subscriber can also selected device is Manual
Device No. 1, specify the use mode from his or her telephone. not used for References
2, 3—Use Schedule: If Scheduled is selected here, follow message
3.2.1.31
Mode the steps below to specify the time frame: notification.
Message
Continuously:
1. Select a day from the Day drop-down list Waiting
The device is
(Sunday – Saturday). Notification—
called whenever
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2. Telephone
a message is
Device
3. Enter the start and end times in the Start recorded in the
At (HH:MM) and End At (HH:MM) fields. mailbox. If Only
Urgent
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be Messages is set
programmed, and then click OK. to "Yes", the
device is called
whenever an
urgent message
is recorded in the
mailbox.
Scheduled: The
selected device is
called only during
the selected
times.
Telephone Specifies the length of time the system waits 0–120 min Feature
Device— after a new message is received before sending Manual
Device message waiting notification. References
Notification
3.2.1.31
Timer—
Message
Device Start
Waiting
Delay Time
Notification—
(0-120 min)
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending 0–120 min Feature
Device— Message Waiting Notification to Device 1, 2, or Manual
Device 3 before sending notification to the next device. References
Notification
3.2.1.31
Timer—
Message
Device
Waiting
Interval Time
Notification—
between
Telephone
Device 1, 2, 3
Device
and Next
Device

570 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

E-mail/Text Specifies the name of the user of the device. Max. 64 Feature
Message characters Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—User
Message
Name
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the e-mail address of the device. Max. 128 Feature
Message characters Manual
Device— Note References
Device No. 1, • This setting requires the installation of an 3.2.1.29
2, 3—E-mail Activation Key for Unified Messaging E- Message
Address mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) for the Waiting
number of users that will be accessing Notification—E-
their UM mailbox using a client software mail Device
programme.
• In the mailbox user’s profile (See 8.1
Users—User Profiles) if Email 1–3 is
input in the Contact tab, and Automatic
copy to UM message notification is
checked, the e-mail address(es) will be
copied to this setting and overwrite any
previously input data here.
E-mail/Text Specifies the type of Message Waiting All Messages, Feature
Message Notification to be sent. Notification can be sent Voice Messages, Manual
Device— for all messages, or voice messages or fax Fax Messages References
Device No. 1, messages only.
3.2.1.29
2, 3—
Message
Notification
Waiting
Type
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will Yes, No Feature
Message be sent only for urgent messages. Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Only
Message
Urgent
Waiting
Messages
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the format of the title of the Title-ID-Name, Feature
Message notification. Title-Name-ID, Manual
Device— ID-Title-Name, References
Device No. 1, Name-Title-ID,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Title ID-Name-Title,
Message
Order Name-ID-Title
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device

PC Programming Manual 571

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

E-mail/Text Specifies the text string to be included as part of Max. 30 Feature
Message the title of the notification. characters Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Title
Message
String
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the callback number to be included in Max. 32 digits (0– Feature
Message the notification. 9, , #) Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Callback
Message
Number
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the delay between the message being 0–120 min Feature
Message left and the sending of the Message Waiting Manual
Device— Notification. References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Send
Message
Wait Time
Waiting
[0-120 min]
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the Yes, No Feature
Message voice message to the notification e-mail. Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Attach
Message
Voice File
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies whether to attach a fax image file of Yes, No Feature
Message fax messages to the notification e-mail. Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Attach
Message
Fax File
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device

572 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

E-mail/Text Specifies if and how each device is used for Not use: The Feature
Message message notification. selected device is Manual
Device— If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps not used for References
Device No. 1, below to specify the time frame: message
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Use notification.
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab. Message
Mode Continuously:
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2. Waiting
The device is
Notification—E-
3. Enter the start and end times in the Start called whenever
mail Device
At (HH:MM) and End At (HH:MM) fields. a message is
recorded in the
4. To specify if sent voice message or fax mailbox. If Only
image files are deleted from the Unified Urgent
Message system after they are sent by e- Messages is set
mail, select "Yes" for Delete After Send to "Yes", the
(Voice File) or Delete After Send (Fax device is called
File). whenever an
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each day to be urgent message
programmed, and then click OK. is recorded in the
mailbox.
Note Scheduled: The
If voice message or fax image files are set selected device is
to be deleted after they are sent by e-mail, called only during
be aware that a deleted file cannot be the selected
recovered in the event that the e-mail is not times.
sent successfully.

External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv

This tab contains programming items for External Message Delivery, Auto Forwarding, and Personal
Custom Service settings.
Name Description Value Range Links
External If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilise the No, Yes Feature Manual
Message External Message Delivery feature. References
Delivery 3.2.2.13 External
Active Message Delivery
Service

PC Programming Manual 573

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

External When an external message is delivered, the Primary, PC
Message receiver will be greeted by the system in the Selective, Programming
Delivery specified language. If set to "Primary", the default Guidance No. Manual
Prompt language will be used. If set to "Selective", the 1–8 References
Mode receiver has a choice of prompts. See related
22.1 UM
explanation in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM
Configuration—
Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group—
[3-1] UM
Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming
Extension / Trunk
Call Service Prompt.
Service—Service
Note Group—Day,
Night, Lunch, and
If set to "Selective" and the receiver uses a
Break Mode -
rotary telephone, the no-entry selection is
Incoming Call
specified by 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1]
Service Prompt
UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service
Group—Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Feature Manual
Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt. References
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Auto If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system No, Yes Feature Manual
Forwarding automatically forwards messages that have not References
Active been played for a specified length of time to 3.2.1.2 Auto
another mailbox. Forwarding
Auto Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will 2–[the value set Feature Manual
Forwarding be forwarded. in Mailbox No. References
Mailbox Max. Length 3.2.1.2 Auto
Number Note (3-8)] digits Forwarding
A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified
as a destination.
Auto Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes 00:00–99:59 Feature Manual
Forwarding that the system waits before forwarding unplayed References
Delay Time messages. The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 3.2.1.2 Auto
min. Forwarding
Note
The delay time must be shorter than the New
Message Retention Time, or else messages
will be deleted before being forwarded.
Auto Specifies whether all messages, or only voice All Messages, Feature Manual
Forwarding messages or only fax messages are forwarded. Voice References
Message Messages, Fax 3.2.1.2 Auto
Type Messages Forwarding
Auto Specifies whether only urgent messages are Yes, No Feature Manual
Forwarding forwarded. References
Message 3.2.1.2 Auto
Type Forwarding
Urgent

574 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Auto Specifies if forwarded messages are to be Copy, Move Feature Manual
Forwarding retained in the original mailbox. When set to References
Mode "Copy", copies of the messages are retained in 3.2.1.2 Auto
the original mailbox after forwarding. When set to Forwarding
"Move", messages are forwarded to the receiving
mailbox and are not retained in the original
mailbox.
Auto Specifies if the forwarded messages remain Yes, No Feature Manual
Forwarding marked as new. This setting is available only References
Mode - when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to "Copy". 3.2.1.2 Auto
Message Forwarding
Remains
New
Auto Specifies the date and time of day for when Date and time Feature Manual
Forwarding forwarding of messages will expire. References
Expires 3.2.1.2 Auto
Forwarding

PC Programming Manual 575

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Personal Specifies the Personal Custom Service. The • Transfer to Feature Manual
Custom System Administrator can assign an operation to specified References
Service each key. mailbox: 2– 3.2.2.24 Personal
[the value set Custom Service
Note in Mailbox
• These settings can be changed by No. Max.
subscribers. Length (3-8)]
digits
• Make sure to add a trunk access number
when you store an outside telephone • Transfer to
number. specified
extension:
• When the Unified Messaging system calls a 2–8 digits
trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#"
after the telephone number (1112223333 in • Transfer to
the example here): specified
9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Custom
Pause) Service
Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Menu: 1–200
Service. • Transfer to
1. Click Edit. outside
(specified
2. For each Key, specify an Assigned number):
Operation. Outside
3. For each Assigned Operation that is Number 1–4
specified, specify a Value
4. Click OK when finished.
Assigned Operation
• Transfer to specified mailbox: Allow the caller
to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
• Transfer to specified extension: Transfers the
caller to a specified extension.
• Transfer to Voice Mail Service: Allows the
caller to access Voice Mail Service.
• Transfer to Automated Attendant Service:
Allows the caller to access Automated
Attendant Service.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the Custom Service
specified here.
• Transfer to operator: Connects the caller to an
operator.
• Transfer to outside (specified number):
Transfers the caller to a specified outside
telephone number. Enter a number from the
Outside Numbers list (1–4).
• Page the party: Pages the subscriber.
• Repeat greeting: Repeats the greeting.
• None: No operation assigned.

576 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Outside Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can Outside Number Feature Manual
Numbers be used for the "Transfer to outside (specified #1–#4: Max. 32 References
number)" operation in the Custom Service digits consisting 3.2.2.24 Personal
settings. Click OK when finished. of 0–9, , #, Custom Service
and special
codes
T: Dial Tone
Detection
,: Dial Pause
(default 1 s)
;: Dial Pause
(default 3 s)
0–9, , #: Dial
Code
No DTMF Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF Recording: The Feature Manual
Input input (a caller does not dial anything) is received caller will be References
Operation after the Personal Greeting. guided to leave 3.2.2.24 Personal
a message. Custom Service
Disconnect (All
Day): The line
will be
disconnected,
regardless of
the time of day.
Disconnect
(Only After
Hours): The
line will be
disconnected
only after hours.
No DTMF Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF 0–10 s Feature Manual
Input input before the action set in No DTMF Input References
Operation Operation is performed. 3.2.2.24 Personal
Wait Time Custom Service

Personal Distribution List

Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to several mailboxes in a single operation.
A maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes.
Name Description Value Range Links
List 1 Name– Specifies a list name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
List 4 Name characters References
3.2.2.17 Group
Distribution Lists

PC Programming Manual 577

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

List 1 Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the Max. 40 Feature Manual
Members–List list. mailboxes References
4 Members Follow the steps below to edit list members. per list 3.2.2.17 Group
1. Click Edit for a List Members item. Distribution Lists
2. Under Subscribers To Add, click the
checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add,
referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox
owners’ names.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
Follow the steps below to remove members from a
list.
1. Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–
4) Members item.
2. Under Distribution, click the checkbox in
No. for each mailbox to add, referring to the
mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’
names.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.

Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

This tab contains programming items for Remote Call Forwarding, Automatic Login, and Direct Service
settings.
Name Description Value Range Links
Remote Call Specifies the telephone numbers Max. 32 digits (consisting PC Programming
Telephone of destinations to which callers of 0–9 and " ") Manual
Number 1, 2 are forwarded when the References
subscriber sets Remote Call
21.1 UM
Forwarding. 2 telephone numbers
Configuration—[2]
can be specified per mailbox.
Class of Service—
Telephone numbers can contain
Call Transfer to
the digits "0–9" and " ". These
Outside
telephone numbers should begin
with a trunk access number. Feature Manual
References
Note
3.2.2.29 Remote
Class of Service programming Call Forwarding Set
determines if the subscriber is
able to use this feature.

578 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Auto Login When this item is set to "Enable", Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Extension subscribers are able to access References
their mailbox directly without 3.2.2.3 Automatic
entering the mailbox number. Login
Subscribers can automatically log
in from their extensions, by calling
from an outside telephone whose
number is stored as a Caller ID
number, or by dialling a telephone
number assigned to a specified
DID number or trunk. When
logging in from outside
telephones, the Toll Saver feature
is also available.
Auto Login Specifies if a password is required Yes, No Feature Manual
Extension for the Automatic Login Extension References
Password feature. 3.2.2.3 Automatic
Entry Login
Requirement Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure
that unauthorised third-parties
are not allowed access to that
mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies the telephone number Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
Caller ID 1, 2 from which the subscriber can References
automatically be logged in from. 3.2.2.3 Automatic
When Caller ID information is Login
received that matches one of
these numbers, the caller
(subscriber) is automatically
logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this telephone number must be
unique for each mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies if a password is required Yes, No Feature Manual
Caller ID for entry when automatic login is References
Password performed using the Caller ID of Notice
3.2.2.3 Automatic
Entry the number set in Auto Login If this is set to "No", Login
Requirement Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ensure that
ID 2. unauthorised third-
parties are not allowed
access to that mailbox
using the number
assigned to Auto
Login Caller ID 1 or
Auto Login Caller ID
2.

PC Programming Manual 579

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Auto Login Specifies the DDI/DID number for Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
DDI/DID Automatic Login. When the References
Unified Messaging system 3.2.2.3 Automatic
receives this DDI/DID number Login
from the PBX, the caller
(subscriber) is automatically
logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this number must be unique for
each mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies the trunk number for 1–96 Feature Manual
TRG No. Automatic Login. When the References
Unified Messaging system 3.2.2.3 Automatic
receives a call on this trunk, the Login
caller (subscriber) is automatically
logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this number must be unique for
each mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies if a password is required Yes, No Feature Manual
DDI/DID, TRG for entry when automatic login is References
No. Password performed using the trunk group Notice
3.2.2.3 Automatic
Entry number or the DID number. If this is set to "No", Login
Requirement ensure that
unauthorised third-
parties are not allowed
access to any
extensions using the
specified trunk group
number.
Auto Login Toll Allows subscribers to call the Disable: Disables the Toll Feature Manual
Saver Unified Messaging system and Saver feature. References
know whether or not new DID: Toll Saver functions 3.2.2.33 Toll Saver
messages have been recorded in when the system receives
their mailboxes by the number of the pre-programmed DID
rings they hear before the Unified number from the PBX.
Messaging system answers their Caller ID: Toll Saver
calls. Toll Saver is available under functions when Caller ID
the same conditions as Automatic information is received that
Login; subscribers can use Toll matches one of the pre-
Saver when calling from an programmed numbers
outside telephone whose number (Caller ID 1 or 2).
is stored as a Caller ID number, or Trunk: Toll Saver functions
by dialling a telephone number when the system receives
assigned to a specified DID a call on the pre-
number or trunk. programmed trunk.

580 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Direct Service Specifies which features can be Record No Answer PC Programming
UM Extension directly accessed by dialling a Greeting: The subscriber Manual
Unified Messaging extension can record the greeting References
number. This setting can only be played when there is no
9.7 PBX
specified for Unified Messaging answer.
Configuration—[1-1]
extension numbers. Record Busy Greeting:
Configuration—Slot
The subscriber can record
Note —UM Port Property
the greeting played when
20.1.2 UM
Automatic Login must be their extension is busy.
Configuration—[1-2]
enabled for extensions to use Record After Hours
Mailbox Settings—
this feature. Greeting: The subscriber
Full Setting—
can record the greeting
Remote Call/
played when the system is
Automatic Login/
in night mode.
Direct Service—Auto
Record Temporary
Login Extension
Greeting: The subscriber
can record a greeting that Feature Manual
is used exclusively until References
the subscriber disables it. 3.2.2.12 Direct
Change Day Main Menu: Service Access
The subscriber can
change the Day Main
Menu greeting. Only the
Message Manager may
make this change.
Change Night Main
Menu: The subscriber can
change the Night Main
Menu greeting. Only the
Message Manager may
make this change.
Change Emergency
Greeting: The subscriber
can change the
Emergency Greeting. Only
the Message Manager
may make this change.

Fax Options
Name Description Value Range Links
Automatic Specifies whether No, Yes Feature Manual
Delivery Status Automatic Delivery is used References
to automatically forward 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax
received faxes to a Delivery
specified fax machine.

PC Programming Manual 581

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic Specifies the default Max. 32 digits consisting of 0– Feature Manual
Delivery Status number for which to send 9, , # and special codes: References
Default Fax automatically delivered ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s) 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax
Number [0-9 * # faxes. ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s) Delivery
T,;] T: Dial Tone Detection
X: Callback Number Entry
Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Automatic Specifies if automatically Delete Automatically, Save as Feature Manual
Delivery Status forwarded faxes are Old, Save as New References
Printed Fax marked as "old" or "new", 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax
Message or deleted. Delivery
Play Voice/Fax Specifies if the subscriber Yes, No Feature Manual
Selection Menu will be prompted to References
choose which messages 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax
will be played: either voice Delivery
messages, information
about waiting fax
messages, or all
messages.
Fax Number Specifies if a dialled fax Disable, Enable
Confirmation number must be re-
entered for confirmation
before sending.
No Space for Specifies the action taken Transfer to Fax Extension: PC Programming
Receiving when there is not enough Transfers the fax to a Manual References
Coverage Mode free space in the mailbox specified fax extension. 24.4 UM
to save a fax message in Receive in GDM: The fax is Configuration—[5-4]
the mailbox. redirected to the general System Parameters—
delivery mailbox. Parameters—Fax
No Receiving: The fax Management
message is not received and
the system goes on hook.

Note
If no fax extension is
specified but Transfer to
Fax Extension is
selected, the system will
go on hook.
Cover Page Specifies the language English (US), English (UK), Feature Manual
Language used for the set French, CA French, German, References
information generated for Swedish, Italian, Dutch, 3.2.2.14 Fax Cover
fax cover pages. Portuguese, Spanish, Page
Norwegian, Danish, Polish,
Hungarian, Czech, Russian,
Greek, Ukrainian

582 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Announce Number of Messages

Name Description Value Range Links
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
All New Messages number of only new messages in their mailbox when
the subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
All Messages number of all messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
New Voice Messages number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
New Fax Messages number of only new fax messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
New Urgent number of only new messages marked as urgent in
Messages their mailbox when the subscriber logs in.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - All New number of only new messages in their mailbox when
Messages the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - All number of all messages in their mailbox when the
Messages subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - New Voice number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
Messages when the subscriber has selected to listen to
messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - New Fax number of only new fax messages in their mailbox
Messages when the subscriber has selected to listen to
messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - New Urgent number of only new urgent messages in their
Messages mailbox when the subscriber has selected to listen to
messages.
Message Client Specifies the language of information generated by English, French,
Display Language the UM system for the mail (IMAP) client. German, Italian,
Dutch, Spanish,
Portuguese,
Russian

PC Programming Manual 583

20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration

Quick Menu and Greeting Recording

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Quick Menu When this setting is enabled for the Message Enable, PC Programming
and Greeting Manager mailbox, the following features are Disable Manual References
Recording enabled for the Message Manager to access 23.3 UM Configuration—
greeting and recording management menus [4-3] Service Settings—
quickly. Custom Service
• Custom Service Menu messages for
Feature Manual
Custom Service 1 and 2 can be recorded
and changed from the Top Menu. References
3.2.1.17 Emergency
• Company Greeting No. 1 can be recorded Greeting
and changed from the Top Menu. This is
useful for recording the Emergency
Greeting.

20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto

Configuration
Auto Configuration automatically associates extension numbers and mailboxes in bulk. This feature is
available at the Installer level only.
Name Description Value Range Links
Select the Specifies Auto configuration mode Create mailboxes Installation Manual
following from the following. Re-create all References
options mailboxes 5.12 Automatic
Note
Configuration of
In Re-create all mailboxes mode, Mailboxes
all voice data is deleted, including
data that is recorded in mailboxes. Feature Manual
It is strongly recommended that References
you backup the voice data that has 3.1.2.1 Automatic
been recorded in mailboxes. Configuration of
Backed up voice data can be Mailboxes
restored as sound data on a PC by
using special software tools. For
details, consult your dealer.
Select UM Specifies the site where mailboxes are Create mailboxes to Installation Manual
group where created. the UM group of the References
mailboxes PBX where 5.12 Automatic
are created extensions belong Configuration of
to (default) Mailboxes
Create mailboxes to
the specified UM Feature Manual
group References
(You can select site 3.1.2.1 Automatic
number from 1-16) Configuration of
Mailboxes

584 PC Programming Manual

 Section 21
UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 585

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to
its subscriber. There are 514 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as
needed. COS No. 513 and 514 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System
Manager, respectively.
No other mailboxes can be assigned to COS No. 513 and 514.

General
Name Description Value Range Links
Class Of Specifies the Class of Service’s name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
Service characters References
Name 3.2.1.11 Class of Service
(COS)
Prompt Mode Specifies the language used for system Primary, PC Programming
prompts played for the subscriber during Guidance No. 1– Manual References
Subscriber Service. If set to "Primary", 8 24.4 UM Configuration—
the default language which is selected [5-4] System Parameters
from all installed languages will be used. —Parameters—Prompt
Setting—Primary
Language
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.42 System Prompts
Directory If set to "Yes", the subscriber’s name No, Yes Feature Manual
Listing and extension number will be listed in References
the directory (Dialling by Name). 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name
Note
This setting is not available for COS
514 (System Manager).

586 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Tutorial The tutorial is a series of voice prompts Normal: A Feature Manual
for setting up the mailbox that is played navigation voice References
to subscribers when they first log in to menu is given for 3.2.2.31 Subscriber
their mailbox. This item specifies if each step. Tutorial
subscribers in the Class of Service hear Simplified: Only
a normal tutorial, a simplified tutorial, or direct prompts
no tutorial when they first log in to their are given for
mailbox. making each
In the tutorial, subscribers are asked to setting. For
provide: Personal
Greetings, only a
– A password
No Answer
– The mailbox owner’s name Greeting can be
– Personal Greetings (No Answer set.
Greeting, Busy Signal Greeting, After None: No tutorial
Hours Greeting) is played and
settings for the
mailbox must be
made manually.
Call-through Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Service Service can make outside calls by References
accessing the subscriber service menu 3.2.2.6 Call-through
(from an outside telephone) and dialling Service
an outside destination.
Remote Call Select if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Forward to Service can perform a Remote Call References
CO Forward to CO. 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview
E-mail Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Option Service can receive notifications by e- References
mail when they have a new message 3.2.1.29 Message
waiting. Waiting Notification—E-
mail Device
Fax Option Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No
Service can use the fax functions of the
Unified Messaging system, such as
sending and receiving faxes.
Desktop Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Messaging Service can access the contents of their References
mailboxes with an e-mail application 3.3.1 Integration with
using IMAP. This includes the Microsoft Microsoft Outlook
Outlook® e-mail client plug-in.
System Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Manager Service have access to the Unified References
Authority Messaging system as a System 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Manager. System Overview

PC Programming Manual 587

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Message Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Manager Service have access to the Unified References
Authority Messaging system as a Message 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Manager. System Overview

Mailbox
Name Description Value Range Links
Personal Greeting Defines the maximum length (in seconds) of 1–360 s Feature
Length (s) Personal Greetings for subscribers in the Manual
Class of Service. References
Note 3.2.2.25
Personal
This setting is not available for COS 513 Greetings
(Message Manager) and COS 514
(System Manager).
Message Length Specifies if the length of messages left for Unlimited,
(Selection) subscribers in the Class of Service are Limited
unlimited in duration or have a specified time
limit. If set to "Unlimited", the maximum
recording time is 60 minutes, and the
maximum recording time for two-way
conversations (Two-way Record and Two-way
Transfer) is unlimited.
Message Length Specifies the maximum recording time for 1–60 min
(Limited) (min) messages left to subscribers in the Class of
Service. Only specified if Message Length
(Selection) is set to "Limited".
Mailbox Capacity Specifies if a maximum limit is applied to the Unlimited,
Maximum total amount of messages (new and saved) for Limited
Message Time mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of
(Selection) Service.
Mailbox Capacity Specifies the total number of available minutes 1–600 min
Maximum for storing messages (both new and saved) for
Message Time mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of
(Limited) (min) Service. Only specified if Mailbox Capacity
Maximum Message Time (Selection) is set to
"Limited".
New Message Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to Unlimited,
Retention Time new messages in mailboxes of subscribers in Limited
(Selection) the Class of Service. If "Unlimited" is selected,
new messages will remain in the mailbox until
erased by the subscriber.

588 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

New Message Defines the number of days that new 1–30 days
Retention Time messages will remain in mailboxes for
(Limited) (days) subscribers in the Class of Service. The
storage period begins the day after the
message reception. Only specified if New
Message Retention Time (Selection) is set to
"Limited".
Saved Message Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to Unlimited,
Retention Time saved messages in mailboxes of subscribers Limited
(Selection) in the Class of Service. If "Unlimited" is
selected, saved messages will remain in the
mailbox until erased by the subscriber.
Saved Message Defines the number of days that saved 1–30 days
Retention Time messages will remain in mailboxes for
(Limited) (days) subscribers in the Class of Service. Only
specified if Saved Message Retention Time
(Selection) is set to "Limited".
Message Retrieval Specifies the order in which messages will be LIFO:
Order retrieved for subscribers in the Class of Messages are
Service (played back for listening). retrieved
starting with
the most
recent (Last In
First Out).
FIFO:
Messages are
retrieved
starting with
the oldest
(First In First
Out).
Number of CIDs Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service None, Other
for Caller Name can assign telephone numbers for the
Announcement Personal Caller Name Announcement feature.
(Selection)
Note
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager) and COS 514
(System Manager).
Number of CIDs Specifies the maximum number of telephone 1–30
for Caller Name numbers that subscribers in the Class of
Announcement Service can assign for the Personal Caller
(Other) Name Announcement feature. Only specified if
Number of CIDs for Caller Name
Announcement (Selection) is set to "Other".

PC Programming Manual 589

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Message Specifies when message envelopes (message Before: The
Envelope Setting date and time, name of the person who system
recorded or transferred the message, announces the
telephone number of the caller) are message
announced. envelope
before playing
the recorded
message.
After: The
system
announces the
message
envelope after
playing the
recorded
message.
Require: The
system
announces the
message
envelope
when the user
presses the
appropriate
dial key as
prompted
when listening
to the
message.
Mailbox Capacity Specifies if the system alerts mailbox None, Other
Warning subscribers in the Class of Service that the
(Selection) programmed recording time for their mailboxes
is reaching its set amount of message storage
time. If set to "None", the warning will not be
announced.
Mailbox Capacity Specifies when the system alerts mailbox 1–60 min
Warning (Other) subscribers in the Class of Service that the
(min) programmed recording time for mailboxes is
reaching its set amount of message storage
time. The setting indicates the remaining
recording time capacity threshold for when the
announcement is heard. Only specified if
Mailbox Capacity Warning (Selection) is set
to "Other".

590 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Play System If set to "Yes", directions for recording a No, Yes
Prompt after message are given to the caller immediately
Personal Greeting after the personal greeting of the subscriber in
the Class of Service has been played.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager) and COS 514
(System Manager).
Message Cancel If set to "Yes", the caller’s message will be No, Yes Feature
for Live Call deleted when a subscriber in the Class of Manual
Screening Service answers a call via Live Call Screening References
while the caller is leaving a message.
3.2.2.19 Live
Note Call Screening
(LCS)
This setting is not available for COS 514
(System Manager).
Delete Message If set to "Yes", the system requests No, Yes
Confirmation confirmation from subscribers in the Class of
Service before erasing a message in the
mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased
immediately.
Personal Greeting If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature
for Caller ID Service can record personal greetings that are Manual
played for specific callers only (Personal References
Greeting for Caller ID).
3.2.2.25
Note Personal
Greetings
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager) and COS 514
(System Manager).
Caller ID Callback If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature
Service can call the caller back while listening Manual
to the caller’s message (Caller ID Callback). References
3.2.2.10 Caller
ID Callback
Auto Receipt If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature
Service can request to receive confirmation Manual
when their message has been listened to by References
the message recipient.
3.2.2.1 Auto
Receipt
Autoplay New If set to "Yes", the system plays new messages No, Yes
Message automatically when subscribers in the Class of
Service log into their mailboxes.

PC Programming Manual 591

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Play New If set to "Yes", the system plays all new No, Yes
Messages messages for subscribers in the Class of
Sequentially Service sequentially without system prompts.
The subscriber’s Service Top Menu will be
heard after all of the messages are played.
This feature is only available when Autoplay
New Message is set to "Yes".
First Playback If set to "Yes", the system plays urgent No, Yes Feature
Urgent Message messages before regular messages for Manual
subscribers in the Class of Service. References
3.2.2.35 Urgent
Message
Announce If set to "Yes", the system plays the information No, Yes
Message of transferred messages to subscribers in the
Transferred Class of Service before playing the messages.
Information
Caller ID Number Specifies whether or not the system No, Yes
Announcement announces the Caller ID number when a
subscriber in the Class of Service plays a
message left by a caller, if their name has not
been recorded for the Caller Name
Announcement feature. If the name has been
recorded, it will be announced regardless of
this setting.

Note
If "Caller ID Callback" is set to "Yes", Caller
ID numbers will be announced regardless
of this setting (see 21.1 UM Configuration
—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Caller
ID Callback).
Announce Option If set to "Yes", the system plays the option No, Yes
Menu after menu after erasing a message for subscribers
Erasing Message in the Class of Service. If set to "No", the
system plays the next message automatically
without playing the option menu.
New Message If set to "Yes", the system announces the total No, Yes
Length length of new messages when the number of
Announcement new messages is announced for subscribers in
the Class of Service.
Password Expiry Specifies if the mailbox passwords for Disable, Other Feature
Period (Selection) subscribers in the Class of Service will expire Manual
after a set time. References
3.1.2.4
Password
Administration

592 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Password Expiry Specifies the number of days a set mailbox 5–200 days Feature
Period (Other) password will be used before it expires and the Manual
system prompts the subscriber for a new References
password. This feature is only available when
3.1.2.4
Password Expiry Period (Selection) is set to
Password
"Other".
Administration
Two-way Specifies whether two-way recording sessions Save as Old, Feature
Recorded are saved in the mailboxes of subscribers in Save as New Manual
Message Save the Class of Service as "old" or "new" References
Mode messages.
3.2.2.34 Two-
way Record/
Two-way
Transfer

Call Transfer
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Intercom Specifies the Intercom Paging group number 1–32 PC Programming
Paging available to subscribers in the Class of Service. Manual References
Group 24.4 UM Configuration
Note
—[5-4] System
This setting is not available for COS 513 Parameters—
(Message Manager). Parameters—Intercom
Paging Parameters
Use Call If set to "Yes", the system signals subscribers in No, Yes
Waiting on the Class of Service when they are on a call and
Busy another call is received.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager).
Caller ID If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service No, Yes Feature Manual
Screen can hear the pre-recorded names of callers when References
they receive calls (Caller ID Screening). 3.2.1 System Features
—3.2.1.9 Caller ID
Note
Screening
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager).
Notify of If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service No, Yes
Transfer will hear "You have a call." when they answer
transferred calls.

PC Programming Manual 593

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Call Transfer If set to "Yes", the system allows calls to be No, Yes Feature Manual
to Outside transferred to a trunk via the following features: References
Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call Transfer 3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to
Service, Personal Custom Service, Call-through Outside
Service.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager).

Hospitality Mode
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Hospitality Specifies whether subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature Manual
Mode Service have the Hospitality Mode enabled. References
(For use with extensions for hotel rooms, etc.) 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
This setting must be set to "Yes" to enable
other Hospitality Mode settings. When this
item is set to "Yes", only the following options
are made available to subscribers:
• Listen to Messages
• Password
• Personal Greetings
• Owner Name
Password Specifies if subscribers in the Class of No, Yes PC Programming
Service are given a voice prompt selection to Manual References
change their password when accessing their 20.1.2 UM Configuration—
mailbox. [1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full
Setting—Mailbox
Parameters
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
Personal Specifies if subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature Manual
Greeting Service are given a voice prompt selection to References
change their Personal Greeting when 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
accessing their mailbox. 3.2.2.25 Personal Greetings
Note
For the Personal Greeting of subscribers
in a Class of Service with Hospitality
mode enabled, only No Answer and Busy
greetings can be set.

594 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Owner Name Specifies if subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature Manual
Service are given a voice prompt selection to References
change the mailbox owner’s name when 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
accessing their mailbox.
Erase When Specifies if the password of the subscriber in No, Yes Feature Manual
Check Out - the Class of Service is erased when the References
Password subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check 2.23.1 Hospitality Features
Out" status. —SUMMARY
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
Erase When Specifies if the Personal Greeting of the No, Yes Feature Manual
Check Out - subscriber in the Class of Service is erased References
Personal when the subscriber’s extension is set to the 2.23.1 Hospitality Features
Greeting "Check Out" status. —SUMMARY
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
Erase When Specifies if the Owner Name of the No, Yes Feature Manual
Check Out - subscriber in the Class of Service is erased References
Owner Name when the subscriber’s extension is set to the 2.23.1 Hospitality Features
"Check Out" status. —SUMMARY
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

PC Programming Manual 595

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

596 PC Programming Manual

 Section 22
UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk
Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 597

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Service Group
The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service
Group (therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break).
One of 6 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service, Fax, or
Transfer to Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Once one or more service groups are set, you can assign the service groups to each UM port in 22.2 UM
Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment.
Name Description Value Range Links
Day, Night, Specifies the greeting to be heard by None, System, Feature Manual
Lunch, and callers, the System Greeting, another Other References
Break Mode - message, or no greeting. The System 3.2.1.12 Company
Company Greeting is "Good morning/Good Greeting
Greeting No. afternoon/Good evening. Welcome to
(Selection) the Unified Messaging System.". Each
call service can have its own setting.
Day, Night, Specifies the number of the greeting 1–32 Feature Manual
Lunch, and message to use when "Other" is References
Break Mode - specified for the greeting selection. 3.2.1.12 Company
Company Greeting
Greeting No.
(Other)
Day, Night, Specifies the incoming call service Voice Mail
Lunch, and used to handle calls. Service,
Break Mode - Automated
Incoming Call Attendant,
Service Interview Mailbox,
Custom Service,
Fax Service,
Transfer to
Mailbox

598 PC Programming Manual

 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Name Description Value Range Links

Day, Night, Specifies the parameter for the type of Interview
Lunch, and Incoming Call Service specified. This Mailbox: Mailbox
Break Mode - is disabled if "Voice Mail Service" or number
Incoming Call "Automated Attendant" is selected for Custom Service:
Service the Incoming Call Service. Custom Service
Parameter number (1–200)
Fax Service:
Mailbox number
Transfer to
Mailbox: Mailbox
number

Note
Mailbox
numbers are
between 2
digits and the
value set in
Mailbox No.
Max. Length
(3-8).
Day, Night, Specifies the language of system Primary, Selective, PC Programming
Lunch, and prompts used by this call service. If Guidance No. 1–8 Manual
Break Mode - set to "Primary", the default language References
Incoming Call which is selected from all installed
24.4 UM
Service Prompt languages will be used. When set to
Configuration—[5-4]
"Selective", the caller can select the
System Parameters—
language of his or her choice,
Parameters—Prompt
provided the System Administrator or
Setting—Primary
the Message Manager has recorded
Language
the Multilingual Selection Menu. To
specify a Prompt Selection Number, Feature Manual
see 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] References
System Parameters—Parameters— 3.2.1.42 System
Prompt Setting. Prompts
Note
If "Selective" is specified, you will
need to select a prompt available
for callers that cannot input DTMF
signals, such as rotary phone
callers. See "Prompt for No DTMF
Input Callers" below.

PC Programming Manual 599

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Name Description Value Range Links

Day, Night, Specifies which language is used Primary, Guidance PC Programming
Lunch, and when a caller cannot enter any digits No. 1–8 Manual
Break Mode - to select a language after the References
Prompt for No Multilingual Selection Menu has been
24.4 UM
DTMF Input played. If set to "Primary", the default
Configuration—[5-4]
Callers language which is selected from all
System Parameters—
installed languages will be used.
Parameters—Prompt
Setting—Primary
Language
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Day, Night, Specifies whether the Unified 0–60 s
Lunch, and Messaging system answers calls on
Break Mode - the port or trunk immediately (0) or
Delayed Answer after a delay (1 s–60 s).
Time

600 PC Programming Manual

 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment

22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Port Assignment
You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service
—Service Group to each UM port.
1. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down
list.
2. Click OK when finished.

PC Programming Manual 601

22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment

602 PC Programming Manual

 Section 23
UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 603

23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—

Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a
pre-programmed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch,
break). For Mode, select Caller-ID Mode or PIN Mode from the drop-down list, and then click the button
to assign a routing destination. PIN Call Routing is only available when the Call Transfer Anytime of a
Custom Service is set to "PIN".

Wild card input for Caller IDs/PINs

• The wild card, " ", can be used as a substitute for any numbers in the following ways.
1. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include one " ":
" " matches any number, regardless of the actual numbers of digits. For example, registering " "
by itself matches all numbers, and registering "201 " matches any number that starts with "201".
2. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include more than one " ":
Each " " matches a single digit. For example, registering " " matches any 10-
digit number, and registering "201 " matches any 10-digit number that starts with "201".

Note
• If Automatic Login or Holiday Service is used, these will take priority over Caller ID Call Routing
settings. Also note that Caller ID Call Routing takes priority over the Trunk Service and Port Service.
• Received Caller ID/PIN numbers are searched for in each service setting table in order from the first
registered number to last. When programming Caller ID/PIN routing, note the order of registration,
and remember that wild card entries should be entered after any specific routing entries.

Caller-ID Mode
Name Description Value Range Links
Caller ID No. Specifies the Caller ID number setting so Private, Out of Area, Feature Manual
(Selection) that callers are automatically forwarded to Long Distance, References
a pre-programmed destination. Others 3.2.1.8 Caller ID
Call Routing
Caller ID No. Specifies a Caller ID number (or range of 0–9, (Max. 20 Feature Manual
(Other) numbers using the wild card, " ") for digits) References
callers from a specific number or range of 3.2.1.8 Caller ID
numbers that are to be automatically Call Routing
forwarded to a pre-programmed
destination. Only specified if Caller ID No.
(Selection) is set to "Others".
Description Specifies a name and/or description of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Caller ID number. References
3.2.1.8 Caller ID
Note
Call Routing
When no data is specified in this
parameter, the caller’s name will be
automatically entered here if the
caller’s name is received from the
telephone company.

604 PC Programming Manual

 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer Specifies the destination to which the call None: disables this Feature Manual
for Day, Night, from an assigned Caller ID number is feature. References
Lunch, and automatically forwarded. A destination Custom Service 3.2.1.8 Caller ID
Break service can be set for each time mode. To disable Menu: forwards Call Routing
the setting, select "None". A Mailbox callers to the
Group number can be entered here specified Custom
instead of a mailbox number. Service menu.
Extension: forwards
callers to the
specified extension.
Mailbox: forwards
callers to the
specified mailbox.
Fax Service:
Forwards callers to
the fax service.

PIN Mode
Name Description Value Range Links
PIN No. Specifies a PIN number (or range of 0–9, (Max. 20 digits) Feature Manual
PIN numbers using the wild card, " ") References
for callers from a specific number or 3.2.1.36 PIN Call
range of numbers that are to be Routing
automatically forwarded to a pre-
programmed destination. For more
information on using " " with pin
numbers, refer to Wild card input for
Caller IDs/PINs.
Description Specifies a name and/or description of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
the PIN number. References
3.2.1.36 PIN Call
Routing
Call Transfer Specifies the destination to which the None: disables this Feature Manual
for Day, Night, call using an assigned PIN number is feature. References
Lunch, and automatically forwarded. A destination Custom Service 3.2.1.36 PIN Call
Break service can be set for each time mode. To Menu: forwards callers Routing
disable the setting, select "None". A to the specified
Mailbox Group number can be entered Custom Service menu.
here instead of a mailbox number. Extension: forwards
callers to the specified
extension.
Mailbox: forwards
callers to the specified
mailbox.
Fax Service: Forwards
callers to the fax
service.

PC Programming Manual 605

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—

Parameters
Automated Attendant
Name Description Value Range Links
Wait Time for Specifies the length of time the 0–20 s
First Digit (0-20 system waits for the caller to dial a
s) digit before assuming the caller
cannot input a DTMF signal and
therefore activates No DTMF Input
Call Coverage
Menu Repeat Specifies the number of times the 1–5 times Feature Manual
Cycle (1-5 times) system will play the Automated References
Attendant top menu if the caller does 3.2.1.3 Automated
not make a selection. Attendant (AA)
Play Owner's Determines whether "Transferring Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Name during you to (name)" is announced to the References
Transfer caller before transferring the caller to 3.2.1.3 Automated
an extension. Attendant (AA)
Operator Service When operator calls are made, calls Operator Service for PC Programming
are connected to the lowest- Day, Operator Manual
numbered operator that is available. Service for Night, References
To enable/disable the operator setting Operator Service for
10.2 PBX
for each time mode, check/uncheck Lunch, Operator
Configuration—[2-2]
it. Service for Break
System—Operator &
Note BGM— PBX
Operator—Day,
• The extension assigned as Lunch, Break, Night
Operator 1 for day mode is
automatically designated as Feature Manual
the Message Manager. References
Because the extension number 3.2.1.35 Operator
assigned for Operator Service Service
No. 1 in the Day Mode is for
the Message Manager, you
cannot assign this extension to
any other mailbox.
• Extensions assigned as
operators can be called by
dialling [0], however, when
setting features such as
Message Waiting Notification
and Remote Call Forwarding,
the extension number (not "0")
must be specified.

606 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Service Specifies the extension number for 1–8 digits Feature Manual
—Operator's Operator 1, 2, and 3 for the checked References
Extension time setting. 3.2.1.35 Operator
Service
Note
• The default extension number
of Operator 1 in day mode
cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Notification
Lamp feature.
• Since the extension number
assigned as Operator Service
No. 1 for Day is automatically
designated as the Message
Manager (mailbox number
998), do not assign an
individual mailbox to this
extension number. Assigning
an individual mailbox to this
extension will result in the
following operations:
– Any messages recorded for
the extension will be sent to
the Message Manager
mailbox instead of the
extension’s assigned
mailbox.
– The Message Manager COS
(513) will be applied to call
transfers, etc., instead of the
COS of the assigned
mailbox.
– If the extension user tries to
access their mailbox using
the Automatic Login feature,
the user will access the
Message Manager mailbox
instead of the assigned
mailbox.
• This time applies to Operator
1, 2, and 3.
• If more than one operator is
assigned, we recommend
setting this value to 15 s.

PC Programming Manual 607

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Service Specifies the mailbox number for 2–8 digits Feature Manual
—Operator's Operator 1, 2, and 3. Callers to References
Mailbox Operator 1, 2, or 3 are prompted to 3.2.1.35 Operator
leave a message in this mailbox Service
depending upon how the Busy
Coverage Mode or No Answer
Coverage Mode is set.
Operator Service Specifies how to handle calls when Hold: Automatically Feature Manual
—Busy the operator is busy. places the caller on References
Coverage Mode hold and the 3.2.1.35 Operator
operator is called Service
again.
No Answer
Coverage: Offers
the option specified
by the No Answer
Coverage Mode to
the caller.
Call Waiting:
Signals the operator
when another call is
waiting using the
Call Waiting feature
of PBX.
Disconnect
Message:
Disconnects the
caller after playing
"Thank you for
calling".

608 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Service Specifies how to handle operator Caller Select: PC Programming
—No Answer calls when they are not answered Allows the caller to Manual
Coverage Mode within the time period set in Operator leave a message or References
Service—Operator No Answer call another
20.1.2 UM
Time (10-60 s). extension. In the
Configuration—[1-2]
following cases, the
Mailbox Settings—
caller cannot call
Full Setting—No
another extension:
DTMF Input
1. No input to Operation
Automated
Attendant. Feature Manual
References
2. When the No
3.2.1.35 Operator
DTMF Input
Service
Operation
setting of a
Custom Service
is set to
"Operator".
Leave Message:
Instructs the caller to
leave a message in
the operator’s
mailbox.
Disconnect
Message:
Disconnects the
caller after playing
"Thank you for
calling.".
Next Operator:
Transfers the caller
to the next operator.
Operator Service When a call to an operator is not 10–60 s Feature Manual
—Operator No answered within the time set, the References
Answer Time system will offer other options as 3.2.1.35 Operator
(10-60 s) defined by Operator Service—No Service
Answer Coverage Mode.
Call Hold Mode If Call Hold Mode is checked, the Enable (checked), Feature Manual
system gives callers the option of Disable (unchecked) References
either holding for a specific extension 3.2.1.3 Automated
or selecting one of several Attendant (AA)
Incomplete Call Handling Service
options. While on hold, the system
periodically gives callers the choice to
either continue to hold or select one
of the Incomplete Call Handling
Service options. If Call Hold Mode is
not checked, the system immediately
offers callers the Incomplete Call
Handling Service and callers are not
put on hold.

PC Programming Manual 609

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Hold Mode If set to "Enable", callers on hold are Enable, Disable Feature Manual
—Call Queuing informed of their current position in References
Announcement the call hold queue. 3.2.1.3 Automated
Mode Example: "One other person is Attendant (AA)
waiting to connect."
Call Hold Mode Specifies the interval between the 1–30 s Feature Manual
—Call Retrieval voice guidance message that asks References
Announcement whether or not calls are to be 3.2.1.3 Automated
Timing (1-30 s) retrieved during call holding. Attendant (AA)
Example: "To cancel holding, press 2
now. Otherwise, I'll try your party
again."

610 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Alternate Specifies extensions that require a Max. 32 extensions PC Programming
Extension different transfer sequence than (max. 5 digits per Manual
normal. Calls to these extensions will extension) References
be transferred according with the
24.4 UM
setting for 24.4 UM Configuration—
Configuration—[5-4]
[5-4] System Parameters—
System Parameters
Parameters—PBX Environment—
—Parameters—PBX
Alternate Extension Transfer
Environment—
Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * #
Alternate Extension
D R F T X , ;]).Click Edit and follow
Transfer Sequence
the steps below to edit an alternate
(Up to 16 digits / [0-9
extension.
* # D R F T X , ;])
Adding an Alternate Extension
Feature Manual
1. Click New. References
2. Enter an extension number. 3.2.1.3 Automated
3. Click OK. Attendant (AA)
Editing an Alternate Extension
1. Select the desired alternate
extension.
2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the extension number.
4. Click OK.
Deleting an Alternate Extension
1. Select the desired alternate
extension.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.
Changing the order of Alternate
Extensions
Select an extension and click Move
up or Move down to change its order
in the list. Alternate extensions will be
dialled in order from top to bottom.

Note
Extension Groups and Logical
Extensions cannot be assigned.
List All Names If set to "Enable", callers can listen to Enable, Disable Feature Manual
all subscriber names and extension References
numbers in the Automated Attendant 3.2.1.3 Automated
service or Custom Service. Attendant (AA)
Operator Specifies the timing of the operator Transfer Feature Manual
Transfer Mode transfer. immediately, Do not References
transfer immediately 3.2.1.3 Automated
Attendant (AA)

PC Programming Manual 611

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

No DTMF Input Operation

Name Description Value Range Links
No DTMF Input Specifies where a caller will G.D.M.: The caller is Feature Manual
Call Coverage for be transferred when there is transferred to the General References
Day, Night, Lunch, no DTMF input in response Delivery Mailbox. 3.2.1.33 No DTMF
and Break to system guidance (for Operator: The caller is Input Operation
(Selection) example, the caller is using a transferred to an operator.
rotary phone) for each time Mailbox: The caller is
mode. transferred to the designated
mailbox extension.
Extension: The caller is
transferred to the designated
extension.
No DTMF Input Specifies the transfer 2–8 digits (for extensions) Feature Manual
Call Coverage for destination if "Mailbox" or 2–[the value set in Mailbox References
Day, Night, Lunch, "Extension" is selected for No. Max. Length (3-8)] 3.2.1.33 No DTMF
and Break No DTMF Input Call digits (for mailboxes) Input Operation
(Parameter) Coverage for Day, Night,
Lunch, and Break
(Selection).

Name Entry
Name Description Value Range Links
Number of Specifies the number of digits (letters) that 3–4 digits Feature Manual
Digits to must be entered when using the Dial by References
Entry Name Name feature, which allows callers to connect 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
(3-4 digits) themselves with the desired party by entering Name
the first 3 or 4 letters of the party’s name.
Name Entry Specifies the length of time that the system 1–10 s Feature Manual
Time Out waits for the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 References
(1-10 s) digits (letters) of the desired party’s name. If 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
the required number of digits are not dialled Name
within this time, the previous menu will be
played again for the caller.
Key Mode Specifies the standard used for keypad text North American Feature Manual
entry. If set to use the North American Standard, References
Standard, press [7] for "Q" and [9] for "Z", If Australasian 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
set to use the Australasian Standard, press Standard Name
[1] for "Q" and "Z".
Name Specifies one of Last Name, First Name, or Last, First, Both Feature Manual
Directory Both to be used when entering the name. References
Mode 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name

612 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Toll Saver
Name Description Value Range Links
Delayed Answer Time Specifies the time period before the 5–60 s
for New Message (5-60 system answers the call when there
s) are new messages.
Delayed Answer Time Specifies the time period before the 5–60 s Feature Manual
for No New Message system answers the call when there References
(5-60 s) are no new messages. 3.2.2.33 Toll Saver

PC Programming Manual 613

23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—

Custom Service
A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones
while listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect
themselves to an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of
an operator. A Custom Service Menu ("Press 1 for Sales, press 2 for Service", etc.) can be recorded by the
System Manager or the Message Manager, and can be recorded in several languages if needed. The
System Manager can create a maximum of 200 Custom Services.
Common uses for Custom Services include:
– callers press a button to connect themselves with the desired destination
– callers press buttons to navigate through a series of other Custom Services before being connected with
the desired destination
– callers enter PIN numbers to connect themselves with the desired destination (PIN Call Routing)
– callers enter the first few letters of the desired parties (Dial by Name) to connect themselves with the
desired destination

Custom Service Builder

The Custom Service Builder is a utility that allows the System Administrator to create Custom Services
visually. Each Custom Service and its functions can be edited, arranged using a familiar drag-and-drop
interface. The following Custom Service types are available:
– Menu & Transfer
– Date Control
– Time Control
– Day Control
– Password

Creating a Custom Service

1. Click the desired Custom Service type under Custom Service Type.
2. Click on an area within the workspace to the right of the menu to place the Custom Service (it can be
moved later).
3. Double-click the Custom Service icon you placed in the grid.
4. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
5. Click OK.

Note
If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, and you become unable to create new Custom Services with
the Custom Service Builder, click the browser’s Refresh button.

Editing a Custom Service

Custom Services parameters can be connected to other Custom Services. To connect a parameter to
another Custom Service, click and hold the parameter’s blue handle, drag it to the desired Custom Service,
then release the mouse button.
You can edit each Custom Service in the following ways.

614 PC Programming Manual

 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

[From the Custom Service List]

1. Enter the desired Custom Service number under Quick Search and click Edit Custom Service.
2. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
3. Click OK.
[From the Custom Service Diagram]
1. Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and
select Edit.
2. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
3. Click OK.
Example: Setting "Menu & Transfer"
1. Click Menu & Transfer under Custom Service Type and drag it to the right side of the screen.
2. Drop Menu & Transfer on to a position of your choice in the Custom Service diagram. The parameters
dialogue box for the Custom Service opens.
3. Enter or select a value for each item.
For each parameter, refer to the description in the following section.
4. Click Record A Prompt For This Custom Service.
This feature is only available when setting "Menu & Transfer" or "Password". You can also skip this step,
and go to step 7.
5. Select Record from extension or Import from recorded file.
When Record from extension is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When Import from recorded file is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open.
6. Click OK.
7. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 615

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Menu & Transfer
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated
party. The prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in this Max. 32 characters Feature Manual
field is for reference only. References
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service
Prompt Specifies the language for None, Primary, Guidance No. 1-8 PC
Mode prompts used by this Programming
Custom Service. Manual
References
Note
22.1 UM
• This parameter Configuration—
overrides a set [3-1] UM
"Incoming Call Extension / Trunk
Service Prompt". Service—Service
• If "Primary" is Group—Day,
selected, the default Night, Lunch, and
language which is Break Mode -
selected from all Incoming Call
installed languages Service Prompt
will be used. Feature Manual
• If "None" is selected, References
the prompt mode of 3.2.1.15 Custom
previous process will Service
be continued, or
"Primary" language
will be selected.
Menu Specifies the number of 1–3 times Feature Manual
Repeat times the Custom Service References
Cycle (1-3) menu message will be 3.2.1.15 Custom
repeated for the caller. Service

616 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Specifies the type of dialling Extn: enables callers to be Feature Manual
Transfer that the system accepts transferred directly to their intended References
Anytime during the Custom Service in party by dialling the extension 3.2.1.15 Custom
addition to the single-digit number. Service
Custom Service options. Mbx: enables callers to leave
This setting allows callers to messages in a mailbox by entering
dial numbers to connect the mailbox number.
themselves to an extension PIN: enables callers to be transferred
or mailbox or enter a PIN. directly to the specified party
according to the setting for PIN Call
Note Routing Service by dialling a PIN.
If you only need to allow No: disables extension transfer and
callers to dial single-digit mailbox transfer; only 1-digit entries
Custom Service option will function (following the Custom
numbers, set this Service menu)
parameter to "No". When
set to a value other than
"No", the system always
waits for the amount
determined by the Wait
for Second Digit (1-5 s)
setting before handling
the call. This will cause a
delay between the time
the caller dials a single-
digit Custom Service
option number and when
the call is actually
handled.
Wait for Specifies the length of time 0–10 s Feature Manual
First Digit that the system waits for the References
(0-10 s) caller to dial the first digit 3.2.1.15 Custom
after a Custom Service Service
menu is played for the caller.
If this time expires, the No
DTMF Operation settings
determines how the call is
then handled. If this
parameter is set to "0", No
DTMF Input Operation
handles the call immediately
after the menu is played for
the caller.

PC Programming Manual 617

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Name Description Value Range Links

Wait for This parameter is only valid 1–5 s Feature Manual
Second when Call Transfer References
Digit (1-5 Anytime is set to a value 3.2.1.15 Custom
s) other than "No". After the Service
caller dials a digit (the first
digit) after listening to a
Custom Service menu, the
system waits for a second
digit to be dialled. This gives
the caller time to continue
dialling a mailbox number,
extension number, or PIN. If
this time expires without a
second digit being entered,
the system assumes the
caller has selected a Custom
Service menu option and
handles the call according to
the digit dialled by the caller.
No DTMF Determines how calls are Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave Feature Manual
Input handled when callers do not messages in a specified mailbox. References
Operation dial any numbers after Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller to a 3.2.1.15 Custom
listening to the menu specified extension. Service
message (most likely Operator: Connects the caller to an
because they are using operator.
rotary telephones) The Trf to Out: Transfers the caller to a
default setting is "Operator", specified outside telephone number.
which allows the caller to be Enter the trunk access number of the
automatically connected to PBX then the destination telephone
an operator after the menu number.
message plays back ("Press Exit: Plays the Custom Service exit
the desired number, or stay prompt and disconnects the caller.
on the line to be connected Prev Menu: Returns the caller to the
to an operator."). previous menu (if there was a
previous menu).
CS: Transfers the caller to the
Custom Service specified here.
Fax Service: Forwards callers to the
fax service.

618 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Key – Any of the 16 Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave messages in a Feature
Assigned operations specified mailbox. Manual
Operation: listed below Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller to a specified extension. Referen
0–9, *, # can be Operator: Connects the caller to an operator. ces
assigned to Trf to Out: Transfers the caller to a specified outside
3.2.1.15
the 0 through telephone number. Enter the trunk access number of the
Custom
9, , and # PBX then the destination telephone number.
Service
keys on the Exit: Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects
telephone the caller.
keypad. Prev Menu: Returns the caller to the previous menu (not
Callers are available if there was no previous menu).
able to access CS: Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified
these here.
operations by VM Serv: Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service.
pressing the Call Trf Serv: Allows the caller to access Automated
corresponding Attendant Service.
keys on their Subscriber Serv: Allows the caller to access the Subscriber
telephones. Service. The caller needs to press the assigned key followed
by the mailbox number that he or she wants to log in. If this
option is enabled, it is strongly recommended that each
subscriber set a password for his or her mailbox; this will
prevent unauthorised callers from accidentally or
intentionally accessing subscribers’ mailboxes.
Dial by Name: Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4
letters of a first or last name of the person the caller wishes
to reach, then transfers the caller to the corresponding
extension.
Repeat Menu: Repeats the Custom Service menu.
Main Menu: Returns the caller to the Custom Service top
menu.
Trf to Fax Extn: Allows the caller to send fax messages to
an extension specified as the fax extension.
List All Names: The system will announce the names and
extensions numbers of all subscribers (except those whose
Class of Service Directory Listing parameter is set to
"No").
Fax Service: Forwards callers to the fax service.
None: No operation assigned.
Example: Assigning key [1] to transfer to extension 101
1. Click the check box next to key [1].
2. Select "Trf to Ext" in the "Assigned Operation" column.
3. Enter "101" in the "Value" column.
Example: Cancelling the setting for key [1]
1. Clear the check box next to key [1].

23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Date Control
The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.

PC Programming Manual 619

23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control

This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no
selection and no menu is announced.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in Max. 32 characters Feature
this field is for reference Manual
only. References
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service
Period 1–5, Period 1–5: Period 1–5: Feature
Outside Specifies the name of Name: Max. 16 characters Manual
date period for From/To: Select the check box, and then References
reference, start and end click the input field to select a date (month
3.2.1.15 Custom
date, and an operation. and day) from the calendar. You can
Service
specify a beginning date (From), ending
Outside: date (To), or both for each period.
Allows you to specify an Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
operation that is Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
enabled on all other VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
dates not included in Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
the set periods. Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax
Service, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—
Custom Service—Menu & Transfer—
Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Outside:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax
Service, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—
Custom Service—Menu & Transfer—
Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Time Control
The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller
makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in Max. 32 characters Feature
this field is for reference Manual
only. References
3.2.1.15
Custom Service

620 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Period 1–5, Period 1–5: Period 1–5: Feature
Outside Specifies the name of Name: Max. 16 characters Manual
time period for reference, From/To: Select the check box, click the References
start and end time, and input field, and then specify a time (hour
3.2.1.15
an operation. and minute). You can specify a beginning
Custom Service
time (From), ending time (To), or both for
Note each period.
When the start time is Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
specified and the end Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
time is "None", the VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
period will end at Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
"00:00". Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax
Service, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Outside: Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—
Allows you to specify an Custom Service—Menu & Transfer—
operation that is enabled Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)
for all other times not
included in the set time Outside:
periods. Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax
Service, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—
Custom Service—Menu & Transfer—
Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Day Control
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The
caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in this field is for Max. 32 characters Feature
reference only. Manual
References
3.2.1.15
Custom
Service

PC Programming Manual 621

23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Sunday– Specifies a service for each day of the Assigned Operation: Trf Feature
Saturday, week and for all holidays. to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Manual
Holiday Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, References
Note Prev Menu, CS, VM
3.2.1.15
If an operation is assigned to "Holiday" Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Custom
here, either one of the following settings Subscriber Serv, Dial by
Service
is required in order to activate the Name, Repeat Menu,
operation for the "Holiday" Custom Main Menu, Trf to Fax
Service: Extn, List All Names, Fax
Service, None (see
a. In the Holiday Table, select
23.3.1 UM
"Custom Service Menu" and
Configuration—[4-3]
specify the number of this Date
Service Settings—
Control—"Holiday" Custom
Custom Service—Menu
Service, or the number of its
& Transfer—Key –
higher layered Custom Service
Assigned Operation: 0–
(see 23.4 UM Configuration—
9, *, #)
[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday
Table).
b. Assign the desired Date Control
—"Holiday" Custom Service or its
higher layered Custom Service to
the desired Port/Trunk (see 22.1
UM Configuration—[3-1] UM
Extension / Trunk Service—
Service Group).
For "Port Affected/Trunk Affected",
exclude the Port/Trunk numbers
that are assigned to the Date
Control—"Holiday" Custom
Service or the number of its higher
layered Custom Service.

23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Password
The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an
operation. If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s pre-programmed
operation. The prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in this Max. 32 characters Feature Manual
field is for reference only. References
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service

622 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Menu Repeat Specifies the number of times 1–3 times Feature Manual
Cycle (1-3) the Custom Service menu References
message will be repeated to 3.2.1.15 Custom
the caller. Service
Wait for First Specifies the length of time 1–10 s Feature Manual
Digit (0-10 s) that the system waits for the References
caller to dial the first digit after 3.2.1.15 Custom
a Custom Service menu is Service
played for the caller. If this
time expires, the No DTMF
Operation setting determines
how the call is then handled.
Maximum Specifies the number of times 1–10 times Feature Manual
Number of an invalid password is entered References
Invalid Entry before the operation assigned 3.2.1.15 Custom
(1-10) for Entry Failure is executed. Service
No DTMF Determines how calls are Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf Feature Manual
Input handled when callers do not to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, Fax References
Operation dial any numbers in response Service (see 23.3.1 UM 3.2.1.15 Custom
to system guidance (often Configuration—[4-3] Service Service
because they are rotary Settings—Custom Service—
telephone users). The default Menu & Transfer—No DTMF
setting is "Operator", which Input Operation)
allows the caller to be
automatically connected to an
operator after the message is
played.
Entry Failure Determines what operation is Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf Feature Manual
activated when a caller enters to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM References
an invalid password X times. Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber 3.2.1.15 Custom
(X= the value set for Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Service
Maximum Number of Invalid Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All
Entry (1-10)) Names, Fax Service (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3]
Service Settings—Custom
Service—Menu & Transfer—Key
– Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

PC Programming Manual 623

23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Pass1–5, Pass1–5: Pass1–5: Feature Manual
Cancel Specifies a password and an Password: Max. 12 digits References
operation for the specified Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, 3.2.1.15 Custom
password. Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Service
Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv,
Cancel: Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv, Dial
Determines the operation that by Name, Repeat Menu, Main
is activated when a caller Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All
presses "#" to cancel Names, Fax Service, None (see
password entry. 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3]
Service Settings—Custom
Service—Menu & Transfer—Key
– Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Cancel:
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx,
Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out,
Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv,
Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv, Dial
by Name, Repeat Menu, Main
Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All
Names, Fax Service, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3]
Service Settings—Custom
Service—Menu & Transfer—Key
– Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

624 PC Programming Manual

 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—

Holiday Table
Holidays can be set for and assigned to trunks and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is received from a
certain trunk or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned holiday, the call handling
settings for that holiday will be used. This screen is similar to the table found in 10.5 PBX Configuration—
[2-5] System—Holiday Table. You can also access the PBX Holiday Table directly by clicking the PBX
Holiday Table tab. A maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Setting Enables the setting of the holiday. This Enable, Disable PC Programming
setting synchronises with the PBX’s Manual References
Holiday Table. 10.5 PBX Configuration—
[2-5] System—Holiday
Table—Holiday Table—
Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Name of Specifies the name of the holiday Max. 32 Feature Manual
Holiday setting for later reference. Characters References
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Start Date Specifies the month and day of the Month and Day PC Programming
(Month holiday start date. Click the cell to Manual References
Day) display a calendar. Select a month 10.5 PBX Configuration—
using the arrow buttons, and click on a [2-5] System—Holiday
day for the selected month. This Table
setting synchronises with the PBX’s
Holiday Table. → Holiday Table—Start
Date—Month
→Holiday Table—Start
Date—Day
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Start Time Specifies the time of day on the Hour and Minute Feature Manual
specified date at which to begin the References
holiday service. Click the cell to display 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
an array of hours and minutes. Select
an hour of the day and a minute of the
hour to set the time.

PC Programming Manual 625

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

Name Description Value Range Links

End Date Specifies the month and day of the Month and Day PC Programming
(Month holiday end date. Click the cell to Manual References
Day) display a calendar. Select a month 10.5 PBX Configuration—
using the arrow buttons, and click on a [2-5] System—Holiday
day for the selected month. This Table
setting synchronises with the PBX’s
Holiday Table. → Holiday Table—End
Date—Month
→ Holiday Table—End
Date—Day
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
End Time Specifies the time of day on the Hour and Minute Feature Manual
specified date at which to end the References
holiday service. Click the cell to display 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
an array of hours and minutes. Select
an hour of the day and a minute of the
hour to set the time.
Retain If "Yes" is selected, the holiday will not No, Yes Feature Manual
Holiday end regardless of the end time setting. References
To end the holiday setting when "Yes" 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
is selected and the end time has
already passed, set Setting to
"Disable" or re-programme the settings
for the holiday.
Company Specify the greeting callers hear when None (do not Feature Manual
Greeting calling the affected trunks or ports playback): No References
No. during the holiday. greeting is heard. 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
No. 1–32: The
selected company
greeting is heard.
System Greeting:
The following
greeting is heard:
"Good morning/
Good afternoon/
Good evening.
Welcome to the
Unified Messaging
System".

626 PC Programming Manual

 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Service One of 4 incoming call services (Voice Voice Mail Feature Manual
Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Service: The caller References
or Custom Service) can be assigned to is transferred to 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
each holiday. After a greeting is played the Voice Mail
(if specified), the call will be transferred Service.
to the selected service. Automated
Attendant
Service: The caller
is transferred to
the Automated
Attendant Service.
Interview
Mailbox: The
caller is transferred
to an Interview
Mailbox.
Custom Service
Menu: The caller is
transferred to a
Custom Service
Menu.
Interview If "Interview Mailbox" or "Custom Interview Mailbox Feature Manual
Mailbox/ Service Menu" was selected for number, Custom References
Custom Service, specify the Interview Mailbox Service number 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Service or Custom Service here.
Menu
Trunk Specify which trunks will be subject to Trunk No. 1–96, All Feature Manual
Affected the holiday setting. Click Edit, and References
then select the check boxes for the 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
trunks to be subject to the holiday
setting, or select the All check box to
apply the holiday to all trunks. Click
OK to finish.
Port Specify which UM ports will be subject Port No. 1–30, All Feature Manual
Affected to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and References
then select the check boxes for the UM 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
ports to be subject to the holiday
setting, or select the All check box to
apply the holiday to all UM ports. Click
OK to finish.

PC Programming Manual 627

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

628 PC Programming Manual

 Section 24
UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Parameters menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 629

24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters

—Mailbox Group
Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a
message and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all
subscribers in the group. The system can maintain a maximum of 20 Mailbox Groups. Each group can have
a maximum of 200 members. For Personal Group Distribution Lists, see 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2]
Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Personal Distribution List.
Follow the steps below to create or edit a Mailbox Group.

Adding Mailbox Groups

1. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for each Mailbox Group to be used.
2. Click OK.

Editing Mailboxes
To edit a mailbox group, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Group list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select a mailbox group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.

Adding Mailboxes to a Group

1. In the Group Members column, click the Edit button of the group to add mailboxes to.
2. In the Subscribers To Add column, select the check boxes for the mailbox numbers to add to the
group.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK.

Recording a Name for the Group in the Edit Mailbox Group dialogue box
1. Select the desired Mailbox Group and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that there is at least 1 member in the group and that you have
clicked Apply since adding members to the group.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file". When "Record from extension" is
selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.

630 PC Programming Manual

 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

The Open dialogue box appears.

2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Group Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
List No. number is similar to a mailbox number Mailbox No. Max. References
and is used to send a message to all Length (3-8)] digits 3.2.2.17 Group
subscribers of the group. It must be a Distribution Lists
unique number; no other group or mailbox
can be assigned this number.
Group Specifies the group name. Max. 32 characters Feature Manual
Name References
3.2.2.17 Group
Distribution Lists

PC Programming Manual 631

24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group

24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters

—Extension Group
An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension
Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be
assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Up to 20 Extension Groups can be created, and each group can consist of 100 extensions (members). You
can add, delete, and review the extensions. Members of an Extension Group are able to share the same
mailbox and be notified by the Message Waiting Notification feature when a message is received.
Follow the steps below to edit an Extension Group.

Adding Extension Groups

1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for the Extension Group.
3. Click OK.

Editing Extension Groups

To edit Extension Group settings, select the desired Group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Extension Group list.

Deleting Extension Groups

1. Select an Extension Group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.

Editing Extension Group Members

1. In the Extension No. column, click the Click To Edit.. button to open the Group Members window.
2. Click the icon.
3. Enter the extension to add in Extension, and click OK.
4. Click OK.
The table on this screen will list any extensions that cannot be added, as well as the reason that extension
cannot be added to the group (i.e. it is already in another extension group, etc.).
Name Description Value Range Links
Group Specifies the Extension Group number. 2–8 digits Feature Manual
List No. References
Note
3.2.1.18 Extension
In order to configure an Extension Group, Group
set a group number here, then assign the
group number as the owner of a mailbox.
The Extension Group number is effectively
the extension number that is the owner of
the group’s mailbox.
Group Specifies the group name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
Name characters References
3.2.1.18 Extension
Group

632 PC Programming Manual

 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—

System Caller Name Announcement
Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 200 telephone numbers and record a caller name
for each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from
one of the pre-programmed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the pre-
programmed callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom
(Intercom Paging).
Caller ID Screening feature is only available when the Caller ID Screen parameter of the subscriber’s Class
of Service is set to "Yes". This feature is also enabled when subscribers select "Call screening" as the Call
Transfer method (see "3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status" in the Feature Manual).
The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting "Intercom Paging" as the Call Transfer method (see
"3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status" and/or "3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.18
Incomplete Call Handling Service" in the Feature Manual).
Follow the steps below to edit System Caller Name Announcements.

Adding a Caller Extension and Description

1. Specify the Caller-ID No. and Description for each entry that will be used.
2. Click OK.

Editing Caller ID Entries

To edit an entry, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select an entry.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.

Recording a Name for the extension in the Caller Information dialogue box
1. Select the desired Caller ID number and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that you have clicked Apply since you added the Caller ID No.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec

PC Programming Manual 633

24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate

– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Caller-ID No. Assigns the telephone number for Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
which the system announces the consisting of 0–9 References
pre-recorded caller name to 3.2.1.10 Caller Name
extension users. Announcement
Description Enters a name and/or description Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
of the Caller ID number. References
3.2.1.10 Caller Name
Announcement

634 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters

—Parameters
Daily Hours Setting
Name Description Value Range Links
Clock Format Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24- 12 H, 24 H
hour).

Note
The selected time format (12-hour or
24-hour) affects the time format of
reports as well as the time that
appears in e-mail notifications for new
messages.
Morning Hours Specifies the starting time of the morning HH:MM (HH: Feature Manual
Start Time greeting. Hour, MM: References
(HH:MM) Minute) 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting
Afternoon Hours Specifies the starting time of the HH:MM (HH: Feature Manual
Start Time afternoon greeting. Hour, MM: References
(HH:MM) Minute) 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting
Evening Hours Specifies the starting time of the evening HH:MM (HH: Feature Manual
Start Time greeting. Hour, MM: References
(HH:MM) Minute) 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting

Prompt Setting
These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
Name Description Value Range Links
Primary Language Specifies the default language Guidance No. 1–8 Feature Manual
to be used when another References
language is not selected in the 3.2.1.32 Multilingual
Multilingual Selection Menu. Service
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts

PC Programming Manual 635

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Language 1–5— Assigns a selection number (1– Language 1–5 PC Programming
Language (1–5) 9) to each language. Callers use Manual References
the numbers to select the 22.1 UM Configuration
desired languages for their —[3-1] UM Extension /
message prompts. This setting Trunk Service—Service
is required when either one or Group—Day, Night,
both of the following parameters Lunch, and Break Mode
are set to "Selective": - Prompt for No DTMF
a. Day, Night, Lunch, and Input Callers
Break Mode - Incoming 24.4 UM Configuration
Call Service Prompt —[5-4] System
Parameters—
b. External Message
Parameters—External
Delivery Prompt Mode
Message Delivery
For each selection of this
setting, related items within Feature Manual
"Language 1–5" can be set. References
3.2.1.32 Multilingual
Service
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Language 1–5— Specifies the language for the None, Guidance No. Feature Manual
Language current language selection 1–8 References
number. 3.2.1.32 Multilingual
Service
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Language 1–5— Specifies the number to be input None, 1–9 Feature Manual
DTMF to select the language set for References
the current language selection 3.2.1.32 Multilingual
number. Service
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Selection Menu Specifies the length of time that 0–20 s Feature Manual
Wait Time (0-20 s) the system waits for the caller to References
select a language by pressing 3.2.1.42 System
the appropriate dial key. If this Prompts
time period expires without the
selection number being entered,
the system uses the Primary
Language.
Selection Menu Specifies the number of times 1–3 Feature Manual
Repeat Cycle (1-3 the system will play the References
times) Multilingual Selection Menu. 3.2.1.32 Multilingual
Service

636 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Delay Time After Specifies the length of time (in 0–10 s Feature Manual
Connected seconds) that the system waits References
Received for after the line is connected for 3.2.1.42 System
Incoming (0-10 s) incoming calls before playing Prompts
the prompt.
Delay Time After Specifies the length of time (in 0–10 s Feature Manual
Connected seconds) that the system waits References
Received for after the line is connected for 3.2.1.42 System
Outgoing (0-10 s) outgoing calls before playing the Prompts
prompt.
System Guidance— Specifies the parameters which Guidance No. 1–8 PC Programming
System Guidance vary depending on the language Manual References
assigned as the System 24.4 UM Configuration
Guidance language. For each —[5-4] System
selection of this setting, related Parameters—
items within "System Guidance Parameters—Prompt
1–8" can be set. Setting—Primary
Language
System Guidance— Specifies the position of the Before: the system
Select Language— "AM/PM" announcement. announces "AM/PM"
Position of "AM/PM" before the time,
in Time Stamp such as P.M. 3:42.
After: the system
announces "AM/PM"
after the time, such
as 3:42 P.M.
24-h: the system
announces the time
in 24-h format, such
as 15:42.
System Guidance— Specifies when and if "O’clock" When at :00: the
Select Language is announced. system announces
—"O'clock" Prompt "O’clock" only on the
hour, such "one
o’clock".
Always: the system
announces
"O’clock" always.
None: No
announcement
System Guidance— Specifies the order of the month MM:DD: Month and
Select Language— and day for date Day
Month/Day Prompt announcements. DD:MM: Day and
Month
System Guidance— Specifies the way of POUND, HASH
Select Language— announcement for the "#"
# Announcement character when "US-English" or
Mode "English (UK)" is selected as
System Guidance.

PC Programming Manual 637

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

PBX Parameters
Specifies how the system will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing calls, and control message
waiting lamps on extensions.
Name Description Value Range Links
PBX Environment— Specifies the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, ,#
Operator Transfer sequence for and special codes
Sequence (Up to 16 transferring calls to D: Disconnecting
digits / [0-9 * # D R F T an operator’s F: Flash (Recall)
X , ;]) extension. R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code
PBX Environment— Specifies the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, ,#
Extension Transfer sequence for and special codes
Sequence (Up to 16 transferring calls to D: Disconnecting
digits / [0-9 * # D R F T any extension F: Flash (Recall)
X , ;]) except an R: Ringback Tone Detection
operator’s T: Dial Tone Detection
extension. ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code
PBX Environment— Specifies the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, ,# Feature
Alternate Extension sequence for and special codes Manual
Transfer Sequence transferring calls to D: Disconnecting References
(Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * extensions in the F: Flash (Recall)
3.2.1.1
# D R F T X , ;]) Alternate R: Ringback Tone Detection
Alternate
Extension Group. T: Dial Tone Detection
Extension
,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
Group
;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

638 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Dialling Parameters Specifies the length of time that the 10–60 s PC Programming
—Call Transfer No system waits before retrieving the Manual References
Answer Time (10-60 transferred call when there is no answer 12.1 PBX
s) at the destination extension. Configuration—[4-1]
Extension—Wired
Note
Extension—FWD No
Make sure that the duration of Call Answer Time
Transfer No Answer Time is longer 12.2 PBX
than the duration of Call Forwarding Configuration—[4-2]
No Answer Time at the PBX. Extension—Portable
Otherwise, the PBX may forward the Station—FWD No
call immediately to the extension’s Answer Time
Intercept Routing destination
according to PBX programming, rather
than return the call to the system.
Dialling Parameters Specifies the length of time that the 10–90 s
—Outgoing Call No system waits before concluding that there
Answer Time (10-90 is no answer at the outside number called.
s)
Dialling Parameters Specifies the pause time for "," used in 100–9900
—Pause Time for call sequences. ms, in
"," (100-9900 ms, units of
*100 ms) 100 ms
Dialling Parameters Specifies the pause time for ";" used in 100–9900
—Pause Time for call sequences. ms, in
";" (100-9900 ms, units of
*100 ms) 100 ms
Message Waiting Specifies a callback number to be Max. 32 Feature Manual
Notification— displayed with text reports of messages digits References
System Callback waiting notifications. The system callback 3.2.1.31 Message
No. (Up to 32 digits) number is displayed when the caller does Waiting Notification—
not enter his or her telephone number Telephone Device
when prompted by the system.

External Message Delivery

Determines how essential External Message Delivery features are carried out.
Name Description Value Range Links
Retry Times Specifies the number of times the 0–3 times Feature Manual
(times) system will attempt to deliver an (E/NE: 0–4 References
external message when the destination times, NZ: 0–5 3.2.2.13 External
is busy or does not answer. times, C: 0–9 Message Delivery Service
times, Taiwan/
Malaysia: 0–2
times)

PC Programming Manual 639

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Busy Delay Specifies the length of time (in 1–60 min Feature Manual
(min) minutes) the system waits to try to (Malaysia: 2– References
deliver an external message again 120 min) 3.2.2.13 External
when the destination is busy. Message Delivery Service
No Answer Specifies the length of time (in 60–120 min Feature Manual
Delay (min) minutes) the system waits to try to References
deliver an external message again 3.2.2.13 External
when the destination is not answering. Message Delivery Service
Outgoing Call Specifies the Unified Messaging On, Off PC Programming
UM Extensions extensions for the External Message Manual References
Delivery feature. 9.7 PBX Configuration—
If not specifying the Unified Messaging [1-1] Configuration—Slot
extensions at Extension Number, this —UM Port Property
setting is not available.
Feature Manual
References
3.2.2.13 External
Message Delivery Service
Message Specifies the maximum length (in 1–6 min Feature Manual
Length (1-6 minutes) of messages recorded for the References
min) External Delivery Message. 3.2.2.13 External
Message Delivery Service
Max. Messages Specifies the maximum number of 1–100 Feature Manual
for Mailboxes External Delivery Messages that can References
(1-100 msgs) be stored in one mailbox. 3.2.2.13 External
Message Delivery Service
System Specifies the maximum length of 1–9 min Feature Manual
External External Message Delivery calls. The References
Message timer begins counting when the called 3.2.2.13 External
Delivery party answers the call, and if the called Message Delivery Service
Duration Time party has not pressed the appropriate
(1-9 min) dial key to initiate message playback,
the system terminates the call when
this timer expires.
Company Specifies the company’s telephone Max. 32 digits
Telephone No. number. When the recipient has failed
(Up to 32 to retrieve the sender’s message
digits) because of he or she did not enter the
correct password, the system
announces the company’s telephone
number to the caller. The caller can
later call the company for assistance or
to speak to the message sender.

Intercom Paging Parameters

Unified Messaging Intercom Paging functions in conjunction with the Intercom Paging feature of the PBX. It
allows the system to page the called party (announce the caller’s name, line number, etc.) while the caller is

640 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

placed on hold. To utilise this feature, Intercom Paging must be available for the PBX, and the Unified
Messaging system must be properly programmed.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
No Answer Time Specifies the length of time (in 1–30 s Feature Manual
for Intercom Paging seconds) the system waits before References
(1-30 s) concluding Intercom Paging when 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging
there is no answer. The system will
return to the caller if the paged party
does not respond before this timer
expires.
Announcement Specifies the number of times the 1–3 times Feature Manual
Repeat Cycle (1-3 system announces the page. References
times) 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging
Example:
"I have a call for (name)".
Intercom Paging Specifies the number of times to 1–10 PC Programming Manual
Retry (1-10 times) retry paging when the called times References
subscriber has set Incomplete Call 20.1.2 UM Configuration—
Handling for No Answer/ [1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full
Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Setting—Incomplete Call
to "Page the mailbox owner by Handling for No Answer
intercom paging" and the subscriber 20.1.2 UM Configuration—
is busy or if there is no answer. [1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full
Setting—Incomplete Call
Handling for Busy
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging
Caller Recorded Determines whether or not the Disable, Feature Manual
Name Announce system announces the caller’s name Enable References
Mode during paging. (In order for the name 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging
to be announced, it must be
recorded beforehand.)

Fax Management
You can programme the system to automatically detect incoming fax calls and forward those calls to a fax
extension. You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for faxes; if the main fax
extension is not available to receive a fax, the system will forward the fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Name Description Value Range Links
Automatic Transfer Specifies the detection and Disable, Transfer to Feature Manual
of Incoming Fax destination of incoming fax calls. Fax Extension, References
Call Receive Fax 3.1.3 Fax Server
Note
The system can detect
incoming fax signals during the
first 30 seconds after it answers
incoming calls.

PC Programming Manual 641

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic Transfer Specifies the mailbox to receive the 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
of Incoming Fax fax if "Receive Fax" is selected for Mailbox No. Max. References
Call—Mailbox Automatic Transfer of Incoming Length (3-8)] digits 3.1.3 Fax Server
Number Fax Call.
Main Fax Extension Specifies the extension number of 1–8 digits Feature Manual
No. (1-8 digits) the main fax machine. References
3.1.3 Fax Server
Alternate Fax Specifies the extension number of 1–8 digits Feature Manual
Extension No. (1-8 the alternate fax machine. When References
digits) the main fax extension is busy or 3.1.3 Fax Server
does not answer within the time
specified under Fax No Answer
Time (5-60s), the system forwards
the fax call to the alternate fax
extension.
Fax No Answer Specifies the length of time (in 5–60 s Feature Manual
Time (5-60s) seconds) that the system waits for References
the main or alternate fax extension 3.1.3 Fax Server
to answer a fax call before taking
other action, such as notifying the
Fax Manager that the fax could not
be received.
Fax Manager Specifies the mailbox number of 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
Mailbox No. the Fax Manager. The system will Mailbox No. Max. References
notify the Fax Manager of the Length (3-8)] digits 3.1.3 Fax Server
status of fax calls depending upon
the settings of the Fax No Answer
Coverage Mode and Fax
Notification Mode parameters.
Fax No Answer Determines what action the system No: The system will Feature Manual
Coverage Mode takes when an incoming fax call not notify the Fax References
could not be answered by the main Manager when fax 3.1.3 Fax Server
or alternate fax extension. The calls were not
system can announce to the Fax answered.
Manager the number of Mbx: The system will
unanswered fax calls. The number announce the number
announced is the number of of unanswered fax
unanswered fax calls since the last calls to the Fax
time the system notified the Fax Manager when the
Manager. This announcement is Fax Manager logs in
heard when the Fax Manager logs to his or her mailbox.
in to his or her mailbox. Ext: The system will
announce the number
of unanswered fax
calls to the Fax
Manager by calling
the Fax Manager’s
extension.

642 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Fax Notification Determines what action the system No: The system will Feature Manual
Mode takes when an incoming fax call is not notify the Fax References
successfully received by the main Manager when fax 3.1.3 Fax Server
or alternate fax extension. The calls are answered.
system can announce to the Fax Mbx: The system will
Manager the number of received announce the number
fax calls. The number announced is of successfully
the number of received fax calls received fax calls to
since the last time the system the Fax Manager
notified the Fax Manager. when the Fax
Manager logs in to his
or her mailbox.
Ext: The system will
announce the number
of successfully
received fax calls to
the Fax Manager by
calling the Fax
Manager’s extension.
Mailbox for Fax If a DISA line detects a fax tone Mailbox no. (2–8 Feature Manual
Receiving and forwards the call to the UM digits) References
group’s floating extension number, 2.16.2 Automatic
the call is forwarded to the Fax Transfer
specified mailbox. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Fax Properties— Specifies the system name for the Max. 25 characters Feature Manual
System Name (Up fax server. This name will appear References
to 25 characters) on the cover page of fax messages 3.1.3 Fax Server
sent by the fax server.
Fax Properties— Specifies the system fax number Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
System Fax for the fax server. This number will References
Number (Max. 20 appear on the cover page of fax 3.1.3 Fax Server
digits) messages sent by the fax server.
Fax Properties— Specifies the number of times a fax 0–99 times Feature Manual
Number of Retries will be re-sent if initial sending fails. References
(0-99) If the fax cannot be sent within the 3.1.3 Fax Server
set number of retries, a non-
delivery notification voice message
will be sent to the target mailbox.
Fax Properties— Specifies the interval between 1–60 min Feature Manual
Retry Interval (1-60 retries when the initial sending of a References
min) fax fails. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Fax Properties— Specifies if a document will be re- Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Page transmitted if for any reason the fax References
Retransmission transmission is interrupted. 3.1.3 Fax Server

PC Programming Manual 643

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Fax Properties— Specifies the starting page of a fax From First Page: The Feature Manual
Page transmission that was interrupted entire fax document is References
Retransmission— and is being re-transmitted. re-transmitted. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Retransmission From Error Page:
Start Page The fax document is
re-transmitted, starting
from the page that
was interrupted.
Fax Properties— Specifies the amount of time the 0–255 s Feature Manual
Delayed Answer system waits before going off-hook References
Time (0-255 s) when receiving a call. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Fax Properties— Specifies the amount of time the 0–90 s Feature Manual
Response Wait system will wait for an answer References
Interval (s) when trying to send a fax. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Fax Properties— Specifies the information printed on LOG ID: The cover Feature Manual
Printed Information the cover page of sent faxes. page will include the References
time of sending, 3.1.3 Fax Server
sender information,
the sender’s fax
number (System Fax
Number), and the
number of pages.
From/To: The cover
page will include the
time of sending,
sender information,
the receiver’s name
and/or fax number,
and the number of
pages.
Fax Properties— Specifies where the printed Inside: Printed Feature Manual
Printed Information information for the fax is positioned information is References
Position positioned inside the 3.1.3 Fax Server
print area of the fax
document.
Outside: Printed
information is
positioned outside of
the margins of the
print area of the fax
document.

644 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Fax Properties— Specifies if sent faxes will have a Default Cover Page, Feature Manual
Cover Page cover page attached. If "Default No Cover Page References
Cover Page" is selected, the cover 3.1.3 Fax Server
page includes the following
information:
• Title: "FACSIMILE COVER
SHEET"
• Sending start time.
• Receiver’s name
• System name and system fax
number of sender
• Number of pages sent
Fax Properties—No When the system’s recording Transfer to Fax Feature Manual
Space for Receiving capacity is full and cannot receive Extension, No References
Coverage Mode faxes, the system can transfer Receiving 3.1.3 Fax Server
incoming faxes to a fax extension,
or not answer the incoming call (not
go off-hook).
Fax Properties— When the system is busy and Transfer to Fax Feature Manual
Fax Busy Coverage cannot receive faxes, the system Extension, No References
Mode can transfer incoming faxes to a fax Receiving 3.1.3 Fax Server
extension, or not answer the
incoming call (the extension will be
busy).

Disconnect Parameters
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Maximum Silence Specifies the length of silence detected by the system 0–60 s
Time (0-60 s) before the system disconnects the call.
Maximum Specifies the length of time the system waits when a 0–60 s
Continuous Tone continuous tone is detected before it disconnects the
Time (0-60 s) call.
Maximum Cyclic Specifies the length of time the system waits when a 0–60 s
Tone Time (0-60 s) cyclic tone is detected before it disconnects the call.
Maximum Call Specifies the maximum duration of calls. If the system 0–60 min
Duration (0-60 min) detects no DTMF signals for the specified amount of
time, it terminates the call. Calls will not be terminated
while playing or recording messages. If this setting is set
to "0", calls will not be terminated.

Transfer to Outside
These parameters determine how the system will transfer calls to a trunk via the following features: Call
Transfer Service, Custom Service, Personal Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call-through Service.

PC Programming Manual 645

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, Feature
Sequence—Call system uses to transfer calls to , # and special codes Manual
Transfer to trunks. D: Disconnecting References
Outside F: Flash (Recall)
3.2.1.7 Call
Sequence (Up to R: Ringback Tone Detection
Transfer to
16 digits / [0-9 * # T: Dial Tone Detection
Outside
D F R T , ; N]) ,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
Sequence—EFA system uses to transfer calls to , # and special codes
Transfer trunks using EFA (External D: Disconnecting
Sequence (Up to Feature Access). This setting F: Flash (Recall)
16 digits / [0-9 * # should match the settings of R: Ringback Tone Detection
D F R T , ; N A]) the PBX. T: Dial Tone Detection
,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
Sequence—EFA system uses to reconnect the , # and special codes
Transfer line when the party transferred D: Disconnecting
Reconnect with EFA (External Feature F: Flash (Recall)
Sequence on Access) is busy. This setting R: Ringback Tone Detection
Busy (Up to 16 should match the settings of T: Dial Tone Detection
digits / [0-9 * # D the PBX. ,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
F R T , ; N A]) ;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
Sequence—EFA system uses to reconnect the , # and special codes
Transfer line when the party transferred D: Disconnecting
Reconnect with EFA (External Feature F: Flash (Recall)
Sequence on No Access) does not answer. This R: Ringback Tone Detection
Answer (Up to 16 setting should match the T: Dial Tone Detection
digits / [0-9 * # D settings of the PBX. ,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
F R T , ; N A]) ;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

646 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Outside Transfer Specifies the answering Guidance: The system plays the Feature
Sequence—Call method the system uses to following guidance before Manual
Transfer to detect whether the destination connecting the line to the References
Outside Answer party has answered the destination party: "You have a
3.2.1.7 Call
Mode transferred trunk call. call. To answer the call, press [1].
Transfer to
Otherwise, press [2] and hang
Outside
up." If the destination party
presses "1", he or she will be
able to answer the transferred
trunk call. The system continues
playing this guidance for the time
specified in Dialling Parameters
—Outgoing Call No Answer
Time (10-90 s) in Dialling
Parameters/MSW Notification.
If the transferred party does not
answer the call within this time,
the system considers it as a No
Answer call.
Analyze: The system monitors
the status of the trunk,
recognises that the destination
party goes off-hook, and
connects the line.
Trunk Group (1– Specifies a trunk group for 1–96
96)—Trunk Group making settings for EFA
No. Transfer, Caller ID Callback,
and Outside Line Access
Sequence for Caller ID
Callback. Selecting different
trunk groups from this drop-
down list allows settings to be
made for each trunk group.
Trunk Group (1– Specifies whether or not the Enable, Disable
96)—EFA system uses EFA (External
Transfer Feature Access) when
transferring incoming trunk
calls to another trunk. If set to
"Enable", the system transfers
incoming trunk calls to another
trunk according to "EFA
Transfer Sequence" specified
in "Transfer to Outside". If set
to "Disable", the system
transfers incoming trunks calls
to another trunk according to
Outside Transfer Sequence
—Call Transfer to Outside
Sequence (Up to 16 digits /
[0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])
specified in Transfer to
Outside.

PC Programming Manual 647

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Trunk Group (1– Specifies whether or not the Enable, Disable
96)—Caller ID system allows a subscriber to
Callback call back the party who left a
message in his or her mailbox
by using the caller ID
information sent from the PBX.
This setting applies to the
trunk number used when the
message with Caller ID
information was left in his or
her mailbox.
Trunk Group (1– Specifies the sequence of Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
96)—Outside Line trunk access numbers for , # and special codes
Access Sequence Caller ID Callback. This D: Disconnecting
for Caller ID parameter is available when F: Flash (Recall)
Callback (Up to the system executes Caller ID R: Ringback Tone Detection
16 digits / [0-9 * # Callback without using EFA. T: Dial Tone Detection
D F R T , ; ]) ,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Number of Digits Specifies the number of digits 1–20
in Telephone for local area telephone
Number (1-20) numbers. According to this
parameter, telephone numbers
dialled by the system can be
distinguished as either local
calls or long distance calls.

E-mail Option
E-mail Integration allows the system to send new message notification or to send recorded voice messages
or fax message data as file attachments to subscribers via e-mail. The following settings must be made in
order for the system to use E-mail Integration features.
Name Description Value Range Links
Mail Address (Up Specifies the mail address of the Max. 128 Feature Manual
to 128 ASCII Unified Messaging system. characters References
characters) 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail Device
Full Name (Up to Specifies the full name that will Max. 64 Feature Manual
64 ASCII appear in e-mail messages sent by characters References
characters) the Unified Messaging system. 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail Device
Maximum Specifies whether voice messages Unlimited, Feature Manual
Message Length sent as e-mail attachments will have Other References
(Selection) a limit to their length. 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail Device

648 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Maximum Specifies the maximum length of 1–30 min Feature Manual
Message Length voice messages sent as e-mail References
(Other) (1-30 min) attachments. 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail Device
Note
If you attach a voice message
that is longer than this setting,
surplus parts of the message
may be discarded when sending
the e-mail.

Message Client
Name Description Value Range Links
Password Lockup Specifies the amount of time access will be locked after 5–60 min
Time (5-60 min) a password has been incorrectly entered 3 consecutive
times.

Mailbox
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Mailbox No. Specifies the maximum allowed number of digits for a mailbox 3–8 digits
Max. Length number.
(3-8)
Note
This setting cannot be changed to a smaller value if mailboxes
exist with a number of digits greater than that smaller value.
Those mailboxes must be re-numbered or deleted before this
setting can be changed to a smaller value.

PC Programming Manual 649

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

650 PC Programming Manual

 Section 25
UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 651

25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

Global Parameters
Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations.
Name Description Value Range Links
Maximum Time to Wait Specifies the length of time that the system waits 5–200 (× 100
for Dial Tone (500-20000 for dial tone detection. ms)
ms, *100 ms)
Delay After Dialling Specifies the length of time that the system waits 0–250 s
Before Onhook (0-250 s) for an answer when making an outside call. If no
answer is detected, the system disconnects the
call.
DTMF Cut Length (0-500 Specifies the length of time for DTMF to be 0–500 ms
ms) deleted when it is detected while recording.
Minimum Message Specifies the minimum message recording length. 0–9 s
Length (0-9 s) Messages shorter than the specified minimum
recording length are discarded from the mailbox.

652 PC Programming Manual

 Section 26
UM Configuration—[7] System Security

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 653

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Manager
Name Description Value Range Links
Login Failures Specifies the number of times an invalid 1–99 times
before password can be entered, when the System
Disconnection (1-99 Manager or Message Manager tries to log
times) in to the system using a telephone, before
the call is disconnected.
System Manager Enables or disables access to the Unified Disable,
Access from Messaging system from the System Enable
Telephone Manager’s telephone.
Password for If "Enable" is selected in System Manager Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
System Manager Access from Telephone, assign a References
(Up to 16 numeric numerical password here for the System 3.1.2.7 System
digits) Manager to login to the system. Security
Password for Specifies the password for the System 4–16 Feature Manual
System Manager Manager for accessing the Unified characters (A– References
(Message Client) Messaging system from the messaging Z, a–z, 1–9) 3.1.2.7 System
client. Security
Note
This setting requires the installation of
an Activation Key for Unified Messaging
E-mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) for the
number of users that will be accessing
their UM mailbox using a client software
programme.
Message Manager Enables or disables access to the system Disable, Feature Manual
Access from from the Message Manager’s telephone. Enable References
Telephone 3.1.2.7 System
Security
Password for If "Enable" is selected in System Manager Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Message Manager Access from Telephone, assign a References
(Up to 16 numeric numerical password here for the Message 3.1.2.7 System
digits) Manager to login to the system. Security
Password for Specifies the password for the Message 4–16 Feature Manual
Message Manager Manager for accessing the Unified characters (A– References
(Message Client) Messaging system from the messaging Z, a–z, 1–9) 3.1.2.7 System
client. Security
Note
This setting requires the installation of
an Activation Key for Unified Messaging
E-mail Notification (KX-NSU2xx) for the
number of users that will be accessing
their UM mailbox using a client software
programme.

654 PC Programming Manual

 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Subscriber
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Minimum Password Specifies the minimum length (number of digits) 0–16
Length (0-16 digits) of mailbox passwords.
Enable Login Failure Specifies whether the system disconnects a call Disable,
Disconnection when the subscriber enters an invalid password Enable
n times. (n=the value specified under Login
Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times))
Login Failures before Specifies the number of times an invalid 1–99 times
Disconnection (1-99 password can be entered before the system
times) disconnects the call. In order to use this feature,
Enable Login Failure Disconnection must be
set to "Enable".
Default Password for Specifies whether the default password is Disable, Feature
New Mailboxes assigned to new mailboxes automatically when Enable Manual
they are created. References
3.1.2.7
System
Security
Default Password— Select this option to specify a fixed password for Max. 16
Fix digit (which length all new mailboxes. The number of digits in the digits
is minimum password password must be equal or greater than the
length) value specified in Minimum Password Length
(0-16 digits).
Default Password— Select this option to specify default mailbox 1 digit: 0–9
Prefix (1 or 2 digits) + passwords using a prefix pattern. The value 2 digits: 00–
Mailbox No entered here will be combined with the mailbox 99
number to become the default password. For
example, if "55" is entered here, and then
mailbox 101 is created, its default password will
be "55101". 1 digit or 2 digits can be used as
the prefix.

PC Programming Manual 655

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

656 PC Programming Manual

 Section 27
Router Configuration

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Router Configuration menu of the Setup screen
of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 657

27.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1] Router Information

27.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1] Router

Information

27.1.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-1] Router Information

—Connection Status
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection This screen shows the connection status of the
Status built-in router function.
Connection Indicates the connection mode of the WAN Disable, Static IP, DHCPc,
Mode (reference only). PPPoE
Router Status Indicates the operation status of the router In-Service, Out-of-Service,
function (reference only). Fault
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
“Out-of-Service” is displayed.
WAN IP Indicates the IP address of the WAN (reference Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Address only). 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
information will not be displayed on this screen.
Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask of the LAN (reference Blank, 0–
only). 255.0-255.0-255.0–255
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode, (except 0.0.0.0 and
information will not be displayed on this screen. 255.255.255.255)
Gateway Indicates the IP address of the gateway on the Blank, 1.0.0.1–
LAN (reference only). 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
information will not be displayed on this screen.
Preferred DNS Indicates the IP address of the primary DNS Blank, 1.0.0.1–
IP Address (reference only). 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
information will not be displayed on this screen.
Alternative Indicates the IP address of the secondary DNS Blank, 1.0.0.1–
DNS IP (reference only). 223.255.255.254
Address If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
information will not be displayed on this screen.

27.1.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-2] Router Information

—PPPoE Status

Name Description Value Range Links

PPPoE Session Indicates the PPPoE session name (reference Max. 20 characters
Name only).

658 PC Programming Manual

 27.1.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-2] Router Information—PPPoE Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Status Indicates the PPPoE connection status (reference No Connect: The
only). session is not
To change the status, click the button next to the connected.
Status display (It will display Connect or Connecting: The
Disconnect depending on the current status). session is in the process
of being connected (not
Note yet connected with the
• If IP Address Configuration Mode shows server).
"-", the button will be greyed out. Connected: The
session is connected.
• If Connection Mode (refer to 27.2.1 Router Fault: A fault has
Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN— occurred (before or
Connection Settings—Connection Mode) is during connection).
PPPoE, and Session Enabled (refer to Disconnected: The
27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup— session was
[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings— disconnected by the
PPPoE—Session Enabled) is set to user.
Disable, the button will be greyed out.
• The button is available only for Installer
level and User (Administrator) level
accounts.
IP Address Indicates the IP address configuration mode - (hyphen), Dynamic IP,
Configuration (reference only). Static IP, Unnumbered
Mode
IP Address Indicates the PPPoE IP address provided by the 0.0.0.0, 1.0.0.1–
ISP (reference only). 223.255.255.254
If Connection Mode (refer to 27.2.1 Router
Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection
Settings—Connection Mode) is not PPPoE, "-" is
displayed.
Elapsed Time Indicates the time elapsed since this port acquired 00:00:00–99:59:59
the link (reference only).
Detail Indicates the number of packets sent from this 0–9999999
Information— port since the last reset or manual clear
Sent Packets (reference only).
Detail Indicates the number of packets received on this 0–9999999
Information— port since the last reset or manual clear
Received (reference only).
Packets
Detail Indicates the largest packet size permitted for 256–1500, [hyphen]
Information— network transmission (reference only).
MTU If the MTU value range for PPPoE is outside of
256–1492, "-" is displayed.
If the MTU value range for PPP/Ethernet is
outside of 256–1500, "-" is displayed.

PC Programming Manual 659

27.1.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-3] Router Information—VPN Status

27.1.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-3] Router Information

—VPN Status
Name Description Value Range Links
VPN - Tunnel This screen indicates the status of VPN tunnel
Connection connections (reference only).
Status
Name Indicates the SA (Security Association) Names ASCII characters
(reference only). (Max. 20 characters)
When connected with VPSS, "VPSS_xx" is displayed,
where "xx" is the VPN location number (00–16).
The SA names are displayed in the order of VPSS
settings, IPsec settings and the ISAKMP configuration.
If SA is not registered when the Remote IP Address of
ISAKMP is static, the SA name is not displayed.
Type Indicates the configured VPN protocol mode (reference Tunnel, Transport
only).
Client Indicates the IP address of the VPN client (reference 0.0.0.0, 1.0.0.0–
only). 223.255.255.255
Status Indicates the status of each VPN tunnel connection No Connect,
(reference only). Connected, Fault
Action Click this button and select Connect or Disconnect for Disconnect, Connect
VPN tunnel connection. If No Connect or Fault is
indicated for Status, Connect is displayed. Otherwise
Disconnect is displayed.
However, if Dynamic is selected for Remote IP
Address Type in 27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—
[3-2] IPSec—Remote IP Address Type, Disconnect is
always displayed. This setting is available for the
Installer level account and User (Administrator) level
account.
RCV Indicates the number of packets received at this port 0–9999999
since the last reset (reference only).
This value will reset to zero after the maximum value is
reached.
SEND Indicates the number of packets sent from this port since 0–9999999
the last reset (reference only).
This value will reset to zero after the maximum value is
reached.
Elapsed Time Indicates the time elapsed since the last reset (reference 00:00:00–99:59:59
only).
This value will reset to zero after the maximum value is
reached.

660 PC Programming Manual

 27.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2] WAN

27.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2] WAN

27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection

Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Mode Selects the connection mode of the Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, Disable
WAN.

Static IP
Allows the PBX to assign a specific IP address.
If Static IP is selected for Connection Mode, this screen is displayed.
Name Description Value Range Links
WAN IP Specifies the IP address of the WAN. Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Address 223.255.255.254
Subnet Specifies the subnet mask of the WAN. Blank, 0–255.0–
Mask 255.0–255.0–255
(except 0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255)
Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default Blank, 1.0.0.1–
gateway of the WAN. 223.255.255.254
Preferred Specifies the IP address of the primary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC Programming
DNS IP DNS server. 223.255.255.254 Manual
Address References
Note
28.1 Network Service
• Since communication over a VPN —[1] IP Address/
will not be possible, do not set a Ports—Basic Settings
destination IP address in the VPN
for this setting. Installation
Manual
• If this setting is configured at the
References
same time as the following setting,
the following setting takes 8.6.5 DNS Client
precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Preferred DNS IP
Address

PC Programming Manual 661

27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Alternative Specifies the IP address of the secondary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC Programming
DNS IP DNS server. 223.255.255.254 Manual
Address References
Note
28.1 Network Service
• Since communication over a VPN —[1] IP Address/
will not be possible, do not set a Ports—Basic Settings
destination IP address in the VPN
for this setting. Installation
Manual
• If this setting is configured at the
References
same time as the following setting,
the following setting takes 8.6.5 DNS Client
precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Alternative DNS IP
Address

DHCP
Allows the PBX to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server.
If DHCP is selected for Connection Mode, this screen is displayed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Host Name Specifies the host name if a host name is 1–63 characters
assigned by the ISP.
Obtain Selects whether to obtain the IP address of Enable, Disable
Gateway the default gateway assigned by the DHCP
address server.
automatically
Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default Blank, 1.0.0.1–
gateway of the WAN. 223.255.255.254
DNS Setting Selects the method of specifying the IP Auto, Static
address of a DNS server.

662 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Preferred DNS Specifies the IP address of the primary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC Programming
IP Address DNS server. 223.255.255.254 Manual
If the DNS server address is set manually, References
that value takes priority over the value set
28.1 Network
by DHCP.
Service—[1] IP
Note Address/Ports—
Basic Settings
• Since communication over a VPN
will not be possible, do not set a Installation
destination IP address in the VPN Manual
for this setting. References
• If this setting is configured at the 8.6.5 DNS Client
same time as the following setting,
the following setting takes
precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Preferred DNS IP
Address
Alternative Specifies the IP address of the secondary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC Programming
DNS IP DNS server. 223.255.255.254 Manual
Address If the DNS server address is set manually, References
that value takes priority over the value set
28.1 Network
by DHCP.
Service—[1] IP
Note Address/Ports—
Basic Settings
• Since communication over a VPN
will not be possible, do not set a Installation
destination IP address in the VPN Manual
for this setting. References
• If this setting is configured at the 8.6.5 DNS Client
same time as the following setting,
the following setting takes
precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Alternative DNS IP
Address

PPPoE
Allows the PBX to receive an IP address from a PPPoE server.
If PPPoE is selected for Connection Mode, this screen is displayed.
Name Description Value Range Links
PPPoE Session If requested by the ISP, enter the PPPoE Max. 20 Characters
Name session name.
Session Selects whether to initiate the PPPoE Enable, Disable
Enabled session.

PC Programming Manual 663

27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

User name Specifies the user name provided by the 0–64 characters
ISP.
Password Specifies the password provided by the 0–64 characters
ISP.
Service Name If requested by the ISP, enter the PPPoE 0–24 characters
service name.
Authentication Selects the authentication method. Auto, CHAP
Method Auto means that PAP, CHAP or None is
selected for the necessary authentication.
IP Address Selects the IP address configuration Dynamic IP, Static
Configuration mode. IP, Unnumbered
Mode
– Dynamic IP: Select this if the IP
address is assigned by the ISP.
– Static IP: Select this if the ISP requires
you to use a single global IP address.
– Unnumbered: Select this if the ISP
requires you to use the multiple global
IP addresses.
IP Address Specifies the IP address when IP Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Address Configuration Mode is set to 223.255.255.254
Static IP or Unnumbered.
If Static IP is selected for IP Address
Configuration Mode, enter the IP
address assigned by the DHCP server.
If Unnumbered is selected for IP
Address Configuration Mode, enter one
of the global IP addresses provided by the
ISP.
Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask when IP 0–255.0–255.0–
Address Configuration Mode is set to 255.0–255 (except
Static IP or Unnumbered. 0.0.0.0 and
If Static IP is selected for IP Address 255.255.255.255)
Configuration Mode, enter the subnet
mask assigned by the DHCP server.
If Unnumbered is selected for IP
Address Configuration Mode, enter one
of the subnet mask provided by the ISP.
DNS Setting Selects the method of setting the DNS Auto, Static
address.
– Auto: Select this if the DNS IP address
is assigned by the ISP.
– Static: Select this to enter the DNS IP
address manually.

664 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Preferred DNS Specifies the IP address of the primary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC
IP Address DNS when DNS Setting is set to Static. 223.255.255.254 Programming
Manual
Note References
• Since communication over a VPN 28.1 Network
will not be possible, do not set a Service—[1] IP
destination IP address in the VPN Address/Ports—
for this setting. Basic Settings
• If this setting is configured at the Installation
same time as the following setting,
Manual
the following setting takes
precedence.
References
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP 8.6.5 DNS Client
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Preferred DNS IP
Address
Alternative Specifies the IP address of the secondary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC
DNS IP DNS when DNS Setting is set to Static. 223.255.255.254 Programming
Address Manual
Note References
• Since communication over a VPN 28.1 Network
will not be possible, do not set a Service—[1] IP
destination IP address in the VPN Address/Ports—
for this setting. Basic Settings
• If this setting is configured at the Installation
same time as the following setting,
Manual
the following setting takes
precedence.
References
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP 8.6.5 DNS Client
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Alternative DNS IP
Address
PPP Keep- Selects whether Keep-Alive is enabled or LCP ECHO: Select
Alive not. to detect PPPoE
When the server of the ISP is link failures.
disconnected for some reason, this ICMP: Select to
function keeps the PPPoE Connection detect network
alive automatically. failures.
Disable: Disables
this setting.
Advanced Click here to open the advanced setting
Setting menu for PPPoE - Advanced.

PC Programming Manual 665

27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

PPPoE - Advanced
Value
Name Description Links
Range
MTU If the MTU value is assigned by the ISP, set it here (1280– 1280–
1492). 1492
If the MTU value is outside of the value range below, 1280 or
1492 is displayed.
Connection on When PPPoE for IPv6 is used to connect to the ISP, this setting Enable,
Demand is always set to Enable. Disable
Disconnect when If Enable is selected, configure the Disconnect when Idle Enable,
Idle timeout timeout—Max Idle Time (x60s) setting. Disable
If Disable is selected, Keep-Alive timer is not available.
Disconnect when Specifies a maximum idle time for which the internet connection 1–1440
Idle timeout— is maintained during inactivity. min
Max Idle Time If Disable is selected for Connection on Demand or
(x60s) Disconnect when Idle timeout, this setting is greyed out.
LCP ECHO If LCP ECHO is selected for PPP Keep-Alive, configure the
parameters below.
LCP ECHO— Specifies the LCP Echo Interval in seconds. 1–3600 s
LCP Echo This value sets the interval between LCP echo requests sent by
Interval (s) the PBX to the ISP.
If LCP ECHO is not selected for 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings—PPPoE —
PPP Keep-Alive, this item is greyed out.
LCP ECHO— Specifies the number of times that the PBX tries to get a 1–255
LCP Echo response to an LCP echo request before the PPPoE
Retries connection is considered inactive.
If LCP ECHO is not selected for 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings—PPPoE —
PPP Keep-Alive, this item is greyed out.
LCP ECHO— Specifies the number of times that the PBX is judged to be 1–255
PPPoE recovered after the PPPoE connection has been re-established.
Recovery Time If LCP ECHO is not selected for 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings—PPPoE —
PPP Keep-Alive, this item is greyed out.
TCP MSS Selects the setting method of the TCP MSS (Maximum Auto,
Segment Size) value. Fixed,
This function is only available for IPv4 packets. Disable
– Auto: MTU-40 is specified.
– Fixed: Specifies the TCP MSS Value.
If Auto is selected, MTU-40 is specified. However if MTU is
smaller than MRU, MRU-40 is specified.

Note
MTU: Maximum Transmission Unit, MRU: Maximum
Receive Unit

666 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-2] WAN—Network Monitor

Value
Name Description Links
Range
TCP MSS—TCP Specifies the TCP MSS—TCP MSS Value. If the TCP MSS 536–1452
MSS Value value is outside of the value range below, 536 or 1452 is
(536–1452) displayed.
If Fixed is not selected for TCP MSS, this item is greyed out.

27.2.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-2] WAN—Network

Monitor
This screen is used to configure the network monitoring functions for the WAN.

Network Monitor (Basic)

Name Description Value Range Links
ICMP Keep-Alive Specifies whether to keep the PPPoE connection Enable, Disable
Enabled alive automatically by using ICMP echo
mechanism.
Destination IP Specifies the destination IP address for ICMP echo 1.0.0.1–
Address requests. 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep-Alive
Enabled, this setting cannot be specified.
Advanced Setting Click here to open the advanced setting menu for
Network Monitor (Advanced).

Network Monitor (Advanced)

Name Description Value Range Links
ICMP Keep- Specifies whether to keep the PPPoE connection Enable, Disable
Alive Enabled alive automatically by using the ICMP echo
mechanism.
Destination IP Specifies the destination IP address for ICMP echo 1.0.0.1–
Address requests. 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep-Alive Enabled,
this setting cannot be specified.
Interval (s) Specifies the interval of the polling timer used for 1–3600 s
sending ICMP echo requests.
Fail Count Specifies the maximum count of ICMP echo failures. 1–255
If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep-Alive Enabled,
this setting cannot be specified.
Recovery Count Specifies the number of ICMP echo replies received 1–255
for ICMP recovery to be detected from the fault state.
If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep-Alive Enabled,
this setting cannot be specified.

27.2.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-3] WAN—Protocol

Bridge

PC Programming Manual 667

27.2.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-4] WAN—Dynamic DNS

Name Description Value Range Links

IPv6 Bridge Selects whether or not to enable IPv6 Pass Through. Enable, Disable
If the IPv6 function is enabled, this setting is disabled.
PPPoE Bridge Select whether or not to enable PPPoE Bridge. Enable, Disable

27.2.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-4] WAN—Dynamic

DNS
Name Description Value Range Links
Dynamic Selects whether to utilise a dynamic DNS service. Disable, Enable
DNS
DDNS Selects the method of specifying a DDNS server. IP address, URL
Server If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings
on this screen cannot be configured.
IP Address Specifies the DDNS Server IP Address. Blank (0.0.0.0),
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS or URL as 1.0.0.1–
DDNS Server, the settings on this screen cannot be 223.255.255.254
configured.
URL Specifies the DDNS URL. Maximum 253
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS or IP Address characters
as DDNS Server, the settings on this screen cannot be
configured.
User Name Specifies the use name for DDNS service. Maximum 64
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings characters
on this screen cannot be configured.
Password Specifies the password for DDNS service. Maximum 64
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings characters
on this screen cannot be configured.
Domain Specifies the domain name for DDNS service. Maximum 128
Name If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings characters
on this screen cannot be configured.
Update Time Specifies the update time for DDNS service. 0, 10–1440 min
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings
on this screen cannot be configured.
Setting "0" specifies an unlimited update time.

668 PC Programming Manual

 27.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3] LAN

27.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3] LAN

27.3.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-1] LAN—IPv4

Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Setting—Host Indicates the host name 1–63 characters
Name (reference only).
LAN Setting—IP Indicates the IP address 1.0.0.1–
Address (reference only). 223.255.255.254
LAN Setting— Indicates the subnet mask 0–255.0–255.0–
Subnet Mask (reference only). 255.0–255 (except
0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255)
LAN Setting— Indicates the IP address of the 1.0.0.1–
Default Gateway default gateway (reference only). 223.255.255.254
LAN Setting—Local Indicates the local domain name Max. 128 characters
Domain for your network (reference only).
LAN Setting— You can click the Network PC
Network Service Service LAN Setting link to open Programming
LAN Setting the system network service Manual
settings screen for LAN. References
28.1 Network
Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—
Basic Settings—
LAN Setting
Dynamic NAPT— Selects whether to utilise a Enable, Disable
Dynamic NAPT dynamic NAPT (Network Address
Enabled Port Translation).
Port Forward— Click here to open the advanced
Advanced Setting setting menu for port forward.
Multicast—IGMP Selects whether to use IGMP Disable, Enable
Proxy (Internet Group Management
Protocol) which your multicasting
server specifies over IPv4.
Protocol— Click here to open the advanced
Advanced Setting setting menu for protocol.

Port Forward Setting

Name Description Value Range Links
Port Specifies whether to set port forwarding for each entry. (Up to Enable, Disable
Forward 64 entries)
Protocol Selects a protocol type to be used when sending/receiving TCP, UDP,
data over the Internet. TCP&UDP, ICMP

PC Programming Manual 669

27.3.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-1] LAN—IPv4

Name Description Value Range Links

WAN Port Specifies the start port for the WAN port range. 1–65535
Start If ICMP is selected for Protocol, this item is greyed out.

Note
• If neither the start port nor the end port is set, any port
can be used.
• The user cannot reserve system ports for the WAN
side.
• If a range is set, ensure that the number of internal
ports and external ports match each other.
WAN Port Specifies the end port for the WAN port range. If this setting 1–65535
End is blank, only the port set for WAN Port Start is available for
port forwarding.
If ICMP is selected for Protocol, this item is greyed out.

Note
• If neither the start port nor the end port is set, any port
can be used.
• The user cannot reserve system ports for the WAN
side.
• If a range is set, ensure that the number of internal
ports and external ports match each other.
• Ensure that the end range value is greater than the
start range value.
Local IP Specifies the IP address of equipment on the LAN. 1.0.0.1–
Address 223.255.255.254
LAN Port Specifies the start port for the LAN port range. 1–65535
Start If ICMP is selected for Protocol, this item is greyed out.

Note
• If neither the start port nor the end port is set, any port
can be used.
• The user cannot reserve system ports for the WAN
side.
• If a range is set, ensure that the number of internal
ports and external ports match each other.

670 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-2] LAN—DNS Server

Name Description Value Range Links

LAN Port Specifies the end port for the LAN port range. 1–65535
End If this setting is blank, only the port set for LAN Port Start is
available for port forwarding.
If ICMP is selected for Protocol, this item is greyed out.

Note
• If neither the start port nor the end port is set, any port
can be used.
• The user cannot reserve system ports for the WAN
side.
• If a range is set, ensure that the number of internal
ports and external ports match each other.
• Ensure that the end range value is greater than the
start range value.

Protocol Setting
Name Description Value Range Links
ICMP (WAN/LAN)—Send Selects whether to send ICMP redirect Enable,
ICMP Redirect messages. Disable
ICMP (WAN/LAN)—Allow Selects whether to enter a new IP address in Enable,
ICMP Redirect the routing table in accordance with ICMP Disable
redirect message.

27.3.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-2] LAN—DNS Server

Name Description Value Range Links
DNS Server Enabled Selects whether to enable the DNS server. Enable,
Disable
DNS Port No. Indicates the DNS port number (reference only). 53
DNS Cache Timeout Specifies the DNS cache timeout which is the time-to- 0–86400 s
(s) live (TTL) value.
If Disable is selected for DNS Server Enabled, this
item is greyed out.
DNS Server— Click here to open the advanced setting menu for DNS
Advanced Setting Server.

DNS Server—Advanced—A Record

Name Description Value Range Links
Enabled Selects whether to enable the DNS server. Enable,
Disable
Host Name Specifies a DNS host name. 1–254
characters

PC Programming Manual 671

27.3.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-2] LAN—DNS Server

Name Description Value Range Links

IP Address Specifies the IPv4 IP address for the DNS host name. 1.0.0.1–
223.255.255.
254

DNS Server—Advanced—PTR(A) Record

Name Description Value Range Links
Enabled Selects whether to specify the PTR(A) record. Enable,
Disable
IP Address Specifies the IPv4 IP address. 1.0.0.1–
223.255.255.
254
Host Name Specifies the DNS host name for the DNS Server. 1–254
characters

DNS Server—Advanced—CNAME Record

Name Description Value Range Links
Enabled Selects whether to specify the CNAME record. Enable,
Disable
CNAME Specifies the CNAME for the DNS host name. 1–254
characters
Host Name Specifies the DNS host name. 1–254
characters

672 PC Programming Manual

 27.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-4] Routing

27.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-4] Routing

Name Description Value Range Links
Routing Selects whether to enable static routing. Enable, Disable
Destination IP Specifies the IP address of the destination Blank, 1.0.0.0–
Address host or network. 223.255.255.255
Netmask Specifies the netmask for the Destination Blank, 0–255.0–255.0–
IP Address. 255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0)
Interface or Selects the method of specifying the Gateway, PPPoE
Gateway Destination IP Address.
Gateway Address Specifies the IP address of the gateway. Blank, 1.0.0.1–
(Next Hop) If Interface or Gateway is set to PPPoE, 223.255.255.254
this item is greyed out.

PC Programming Manual 673

27.5 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-5] DMZ

27.5 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-5] DMZ

Name Description Value Range Links
DMZ Selects whether to enable the DMZ host function. Enable, Disable
DMZ Host IP Specifies the DMZ host IP address connected to 1.0.0.1–
Address (Only the same segment as the LAN port. (Except IP 223.255.255.254
Local Host address of the LAN port)
available) If Disable is selected for DMZ, this item is greyed
out.

674 PC Programming Manual

 27.6 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-6] MAC Address

27.6 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-6] MAC

Address
Name Description Value Range Links
MAC Address Clone Selects whether to clone the MAC Enable, Disable
address of your PC’s network
adaptor onto this router.
MAC Address Specifies the MAC address of your 00:00:00:00:00:00– PC
(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) PC’s network adaptor. FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Programming
After specifying the MAC address, Manual
you must restart the PBX. It is References
recommended to use the System
5.4 System Control
Reset command of the PBX.
—System Reset
If Disable is selected for MAC
Address Clone, this item is
greyed out.

PC Programming Manual 675

27.7 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-1] One Touch Security

27.7 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-1] One

Touch Security
Value
Name Description Links
Range
SPI—WAN/LAN Selects whether to enable SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection). Disable,
Port If a packet being received from the WAN/LAN sides is Enable
inspected, and judged to be a corrupt packet, it is
intercepted. By comparing the packet to static filtering
(packet filtering through header information), Internet data
can be sent more safely. A detection record is noted in the
log.
SPI—Log Output Selects whether to output logs. Disable,
Enable
DoS Protection— Selects whether to enable DoS (Denial of Service) protection. Disable,
WAN Port If Enable is selected, harmful data from the WAN side is Enable
detected, and the packet is intercepted. A detection record is
noted in the log.
The following types of scans are performed:
– TCP SYN Scan
– TCP FIN Scan
– TCP RST Scan
– TCP NULL Scan
– TCP XMAS Scan
– UDP Port Scan
– IP Spoofing Scan
– Land Attack Scan
– SYN Attack Scan
– Ping of Death Scan
"Smurf Attack" denial-of-service attacks can be always
detected.
If an ICMP broadcast or multicast packet is received on the
LAN or WAN side, it will not be answered.
DoS Protection— Selects whether to output logs. Disable,
Log Output Enable

676 PC Programming Manual

 27.7 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-1] One Touch Security

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Private IP Address Specifies whether to deny access to private IP addresses. Disable,
Filtering— If Enable is selected, the following types of packets can be Enable
WAN/LAN Port intercepted:
– when the source IP address from LAN to WAN is a private
address.
– when the destination IP address from WAN to LAN is a
private address.
A detection record is noted in the log.
If the IP address on the WAN side is private, this setting
cannot be configured.
Private IP Address Selects whether to output logs. Disable,
Filtering—Log Enable
Output
ICMP Echo Reply Selects whether to reply to ICMP echo requests from the Disable,
—WAN Port WAN. Enable
You can specify TCMP echo reply from the LAN settings at
28.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security. A
detection record is noted in the log.
ICMP Echo Reply Selects whether to output the logs. Disable,
—Log Output Enable
NET BIOS Packet Selects whether to enable NET BIOS packet filtering. Disable,
Filtering—LAN If Enable is selected, the following types of services (and Enable
Port -> WAN Port port numbers) can be intercepted:
– microsoft-rpc (135)
– netbios-ns (137)
– netbios-dgm (138)
– netbios-ssn (139)
– microsoft-ds (445)
A detection record is noted in the log.
NET BIOS Packet Selects whether to output the logs. Disable,
Filtering—Log Enable
Output

PC Programming Manual 677

27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet Filtering

27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet

Filtering
By specifying the IP address, port and protocol parameters, it is possible to either pass or intercept IP
packets that are being received. If the parameters are set effectively they can be used as a security
measure.
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN->WAN Indicates whether to accept or discard Accept, Discard
Basic Policy packets as the basic policy from LAN
to WAN (reference only).
If Discard is displayed, all packets
from LAN to WAN are intercepted.
WAN->LAN Indicates whether to accept or discard Accept, Discard
Basic Policy packets as the basic policy from WAN
to LAN (reference only).
If Discard is displayed, all packets
from WAN to LAN are intercepted.
Filter Indicates whether to enable the packet Enable, Disable
filtering function (reference only).
Protocol No. Indicates the protocol type or the ANY, ICMP, TCP, UDP, TCP&UDP,
protocol number (0–255) (reference 0–255
only).
Source IP Indicates the protocol name or the ANY, Protocol Name, Port Number
Address Start – range of source IP address (reference Start-End
End only).
Note
Protocol Name is specified at
27.8 Router Configuration—
Firewall—[2-2] Packet
Filtering—Packet Filtering -
Advanced.
Source Port Indicates the port name or the port ANY, Port Name, Port Number
number (reference only).
Destination IP Indicates the protocol name or the ANY, Protocol Name, Port Number
Address Start - range of destination IP addresses Start-End
End (reference only).
Note
Protocol Name is specified at
27.8 Router Configuration—
Firewall—[2-2] Packet
Filtering—Packet Filtering -
Advanced.
Destination Port Indicates the port name or the port ANY, Port Name, Port number
number (reference only).

678 PC Programming Manual

 27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet Filtering

Name Description Value Range Links

ICMP Type Indicates the ICMP type (reference ANY, Echo Reply, Destination
only). Unreachable, Source Quench,
Redirect, Echo Request, Router
Advertisement, Router Solicitation,
Time Exceeded, Parameter
Problem, Timestamp, Timestamp
Reply, Information Request,
Information Reply, Address Mask
Request, Address Mask Reply
Direction Indicates the direction of IPv4 packets LAN->WAN, WAN->LAN
(reference only).
Policy Indicates the packet filtering policy Accept, Discard
(reference only).
Logging Selects whether to enable the packet Enable, Disable
filtering log. If Accept is selected for
Policy, this setting is greyed out and
disabled.
Packet Filtering Click here to open the advanced
—Advanced setting menu for Packet Filtering -
Setting Advanced.

Packet Filtering - Advanced

Name Description Value Range Links
LAN->WAN Basic Selects whether to accept or discard Accept, Discard
Policy packets as the basic policy from LAN to
WAN or not.
If Discard is selected, all packets from
LAN to WAN are intercepted.
WAN->LAN Basic Selects whether to accept or discard Accept, Discard
Policy packets as the basic policy from WAN to
LAN or not.
If Discard is selected, all packets from
WAN to LAN are intercepted.
Filter—Entry No. Selects the packet filter number. Once the 1–64
Entry No. is selected, all following items
on this screen can be programmed for that
packet filter.
Filter—Filter Selects whether to specify the packet Enable, Disable
filtering function.
Filter—Protocol Selects the protocol type or the protocol ANY, Protocol Name, Other
Number number (0–255). ( 0 - 255 )
Filter—Protocol Selects the protocol type. ICMP, TCP, UDP, TCP&UDP
Number— If you did not select Protocol Name as
Protocol Name Protocol Number, this item is greyed out.

PC Programming Manual 679

27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet Filtering

Name Description Value Range Links

Filter—Protocol Specifies the protocol number. Blank, 0–255
Number—Other If Other ( 0 - 255 ) is not selected for
( 0 - 255 ) Protocol Number, this item is greyed out.
Filter—TCP/UDP Selects the method of specifying the ANY, Protocol Name, Port
Source Port TCP/UDP Source Port. Number
If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number
—Protocol Name, this item is greyed out.
Filter—TCP/UDP Selects the protocol type. If TCP is selected for
Source Port— If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number Protocol Number—Protocol
Protocol Name —Protocol Name, this item is greyed out. Name, the following protocol
types can be selected:
Note FTP(20/21), SSH(22),
• If TCP or TCP&UDP is selected for Telnet(23), HTTP(80),
Protocol Number—Protocol HTTPS(443), POP3(110),
Name, default value is FTP. POS3S(995), IMAP(143),
SMTP(25)
• If ICMP is selected for Protocol
Number—Protocol Name or If UDP is selected for
Protocol Name is not selected for Protocol Number—Protocol
TCP/UDP Source Port, this item is Name, the following protocol
greyed out. types can be selected:
DNS(53), DHCP(67/68),
TFTP(69), SNMP(161/162)

If TCP&UDP is selected for

Protocol Number—Protocol
Name, the following protocol
types can be selected:
FTP(20/21), SSH(22),
Telnet(23), HTTP(80),
HTTPS(443), POP3(110),
POS3S(995), IMAP(143),
SMTP(25), DNS(53),
DHCP(67/68), TFTP(69),
SNMP(161/162)
Filter—TCP/UDP Specifies the start and end port numbers. 0–65535
Source Port— If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number
Port Number —Protocol Name, this item is greyed out.
Filter—TCP/UDP Selects the method of specifying the ANY, Protocol Name, Port
Destination Port TCP/UDP Destination Port. Number
If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number
—Protocol Name, this item is greyed out.

680 PC Programming Manual

 27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet Filtering

Name Description Value Range Links

Filter—TCP/UDP Selects the protocol type. If TCP is selected for
Destination Port If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number Protocol Number—Protocol
—Protocol Name —Protocol Name, or Protocol Name is Name, the following protocol
selected for TCP/UDP Destination Port, types can be selected:
this item is greyed out. FTP(20/21), SSH(22),
Telnet(23), HTTP(80),
Note HTTPS(443), POP3(110),
If TCP or TCP&UDP is selected for POS3S(995), IMAP(143),
Protocol Number—Protocol Name, SMTP(25)
the default value is FTP. If UDP is
selected for Protocol Number— If UDP is selected for
Protocol Name, the default value is Protocol Number—Protocol
DNS. Name, the following protocol
types can be selected:
DNS(53), DHCP(67/68),
TFTP(69), SNMP(161/162)

If TCP&UDP is selected for

Protocol Number—Protocol
Name, the following protocol
types can be selected:
FTP(20/21), SSH(22),
Telnet(23), HTTP(80),
HTTPS(443), POP3(110),
POS3S(995), IMAP(143),
SMTP(25), DNS(53),
DHCP(67/68), TFTP(69),
SNMP(161/162)
Filter—TCP/UDP Specifies the start and end port number. 0–65535
Destination Port If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number
—Port Number —Protocol Name, this item is greyed out.
Filter—Source Selects the method of specifying the ANY, Address, Subnet
source packet.
Filter—Source— Specifies the IP address. Blank, 1.0.0.1–
IP Address If ANY is selected for Source, this item is 223.255.255.254
greyed out.
Filter—Source— Specifies the subnet mask. Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Subnet Mask If Subnet is not selected for Source, this 255.255.255.255
item is greyed out.
Filter— Selects the method of specifying the ANY, Address, Subnet
Destination destination packet.
Filter— Specifies the IP address. Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Destination—IP If ANY is selected for Destination, this 223.255.255.254
Address item is greyed out.
Filter— Specifies the subnet mask. Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Destination— If Subnet is not selected for Destination, 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask this item is greyed out.

PC Programming Manual 681

27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet Filtering

Name Description Value Range Links

Filter—ICMP Selects the ICMP type. ANY, Echo Reply, Destination
Type Unreachable, Source Quench,
Redirect, Echo Request,
Router Advertisement, Router
Solicitation, Time Exceeded,
Parameter Problem,
Timestamp, Timestamp Reply,
Information Request,
Information Reply, Address
Mask Request, Address Mask
Reply
Filter—Direction Selects the direction of the IPv4 packet. LAN->WAN, WAN->LAN
Filter—Policy Selects whether to enable the packet Accept, Discard
filtering policy.
Filter—Logging Specifies whether to enable the packet Enable, Disable
filtering log.

682 PC Programming Manual

 27.9 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-1] VPSS

27.9 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-1] VPSS

Name Description Value Range Links
VPSS Selects whether to enable VPSS (VPN Simple Setting). Enable, Disable
Master Site IP Specifies the IP address of the master site. Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Address If Disable is selected for VPSS, this setting cannot be 223.255.255.254
(WAN) configured.
If Enable is selected for VPSS, this setting must be
configured.
If setting from a Slave unit connected to a Master unit,
this setting becomes reference only.
This setting must be made from a Slave unit (including a
Backup master) that is not connected to a Master unit.
Slave Site— Selects the site number. 1–16
Site No. If Disable is selected for VPSS, this setting cannot be
configured.
Slave Site— Specifies whether to display/change the status of the Enable, Disable
Slave Site slave site specified in Site No.. This setting is displayed
only when programming the Master unit. Clicking the
Export button for a Slave unit on the Master unit allows
the VPSS setting file to be exported to the Slave unit.
If Disable is selected, you cannot click the Export
button.
VPSS— Click here to open the advanced setting menu for
Advanced VPSS.
Setting

VPSS - Advanced
Name Description Value Range Links
Additional LAN on Specifies the local IP address at an adjacent Blank, 1.0.0.0–
VPN Tunnel sharing segment or satellite office for use in VPN tunnel 223.255.255.255
(MAX 4 Entries)— sharing. Up to 4 addresses can be specified
Local Network (#1–#4).
Address
Additional LAN on Specifies the subnet mask at an adjacent Blank, 0.0.0.0–
VPN Tunnel sharing segment or satellite office for use in VPN tunnel 255.255.255.255
(MAX 4 Entries)— sharing. Up to 4 addresses can be specified
Subnet Mask (#1–#4).
Timer Settings— Specifies the maximum time for establishing a 1–86400 s
VPSS Path VPSS path.
Established Timer (s) If the value set is outside of the value range
below, 1 or 86400 is displayed.
This setting is not displayed when connecting to
the Slave unit directly, or if changing sites when
connected to the Master unit.

PC Programming Manual 683

27.9 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-1] VPSS

Name Description Value Range Links

Timer Settings— Specifies the maximum waiting time to respond 1–86400 s
Creating Site to the request for creating a VPN site.
Response Wait Timer If the value set is outside of the value range
(s) below, 1 or 86400 is displayed.
Timer Settings— Specifies the maximum time to establish a VPN 1–86400 s
Tunnel Established tunnel.
Timer (s) If the value set is outside of the value range
below, 1 or 86400 is displayed.
Timer Settings— Specifies the maximum waiting time to finish 1–86400 s
Creating Site creating a VPN site.
Completion Wait If the value set is outside of the value range
Timer (s) below, 1 or 86400 is displayed.
Timer Settings— Specifies the maximum waiting time to respond 1–86400 s
Deleting Site to the request for deleting a VPN site.
Response Wait Timer If the value set is outside of the value range
(s) below, 1 or 86400 is displayed.
Timer Settings— Specifies the maximum waiting time to finish 1–86400 s
Deleting Site deleting a VPN site.
Completion Wait If the value set is outside of the value range
Timer (s) below, 1 or 86400 is displayed.
Timer Settings— Specifies the maximum time to finish creating a 1–86400 s
Changing Static IP VPN site when changing the static IP address
Address Additional of the WAN port.
Timer (s) If the value set is outside of the value range
below, 1 or 86400 is displayed.
Timer Settings— Configure the maximum time to monitor the 1–86400 s
VPSS Monitoring VPSS Information Path.
Timer (s) If the value set is outside of the value range
below, 1 or 86400 is displayed.

684 PC Programming Manual

 27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec

27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Mode Selects whether to enable IPSec. Enable, Disable
Main—Advanced Click here to open the advanced setting menu for
Setting IKE Settings.

IKE Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
IKE Settings—Version Indicates the version of IKE (Internet Key v1
Exchange) (reference only).
IKE Settings—Retry Count Specifies the retry count number for the 1–50
IKE Keep Alive.
IKE Settings—Retry Interval (s) Specifies the retry interval time for the IKE 1–100 s
Keep Alive.
IKE Settings—Phase1 - Timeout Specifies the IKE SA (Security 1–86400 s
(s) Association) lifetime.
IKE Settings—Phase2 - Timeout Specifies the IPsec SA lifetime. 1–86400 s
(s)
IKE Settings—Transmit Count Specifies the number of packet to send. 1–65535
IKE Settings—Auto Connection Selects whether to enable Auto Enable, Disable
Connection.

Security Policy
Name Description Value Range Links
SPD Check Click the SPD Check button on this screen to
perform checks such as network address duplication
on SPD (Security Policy Database) entries and
display the results.
SP Name Specifies the SP (Security Policy) name. 1–16 characters
Setting Specifies whether to enable the security policy. Enable, Disable
SA Name Selects an SA (Security Association) name from the SA Name
drop down list. SA is a connection between VPN
gateways.
Source Type Selects the source type of the SA. Any, IP Address
Source IP Specify the source IP Address of the SA. Blank, 1.0.0.0–
Address This setting is available only if IP Address is selected 223.255.255.255
for Source Type.
This setting can be set to blank only if Any is
selected for Source Type.

PC Programming Manual 685

27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec

Name Description Value Range Links

Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask for the source IP Address Blank, 0.0.0.0–
of the SA. 255.255.255.255
This setting can be set to blank only if Any is
selected for Source Type.
Destination Selects the destination type of the SA. Any, IP Address
Type
Destination IP Specifies the destination IP Address of the SA. Blank, 1.0.0.0–
Address This setting is available only if IP Address is selected 223.255.255.255
for Destination Type.
This setting can be set to blank only if Any is
selected for Destination Type.
Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask for the destination IP Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Address of the SA. 255.255.255.255
This setting can be set to blank only if Any is
selected for Destination Type.
Advanced Click here to open the advanced setting menu for
Setting Security Policy—Advance.

Security Policy—Advance
Name Description Value Range Links
SPD Check Click the SPD Check button on this screen
to perform checks such as network address
duplication on SPD (Security Policy
Database) entries and display the results.
SP Name Specifies the SP (Security Policy) name. 1–16 characters
Setting Selects whether to enable the security policy. Enable, Disable
SA Name Selects an SA (Security Association) name SA Name
from drop down list. SA is a connection
between VPN gateways.
Protocol Type Selects the protocol to be controlled by Any, TCP_UDP,
IPSec. TCP_UDP_ICMP_IGMP,
Fixed Protocol No.
Fixed Protocol Specifies the fixed protocol number to be 0–255
Number (0-255) controlled by IPSec.
This setting is available only if Fixed
Protocol No. is selected for Protocol.
Source Type Selects the source type of the SA. Any, IP Address
Source IP Specifies the source IP Address of the SA. Blank, 1.0.0.0–
Address This setting is available only if IP Address is 223.255.255.255
selected for Source Type.
This setting can be set to blank only if Any is
selected for Source Type.

686 PC Programming Manual

 27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec

Name Description Value Range Links

Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask for the source IP Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Address of the SA. 255.255.255.255
This setting can be set to blank only if Any is
selected for Source Type.
Source Port Selects the method of specifying the source Any, Fixed
Type port number.
Fixed Source Specifies the source port number. 1–65535
Port Number
Destination Selects the destination type of the SA. Any, IP Address
Type
Destination IP Specifies the destination IP Address of the Blank, 1.0.0.0–
Address SA. 223.255.255.255
This setting is available only if IP Address is
selected for Destination Type.
This setting can be set to blank only if Any is
selected for Destination Type.
Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask for destination IP Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Address of the SA. 255.255.255.255
This setting can be set to blank only if Any is
selected for Destination Type.
Destination Port Selects the method of specifying the Any, Fixed
Type destination port number.
Destination Port Specifies the destination port number. 1–65535
Number
TCP MSS Selects the method of specifying the TCP Auto, Fixed
MSS (Maximum Segment Size).
TCP MSS Value Specifies the TCP MSS value. 536–1460
If Auto is selected for TCP MSS, this item is
greyed out.

SA (ISAKMP)
Name Description Value Range Links
SA Name Specifies the SA (Security Association) 1–16 characters
name.
Exchange Mode Selects the IKE exchange mode. Main, Aggressive, Both
Remote Type Selects the remote type for SA. Terminal, Multi Site
Remote IP Selects the method of specifying the Static, Dynamic
Address Type remote IP address type.
Remote IP Specifies the remote IP address. Blank, 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254
Address If Dynamic is selected for Remote IP
Address Type, this item is greyed out.
Remote Port Selects the method of specifying the port Any, Fixed
Number Type number type.

PC Programming Manual 687

27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec

Name Description Value Range Links

Fixed Port Specifies the Fixed Port Number. If Any 1–65535
Number is selected for Remote Port Number
Type, this item is greyed out.
My Identifier Selects the method of specifying My FQDN, User FQDN, WAN IP
Type Identifier Type. Address
My Identifier Specifies My Identifier when FQDN or 1–255 characters
User FQDN is selected for My Identifier
Type. If WAN IP Address is selected for
My Identifier Type, this setting is greyed
out.
Peer Identifier Selects the method of specifying Peer FQDN, User FQDN, IP Address
Type Identifier Type.
Peer Identifier Specifies Peer Identifier. If FQDN or User FQDN is
selected for Peer Identifier
Type, enter the Peer Identifier:
1–255 characters
If IP Address is selected for
Peer Identifier Type, enter the
IP Address as the Peer
Identifier: Blank, 1.0.0.1–
223.255.255.254
Nonce (byte) Specifies the Nonce (Number used 8–256
ONCE).
Phase2 - Selects the type of proposal check. obey, strict, claim
Proposal Check
Initial - Contact Selects whether to send an INITIAL- Enable, Disable
CONTACT message.

SA Option
Name Description Value Range Links
SA Name Specifies the SA (Security Association) name. 1–16 characters
XAuth Mode Selects whether to enable XAuth Mode. Enable, Disable
IPComp Mode Selects whether to deflate when using IPComp (IP none, deflate
Payload Compression Protocol).
Keepalive Mode Selects the keep alive mode. DPD (Dead Peer
Protection), ICMP
Echo, None
Keepalive Specifies the action the when keep alive timer Alarm, Alarm & SA
Timeout Action expires. If DPD is selected for Keepalive Mode, this Delete
item is greyed out.
DPD Interval (s) Specifies the DPD interval in seconds. 1–3600 s
If ICMP Echo is selected for Mode, this item is
greyed out.

688 PC Programming Manual

 27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec

Name Description Value Range Links

DPD Retry Specifies the DPD retry interval in seconds. 1–3600 s
Interval (s) If ICMP Echo is selected for Mode, this item is
greyed out.
DPD Fail Count Specifies the maximum count of DPD failures. 1–255
If ICMP Echo is selected for Mode, this item is
greyed out.
DPD Recovery Specifies the recovery time for DPD in seconds. 1–3600 s
Time (s) If ICMP Echo is selected for Mode, this item is
greyed out.

IKE Proposal
Name Description Value Range Links
SA Name Specifies the SA (Session Announcement) 1–16 characters
name.
Authentication Selects the authentication method. Pre-Shared Key
Pre-Shared Key Specifies the Pre-Shared Key. 8–63 characters
Inputted characters are displayed as black
circles.
Encryption Algorithm Selects the encryption algorithm. AES-CBC-128, AES-
CBC-192, AES-CBC-256,
DES-CBC, 3DES-CBC
Hash Algorithm Selects the hash algorithm. HMAC-MD5, HMAC-
SHA1
Diffie-Hellman Group Selects the Diffie-Hellman Group. Group1 (modp768),
Group2 (modp1024),
Group5 (modp1536),
Group14 (modp2048)
Lifetime (s) Selects the SA life time. 300–691200 s
Perfect Forward Specifies whether to enable Perfect On, Off
Secrecy Forward Secrecy (PFS) in phase 2.
When Off is selected, the secret shared
key created in phase 1 is used in phase 2.
Security is increased when PFS is enabled.

IPSec Proposal
Name Description Value Range Links
SA Name Specifies the SA (Session 1–16 characters
Announcement) name.
Security Protocol Selects the protocol for IPSec. AH, ESP
Lifetime (s) Specifies the SA life time. 300–691200 s
Capsulation Selects the IPSec mode. Transport, Tunnel

PC Programming Manual 689

27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec

Name Description Value Range Links

Encryption Algorithm Selects the encryption algorithm. None, AES-CBC-128, AES-
CBC-192, AES-CBC-256, DES-
CBC, 3DES-CBC
Hash Algorithm Selects the Hash algorithm. HMAC-MD5, HMAC-SHA1
Diffie-Hellman Selects the Diffie-Hellman Group. None, Group1 (modp768),
Group Group2 (modp1024), Group5
(modp1536), Group14
(modp2048)

XAuth ID
Name Description Value Range Links
User Name (32 Specifies the user 8–32 characters (a–z, 0–9, [hyphen],
characters) name. [underscore])
* The first character must be a letter.
Password (32 Specifies the Maximum 32 characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9,
characters) password. [hyphen], [underscore])

690 PC Programming Manual

 27.11 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-3] Pass Through

27.11 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-3] Pass

Through
Name Description Value Range Links
IPSec Pass Selects whether to enable IPSec Pass Through. Enable, Disable
Through
IPSec Pass Specifies the IP address assigned from the IPSec 1.0.0.1–
Through—IP server when connected. 223.255.255.254
Address If Disable is selected for IPSec Pass Through,
this item is greyed out.
PPTP Pass Selects whether to enable PPTP Pass Through. Enable, Disable
Through
PPTP Pass Specifies the IP address assigned from the PPTP 1.0.0.1–
Through—IP server when connected. 223.255.255.254
Address If Disable is selected for PPTP Pass Through,
this item is greyed out.
L2TP Pass Selects whether to enable L2TP Pass Through. Enable, Disable
Through
L2TP Pass Specifies the IP address assigned from the L2TP 1.0.0.1–
Through—IP server when connected. 223.255.255.254
Address If Disable is selected for L2TP Pass Through,
this item is greyed out.

PC Programming Manual 691

27.12 Router Configuration—QoS Settings—[4] QoS Service

27.12 Router Configuration—QoS Settings—[4]

QoS Service
Name Description Value Range Links
QoS Service Selects whether to enable QoS. Enable, Disable
Auto QoS VoIP— Specifies whether to enable the automatic QoS OFF, ON
Enable setting where VoIP packets are prioritised.
Auto QoS VoIP— Selects the method of specifying the automatic QoS Priority Queue,
Priority setting. TOS (DSCP)
Queue/TOS If ON is not checked for Auto QoS VoIP—Enable,
(DSCP) this item is greyed out.
Auto QoS VoIP— Selects the kind of VoIP packets to be prioritised. VoIP (RTP Packet),
Mode If ON is not checked for Auto QoS VoIP—Enable, VoIP (Signaling),
this item is greyed out. VoIP (All)
Upstream Selects the method of specifying upstream Automatic, Fixed
Bandwidth bandwidth. Bandwidth Size
If Fixed Bandwidth Size (Kbps) is selected, (Kbps) (64–
specify the bandwidth. 100000)
If Automatic is selected, this item is greyed out.
Advanced Setting Click here to open the advanced setting menu for
QoS Settings - Advanced.

QoS Settings - Advanced

Name Description Value Range Links
WAN QoS—QoS Indicates the QoS mode (Reference Only).
Mode
WAN QoS—Entry No. Selects the entry number. 1–32
(1-32)
WAN QoS—Priority Specifies whether to enable priority queue On, Off
Settings numbers.
WAN QoS—Priority Selects which queue number is prioritised. 0–3
Settings—Priority If Enable is not checked as WAN QoS—
Queue No. Priority Settings, this item is greyed out.
WAN QoS—Protocol Selects the method of specifying protocols for ANY, Select Protocol,
No. which QoS is applied. Other ( 0 - 255 )
If ANY is selected for Protocol No., QoS is
available for all protocols.
If Select Protocol is selected for Protocol No.,
specify the protocol type for Select Protocol
below.
If Other ( 0 - 255 ) is selected for Protocol No.,
specify the protocol number for Other ( 0 -
255 ) below.

692 PC Programming Manual

 27.12 Router Configuration—QoS Settings—[4] QoS Service

Name Description Value Range Links

WAN QoS—Protocol Selects the protocol name for which QoS is ICMP, TCP, UDP,
No.—Select Protocol applied. This setting is available only if Select TCP&UDP
Protocol is selected for WAN QoS—Protocol
No..
WAN QoS—Protocol Specifies the protocol number for which QoS is Blank, 0–255
No.—Other ( 0 - 255 ) applied. This setting is available only if Other
( 0 - 255 ) is selected for WAN QoS—Protocol
No..
WAN QoS—Source Selects the method of specifying a source. ANY, Address,
If ANY is selected for Source, QoS is available Subnet
for all IP addresses.
If Address is selected for Source, enter the IP
address for IP Address below.
If Subnet is selected for Source, enter the
subnet mask for Subnet Mask below.
WAN QoS—Source— Specifies the IP Address to specify a source. If Blank, 1.0.0.1–
IP Address you did not select Address as Source, this 223.255.255.254
item is greyed out.
WAN QoS—Source— Specifies the subnet mask to specify a source. Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Subnet Mask If you did not select Subnet as Source, this 255.255.255.255
item is greyed out.
WAN QoS— Selects the method of specifying a destination ANY, Address,
Destination IP address. Subnet
If ANY is selected for Destination, QoS is
available for all IP addresses.
If Address is selected for Destination, enter
the IP address for IP Address below.
If Subnet is selected for Destination, enter the
subnet mask for Subnet Mask below.
WAN QoS— Specifies the IP Address to specify a Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Destination—IP destination. If you did not select Address as 223.255.255.254
Address Destination, this item is greyed out.
WAN QoS— Specifies the subnet mask to specify a Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Destination—Subnet destination. This setting is available only if 255.255.255.255
Mask Subnet is selected for Destination.
WAN QoS—TOS Specifies whether to enable QoS by using the OFF, ON
(DSCP)—Enable DSCP value.
WAN QoS—TOS Selects the method of specifying DSCP value. ANY, TOS(DSCP)
(DSCP) Value (0-63)
WAN QoS—TOS Specifies the TOS (DSCP) value. 0–63
(DSCP)—TOS(DSCP) If TOS(DSCP) Value (0-63) is not selected for
Value (0-63) TOS (DSCP), this item is greyed out.
WAN QoS—TOS Specifies whether to enable TOS mapping. OFF, ON
Mapping—Enable

PC Programming Manual 693

27.12 Router Configuration—QoS Settings—[4] QoS Service

Name Description Value Range Links

WAN QoS—TOS Specifies the TOS (DSCP) value. 0–63
Mapping— If above Enable is not checked, this item is
TOS(DSCP) Value greyed out.
(0-63)
Bandwidth Control— Selects whether to enable bandwidth control. OFF, ON
Enable If Enable is not selected, Priority Queue
0(kbps), Priority Queue 1(kbps), Priority
Queue 2(kbps) and Priority Queue 3(kbps)
are greyed out.
Bandwidth Control— Specifies the maximum bandwidth for this Blank, 64–100000
Upstream—Priority queue. Kbps
Queue 0(kbps) If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth
Control, this item is greyed out.
Bandwidth Control— Specifies the maximum bandwidth for this Blank, 64–100000
Upstream—Priority queue. Kbps
Queue 1(kbps) If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth
Control, this item is greyed out.
Bandwidth Control— Specifies the maximum bandwidth for this Blank, 64–100000
Upstream—Priority queue. Kbps
Queue 2(kbps) If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth
Control, this item is greyed out.
Bandwidth Control— Specifies the maximum bandwidth for this Blank, 64–100000
Upstream—Priority queue. Kbps
Queue 3(kbps) If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth
Control, this item is greyed out.

694 PC Programming Manual

 Section 28
Network Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of
Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 695

28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Basic Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Setting— Specifies the port number of the 68, 1024–65535
DHCP Port DHCP client. This parameter is only
Number available for entering values when
Obtain an IP address automatically
is selected.
LAN Setting— Specifies whether to enable the Obtain an IP address Feature Manual
Obtain an IP DHCP server to assign IP address automatically, Use References
address information automatically to the the following IP 5.6.6 Dynamic
automatically/Use mother board, or to enter the address Host
the following IP information manually. Configuration
address Protocol (DHCP)
Assignment
LAN Setting—IP Specifies the IP address of the mother 1.0.0.0–
Address board. This parameter is only 223.255.255.255
available for entering values when
Use the following IP address is
selected.
LAN Setting— Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
MAC Address mother board (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
LAN Setting— Specifies the network mask address 0–255.0–255.0–
Subnet Mask of the mother board. This parameter is 255.0–255 (except
only available for entering values 0.0.0.0 and
when Use the following IP address 255.255.255.255)
is selected.
LAN Setting— Specifies the IP address of the default 0.0.0.0–
Default Gateway gateway for the network. This 223.255.255.255
parameter is only available for
entering values when Use the
following IP address is selected.
LAN Setting— Specifies the Local Domain for the Max. 128 characters
Local Domain network.
DNS Setting— Specifies the port number of the DNS 53, 1024–65535
Port Number server. This parameter is only
available for entering values when
Obtain DNS server address
automatically is selected.
DNS Setting— Specifies whether to enable the Obtain DNS server Feature Manual
Obtain DNS DHCP server to assign DNS server address References
server address address information automatically to automatically, Use 5.6.6 Dynamic
automatically/Use the mother board, or to enter the the following DNS Host
the following DNS information manually. server address Configuration
server address Protocol (DHCP)
Assignment

696 PC Programming Manual

 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Name Description Value Range Links

DNS Setting— Specifies the preferred IP address for 1.0.0.0– PC
Preferred DNS IP the DNS server. This parameter is 223.255.255.255 Programming
Address only available for entering values Manual
when Use the following DNS server References
address is selected.
27.2.1 Router
Note Configuration—
Setup—[1-2-1]
• Since communication over a WAN—
VPN will not be possible, do not Connection
set a destination IP address in Settings
the VPN for this setting.
Installation
• If this setting is configured at
Manual
the same time as the following
settings, this setting takes
References
precedence. 8.6.5 DNS Client
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—Static
IP—Preferred DNS IP
Address
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—DHCP
—Preferred DNS IP Address
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—
PPPoE—Preferred DNS IP
Address

PC Programming Manual 697

28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Name Description Value Range Links

DNS Setting— Specifies the alternative IP address 1.0.0.0– PC
Alternative DNS for the DNS server. This parameter is 223.255.255.255 Programming
IP Address only available for entering values Manual
when Use the following DNS server References
address is selected.
27.2.1 Router
Note Configuration—
Setup—[1-2-1]
• Since communication over a WAN—
VPN will not be possible, do not Connection
set a destination IP address in Settings
the VPN for this setting.
Installation
• If this setting is configured at
Manual
the same time as the following
settings, this setting takes
References
precedence. 8.6.5 DNS Client
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—Static
IP—Alternative DNS IP
Address
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—DHCP
—Alternative DNS IP
Address
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—
PPPoE—Alternative DNS IP
Address
DSP IP Setting— Specifies whether the DHCP server Obtain DSP IP
Obtain DSP IP assigns IP address information address
address automatically to the DSP card(s), or to automatically, Use
automatically/Use enter the information manually. the following DSP IP
the following DSP address
IP address
DSP IP Setting— Specifies the IP address of the DSP 1.0.0.0–
DSP Card #1 - card. This parameter is only available 223.255.255.255
1/DSP Card #1 - for entering values when Use the
2/DSP Card #2 - following DSP IP address is
1/DSP Card #2 - 2 selected.
—IP Address
DSP IP Setting— Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
DSP Card #1 - DSP card (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
1/DSP Card #1 -
2/DSP Card #2 -
1/DSP Card #2 - 2
—MAC Address

698 PC Programming Manual

 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Advanced Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Port—Speed & Specifies the connection mode of Auto: Automatic mode selection
Duplex the main port. The connection is 1000M-Full: 1000 Mbps/full duplex
made in 100 Mbps/half duplex 100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
when Auto negotiation fails. 100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex
LAN Port—MDI/ Specifies the cable type connected Auto, MDI, MDIX
MDIX to the LAN port.
WAN Port—Speed & Specifies the connection mode of Auto: Automatic mode selection
Duplex the WAN port. The connection is 1000M-Full: 1000 Mbps/full duplex
made in 100 Mbps/half duplex 100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
when Auto negotiation fails. 100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex
WAN Port—MDI/ Specifies the cable type connected Auto, MDI, MDIX
MDIX to the WAN port.
WAN Port—Uplink Specifies whether the WAN port Enable, Disable
data uplink is enabled.
Maintenance Port— Specifies the connection mode of Auto: Automatic mode selection
Speed & Duplex the maintenance port. The 1000M-Full: 1000 Mbps/full duplex
connection is made in 100Mbps/half 100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
duplex when Auto negotiation fails. 100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
This setting is available at Installer 10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
level only. 10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex
Port Mirroring— Specifies the types of packets used Disable
Packet kind for for port mirroring. This setting is LAN (All packets)
mirroring available at Installer level only. LAN (Data packets PBX)
LAN (Voice packets)
WAN (All packets)
WAN/LAN (All packets)

Reference
The items displayed in this tab are the settings obtained from a DHCP server by the DHCP client of the
PBX. They are for reference only.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Assigned IP Address—IP Address Indicates the assigned IP address of the
mother board (reference only).
Assigned IP Address—MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the mother
board (reference only).
Assigned IP Address—Subnet Mask Indicates the network mask address of the
mother board (reference only).
Assigned IP Address—Default Gateway Indicates the assigned IP address of the
default gateway for the network (reference
only).

PC Programming Manual 699

28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Assigned WAN IP Address—IP Address Indicates the assigned WAN IP address of
the mother board (reference only).
Assigned WAN IP Address—MAC Indicates the MAC address of the mother
Address board (reference only).
Assigned WAN IP Address—Subnet Indicates the network mask address of the
Mask mother board (reference only).
Assigned WAN IP Address—Default Indicates the assigned WAN IP address of
Gateway the default gateway for the network
(reference only).
Assigned DNS Server Address— Indicates the assigned IP address for the
Preferred DNS IP Address preferred DNS server (reference only).
Assigned DNS Server Address— Indicates the assigned IP address for the
Alternative DNS IP Address alternative DNS server (reference only).
DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Indicates the IP address assigned for an
Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—IP installed optional DSP card (reference
Address only).
DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Indicates the MAC address of the DSP
Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—MAC card (reference only).
Address
DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Indicates the Subnet Mask address of the
Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—Subnet DSP card (reference only).
Mask
DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Indicates the Default Gateway address of
Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—Default the DSP card (reference only).
Gateway

700 PC Programming Manual

 28.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature

28.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature

28.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP
Settings for the DHCP Server can be programmed.

Basic Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
DHCP Specifies if the DHCP server functions of the PBX are Disable, DHCP Server,
Server enabled or not. DHCP Relay Agent

Note
If the PBX is in Backup Master mode of network
survivability, it is recommended that an external
DHCP server is used instead of the PBX’s DHCP
server.
Port number Specifies the port number used for the DHCP server. 67, 1024–65535
Server IP Specifies the IP address for the DHCP server for 1.0.0.1–
address for DHCP Relay. This setting is only available when DHCP 255.255.255.255
Relay Relay Agent is checked.

IP address auto assignment

Name Description Value Range Links
Starting IP address Specifies the starting IP address for the 1.0.0.0–
assignable range of IP addresses. 223.255.255.255
Ending IP address Specifies the ending IP address for the 1.0.0.0–
assignable range of IP addresses. 223.255.255.255
Lease interval (h) Specifies the duration in hours of the DHCP 1–168 (hours)
allocation lease. Setting "0" specifies an
unlimited lease duration.
Auto assignment Up to 16 IP Addresses can be specified that will 1.0.0.0–
exclusions not be automatically assigned. 223.255.255.255

IP Address Static Assignment

Name Description Value Range Links
MAC Specifies the MAC addresses of the MAC 00:00:00:00:00:00–
Address address/IP address pairs to be subject to static FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
DHCP allocation.
IP Address Specifies the IP addresses of the MAC address/IP 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
address pairs to be subject to static DHCP
allocation.

PC Programming Manual 701

28.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP

IP Address Assignment List

Name Description Value Range Links
MAC Address Specifies MAC addresses currently 00:00:00:00:00:00–
specified by the system. FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
IP Address Specifies IP addresses currently assigned 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
by the system.
Remaining lease Specifies the remaining lease time for the 1–85777 s
time MAC address/IP address pair.

28.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP

Settings for FTP server connections can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Control Specifies the port number for connecting 21, 1024–65535
—Control Port to the PBX’s FTP server.
number
Data Transfer Port Specifies the minimum port number for 1024–65535
—Port number FTP data transfer.
(Minimum)
Data Transfer Port Specifies the maximum port number for 1024–65535
—Port number FTP data transfer.
(Maximum)
User Information— Specifies the user name for the PBX’s Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–
User Name FTP server authentication. 9, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note Note
Be sure to change the user name from The first character must
its initial, default value. Also, for be a letter (a–z).
security reasons, change the user
name regularly.
User Information— Specifies the password for the PBX’s FTP Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–
Password server authentication. z, 0–9, [hyphen],
[underscore])
Note
Be sure to change the password from Note
its initial, default value. Also, for The first character must
security reasons, change the be a letter or number.
password regularly.

28.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP

HTTP server settings can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
HTTP (LAN / MNT) Specifies the port number for HTTP connections using 80, 1024–65535
—Port number the LAN or MNT ports. This port is used for accessing
the PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming.

702 PC Programming Manual

 28.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP

Name Description Value Range Links

HTTPs (LAN / MNT) Enables or disables HTTPs for connections to the Disable, Enable
—HTTPs server LAN or MNT ports using the PBX’s HTTP server
function.
HTTPs (LAN / MNT) Specifies the port number for HTTPs connections. 443, 1024–
—Port number This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web 65535
Maintenance Console programming when using a
TLS connection.
HTTPs (WAN)— Enables or disables HTTPs for connections to the Disable, Enable
HTTPs server WAN port using the PBX’s HTTP server function.
HTTPs (WAN)— Specifies the port number for HTTPs connections to 443, 1024–
Port number the WAN port using the PBX’s HTTP server function. 65535
HTTPs (WAN)— Specifies how HTTPs (WAN) is disabled. Automatic
Port Close Control If you enabled the HTTPs (WAN) port and select (24H), Manual
Automatic (24H), it will be disabled automatically
after 24 hours for security purposes.
Automatic logout Specifies the amount of time required to elapse before 5, 10, 30, 60×n
Timer (min) logging off an inactive connection from the HTTP (n=1–24)
server. (minutes)

28.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP

NTP server settings for use with KX-UT series SIP phones can be programmed.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
NTP Enables or disables NTP service with Disable, PC Programming Manual
server the PBX’s NTP server for connected Enable References
KX-UT series SIP phones. 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2]
When this feature is enabled, the PBX System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight
will report to connected KX-UT series Saving—SNTP—SNTP Server—IP
SIP phones the information obtained Address
from the SNTP server specified in 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2]
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight
System—Date & Time—SNTP / Saving—SNTP—SNTP Server—Port
Daylight Saving. Number
If this feature is disabled, connected 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2]
KX-UT series SIP phones will use their System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight
individually programmed time settings. Saving—SNTP—Time Zone—Time
Zone

28.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

Settings for SMTP for sending e-mail for PBX functions can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Mail sending—Mail Specifies the name to be used as Max. 64 characters
sender information name the sender of the e-mails from the
PBX.

PC Programming Manual 703

28.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

Name Description Value Range Links

Mail sending—Mail Specifies the sending e-mail Max. 128 characters
address address for messages sent from
the PBX. This address, for
example, could be set as the e-
mail address of an administrator.
SMTP server for relay— Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.0– Installation
SMTP server address— SMTP server to be used to send 223.255.255.255 Manual
IP Address e-mails. References
8.6.5 DNS
Client
SMTP server for relay— Specifies the host name of the Max. 128 characters Installation
SMTP server address— SMTP server to be used to send Manual
Name e-mails. References
8.6.5 DNS
Client
SMTP server for relay— Specifies the port number of the 25, 465, 587, 1024–
SMTP server Port SMTP server to be used to send 65535
number e-mails.
SMTP server for relay— Specifies whether the SMTP Enable, Disable
SMTP over TLS server uses Transport Layer
Security. Note
When Enable is
selected, the
encryption method
used is
STARTTLS.
SMTP Authentication— Specifies whether authentication Enable, Disable
SMTP Authentication on the SMTP server is enabled.
SMTP Authentication— Specifies the user name required Max. 64 characters
User Name to access the SMTP server.
SMTP Authentication— Specifies the password required Max. 64 characters
Password to access the SMTP server.
POP Before SMTP— Specifies whether POP before Enable, Disable
POP before SMTP SMTP is enabled on the SMTP
server.
POP Before SMTP— Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.0–
POP server address—IP POP server when POP before 223.255.255.255
Address SMTP is enabled.
POP Before SMTP— Specifies the host name of the Max. 128 characters
POP server address— POP server when POP before
Name SMTP is enabled.
POP Before SMTP— Specifies the port number of the 110, 1024–65535
POP server Port number POP server when POP before
SMTP is enabled.

704 PC Programming Manual

 28.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4

Name Description Value Range Links

POP Before SMTP— Specifies the user name for the Max. 64 characters
User Name POP server when POP before
SMTP is enabled.
POP Before SMTP— Specifies the password for the Max. 64 characters
Password POP server when POP before
SMTP is enabled.
Mail Receiving—SMTP Specifies if SMTP authentication Enable, Disable
Authentication is enabled for mail receiving.
Mail Receiving—SMTP Specifies whether mail receiving Enable, Disable
over TLS uses Transport Layer Security for
SMTP.
Mail Receiving—Receive Specifies the receiving port 25, 465, 587, 1024–
Port number (SMTPs) number when using SMTPs. 65535
Mail Receiving—Receive Specifies the receiving port 25, 465, 587, 1024–
Port number (SMTP) number when using SMTP. 65535

28.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4

Settings for IMAP4 server functions for the PBX can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
IMAP4—IMAP4 server Specifies whether to enable the IMAP4 server Enable, Disable
functions of the PBX.
IMAP4—Port number Specifies a port number for the IMAP server. 143, 1024–
The default value is 143. 65535
IMAP4 over TLS—IMAP4 Specifies whether to enable TLS encryption for Enable, Disable
over TLS the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX.
IMAP4 over TLS—Port Specifies a port number for the IMAP server 993, 1024–
number when using TLS encryption. The default value 65535
is 993.
CAPABILITY command— Specifies whether the IMAP4 server will Enable, Disable
Supporting IDLE response respond to IDLE commands sent by clients.
Authenticated Connection Specifies the amount of time of no activity that 1, 2, 3, 5, 10,
Timeout—Authenticated is required before an authenticated connection 15, 20, 25, 30,
Connection Timeout (min) to the IMAP4 server will be disconnected. 60 (min)

28.2.7 Network Service—[2-8] Server Feature—TELNET

Settings for TELNET server functions for the PBX can be programmed. This option is available for the
Installer level account.
Name Description Value Range Links
TELNET Specifies whether to enable the TELNET Enable, Disable
Server server functions of the PBX.
Port number Specifies a port number for the TELNET 23, 1024–65535
server.

PC Programming Manual 705

28.2.7 Network Service—[2-8] Server Feature—TELNET

Name Description Value Range Links

User name Specifies a user name for the TELNET Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, $,
server to log in. [hyphen], [underscore])
Password Specifies a password for the TELNET Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, $,
server to log in. [hyphen], [underscore])

706 PC Programming Manual

 28.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature

28.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature

28.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP
FTP client connection settings can be programmed. Up to 5 FTP sites can be specified for connections.

Connection 1—Connection 5
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Specifies the name of the connection to Max. 64 characters
Name use for programming in other items.
IP Address Specifies the IP address of the FTP 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
site. Click the IP Address radio button
when this is used.
Name Specifies the name of the FTP site. FTP site name (max. 253
Click the Name radio button when this characters)
is used.
Server Port Specifies the port number used to 21, 990, 1024–65535
Number connect to the FTP site.
User name Specifies the user name required to log Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, $,
in to the FTP site. [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
• The first character must be a
letter or number.
• $ may only be used as the
final character.
Password Specifies the password for the user Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9,
name required to log in to the FTP site. =, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
The first character must be a
letter, number, or =.
Protocol Specifies the communication protocol FTP, FTPS (Explicit), FTPS (Implicit)
for the FTP connection.

28.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog

Settings can be programmed for a Syslog client connection.
Name Description Value Range Links
Remote Syslog Specifies whether an external Syslog Enable, Disable
server will be used with the PBX.
Remote Syslog Specifies the IP address or host name of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP
server—IP the external Syslog server. address), Max. 253 characters
address / Host (host name)
name

PC Programming Manual 707

28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Specifies the connection port for the 514, 1024–65535
remote Syslog server.

28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP
manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general
system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Name Description Value Range Links
SNMP agent Enables the PBX to use its Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
SNMP agent function. 5.6.5 Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor
SNMP version Specifies the version of the SNMP V1, Feature Manual References
SNMP protocol to use. SNMP V2c 5.6.5 Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor
SNMP manager Specifies the SNMP 161, 1024– Feature Manual References
port manager port. 65535 5.6.5 Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor
MIB info— Specifies the name and Max. 255 Feature Manual References
SysContact contact information of the characters 5.6.5 Simple Network Management
system administrator. Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor
MIB info— Specifies the administrative Max. 255 Feature Manual References
SysName name for the system. characters 5.6.5 Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor
MIB info— Specifies the physical Max. 255 Feature Manual References
SysLocation location for the system. characters 5.6.5 Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

SNMP Manager #1 / SNMP Manager #2

It is possible to assign up to two PCs as SNMP managers. The settings related to SNMP manager activity
can be programmed for each SNMP manager, indicated as No.1 and No.2 on the screen.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Name Description Value Range Links
IP address Specifies the IP address of 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
an SNMP manager. Click 223.255.255.255 References
the button next to IP 5.6.5 Simple Network
Address and enter the Management Protocol
address. (SNMP) System Monitor

708 PC Programming Manual

 28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Name Description Value Range Links

Host name Specifies the host name of Max. 253 Installation Manual
an SNMP manager. Click characters (host References
the button next to Host name) 8.6.5 DNS Client
Name and enter a name.
Feature Manual
References
5.6.5 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
Trap port Specifies a port number 162, 1024–65535 Feature Manual
used to send trap messages References
from the agent to an SNMP 5.6.5 Simple Network
manager. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
Community name Specifies a community Max. 32 characters Feature Manual
name of an SNMP References
manager. 5.6.5 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
TRAP filtering— Selects whether the PBX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Standard TRAP sends standard trap References
messages to an SNMP 5.6.5 Simple Network
manager or not. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
TRAP filtering— Selects whether the PBX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
enterpriseSpecific sends Major Alarm trap References
(Major) messages to an SNMP 5.6.5 Simple Network
manager or not. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
TRAP filtering— Selects whether the PBX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
enterpriseSpecific sends Minor Alarm trap References
(Minor) messages to an SNMP 5.6.5 Simple Network
manager or not. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor

PC Programming Manual 709

28.4 Network Service—[4] Other

28.4 Network Service—[4] Other

28.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security
Network security settings can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
ICMP Echo Reply—LAN Specifies if the LAN port will send ICMP Enable, Disable
Port echo-replies to incoming ICMP echo-
requests.
ICMP Echo Reply—Log Specifies if the PBX logs ICMP echo- Enable, Disable
Output replies.
TLS—Encryption Suite Specifies the method of encryption used AES256-SHA, DES-
for TLS. CBC3-SHA, AES128-
SHA, DES-CBC-SHA

28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

NAS settings can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
NAS Status Displays/changes the connection Connected, Disconnected
status of the NAS. To change the connection status of
the NAS, perform the following:
• Click Disconnect to set the
NAS to disconnect status.
• Click Connect to set the NAS to
connect status.
NAS Setting— Specifies the communication NFS, CIFS
Protocol protocol for the NAS connection.
NAS Setting—NAS Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254
Address—IP NAS.
Address
NAS Setting—NAS Specifies the Name of the NAS. Max. 253 characters
Address—Name
NAS Setting—Port Specifies the NAS using port 445, 1024–65535
No. number.
NAS Setting—Mount Specifies the NAS mount directory. Max. 128 characters (multi-byte
directory characters allowed)
CIFS Setting—User Specifies the NAS connection user Max. 24 characters (multi-byte
Name name when NAS Setting— characters allowed)
Protocol is set to CIFS.
CIFS Setting— Specifies the NAS connection Max. 24 characters (multi-byte
Password password when NAS Setting— characters allowed)
Protocol is set to CIFS.

710 PC Programming Manual

 Section 29
Appendix

PC Programming Manual 711

29.1 Revision History

29.1 Revision History

29.1.1 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.0xxxx
New Contents
• 1.2.3.1 One-look Networking Survivability

• 6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS

• 6.15 Tool—URL Information

• 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis—Pair Port Test

• 7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor

• 7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace

• 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection

• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

– Unified Messaging Plug in
– Fax Driver Tool

• 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

– To pre-install PBXs connected to the STACK-M card
– Common Programming Reference Items

• 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary—Legacy Gateway 1 Shelf/Legacy Gateway

2 Shelf

• 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Multisite—Multisite startup

monitoring time

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

– Main—Isolated Mode
– Port Number—CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
– Port Number—CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
– Port Number—Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
– Port Number—Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port
No.

712 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.1 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.0xxxx

– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port
No.
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download
Server (HTTP) Port No.
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download
Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP
Address
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server Port No.
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending
Interval Time (s)
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Register Expire Time (s)
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT -
CWMP Server IP Address
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT -
CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
– SIP Extension—Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT -
CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– SIP Extension—Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Ability
– SIP Extension—Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s)

• 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View

• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property—Trunk Adaptor

• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property—Main—Backup

• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property—Secondary Setting

• 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property—Trunk Adaptor

• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main—INFORM

retransmission counter

• 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

– Secondary Setting
– Remote Place

• 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—KX-T7710

PC Programming Manual 713

29.1.2 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.1xxxx

• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Fail Over Site Name

• 11.11 PBX Configuration—[3-11] Group—VM(DPT) Group

• 11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—VM(DTMF) Group

• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

• 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer

Changed Contents
• 3.1 Home Screen

• 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File

• 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

• 6.5 Tool—Extension List View

• 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup

• 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

• 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

29.1.2 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 002.1xxxx

New Contents
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting
• 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration

Changed Contents
• 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
• 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
• 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard
• 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

714 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.3 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 003.0xxxx

• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

29.1.3 KX-NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 003.0xxxx

New Contents
• 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table
• 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table
• 27 Router Configuration
• 28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

Changed Contents
• Introduction
• 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
• 2.1.2 Access Levels
• 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard
• 2.1.5 Software Interface
• 3.1 Home Screen
• 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File
• 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
• 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup
• 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS
• 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup
• 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup
• 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore
• 7.8.2 Utility—Command—Router Command
• 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status—Activated Feature
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—VoIP-DSP Options
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property—Calling Party
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property—Supplementary Service
• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property—FAX/T.38
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property—Main
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property—Option
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property—Remote Place

PC Programming Manual 715

29.1.4 PCMPR Software File Version 003.2xxxx

• 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property—Remote Place—

Phone Location
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
• 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group
• 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting
• 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
• 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Automatic Answer w/o Extension Setting
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone
• 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
• 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority
• 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table
• 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports
• 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Advanced Settings
• 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings—LAN Setting—Local Domain
• 28.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP
• 28.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP
• 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP—SMTP server for relay—SMTP over TLS
• 28.2.7 Network Service—[2-8] Server Feature—TELNET
• Feature Programming References—Last Number Redial

29.1.4 PCMPR Software File Version 003.2xxxx

Changed Contents
• 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

716 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.5 PCMPR Software File Version 004.00xxx

• 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
• 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS
• 6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting
• 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View
• 7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
• 7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
• 7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace
• 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
• 8.1 Users—User Profiles
• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
• 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting
• 27.1.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-2] Router Information—PPPoE Status
• 27.1.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-3] Router Information—VPN Status
• 27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec—SA Option
• 28.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP—HTTPs (WAN)—HTTPs server
• Feature Programming References

29.1.5 PCMPR Software File Version 004.00xxx

New Contents
• 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
• 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property—Secondary Setting
• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property—Remote Place
• 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
• 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

Changed Contents
• 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
• 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
• 2.1.2 Access Levels
• 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
• 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

PC Programming Manual 717

29.1.6 PCMPR Software File Version 004.01xxx

• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

• 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
• 7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information
• 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property
• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property
• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
• 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
• 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
• 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
• 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation
• 25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings
• 27.10 Router Configuration—VPN—[3-2] IPSec
• 28.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP
• Feature Programming References

29.1.6 PCMPR Software File Version 004.01xxx

Changed Contents
• 2.1.2 Access Levels
• 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information
• 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
• 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update
• 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
• 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
• 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

718 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.7 PCMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
• 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
• 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
• 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

29.1.7 PCMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx

New Contents
• 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log
• 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor—Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Full Screen
Display (pixels)
• 8.4.3 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export
• 8.4.4 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Export History
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main—Area ID for logical
partition
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—Applying logical partitioning
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Display Information from Mobile
Extension (MEX)—when using Automatic Walking COS
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor
– Sensor Alarm—Email notification
– Sensor Alarm—Email Address
– Sensor Alarm—Email Comment

Changed Contents
• 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types
• 2.1.5 Software Interface
• 3.1 Home Screen
• 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard
• 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
• 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
• 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation
• 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report—Option
• 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report—Group—Group—View Report
• 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report—Agent—Agent—View Report
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main
• 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property—Called Party

PC Programming Manual 719

29.1.8 PCMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx

• 9.34.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9
• 10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)
• 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery
• 28.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP
• 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

29.1.8 PCMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx

New Contents
• 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Multisite—Master Suspend if
Backup Master Detected
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main—Switch Time Service
to "Break" in Isolated Mode
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
– Use Quick Dial for CO rerouting during Break Mode.
– Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work.
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
Call Log for Built-in ACD Report—ICD Group Unanswered Call Log

Changed Contents
• 5.4 System Control—System Reset
• 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report—Call—Call—View Report
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status—Activated Feature
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Telephone
Type

29.1.9 PCMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx

Changed Contents
• 3.1 Home Screen
• 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
• 8.4.1 Users—ICDG Management—Group Monitor—Start Monitor
• 8.4.2 Users—ICDG Management—ACD Report
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status—Activated Feature
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status—Trial Activation Keys
• 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Multisite

720 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.9 PCMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Media Relay—SIP
Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—SIP Extension—Setting
parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
• 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—SIP Refer(Blind)
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
• Feature Programming References—Backup Master Mode and Isolated Mode

PC Programming Manual 721

29.1.9 PCMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx

722 PC Programming Manual

Feature Programming References

PC Programming Manual 723

Feature Programming References

Absent Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Absent Message Set /
Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Absent
Message
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Absent
Message
• 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message

Feature Manual References

2.20.2 Absent Message

Account Code Entry

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Account Code Entry
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Account
Code Mode

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Advice of Charge (AOC)

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Automatic Callback
Busy Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Automatic
Callback Busy

Feature Manual References

2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Automatic Extension Release

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Dial—Extension First Digit
– Dial—Extension Inter-digit
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free

Feature Manual References

724 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Automatic Fax Delivery

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Fax Options
– Automatic Delivery Status
– Automatic Delivery Status Default Fax Number [0-9 * # T , ; ]
– Automatic Delivery Status Printed Fax Message

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery

Automatic Fax Transfer

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—
Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message—Fax Extension

Feature Manual References

2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer

Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX

• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property—Secondary Setting
• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property—Secondary Setting
• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property—Option—Announce Mode
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property—Main—Failover Timer
(For S-PS/SIP-CS)
• 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property—Secondary Setting

Feature Manual References

4.2.3.2 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

• 6.6 Tool—Import
– ARS - Leading Digit
– ARS - Except Code
– ARS - Routing Plan
• 6.7 Tool—Export
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—
Extension Inter-digit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3—Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—ARS
Itemised Code
• 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—ARS
Itemised Code

PC Programming Manual 725

Feature Programming References

• 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table

• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code—Itemised Billing Code for ARS
• 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options—Option—ARS Dial

Feature Manual References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Automatic Setup
• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
• 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Automatic Time
Adjustment—Automatic Time Correction on Stand-alone mode
• 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
• 28.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP—NTP server

Feature Manual References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

Background Music (BGM)

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– External BGM On / Off
– BGM Set / Cancel
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– External MOH—MOH 1–8 (Music On Hold 1–8)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Manual References

2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

Backup Master Mode and Isolated Mode

• 3.1 Home Screen
• 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Multisite—Master Suspend if
Backup Master Detected
• 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Multisite—Multisite Keepalive time
for Isolated Mode
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main
– Isolated Mode
– Switch Time Service to "Break" in Isolated Mode
– Normal Mode Auto Recovery
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property—Main—Backup
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

726 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

4.2.3.1 Backup Master Mode and Isolated Mode

Budget Management
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge—Charge Options—Action at Charge
Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code—Budget Management

Feature Manual References

2.7.2 Budget Management

CA (Communication Assistant)
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Port Number—Built-in
Communication Assistant Server
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI)
→ Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer
→ Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9—Built-in
Communication Assistant
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9—Built-in
Communication Assistant

Feature Manual References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Call Billing for Guest Room

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Bill—Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)

Feature Manual References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Call Charge Services

• 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

PC Programming Manual 727

Feature Programming References

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type

• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
– Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit
– Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection

Feature Manual References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

Call Distribution Port Group

• 9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
—Hunt Pattern 1–16—Leading Number
• 9.12.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
—Hunt Pattern 1–16—Call Distribution Port Group—1st–16th
• 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property—Call Distribution Port
Group

Feature Manual References

4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set /
Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—CF (MSN)

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set /
Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—CF (MSN)

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

728 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

Call Forwarding (FWD)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—FWD No Answer Timer
Set
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR—Call Forward to CO
– Manager—Group Forward Set
– Optional Device & Other Extensions—Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Extension Status
of Mobile Integration (FWD NA to CO)
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Status of FWD for Virtual PS
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group
Log / Group FWD
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
2nd line LCD display information for ICD Group redirected call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Manual References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call Hold
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Recall—Hold Recall
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
– Call Hold Retrieve: Specified with a Holding Extension Number

PC Programming Manual 729

Feature Programming References

– Hold Retrieve: Specified with a Held CO Line Number

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group Key
– Option 1—PT Operation—Hold key mode
– Option 5—SLT—SLT Hold Mode

Feature Manual References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN Hold
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

Call Monitor
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Call Monitor
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive—Call Monitor
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Data Mode
– Option 3—Executive Override Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny

Feature Manual References

2.10.3 Call Monitor

Call Park
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
– Recall—Call Park Recall
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Call Park / Call Park
Retrieve
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

730 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

2.13.2 Call Park

Call Pickup
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Call Pickup
– Directed Call Pickup
– Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
• 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call
Pickup Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call
Pickup Deny

Feature Manual References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Call Transfer
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM—BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on
Transfer
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—
Transfer Recall
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR—Transfer to CO
– Assistant—Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for
Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Transfer Recall Destination
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Transfer Recall Destination

Feature Manual References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

PC Programming Manual 731

Feature Programming References

Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

Call Waiting
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type—Caller ID—Caller ID
Signalling
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
– Automatic Call Waiting
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—Call Waiting—Automatic Call
Waiting for Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Manual References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Call Waiting Tone

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Caller ID—Visual Caller ID
Display
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type

732 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Manual References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

Caller ID
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
– Caller ID—Waiting to receive
– Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Private Network—Public Call
through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits
• 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Caller ID Modification
Table
• 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8
– Extension Caller ID Sending
– Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Manual References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
– CLI Destination
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL—CLI Ring
for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—CPC Signal Detection
Time—Outgoing, Incoming

PC Programming Manual 733

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

2.11.9 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
– ISDN CO—Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
– CO Setting—Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel
– Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party)
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
CLIP on ICD Group Button
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main—Extension Number
– CLIP—CLIP ID
– CLIP—CLIP on Extension/CO
– CLIP—CLIR
– CLIP—COLR
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– CLIP—CLIP ID
– CLIP—CLIP on Extension/CO
– CLIP—CLIR
– CLIP—COLR
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

734 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name

Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Centralised Voice Mail

• 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option—New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for
PRI23 Card
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG
• 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission: Repeat Counter
– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission: Repeat Timer
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Maintenance
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)

Feature Manual References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Class of Service (COS)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Manual References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 735

Feature Programming References

Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Manual References

4.3.1.4 Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous—Intercept—Routing to Operator -
No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Manual References

4.3.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—CCBS Option
– CCBS Type
– CCBS Delete Digits
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service
– COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
– CCBS Type
– CCBS Delete Digits

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

• 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Dial Information (CTI)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI)

Feature Manual References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

736 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Conference
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
– Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
– Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Transfer to
CO
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—CO - CO Call Limitation—After
Conference
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1: Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2: Finish Conference
– Echo Cancel—Conference
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8—Conference Group—Maximum
Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

2.14.2 Conference

Conference Group Call

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Conference Group Call—
Ring Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Conference Group Call
Operation
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—
Conference Group Call Operation
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8—Conference Group—Maximum
Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call
• 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group
• 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List

Feature Manual References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Confirmation Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 1: Called by Voice
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 2: Paged / Automatic Answer
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1: Start Talking after Making Call / Call from DOORPHONE
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2: Start Talking after Answering Call
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1: Start Conference

PC Programming Manual 737

Feature Programming References

– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2: Finish Conference

– Confirmation Tone—Tone 5: Hold

Feature Manual References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Data Line Security

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Data Line Security Set /
Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Data
Mode

Feature Manual References

2.11.5 Data Line Security

Dial Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

Feature Manual References

2.25.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone Transfer

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Feature Manual References

2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Dial Type Selection

• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
– Dialling Mode
– DTMF Width
– Pulse Speed

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

738 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Direct In Line (DIL)

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.
– VM Trunk Group No.

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—DDI / DID
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
– DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
– DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
– DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
– DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
– DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
– DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Accept the Call from DISA
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
– DISA Tone Detection—Silence
– DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
– DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic

PC Programming Manual 739

Feature Programming References

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept

Destination—Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination—Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Manual References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct SIP Connection

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main
• 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Feature Manual References

• 4.1.1.2 Direct SIP Connection

Display Information
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
• 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings—CO Name

Feature Manual References

2.21.4 Display Information

Distribution Order
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
ICD Group Distribution order

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.5 Distribution Order

740 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Do Not Disturb (DND)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—
Busy Tone / DND Tone
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—DND Override
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Manual References

2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Door Open
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—
Doorphone—Open Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Door Open
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Door Unlock

Feature Manual References

2.18.2 Door Open

Doorphone Call
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
– Doorphone—Call Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—DOORPHONE Call
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 1: Called
by Voice
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Manual References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

DSP Resource Reservation

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—DSP Conference—DSP
Conference Priority
• 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource

PC Programming Manual 741

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

5.5.4.1 DSP Resource Reservation

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

• 28.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP

Feature Manual References

5.6.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

E-mail Notification for Extension Users

• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—E-mail/Text
Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
• 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

Feature Manual References

5.4.1 E-mail Notification for Extension Users

E-mail Notification for Manager

• 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—E-mail Option

Feature Manual References

5.4.4 E-mail Notification for Manager

E-mail Notification of Sensor Alarm

• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Manual References

5.4.3 E-mail Notification of Sensor Alarm

E-mail Notification of System-level Events

• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 7.7 Utility—Email Notification

742 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

• 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

Feature Manual References

5.4.2 E-mail Notification of System-level Events

Emergency Call
• 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.2 Emergency Call

Enhanced Walking Extension

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Walking Extension

Feature Manual References

2.24.3.2 Enhanced Walking Extension

Executive Busy Override

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Executive Override
Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Executive Busy
Override
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive
– Executive Busy Override
– Executive Busy Override Deny
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—One-touch Busy
Override by SCO key
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny

Feature Manual References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Extension Dial Lock

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
– Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
– Remote Extension Dial Lock On
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level on
Extension Lock

Feature Manual References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

PC Programming Manual 743

Feature Programming References

Extension Feature Clear

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension Feature
Clear
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Extension Clear—Call Waiting
– Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
– Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pick-up Dial)

Feature Manual References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension PIN Set /
Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN

Feature Manual References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

External Feature Access (EFA)

• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Flash Time
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Feature
Access
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous—TRS Check after EFA

Feature Manual References

2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

External Relay Control

• 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Relay Access
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—External Relay Access

744 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Manual References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

External Sensor
• 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—External Sensor—Ring
Duration
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—External Sensor—
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Manual References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Fax Cover Page

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Fax Options—Cover Page Language
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Fax Management
– Fax Properties—System Name (Up to 25 characters)
– Fax Properties—System Fax Number (Max. 20 digits)
– Fax Properties—Printed Information
– Fax Properties—Printed Information Position
– Fax Properties—Cover Page

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.14 Fax Cover Page

Flash/Recall/Terminate
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Disconnect Time
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

Flexible Buttons
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—PT Display—PT Last
Display Duration in Idle Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 745

Feature Programming References

• 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data

copy
• 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Manual References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
– Extension
– Features
– Other PBX Extension
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Feature Manual References

5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Floating Extension
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
– Floating Extension Number
– Group Name
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Floating Extension No.
• 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Floating Extension Number
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager—Floating Extension Number
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating
Extension Number

Feature Manual References

5.5.8 Floating Extension

FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED

746 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Feature Manual References

2.3.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

Group
• 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group

Feature Manual References

5.1.2 Group

Group Call Distribution

• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main—Distribution Method
– Main—Call Waiting Distribution
– Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List—Delayed Ring
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
– Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
– Options—Longest Idle Distribution
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-
up Timer
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-
up Timer

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

PC Programming Manual 747

Feature Programming References

Hands-free Answerback
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—
Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—Automatic
Answer (Caller)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
– Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2: Paged / Automatic Answer
– Option 4—Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 5—Automatic Answer for CO Call
– Option 6—Forced Automatic Answer

Feature Manual References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Hands-free Operation
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—
Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS
Answer Mode

Feature Manual References

2.11.1 Hands-free Operation

Headset Operation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

2.11.4 Headset Operation

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options—Option—ARS Dial

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

Hot Line
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line
(Pickup Dial) Start
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Program Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set

748 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Pickup Dial No.

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.

Feature Manual References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Idle Extension Hunting

• 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group
• 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Feature Manual References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Miscellaneous
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Feature Manual References

2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

Incoming Call Log

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 7
– Incoming Call Log—Busy/Intercept (when Called Party is Busy)
– Incoming Call Log—Fwd All/Fwd Busy
– Incoming Call Log—Call Pickup
– Incoming Call Log—Extension / TIE Call
– Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Supervisor Extension Number
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 5—Incoming Call Display
– Option 6—Display Lock
– Option 7—Incoming Call Log Memory
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 749

Feature Programming References

– Option 5—Incoming Call Display

– Option 7—Incoming Call Log Memory

Feature Manual References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—
Extension Inter-digit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of
Dial for en Bloc mode
• 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main—Extension Number
– Option 7—ISDN Bearer
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7—ISDN
Bearer

Feature Manual References

4.1.2 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

Intercept Routing
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept
Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—
Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow
No Answer—Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

750 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Intercept Routing—No Destination

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous—Intercept—Routing to Operator -
No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Intercom Call
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Alternate
Calling - Ring / Voice
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main—Extension Number
– Main—Extension Name
– Option 3—Intercom Call by Voice
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name

Feature Manual References

2.5.3 Intercom Call

Internal Call Block

• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block—COS Number of the
Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–512
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
COS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—COS
• 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay—COS Number

Feature Manual References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

Internal Call Features

• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Manual References

2.1.2 Internal Call Features

IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main—IP Terminal
Registration Mode
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

PC Programming Manual 751

Feature Programming References

• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Manual References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

IP-CS (KX-NS0154)
• 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
• 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
• 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main
– LLDP Packet Sending Ability
– IP-CS Registration Mode
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Port Number—Firmware
Update Port No. for IP-PT/IP-CS (Media Relay)
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Media Relay
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property
• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Air Synchronisation—
Watching Degeneracy (x60s)
• 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation

Feature Manual References

5.2.6 IP-CS (KX-NS0154)

ISDN Extension
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN Extension
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Extension Setting

Feature Manual References

5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension

ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

752 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number—Leading Number
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
– Leading Number
– Removed Number of Digits
– Added Number

Feature Manual References

4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

KX-UT Series SIP Phones

• 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—System Speed Dial
Download For UT Extensions
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main—IP Terminal
Registration Mode
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property
• 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.1 KX-UT Series SIP Phones

Last Number Redial

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval
– Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Redial
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
– Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 7
– Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—
Outgoing Call Log Memory
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7—
Outgoing Call Log Memory

Feature Manual References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

PC Programming Manual 753

Feature Programming References

LED Indication
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

Feature Manual References

2.21.3 LED Indication

Legacy Device Connection

• 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary—Legacy Gateway 1 Shelf/Legacy Gateway
2 Shelf
• 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2

Feature Manual References

5.3 Legacy Device Connection

Line Preference—Incoming
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Incoming Preferred Line
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Incoming Preferred Line

Feature Manual References

2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Line Preference—Outgoing
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Outgoing Preferred Line
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Outgoing Preferred Line

Feature Manual References

2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Local Alarm Information

• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
– SMDR—Print Information—Error Log
– Maintenance—Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Set
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Hour

754 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Feature Manual References

5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

Log-in/Log-out
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Log-in / Log-out
– Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous
– No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
– Last Extension Log-out
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List—Wrap-up Timer
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
Wrap-up Timer based on
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-
up Timer
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-
up Timer
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR—Print Information—Log-in / Log-out

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Making a TIE Line Call

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—TIE Line Access
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Own PBX Code

Feature Manual References

4.3.1.1 Making a TIE Line Call

Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—MCID

PC Programming Manual 755

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

Manager Features
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Manager
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Password—Manager Password - PT Programming
—Prog *1

Feature Manual References

5.1.6 Manager Features

Message Waiting
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Message Waiting Set /
Cancel / Call Back
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Message
Waiting Set
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 3—Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Option 5—SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Music on Hold
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– External MOH—MOH 1–8 (Music On Hold 1–8)

Feature Manual References

2.13.4 Music on Hold

756 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—Networking
Data Transfer
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—Networking
Data Transfer
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Manager
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
• 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)
• 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Feature Manual References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network ICD Group

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Manual References

4.3.6 Network ICD Group

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—OHCA /
Whisper OHCA

Feature Manual References

2.10.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Off-hook Monitor
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor

Feature Manual References

2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

PC Programming Manual 757

Feature Programming References

One-look Networking
• 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types
• 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard
• 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

Feature Manual References

4.2 One-look Networking

One-numbered Extension
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Parallel Telephone
(Ring) Mode Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 1—Wireless XDP / Shared Extension
– Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
– Option 5—Automatic Answer for CO Call
– Option 6—Forced Automatic Answer
– Option 7—ISDN Bearer

Feature Manual References

2.11.10 One-numbered Extension

One-touch Dialling
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—
Flexible Button Programming Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flexible
Button Programming Mode
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)

Feature Manual References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Operator Features
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant—Operator (Extension Number)

Feature Manual References

5.1.5 Operator Features

758 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Outgoing Message (OGM)

• 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
• 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—
Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—OGM Record / Clear /
Playback
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List—Delayed Ring
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table—
Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating
Extension Number

Feature Manual References

2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

Overflow Feature
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
Overflow immediately when All Logout

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature

Paging
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Paging
– Group Paging Answer
– Paging Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension

PC Programming Manual 759

Feature Programming References

– Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2: Paged / Automatic Answer

• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1–6 (External Pager 1–6)
– Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
• 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group
• 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting
• 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Paging
Deny

Feature Manual References

2.17.1 Paging

Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP)

• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.4 Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP)

Pause Insertion
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Pause Time
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—During Conversation—
Pause Signal Time
• 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 4—System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
– Option 6 (CTI)—CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)
– Extension Number (for SDN)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)

760 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Extension Number (for SDN)

• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

Feature Manual References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—P2P Group
• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property—P2P Group
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8
– P2P Group—Priority Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3
– P2P Group—Video Conference
• 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group
Feature Manual References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Ping
• 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

Feature Manual References

5.6.7 PING Confirmation

Portable Station (PS) Connection

• 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Power Failure Transfer

• 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer

Feature Manual References

5.6.2 Power Failure Transfer

Printing Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Printing Message
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2
—Printing Message 1–8

Feature Manual References

2.22.2 Printing Message

Privacy Release
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—Privacy Release by
SCO key

PC Programming Manual 761

Feature Programming References

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type

• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

2.14.3 Privacy Release

PS Directory
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
Name
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
Name
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.3 PS Directory

PS Ring Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Distribution Method
• 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group
• 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—System Wireless—PS Out
of Range Timer
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—System Wireless—Out of Range
Registration

Feature Manual References

4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

PT Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—PT
Programming Mode
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Password
– Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

Feature Manual References

5.5.3 PT Programming

762 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

QSIG Enhanced Features

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—CO - CO Call Limitation—After
Conference
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG

Feature Manual References

4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

Queuing Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Queuing Time Table
– Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings—Call Waiting on VM Group
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Quick Dialling
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Feature Manual References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling

Reverse Circuit
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Reverse Detection

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Ring Tone Pattern Selection

• 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO—Ring Tone Pattern Plan
1–8

PC Programming Manual 763

Feature Programming References

• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE—Ring Tone

Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Extension—Ring
Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
Pattern Table
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
Pattern Table

Feature Manual References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Room Status Control

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main—Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
– Bill—Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest

Feature Manual References

2.23.2 Room Status Control

Send to Fax Machine

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv—Auto Forwarding Message Type
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Fax Options
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Fax Management

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.30 Send to Fax Machine

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

• 28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Manual References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

Simple Remote Connection

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—SIP Extension
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port
No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS)
Port No.

764 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address

– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Register Expire Time (s)
– Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server
IP Address
– Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server
(HTTP) Port No.
– Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server
(HTTPS) Port No.
– Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Ability
– Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Port Number—Firmware
Update Port No. for IP-PT/IP-CS (Media Relay)
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Media Relay
– Common—NAT - External IP Address
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No.
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.
– SIP Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. for Network Survivability
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. for Network Survivability
– UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - NTP Server Port No.
– UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Type
– UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– UT Extension—SIP Register Expire Time (s)
– UT Extension—PERIODIC Ability
– UT Extension—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– Option—NAT - RTP IP Address

PC Programming Manual 765

Feature Programming References

– Option—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address

– Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
– Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address for Network Survivability
– Option—NAT - NTP Server IP Address
• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property—Remote Place
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property—Remote Place
• 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property—Remote Place

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Manual References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

• 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Feature Manual References

4.1.1 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

SIP Portable Station (S-PS) and SIP Cell Station (SIP-CS)

• 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection
• 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property—Main— Telephone
Type
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Telephone
Type
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.2 SIP Portable Station (S-PS) and SIP Cell Station (SIP-CS)

SIP Refer Transfer

• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property—Supplementary Service
– Blind Transfer(REFER)
– Attended Transfer(REFER)

Feature Manual References

2.12.2 SIP Refer Transfer

766 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Software Upgrading
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update

Feature Manual References

5.5.9 Software Upgrading

Special Carrier Access Code

• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Speed Dialling—Personal/System
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling
– Personal Speed Dialling - Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level for
System Speed Dialling
• 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
– Extension Directory
– System Speed Dial

Feature Manual References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—
Analogue CO Call Duration Start
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Outgoing
CO Call Printout (SMDR)
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
– Charge—Charge Options—Currency
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
– SMDR
– SMDR Options
– RS-232C

Feature Manual References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

PC Programming Manual 767

Feature Programming References

Supervisory Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Supervisor Extension Number

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature

Supervisory Feature (ACD)

• 8.4 Users—ICDG Management
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Syslog Record Management

• 28.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog

Feature Manual References

2.22.1.2 Syslog Record Management

Tenant Service
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
– PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block
• 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Tenant Number
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—User
Group
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—User
Group
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—Tenant Number
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor—Tenant No.
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
• 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS
• 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier—Authorisation Code for Tenant
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—Tenant Number
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Tenant Number

768 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN—Tenant Number

Feature Manual References

5.1.3 Tenant Service

Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

TIE Line Service

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—TIE
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– TIE Line Access
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Private Network—TIE Call by
Extension Numbering
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
– DIL—Trunk Property
– DIL—DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—DDI / DID Destination—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Manual References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Time Service
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

PC Programming Manual 769

Feature Programming References

• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Time Service (Day /
Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Time Service
Switch
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Feature Manual References

5.1.4 Time Service

Timed Reminder
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
– Timed Reminder—Interval Time
– Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
– Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Timed Reminder—
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Time Display
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 2
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 1
—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main—Timed Reminder Message for SIP-
MLT / Standard SIP Phone—Message
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR—Print Information—Timed Reminder
(Wake-up Call)

Feature Manual References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS

770 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

– TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code
• 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code
• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Feature Manual References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Trunk Access
• 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property—Connection
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– Single CO Line Access
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting—ARS Mode

PC Programming Manual 771

Feature Programming References

• 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings—CO Name

Feature Manual References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Adaptor Connection

• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property
– Trunk Adaptor
– Connection Attribute
– Channel Attribute
• 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property
– Trunk Adaptor
– Connection Attribute

Feature Manual References

5.3.2 Trunk Adaptor Connection

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—TAFAS Answer
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1–6 (External Pager 1–6)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Manual References

2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Trunk Busy Out

• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Busy Out Status
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Busy Out Cancel
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Manager
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue
CO

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Trunk Call Limitation

• 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main—Area ID for logical
partition
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Extension-
CO Line Call Duration Limit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call

772 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Applying logical partitioning

• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous—Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

Feature Manual References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

UM Group Failover
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Fail Over Site Name

Feature Manual References

4.2.3.3 UM Group Failover

Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters—Alternate Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group

Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– Auto Forwarding Active
– Auto Forwarding Mailbox Number
– Auto Forwarding Delay Time
– Auto Forwarding Message Type
– Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent
– Auto Forwarding Mode
– Auto Forwarding Expires

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Unified Messaging—Auto Receipt

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Auto Receipt

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.1 Auto Receipt

Unified Messaging—Automated Attendant (AA)

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s)
– Menu Repeat Cycle (1-5 times)

PC Programming Manual 773

Feature Programming References

– Play Owner's Name during Transfer

– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator's Extension
– Operator Service—Operator's Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)
– Alternate Extension
– List All Names
– Operator Transfer Mode

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Unified Messaging—Automatic Login

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID
– Auto Login TRG No.
– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

• 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List
– Internal Call
– External Call
– Supervisor
– UM Group No.
– Mailbox Number

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

774 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Call Services

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.6 Call Services

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario

• 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting
– Advanced Call Transfer Setting
– Scenario Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Status

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Call Transfer
Status

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer—Call Transfer to Outside
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Unified Messaging—Call-through Service

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Call-through Service
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside—Outside Transfer
Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.6 Call-through Service

Unified Messaging—Callback Number Entry

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—Telephone
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification
—Message Waiting Notification—System Callback No. (Up to 32 digits)

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.9 Callback Number Entry

PC Programming Manual 775

Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Callback

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Caller ID Callback
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside—Trunk Group (1–
96)—Caller ID Callback

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.10 Caller ID Callback

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Screening

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer—Caller ID Screen

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.9 Caller ID Screening

Unified Messaging—Caller Name Announcement

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement
(Selection)
• 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement

Unified Messaging—Company Greeting

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Selection)
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Other)
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Daily Hours Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Unified Messaging—Covering Extension

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Covering
Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.14 Covering Extension

Unified Messaging—Custom Service

• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

Feature Manual References

776 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Custom Service Builder

• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Custom Service Builder

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.2 Custom Service Builder

Unified Messaging—Default Mailbox Template

• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings—Adding Mailboxes

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.3 Default Mailbox Template

Unified Messaging—Dialling by Name

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– First Name
– Last Name
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Directory Listing

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Unified Messaging—Direct Service Access

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service—Direct Service UM Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.12 Direct Service Access

Unified Messaging—Extension Group

• 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.18 Extension Group

Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– External Message Delivery Active
– External Message Delivery Prompt Mode
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Extension
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

PC Programming Manual 777

Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Group Distribution Lists

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Personal Distribution List
• 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.17 Group Distribution Lists

Unified Messaging—Hold
• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.20 Hold

Unified Messaging—Holiday Service

• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9
• 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Manual References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

Unified Messaging—IMAP Integration

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Mailbox Password
(Message Client)
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– Fax Option
– Desktop Messaging

Feature Manual References

3.3.2 IMAP Integration

Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer

778 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.18 Incomplete Call Handling Service

Unified Messaging—Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings—Intercept to Mailbox for Call to
Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.23 Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Intercom Paging

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer
– Intercom Paging Group
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging

Unified Messaging—Interview Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Interview Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.25 Interview Service

Unified Messaging—List All Names

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Directory Listing

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.26 List All Names

Unified Messaging—Live Call Screening (LCS)

• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Live Call Screening
—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS
Recording Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Message Cancel for Live Call Screening

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.19 Live Call Screening (LCS)

PC Programming Manual 779

Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—All Calls Transfer
to Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.27 Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

Unified Messaging—Mailbox
• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.20 Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Manager Service Switching

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– System Manager Authority
– Message Manager Authority

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.22 Manager Service Switching

Unified Messaging—Message Reception Mode

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—All Calls Transfer
to Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.28 Message Reception Mode

Unified Messaging—Message Transfer

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Announce Message Transferred Information

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.23 Message Transfer

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number

780 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]

– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Fax File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– E-mail Option
– Fax Option
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—E-mail Option

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—Message
Waiting Lamp

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No. of Retries
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Busy Delay Time (min)
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min)
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Start Delay Time (0-120 min)
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between Device 1, 2, 3 and Next
Device
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Unified Messaging—Multilingual Service

• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service

PC Programming Manual 781

Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—No DTMF Input Operation

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– No DTMF Input Operation
– No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.33 No DTMF Input Operation

Unified Messaging—On Hold Announcement Menu

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.34 On Hold Announcement Menu

Unified Messaging—Operator Service

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator's Extension
– Operator Service—Operator's Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.35 Operator Service

Unified Messaging—Password Administration

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– Mailbox Password
– Mailbox Password (Message Client)

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.4 Password Administration

Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv—Personal Custom Service

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.24 Personal Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Personal Greetings

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox
– Personal Greeting Length (s)

782 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Personal Greeting for Caller ID

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.25 Personal Greetings

Unified Messaging—PIN Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
– PIN No.
– Description
– Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.36 PIN Call Routing

Unified Messaging—Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.37 Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

Unified Messaging—Port Service

• 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.38 Port Service

Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service—Remote Call Telephone Number 1, 2

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.29 Remote Call Forwarding Set

Unified Messaging—Subscriber Tutorial

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Tutorial

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.31 Subscriber Tutorial

Unified Messaging—System Backup/Restore

• 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
• 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore
• 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.5 System Backup/Restore

PC Programming Manual 783

Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—System Prompts

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Prompt Mode
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Unified Messaging—System Reports

• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.6 System Reports

Unified Messaging—System Security

• 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.7 System Security

Unified Messaging—Toll Saver

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID
– Auto Login TRG No.
– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver
• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Delayed Answer Time for New Message (5-60 s)
– Delayed Answer Time for No New Message (5-60 s)

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.33 Toll Saver

Unified Messaging—Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—
Transfer Recall
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings—Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.43 Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

784 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Trunk Service (Universal Port)

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.45 Trunk Service (Universal Port)

Unified Messaging—Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Two-way
Recording
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Two-way
Recording
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.34 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

Unified Messaging—Urgent Message

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv—Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages
– Subscriber Service - New Urgent Messages
– Receiving Message Service - New Urgent Messages
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—First Playback Urgent Message

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.35 Urgent Message

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Extension Number
(for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Extension Number
(for Voice Mail Transfer)

PC Programming Manual 785

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.36 Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail Service

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.46 Voice Mail Service

Unified Messaging—Web Programming

• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings
• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group—Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.37 Web Programming

UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) Integration

• 4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS

Feature Manual References

5.6.1 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) Integration

User Profiles
• 8 Users
• 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension
• 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

Feature Manual References

5.5.1 User Profiles

Verification Code Entry

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote
Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 1—ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3—Charge Limit
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 1—ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3—Charge Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

Feature Manual References

786 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

VIP Call
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—VIP Call Mode

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.6 VIP Call

Virtual PS
• 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—Registration

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.6 Virtual PS

Voice Mail (VM) Group

• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Feature Manual References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Voice Mail Integration

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—
Transfer Recall
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS
Recording Mode
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

PC Programming Manual 787

Feature Programming References

• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—Service Group Number

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.

Feature Manual References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

• 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings—DSP IP Setting—DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP
Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—IP Address

Feature Manual References

4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

Walking COS
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote
Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
PIN
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
PIN

Feature Manual References

2.7.5 Walking COS

Walking Extension Features

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Walking Extension
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN

Feature Manual References

2.24.3 Walking Extension Features

Walking Extension-Home position control

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9—Walking Extension Option—Home
position control

788 PC Programming Manual

 Note

Feature Manual References

2.24.3.3 Walking Extension-Home position control

Whisper OHCA
• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property—Option—IP Codec
Priority
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—OHCA /
Whisper OHCA
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—Whisper OHCA—for SLT

Feature Manual References

2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

• 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Wireless XDP Parallel
Mode Set / Cancel
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Wireless XDP / Shared Extension

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

PC Programming Manual 789

Note

790 PC Programming Manual

 Note

PC Programming Manual 791

Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com/

Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for
internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd.

© Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2011

PNQX3643JA DD1111HH15115